325 054_Synchronous_Dataspeed_40_4_Service_Mar79 054 Synchronous Dataspeed 40 4 Service Mar79
User Manual: 325-054_Synchronous_Dataspeed_40_4_Service_Mar79
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 530
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
-Manual 325-054
March, 1979
at..:
~
/
~
-:.,.j
STATION
ARRANGEME,N TS
,
~~:t
' ....
I
;;( " -"
,
c,
J
I
..
SERVICE MANUAL
\
,
'
•
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SEiwiCE MANUAL 325·054
.
Mru-ch 1979
SERVICE MANUAL
for
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4 STATION ARRANGEMENTS
This service manual applies to maxi·cluster and mini·cluster station arrangements (M/M). It also applies
to single display station (SDS) arrangements.
The manual is reissued to revise information on maxi·cluster and mini·cluster station arrangements and
to add information for single display station arrangements and the keyboard disable lock feature for
attached KDs.
Contents
Section
Issue
Installation (M/M)
Maintenance Controller Arrangements
Wiring (M/M)
Testing and Troubleshooting (M/M)
Disassembly/Reassembly and Parts (M/M)
Routine Maintenance
582·200·201
582·200·300
582·200·401
582·200·501
582·200·701
582·200·751
4
2
3
4
3
2
Installation (SDS)
Wiring (SDS)
Testing and Troubleshooting (SDS)
Disassembly /Reassembly and Parts (SDS)
582·200·205
582·200·405
582·200·505
582·200·705
2
2
2
1
Keyboard Display Amplifier (KDA)
Keyboard Disable Lock Feature (Attached KD)
Keyboard Disable Lock Feature (Free Standing KD)
(Order from Teletype Corporation,
Dept. 2183·3, Skokie, Illinoi~ 60077)
Station Cablfng (M/M)
(Order from Teletype Corporation
Dept 2183·3, Skokie, Illinois 60077)
582·200·212
582·211·210
509428
2
1
1
50859S
2
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
See individual sections for copyright notices.
Printed in U.S.A.
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-201
.Issue 4, January 1979
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
MAXI-CLUSTER AND MINI-CLUSTER STATION ARRANGEMENTS
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
1.
2.
GENERAL .....................
2
STATION WORKSHEETS .........
2
SAMPLE BLANK WORKSHEETS ...
CONTENTS
PAGE
STATION COMPONENT
PLACEMENT ...................
68'
3
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
(PRELIMINARY) ................
69
PREPARATION OF
WORKSHEETS ..................
6
CONTROLLER SELF TEST
(WITHOUT CABLES) .............
71
EXAMPLES OF WORKSHEET
PREPARATION .................
6
CABLE ID TAGS AND CABLE
ROUTING ......................
72
. CONTROLLER
ARRANGEMENTS ...............
12
A.
B.
Cable ID Tags ...............
Cable Routing ....... , .......
72
73
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION ...............
12
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
(FINAL) .......................
73
KD (KEYBOARD-DISPLAY)
INSTALLATION ................
79
PRINTER INSTALLATION ........
85
Friction Feed ...............
Tractor Feed ................
85
86
OPTIONS ......................
88
28
GENERAL .....................
88
56
EXTRACTING CIRCUIT CARDS
FROM CONTROLLER ............
88
LOCATING SWITCH PACKS
ON CIRCUIT CARDS .............
88
88
89
INTERPRETATION OF
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTFORMS ..................
16
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT
FORMS ........................
20
A.
B.
C.
3.
PAGE
SCC - Station Cluster Controller
Arrangement Forms ..........
DCC - Device Cluster Controller
Arrangement Forms ..........
MCC - Mini-Cluster Controller
Arrangement Forms ..........
20
A.
B.
4.
INSTALLATION ................
66
INSTALLATION OUTLINE ........
66
UNP ACKING INSTRUCTIONS .....
66
ID LABELS .....................
66
ACTIV ATING OPTIONS OR
CHANGING SWITCH
POSITIONS .....................
STATION WORKSHEETS .........
68
CONTROLLER OPTIONS .........
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
© 1973, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-201
CONTENTS
PAGE
PRINTER OPTIONS ..........•...
98
DATA SET AND DATA
SERVICE UNIT OPTIONS .........
116
5.
ADJUSTMENTS .................
120
6.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES ...........
121
1.
GENERAL
This section provides the installation procedures and methods for a DATASPEED
40/4 Station. See 3. INSTALLATION on Page 66
for order of procedures.
Warning 1: To avoid possible internal damage
to circuitry, wear a 346392 static discharge
strap connected to ground to allow static discharge before handling circuit cards (or removal
or replacement. Avoid touching circuit lands or
components as much as pbssible.
1.01
1.02
(a)
This section is reissued to provide information for:
Placement of 410525 circuit card in
EPROM MCC.
(b) 40K203/GAB Opcon.
Note: When ordering replaceable components,
unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
1.03
Warning 2: Place listed card in an RM150592
static bag immediately after removal from unit,
Do not place any printer paper in the bag with
the card. Keep the card in' the static bag at all
times. Never handle the card outside the bag
withoutwearing a properly grounded 346392
static ground strap.
Cards List
582-200-101
582-200-300
582-200-401
582-200-501
582-200-701
582-200-751
582-200-212
582-211-210
Abbreviations used in this section are
defined in Section 582-200-101.
1.05
The following warnings are to be used
as safety measures for the apparatus and
the craftsperson.
Danger 1: Safety glasses must be worn whenever monitor cover is removed or whenever
monitor is replaced.
Danger 2: Turn off all the power and signal
sources before removing or replacing any
component.
Page 2
Attach clip end
of static dis'charge strap to
frame ground.
Reference BSP Sections
Description and Operation
Maintenance Controller
Arrangements
Wiring Diagrams
Testing and Troubleshooting
Disassembly /Reassembly and Parts
Routine Maintenance
Keyboard Display Amplifier
KD Security Lock
1.04
Attach static
ground strap
tightly to wrist.
STATION WORKSHEETS
1.06
The Station Configuration Worksheet
provides the craftsperson with an understanding of the station configuration prior to
installation. Blank samples of the worksheets
are given on Pages 3, 4 and 5. When W-4TTOO
(SCC/DCC) or W-4TXOO (MCC) is available,
their worksheets will be the preferred sheets to
use. Paragraph 1.09 'provides information on how
to fill out the worksheets.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
1.07
The worksheet examples (1.15 and 1.16) included in this section provide the required information
contained on the worksheets to be used during installation.
1.08
A Station Configuration Worksheet should be included as part of every Synchronous DATASPEED
40 Station; however, if the worksheet is not included with the station, fill in the appropriate
blank samples that follow by using the information included on the USSO (Unive,:sal System Service
Order), refer to 1.10.
SAMPLE BLANK WORKSHEETS
DATASPEED 40/4 Station Configuration Worksheet - Maxi-Cluster
see
SPA _ _ _ __
SSA _ _ _ __
USSO NO. _ _ _ _ _ _ TELCO· REQ NO. _ _ __
WE REQ NO. _ _ _ _ _ CKT. NO. _ _ _ _ __
OPTIONS
401
402
403
404
406
407
b.
------
-- No._-=-_ __
a 0
b 0
a 0
b 0
c 0
a 0
b 0
a 0
b 0
a 0
b 0
408 -- a 0
409 -- a 0
410 -- a 0
b 0
b 0
b 0
CUSTOMER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
LOCATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I_D_~_TA_SE_T_ Jt::
02400
04800
07200
09600
DEVICE
ROW 1
DEVICE
ROW 2
DEVICE
\lllW3
DEVICE
ROW 4
DEVICE
ROW 5
DEV
E
05
P
DEV.
11
P
DEV.
J
17
DEV.
P
P
23
DEV.
29
DEV.
35
P
T
P
DEVICE
ROW 6
*Characters in parentheses are EBCDIC.
Page 3
SECTION 582-200-201
DATASPEED 40/4 Station Configuration Worksheet - Mini-Cluster
MCC -- SPA
SSA
OPTIONS
401b -- No. - 402
a 0 b 0
403 -- a 0 b 0 c
404 -- a 0 b 0
40Sb
1st DVC No.
40Sc -- 2nd DVC No.
40Sd -- 3rd DVC No.
406 -- a 0 b 0
407 -- a 0 b 0
408 -- a 0 b 0
409 -- a 0 b 0 c
410
a 0 b 0
414 -- a 0 b 0
--
l
FT
I
0
CKT. NO.
LOCATION
FT
0
FT
2nd Device
Address _ _
-
-
2nd Device is always a printer.
3rd Device is either KD or printer.
Page 4
WE REQ NO.
__
__
__
1st Device
Address _ _
Note:
TELCO REQ NO.
CUSTOMER
--
--
USSO NO.
FT
3rd Device
Address _ _
-
DATA SET
02400
04800
ISS 4, SECTION 582·200·201
DATASPEED 40/4 Cable Worksheet
Caution: Do not attempt
connecting wires to termi·
nal boxes unless both
wires have terminals or
both do not.
DCC_
SCC_
405238
CABLEtt
10 FT.
FT.*---.J
r. ~S-~L:-C-C---~---V
_c_c_-_-____
• ,,'"
....
"FT.
<0'''' " FT.
*
CABLEtt
_FT.
DCC_
MCC_
VIDEO_
KD
S--~~~~----~------~~_r~
FREE
STAND
OR
ATTACHED
405 __ _
TKS107t
405372
4053 __ _
---(Applies only to 405982)
405390 Term. Boxes
DCC_
MCC_
KD
FREE
STAND
OR
ATTACHED
405 __ _ _
FT.
TKS107t· _FT.* - - - - - - - '
6FT.-------------J
405372
4053 __ _ _FT. ------(Applies only to 405982) _ _ _ _ _ _ _..J
DCC _
-_~
...M_C_C
__
405237
CABLEtt
DCC_
MCC_
405237
CABLEtt
I
S_~--~~-----r----~~~.~~------------~
405389 or W.E. 44A
Term. Boxes
PRINTER
______
10 FT.
_FT.* --4""0""'5"'3"'8""9-oJr W.E. 44A
Term. Boxes
405239
10 FT.
PRINTER
(Use additional cable
worksheets as required.)
S~__~~___~~~__-r~
10 FT.
_FT.* _ _ _ _ _J
/
405239
10 FT.
*Approximate length, cables should be cut to proper length at the customer location.
tTKS107 cable can be ordered under COM code 104873419.
ttShielded 4·conductor cable (2 twisted pair) (see 3.31).
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-201
If a printer is to be connected to a DCC
or MCC using stub cables, the cable worksheet must be filled out to indicate items as in
(h) and type of printer used.
(i)
PREPARATION OF WORKSHEETS
Note: See "Examples of Worksheet Preparation"
if required_
1.09
(a)
Along the left side of each applicable area
on all worksheets, include the physical
location for that area (ie, post L1, room 205,
etc).
(j)
Instructions for preparing DATASPEED
40/4 Worksheets:
Use a separate worksheet for each station
ordered. Select the worksheet(s) to be
used.
\
EXAMPLES OF WORKSHEET PREP ARATION
In the upper right portion of the configuration worksheet, include all information
as required (ie, Telco requisition number,
customer location, etc).
(b)
(c)
In the SCC or MCC area of the configuration worksheet, list the SPA (Station Poll
Address) and SSA (Station Select Address)
graphics. Also, use Xs in the boxes to select
controller options. List the USOCs which
reflect the material found in the SCC or
MCC area.
In the MCC area of the configuration
worksheet, list the KD and printer device
addresses.
(d)
If a station worksheet is not included with
the station, a worksheet can be prepared
from the USSO (Universal System Service Order).
An example of the USSO is given below and
examples of worksheets prepared from the
example USSO are found on Pages 8 and 9.
1.10
1.11
Example US SO - Assume that a customer
wishes to install one SCC at one location
and one MCC at a second location. The SCC will
have associated with it one DCC and three KDs.
The MCC will have one KD. The Service and
Equipment section of the USSO should read as
follows.
(e)
In the applicable DCC and device areas,
list the USOCs which reflect the material
found in those areas. If the station is a minicluster configuration, list the device address in
each applicable device area.
Note: Necessary details of ordering pedestals,
WES codes for cable lengths and data sets have
been omitted to make the examples more readily
understandable.
(f)
CKL
SN
SA
For each applicable DCC and device,
include the cable length (number of feet)
between each DCC and SCC and between each
device and the DCC or MCC.
If a KDA is part of the station arrangement, the cable worksheet must also be
filled out to specify length of TKS107 cable,
whether one or two termination boxes (specify part number) are required, which KDA
mounting modification kit is used, the physical
location of the KDA and connectors affected
at DCC or MCC.
(g)
(h) If a DCC is to be connected to an SCC
using stub cables, the cable worksheet
must also be filled out to indicate the part
numbers and length of the stubs, the SCC and
DCC identification, the length of cable, part
numbers of the termination boxes and connectors affected at SCC and DCC.
Page 6
I
I
I
I
1(City, State)
(Service Name)
(Service Address)
STA A CCA 00 LOC RM 500
14TT
14TV/REF A
3 4TOXG/REF A/ DEV 00,01,03
RMKR: EBCDIC DEV 00 at post L1, DEV 01
at post L2, DEV 03 at post L3, etc, for further
location information.
CKL
SN
SA
I
I
I
I
2
STA B CCA 06/ LOC RM 3005
1 4TX
2 4TOXG/DEV 01-DA 04/DEV 03-DA 08
1 4TSXG/DEV 02-DA 35
RMKR ... EBCDIC - DEV 01 at post K4, etc.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
1.12
Explanation of Example USSO:
STA (Station) A, and B is consistent with current
nomenclature for the first station at CKL 1 and
the first station at CKL 2.
CCA (Cluster Controller Address) 00 , and 06 provide the addresses for the customers polling and
selecting. Note that CCA is used for locations
with either a SCC or MCC. Station number corresponds to SPA of SP (space) and SSA of
- (minus) in the sample worksheet on the next
page.
LOC (Location) RM 500, and RM 3005 provide
location infonnation of the station.
REF (Reference) A indicates that the DCC is the
first DCC respectively on the SCC. Note that no
REF is required with the MCC, since there is no
DCC present.
REF A/DEV (Device) 00, 01, 03; indicate with
which DCC the KDs are associated and what the
device numbers (for the KDs) are for the
customers polling and selecting.
RMKR (Retained Remarks) has been used to
show additional location infonnation. It can also
show the option information.
ing pages. The first worksheet (Station A at
CKL 1) on Page R is prepared in the following
manner:
(a)
Room 500, the physical location of Station A, was entered along the left side of
the SCC.
(b)
00, the cluster controller address, is
entered in the block labeled SCC.
(c)
4TT is a SCC and is also entered in the
SCC block.
(d) 4TV is a DCC, and since REF A is listed
with it, it is entered in the block labeled
DCCA.
(e)
The three 4TOs are attached KDs, and
since their IDs are 00, 01 and 03, they
are entered into the blocks labeled Device 00,
Device 01 and Device 03, respectively. The
abbreviation KD is also entered into these
blocks.
Locations by post number, as listed under
retained remarks, are entered along side
of each device block.
(f)
1.14
1.13
Examples of the Station Configuration
Worksheets (for both of the stations listed
in the example USSO) are included on the follow-
A Station Configuration Worksheet for
Station B at CKL 2 (Page 9) is prepared
in the same manner as the worksheet for Station
A at CKL 1.
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-201
1.15
Example 1 (Station A at CKLI from USSO of 1.10): In example 1, Option 407 was lined out
because it did not apply to the order. Cable lengths (not distance between components) is entered.
See 1.17 and 1.18 for variations.
DATASPEED 40/4 Station Configuration Worksheet - Maxi-Cluster
~
SCC
SPA
USSO NO.
SSA
~
401 b. ~~ No. QQ
b III
402 -- a 0
Q 403 -- a U b Il
b 0
, 404 -- a lJ
b 0
~ 406 -- a 111
'BjJ
g
e8
~
161~-I059-00 TELCO REQ NO. ~
WE REQ NO. 94-3- 81955
OPTIONS
408 _. a 0
409 -- a 0
410 -- a lit
, 0
bll(
b"
b 0
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
CKT. NO,
2FD 453
ABC p~OceSSING
CO.
1234 1ST AVE.
ANYWHERE
U.S.A.
DATA SET
........ III!)
0240'0
l!i4800
07200
09600
KD
DEVICE
ROW 1
::;
in0
.
4TOXG
~
~
DEVICE
ROW 2
DEV
DEVICE
ROW 3
i;;
KO
...
~
DEVICE
ROW 4
!;;
4TOXG
0
Q.
DEV.
04
t:
~
~
~
DEV
10
(¢)*
0
DEV.
16
DEV.
0
22
DEV,
23
P
P
~
~
DEV.
28
~
*
DEV
S
34
DEV.
3S
~
~
DEVICE
ROW 5
H
DEV.
E
05
!...
~
~
DEV.
11
P
DEVICE
ROW 6
*Characters in parentheses are EBCDIC.
Page 8
~
.
H
DEV.
J
17
t:
DEV.
29
!...
:;:
T
.
H
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
1.16
Example 2 (Station B at CKL2 from USSO of 1.10): In example 2, Option 407 was lined out
because it did not apply to the order. Cable lengths (not distance between components) is entered.
See 1.17 for variations. ,
DATASPEED 40/4 Station Configuration Worksheet - Mini-Cluster
F
MCC -- SPA
SSA
W
USSO NO. 1612.-1059-00 TELCO REQ NO. 3- 81955
OPTIONS
401b -- No~
402
a tJ b ~
403 -- a 0 b 181 c 0
404 -- a 181 b 0
405b
1st DVC No • ....Ih£..
405c -- 2nd DVC No.~
405d -- 3rd DVC No.~
406
a ~ b 0
WE REQ NO. 94-3-al955 CKT. NO. 2.'P4"
--
--
~
o
o
46Y
at:
--
a
0
408 -- a 0
409 -- a 0
410
a lEI
414 -- a 1&1
--
U5DC"
l
6
4 TOXG
ABC PROCISSING
LOCATION
1234 1ST Ave..
IT
co.
AMVWKIRI
U.S. A.
"0
b ~
b S
b 0
b 0
c 0
7
DATA SET
IT
208
",.-rx
1st Device
Address _ _D_
KD
CUSTOMER
l
IT
i
2nd Device
T
Address
..::L
4STX6
FT
i
3rd Device
Address
1'1:>
2400 0
4800.
IX
ft
4-TOX'G;
Page 9
SECTION 582-200-201
Example 3 (No relation to USSO of 1.10): Example 3 consists of sample entries on the cable
worksheet. The asterisk in the entries refers to approximate cable lengths; such cables should be
cut to the proper length at the customer location.
1.17
(a)
DCC is 200 feet from SCC
405389_
~Term.
see L2
Boxes
Dee
L
t---:-iF----:---~~_:__I S L
4TV(+2- 4rO'XG)
405238
10 FT.
eABLEt
(b)
Free-standing KD is 200 feet from SCC, only one termination box is required (two could be used).
405390 Term. Box_
405/.,0
~FT.
~
___
405372
405318
L5lS!.
Page 10
-~-------.J
6FT.-------------------------J
FT. ----- (Applies only to 405982) ______________...J
KD
(Attached KD could be used.)
(KDA External to KD)
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
(c)
Attached KD is 300 feet from MCC. 405982 modification kit could have been used.
'98988 er
fiee
MCC
405983
Mod. Kit r-:Pft=El:-::El:---~K~D..,
L
VIDEO l!.
S~
~rX(+~TOX~)
~
-eR
~~~~------~~~~~
t----:rl ATTACHED
~_..J
4053DI
TKS107
405372
~_ _
(d)
A. FT.
FT.* _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
6 FT.---------------'
_ _ ~~---(Applies only to 405982)-------..J
~
97'Q)tt;
(KDA Installed in KD)
Printer is 500 feet from DCC.
DCC..lL
Mee_
405389_
Term. Boxes
~
PRINTER 80 Col7:F.
47Rt; +
47L)( J)
-lTV
405233
CABLEt
405239
FT.
tShielded 4-conductor cable (2 twisted pair) (see 3.31).
Page 11
SECTION 582-200 -201
2.
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS
2.01
Identification of SCC, DCC, and MCC arrangements given in 2. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT
FORMS are also given and discussed.
2.02
The controller arrangement forms of this part include a duplicate of the form which should be
taped to the inside cover of each controller and should be fIlled out in pencil by the service center
and kept current by the installer. A filled-out form is required when performing actions of 3. INSTALLATION. The purpose of the form is to provide:
(a)
Location and type of circuit cards required
(b) Switch positions (on or off) on circuit cards
(c)
Controller and printer options selected
(d) Required cable connections to controller.
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS IDENTIFICATION
DISPLAY
CONNECTORS
~
FANS
40C401, 402 or 403
CONTROLLER
EIA CONNECTOR
(Not Present
on 40C402)
INTERCONNECTION MODULE
SCC - 405150
DCC - 405151
MCC - 405152
0 ....
RUN LAMP
• 00
-"""--PATTERN
POWER
INDICATORS
SELF LIGHTS
TEST
SWITCH
IXL"B"
41040~
'.
Page 12
[Jii.l
VARIABLE
CARDS
S5 THROUGH S8
405181
(Not Present on 40C403)
EARLY FUSES
321955
LATE FUSES
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
2.03
Station Cluster Controller (SCC) Arrangements - 40C401 *.
*410400 and 410401 circuit cards are in positions 1 and 2.
All circuit card numbers are preceded by 410.
SCCs Equipped With 410804 and 410905 PROM Circuit Cards
CIRCUIT CARD POSITION
4
5
6
7
HANDLES
UP TO
3
4DCC
40N
403
905
461
406
6DCC
40N
403
905
461
406
408- ASCII
409- EBCDIC
8
406
9
10 THRU 14
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
804
NONE
20
804
NONE
24
CARD TITLES
PROM
SSI
RAM
PROM
PIT/SID
ACIU
ECIU
SCCs Equipped With 410508 EPROM Circuit Cards
HANDLES
UP TO
4DCC
6DCC
CmCUIT CARD POSITION
3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 J 9 I 10 I 11 I 12 I 13 I 14
All I 465 I 406 I
I 508 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
411 I 465 I 406 I 406 J 508 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
22
26
l~,
I ===============~M1PIT/SID
CARD TITLES
I
EPROM
SSI
Page 13
SECTION 582-200-201
2.04
Device Cluster Controller (DCC) Arrangements - 40C402 (410400 and 410401 circuit cards are
in positions 1 and 2. All circuit card numbers are preceded by 410.)
DCCs With 4108NN and 4109NN PROM Circuit Cards
431 432 434 435 436 I
HANDLES
UP TO
1 KD + 1 PTR
2 KD + 0 PTR
1 KD + 5 PTR
2 KD + 4 PTR
3 KD + 3 PTR
4 KD + 2 PTR
CARD TITLES
ASCII - UP.LOW _ _ _-=--:-_;--_--;-~AUL- D I/O
ASCII - LINE DRAWING (Internal use only) ALD- D I/O
ASCII - MONOCASE
AMC- D I/O
EBCDIC - UP-LOW
EUL - D I/O
EBCDIC - MONOCASE
EMC- D I/O
\
3
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
4
406
43N
406
43N
43N
43N
5
406
406
406
43N
43N
406
PROM~ 911
907
809
810
-
11
406
406
43N
461
461
461
461
406
406
~
CARD TITLES
SSI
RAM
CIRCUIT CARD POSITIONS
10
6
7
8
9
406
I I
12
461
461
461
461
461
461
13
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
14
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
28
32
36
40 and 42
48
52
(0,>( (o~~
465) 465
TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCONTYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
DCCs With 4105NN EPROM Circuit Cards
431
432
434
435
436
I
HANDLES
UP TO
1 KD + 1 PTR
2 KD+ 0 PTR
1 KD + 5 PTR
2 KD + 4 PTR
3 KD + 3 PTR
4 KD + 2 PTR
CARD TITLES
ASCII - UP-LOW
AUL- D I/O
ASCII - LIN~: DRAWIN(; (Internal use only) ALD- D I/O
ASCII - MONOCASE
AMC- J) I/O
EBCDIC - UP-LOW
EUL - D I/O
EBCDIC - MONOCASE
EMC- D I/O
\
3
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
4
406
43N
406
43N
43N
43N
CARD TITLES
SSI
RAM
-
406
5
406
406
406
43N
43N
t
CIRCUIT CARD POSITIONS
6
7
10
8
9
406
406
43N
J
406
406
406
1
I
11
12
509 --TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
EPROM
Page 14
[;0
- - INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
I
14
13
[464 5NN
I 464 5NN
464 5NN
I 464 5NN
I 464 5NN
I 464 5NN
1
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
30
34
38
44 and 46
50
54
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
2.05
Mini-Cluster Controller (MCC) Arrangements - 40C403 (410400 and 410401 circuit cards are in
positions 1 and 2. All circuit card numbers are preceded by 410.)
MCCs Equipped With 4108NN and 4109NN PROM Circuit Cards
CARD TITLES
ACIU
408- ASCII
ECIU
409- EBCDIC
.--AUL-DI/O
431 - ASCII - UP-LOW
432 - ASCII - LINE DRAWING (Internal use only) ALD-D 1/0
L"N - '" -
MONOCA"
AMC-DI/O
EUL -0110
EMC-D 1/0
ASCU 435 - EBCDIC - UP-LOW
..£6 - EBCDIC - MONOCASE
HANDLES
UP TO
3
1 KD + 1 PTR 40N
1 KD + 2 PTR 40N
2 KD + 1 PTR 40N
CARD TITLES
4
43N
43N
43N
915 PROM- 909
914 808 ~-
CIRCUIT CARD POSITIONS
6
7
8
10
9
403
403
461
461
403
406
406~ 1
SSI
PIT SID
r-gro -
5
406
406
43N
12
461 9NN
461 9NN
461 9NN
11
(~~)t (o~~
13
14
9PP 8NN
9PP 8NN
9PP 8NN
REFERENCE
PAGE NO_
56
58
62
465) 465
LRAM
SSI
TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCONTYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
MCCs Equipped With 41051N EPROM Circuit Cards
CARD TITLES
r
PIT/sID/em
,...-.
AUL - DI/O
431-ASCII-UP-LOW
43N 432-ASCII-LINE DRAWING (INTERNAL USE ONLY)---ALD - D I/O
434 - ASCII - MONOCASE
AMC - D I/O
435 - EBCDC - UP-LOW
EUL - D I/O
~6 - EBCDIC - MONOCASE
EMC - D I/O
HANDLES
UP TO
1KD+2PTR
2KD+IPTR
cmCUIT CARD POSITIONS
3 I 4 I 5 I 6 T 7 I 8 I 9 I 10 I 11 I 12 I 13 I 14
I 464 I 51N I 51N
411 . 43N I 406 I
I
I
I
I
J
151N 151N
411 I 43N I 43N I 464 I 406 I
I
I
I
I
r
CARD TITLES
SSI -·--406
t
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
60
64
t
RAM
PROM
513
515
512
4
(or 525) -TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
- INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
- TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON .
- INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
Page 15
SECTION 582-200-201
INTERPRETATION OF CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS
On this and t.he following three pages are portions of the controller arrangement forms found on
Pages 20 through 65. Various examples are included so that proper interpretation of the forms
can be made. The information on the front side of a form includes card positions, trouble patterns, continue patterns, required switch positions, and printer options (if applicable).
2.06
Example:
---
.
Lme code being used (ASCII or EBCDIC)
one will be checked .
Type of controller
./" (SCC, DCC, or MCC)
/
/
This line includes those USOCs needed to make
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
/ up the. controller arran.gment. Additional USOCs
LINE CODE: ASCII 0
EBCDIC ~
for up-low font, internal numeric cluster opcon
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + 1-(4TOX+ or 4TPX+)
feature, etc, may also apply.
HANDLES: 1-KD & 2 PTRs (1 Print Local>--,
Either a 410461 or
This area lists the circuit cards
Lists devices that controller
410465 card can be
is capable of handling
USedd\
and their respective positions
in the controller .............
No;e 1
Lamp ON = •
Note 2
L
LampOFF = 0
(''\RD POSITION ~
I
I 2 I 3 Y 1 /> I fi I 7 I K I 9 I 10
11
I 12 I 13 I 14 I
.L
L
L"""""M 00 ! (~ ~ 000
~r'
";;:~
s
Ptici~:sN
CONTINUEL....t'::1
SWITCH ,---- ~
L~'i,~ ~'o
~
'+12 •
+5
•
0
0
•• 0
00.
o~ 0
==- t
\Q
~.
o SWITCH
~
=
L-
~
~
•
•
0
EBCDIC
_
'- '-
'----------____i.....k======__
1
2
3
4
~
r
~~
s•
r
"
~
~
"CONTINUE"
- I
LIGHT PATTERNS I
ASCII
EBCDIC
••
•
.~.
o. o.
0 • 0
o. 0 ·0
.
•
•
TROUBLE
0
• ,.......-PATTERNS" 0
0
•
•
0
•
0
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
•
!---" If any of the above trouble patterns are observed on the
ASCII
•
"
~
~
(b~~~======~============~~
/(50
•• 0 . 0
000
••
f+- 20
0
_
3
12
-.
pattern lamps of the 410401 circuit card during a controller self test, it indicates that the circuit card shown above
the pattern is defective. If the station line code is ASCII,
disregard the EBCDIC pattern; if EBCDIC, disregard the
ASCII pattern. (See Note 3.)
This area shows where the run lamp, pattern lamps, continue switch and test switch are located within the controller. The switches and lamps are used when performing
controller self test (see Testing, Section 582-200-501).
This area illustrates those patterns which will appear
legitimately during a controller self test. If the line code of
the station is ASCII, disregard the EBCDIC portion; if
EBCDIC, disregard the ASCII portion. (See Note 3.)
Note1:
a 410408 circuit card will be found in position 3 of
~ ASCII,
controller; if EBCDIC, a 410409 will be found in position
In early stations only, if station line code is
*ASCII -410408
EBCDIC - 410409
3. In newer stations, a 410411, which handles ASCII and
EBCDIC, will be in position 3.
'"ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CAR~D:J.I.....----Note
2: D I/O circuit cards should be of ASCII or
EBCDIC types, depending on station line code. (See 2.04
or 2.05 for various D I/O circuit card numbers.)
Note 3: When 410411 circuit card is present, the trouble
pattern and continue pattern is the same for both ASCII
and EBCDIC.
Page 16
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200·201
Example: (Cont)
Note: The 410400 and
410401 circuit cards have
no switches.
o •
••
o
••
00
•o ••o
o
o
L
loll.
rzl
, i• t:.
/rHPC4
rsPCt3
-!ilIo
---
CIU TP41040N·
t"7.0
r;;0
v
r;IQ
].
••
10
20
,,0
A
2
2
2
2
.1
:I
:I
:t
_
•
•
'
MCC PIT SID 1"1'41040311
SWIT('II
!';I'~IBEH
SPB13 SPBl5 SPD20
10 11. 10 1141
2~ 2. 20 2.
]1. ]1.
]0
·0
• 0 41.
'0 'I. '0 '0
-0 -0
-. '.
SPC'15
SWITCH
POSITION S
2
SPA5
o •
o •
•
o • • •
•
• • • • •
,----------------.
~o I~'I :'ol'I·
o o
0
•
TROUBLE
0
• /PATTERNS, 0
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
1 AI!"
•
1.1ReJ81. HI7 "7 'I.
10
I
"
0
,1
:0;1'('11
ON
OFF
o
0
0
I
".
'-------------'~
+1
II
..!.,Q
10
20
••
0
0
5
fi
7
H
'--
•
0
'-'--
This area lists the switch packs (SPs and their switch
positions) of the circuit cards which are either above
them or indicated by arrows.
n;
Those switches which are permanently shown as
on or off are required selections.
On those controller arrangement forms
for controllers which may have printers
connected to them, a printer option
_ .
_
recordisincluded.~'~------~---------------------Example:
Friction feed printer in socket S3 of controller
and 132-column printer in socket S4 of
con troller.
Note: Option selections should be entered in
pencil. Option 17. should specify number of
columns selected for right-hand margin and,
for later printers only, left-hand margin.
PRINTER OPTIONS
PRINTER 1/0 SOCKET
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17, Specify RIght Marcin
18.a. No Paper Feed Out
IS.b. Paper FO on "RM" Loss
IS.c. Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19.c. No Symbol on V.P. Error
19.d. 96 Character Set
I9.e. 64 Character Set
19.f. Ext. ASCII Set
20.8.
20.h.
21.a.
21.h.
22.&.
22.h.
39.a.
39.b.
48.a.
48.b.
Single LF
Double LF
Lower and Upper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
Forms on
Forms off
Paper Out Not Gated WIFF
Paper Out Gated WIFF
S3
S4
X
80
~
132
/I
A
..Ll. A
A
)(
X
)\
J'
A
Page 17
SECTION 582-200-201
2.07
The information on the front side of a form also includes controller option switch positions. All
controller options will be entered on the 410403 or 410411 circuit cards. The following examples
show a filled-out 410403 switch chart. Also see examples of the various options and how they are entered
on the controller arrangement form in 2. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS.
Example for MCC:
MCC PIT SID TP410403
S\\T(,('II
:\('\lHfW
Note 1: All examples on
this page are for 410403
circuit card. Options for
newer 410411 circuit card
are similiar.
1
2
4
10
20
•
•
Line code of example
is EBCDIC.
3.
I ~ \ l:l 81:1
141'
0
a I.
OPTIONS - 410403
402
SPCI7·1
a Iia Continuous Alarm
•
b 0 1·Second Alarm
0
403
SPCI7·2·3
A17 '17 'I.
_010
a
016'1411 .1'0
1717 01 'O~O
lo'? Ol~ &0'0
Itl tJ OP POOO
010 017 0
Blink Only
00
eo
oe
SPCl •
Alpha in Num. Fld.
•
Alpha Not in Num. Fld. 0
4U4
Sl'Cff.5
b 0
I• • 0 ' lIP 0
.!'J'~~Jr
Intensified Only
Intensified & Blink
0
a IZ Terminate w/ETX
I~.
8
0
b ritI
c
406
a riI
b (]
I", 0 , ,'. 0
7
4.
,
00
3
SI'(,11
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
I
408
p 6/5
0
Terminate W/SUB. ENQ.
•
SPCI7·6
aoASen
•
~ . ~~~ _ _ ---2
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
a 0
b
a
Enabled
Disabled
SPC17·8
•
0
GRAPHIC DESlGNATlON,J
OPTION .JSTATION POLL AD
401
l,EITATION SELECT
OPTION~st DEVICE ADDRE SS
Note 2:
MCC.
Example for SCC:
Note 3: Option 409 is not an entry;
it is determined by the type of D 1/0
circuit cards present. See 4. OPTIONS.
2nd DEVICE ADDRE SS
3rd DEVICE ADDRE SS
405
l
S C PIT SID TP410403
SWIT(,II
Nl'MBEH.
SWIT('III'ACK J.()('ATIOt\
], AI
1
2
I
4
'0
20
5
••
7
0
0
0
'0
00 0 0
0
0
00 00 0
00 01.0
0
PO
.I
6
I
8/
L_
Note 4: Option 410 is not an entry;
it is determined by PROM or EPROM
cards and opcon(s) present. See 4.
OPTIONS.
\1. 813 B \. Bl, '17 '\"
00
3
SI'( 11
3.
0
0
~.
R S ATION WORK SHE T,
HIG~:~T ~C CONNECTED i'J'1cc IS
Ao
SPA13-!
SPA13-2
SPA13-3
SPA13·4
Page 18
Option 405 is used only on an
BCD
• •
• •
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
On a SCC controller arrangement form,
the 410403 or 410411 chart will also
include a switch pack (A13 for 410403,
B3 for 410411) which must show
switches selected to reflect the DCC with
the highest graphic connected to the
SCC.
Example:
"c" is the highest graphic DCC
connected to the SCC then select
Column C - (C is a higher graphic than
A or B).
If DCC
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
2.08
The information on the backside of a form includes connections, associated device addresses and
card positions affecting various devices.
Example:
Illustrated below is a DCC. By following the chart we find that a SCC will be connected to I/O socket S5
of the DCC. We also find that the SCC (connected to DCC) will be affected by the circuit card in position
4. Device addresses are also included. For instance, assume the DCC below is DCC B. We then find that the
KD connected to DCC B is device address F and the printer is device address G.
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
4
55
56 lie A
57
4 lie 3
4
\
DEVICE
ctc
STATION
(SCC)
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER N LOC
The drawmg below illustrates this column.
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
DCC
DEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
*
AIBlclDIEIF
Il>p F
K Q
A G (
L R
<
'"
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
l ASCII I EBCDIC 1
l
I , (4 )**1
'"
Does not apply when
DCC is connected to
EPROM SCC.
MONITOR
KYBD
t--------------...J
**Character in parentheses is displayed as the device
address in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 19
SECTION 582-200 -201
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS
A.
SCC - Station Cluster Controller Arrrangement Forms
SCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: AscnD EBCDICD
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
= "'OFF" • - "ON"
o
CARD
POSITIO~
I
" I
fi
I
H
I
10
I " I
II
I
J:J
I
II
•
PATTERN
LIGHTS
•
TROUBLE
: _ _ PATTERNS
(,ONTI!S'l'E
sWlreu
Rl:)\"
LAMP
.
SWITCH
POSITIONS
.t2~
.,
+12 •
•
t
2
3
,
"COSTIN1'fo:"
LIGHT PATTER:\S
EB('DIC
ASCII
.0 .0
.0 .0
00 00
••
o.
OPTIONS
,I
sec
PIT/SID TP410403
SWITCH
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
NUMBER
I, AI, ·\1 flI3 BI. 81, 'Ii '\.
403
a
h
2
1-----1-+-+--li00ttl00ffi0::+--+OO~
+04
o 00 0
10
H~-..::....-t+--t;;$ffi;;~'1---~
a
5
II
20 6
H~-..::....-++--t;;00ffi;0030~00~.~00~
7
3.
!08
b
L.-J=_-=---+-+-+"O~O=",O=0"f.l>0o & l·PTR (Not Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
4.
41103
4
55
51110 A
57
DEVICE
STATION C/c (SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
PRINTER N LOC
STATION
WORK SHEET
DCC
DEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW Z
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
AIBlclDIEIF
K Q -~
F
A G (
L R A.
"'p
<
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics 1 ASCII I. EBCDI!U
are the same, except for
A
~*I
KYBD
**This footnote applies only when this DCC is
connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 29
SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD Bo CO DO EO Fo
USOC: 4TV + (4TOX+ OR4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 1-PTR (1 Print Local) )
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
o
I
(,ARD i'OSITIO\
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
•
I
I
10
is
~
0
~
" I ' I ' I ., I
·
----I.
3.'4.. 3..
SPC4
LAMP
.5
:I
••o ••
o o
PATTERN
LIGHTS
'12~
+12.
1
gpet3
,
40
50
60
70
="OFF"
10
I
11
•
I
="ON"
12
I
13
14 I
g ••
• ••
TROUBLE
PATTERNS _ _ _ _ _ _ •
SWITCH
POSITIONS
SPA2
SPAt
3.4. 4.3.
10 2.
'.
20
When internal numeric
cluster opcon is
used (Option 410b.),
o
this substitution applies
o
and switches on 410464
must be po._s~it=io:::n:e:.:d=-_ _ _ _--,~-...J
as shown. -
.
~
'4.2..
SPA2
30
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PA'M'ERNS
0.00
00.0
3 ••• 0
4000.
1
OR
2
*41043N - ANY D 1/0 CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
Page 30
PRINTER OPTIONS
/\
S7 S8
PRINTER I/O SOCKET
Friction Fped
rTractor Feed 80 Col
t-Tractor ~'eed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18.a. No Paper Feed Out
IIl.n. Paper FO on ''RM'' LOfIS
18.c. PlIl"'r FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19.d. 96 Character Set
19.('. 64 Character Set
19.L Ext. ASCII Set
20.a. Singlp LF
20.h. Douhle LF
21.0. Lower and Upper Caae Print
21.n. Lower Case Prints aa U~er Caae
22.a. Lower Case Prints aa Error
22.h. Lower Caae Prints as UQPer Caae
39.a. Forms on
39.h. Forms off
48.a. Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
48.0. Paper Out Gated W/FF
- - - --
-
-----
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: ALJ BO CD DO ED FO
USOC: 4TV + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 1-PTR (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
OR /
4
411<3
4
4
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
ctc
S7
STATION
(SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
PRINTER N LOC
S8
PRINTER (LOC)
S5
sail<
A
STATION
WORK SHEET
DCC
DEVICE ROW 1
DEVICE ROW Z
DEVICE ROW 3
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
B
l1ip
F
G
H
A
B
ASCII
'"
J
MONITOR
*
<
E
F
Q
~
(
D
K
L
R
A
+
M
J. -
C
EBCDIC
-,(¢)**
!m
I--------------..J
KYBD
Note: If the customer requires that the printer
not be "print local", connect the printer to socket
7.
**This footnote applies only when this DCC is
connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 31
SECTION 582-200 -201
DCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD BO cO DO EO FO
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KD & O-PTR
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
O="OFF"
I
CARD POSITIOr-;
1
5
I
6
Iii
e="ON"
I 11 I 12 I 13 I
14
I
-_C'~"~'::::,U 00 ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 0 D!OO ~ ~
0
•
20 I .
•
10 I
PATTERN
LIGHTS
!g I__g
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
SPC4
LAMP
'12~
g
~
+12.
'5
g
•
~
2.
o.
0
•
~
~
SPC4
sre13
10 10
2.
3. 30
4. 4
1.
2.
3.
40
50
60
70
___
0
•
•
TROUBLE
0
PATTERNS _ _ :
0
•
:
:
SPC'15
I
•• Oi
00.
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections and Device Addresses.
Page
32
.
the~~lJ1J~.
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.),
substitutions apply.
1 .00.
- 0.0.
:J
4. I
If internal numeric
"CONTINUE"
SPA.1
10 1.
20 2. 2.
.1 • .1. : J .
SWITCH
POSITIONS
LIGHT PATIERNS
SPA3
.
S
~
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (PROM Version)·- Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: AD BD CD DO ED FO
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KD & O·PTR
CARD
POSITION
,
lal
,a ..
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
STATION
WORK SHEET
SI
S2 a A
S3 a B
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y I
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y 2
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
ATBTclDIETF
5p F
K Q
A G ( L R A
<
**This footnote applies only when this DCC is
connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 33
SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DOO: AD Bo CO DO EO Fo
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KD
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
O-UOFF"
CARD POSITION
5
••o oo
o •
o
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
SPC.
LAMP
SPC.
••
+12.
+5' •
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PA'M'ERNS
••
•• • •
1
2
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
6
I
7
I
8
9
I
10
.~TROUBLE
•
o
'.
I
e-"ON"
11
I
12
I
13
0
i0
________
. PATTERNS _______
SWITCH
POSITIONS
SPC13
When internal numeric
cluster opcon is
used (Option 410b.),
this substitution applies
and switches on 410464
must be positioned
as shown.
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections and Device Addresses.
Page 34
I
•
10 '0
2. 2. 2.
3. 30 3.
• ·0
50
60
70
"2~
I
I
14
••
••
2.
'.
~
2..
••
SPA2
I
SPA]
10
20
3. 3 •.
SPA2
'
30
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201 .
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD BO CD DO EO FO
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KD
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
....
....•
SI
sa eo A
SI . . .
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY I
KEYBOARD DISPLAY Z
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
DCCAIBlclDIEIF
DEVICE ROW I l"p F
K Q
DEVICE ROW Z
A G ( IL R /\.
<
**This footnote applies only when this DCC
is connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 35
SECTION 582-200 -201
DCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
OCC: AO
BO
CD DO
ED FO
USOC: 4TV + 4TW + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-1m & Up To 5-PTRs (1 Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
.:II "OFF"
• • "ON"
o
CARD I'OSITIOS
PATTERN
LIGHTS
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
10
••o •• ooo ...............
o •
o •
TROUBLE
I.
13
•o
• •• ••
•
PATTERNS''___
LAMP
•0
o
o
~·Il·n~
2.20.2.
•
4.4 4.4.
3033 •••
If internal numeric
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.). these
substitutions apply. -
~
"~
:;
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PA1"I'ERNS
I
2
•
I
g.O
PRINTER OPTIONS
00.
•••
000
*41043N - ANY D 1/0
CIRCUIT CARD
S7 S8 SI S2 S3
PRINTER I/O SOCKET
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18.a. 1110 Paper Feed Out
18.b. Paper FO on ''aM'' Loss
18.c. Paper FO on "aM" Lou and ETX
19.d. 96 Character Set
19.e. 64 Character Set
19.f. Ext. ASCII Set
20.a. Single LF
20.b. Double LF
21.a. Lower and Upper Cue Print
21.b. Lower Case Printa as Upper Case
22.8. Lower Case Printa as Error
22.b. Lower Case Printa as Upper Cue
39.8. Forms on
39.b. Forms off
411.a. Papt'r Out Not Gated W/FF
48.b. Paper Out Gated W/FF
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
Page 36
••
••
101101.
SWITCH
POSITIONS
.I'~
+12.
+5
IJ
~
:;
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: AD BO CD DO ED FO
USOC: 4TV + 4TW + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 5-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
.
..
.. 803
5
5
5
I/O
SOCKET
S5
S6 a A
S7
S8
SI
S2
S3
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/c (SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER LOC
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
Note: If the customer requires that no printer
be "print local", place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD
opcon.
DCCDEVICE ROW 1
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW ..
DEVICIt ROW 5
DEVICE ROW 6
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
I"'p
A
B
C
D
E
B
F"
G
H
C
D
K
L
E
*F"
Q
i
I
<
+I
C
II:- 01* S
.
J
R
A
M
N I~
P
)
I
T
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
ASCII
EBCDIC
I
I (! )
'"
';(. Double LF
21 .•. Lower and Upper Case Print
21.b. Lower Case Prints as Upl'er Case
22.a. Lower Case Prints as Error
22.b. Lower Case Prints as UQp_er Case
39.a. Forms on
39.b. Forms off
4R.a. Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
4S. b. Paper Out Gated W/FF
S4 S7
>-- I-r-- I-'-- ' - -
-
I-:-- I--
r- I-r-- r---
>--
-
>--
-
r--
---
>--
-
--
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
nec: AD BO CO DO EO FO
USOC: 4TV + 4TW + 4-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
7&3
7&4
7
51
52 &
53 &
54
55 &
58 &
57
8 & 5
8 & 6
8
A
B
C
D
DEVICE
STATION c/c (SCC'
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW 4
DEVICE ROW II
DEVICE ROW II
A
S"
A
B
C
D
E
B
F
G
H
C
X
[
F
D
K
L
Q
\
R
A
+
M
]
-
I
N
0
P
f
7
*
S
T
<
(
,
J
E
)
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
MONrrOR
l--------------.
MONITOR 1-----"'\
KYBD
ASCII
(
I ( ! )
J
MONrrOR
EBCDIC
.. (.) **
!(
,
I )
('*-)
Note 2: If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibited from all KDs, or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL
position of the appropriate KD
opcon(s).
KYBD
MONrrOR
KYBD
**This footnote applies only when this DCC is
connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 53
SECTION 582-200-201·
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD Bo CO
DO EO Fo
USOC: 4TV + 4TU + 4-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
o ·"OFF" • • .. ON..
CARD POSITION
5
PATTERN
LIGHTS
SWITCH
TEST
SWITCH
RUN
LAMP
+5
•
6
7
I
8
I
••o oo •o •o •• oo
o •
o •
o ••
o •
o •
3. 3. 2.3. 3.
••
9
I 10 I
11
I 12 I 13 I 14 I
••
• ••
0
TROUBLE
0
0 _ _ _ PATTERNS _ _
CONTINUE
.12~
+12.
I
g
~
~
SPC4
SPC4
SPC4
SPC4
SPC13
'. '.
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERN
There are no
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
3. 3.2.
SPA2
SPCt3
10 10 10 10 1. 1.
2. 2. 20 20
20
30
30
4 • '0 '0
5 0
50
00 " 0
70 70
SWITCH
POSITIONS
When internal numeric cluster
opcon is used (Option 410b.), this
substitution applies and
switches on 410464 must
be positioned as shown.
SPAt
10 1.
20
'. '.
1.2.
,.
SPA2
30
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
Note 1: Printer in I/O socket S4 is
printlocal to KDs in I/O socket S2 &
A and S3 & B, Printer in I/O socket
S7 is print local to KDs in I/O socket
85 & C and 86 & D. If no printer in
I/O socket 87; printer in I/O socket
S4 will be print local to all KDs.
See Note 2.
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
PRINTER OPTIONS
S4 S7
PRINTER 1/0 SOCKET
Friction Fred
I-- f-Tractor Feed 110 Col
t-Tractor Feed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18.a. No Paper Feed Out
1i'l.b. Paper FO on "RM" LOllS
rIIl.c. Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19.0. 96 Character Set
t-19.('. 64 Character Set
,..... I-19. f Ext. ASCII Set
20.a. Single LF
r- t-20.1>. Double LF
21.a. Lower and Upper Caae Print
t-t-21.b. Lower Caae Prints aa UDDer Caae
22.a. Lower Case Prints aa Error
22.h. Lower Case Prints as UDDt.'r Case t-39.a. Forms on
I-39.b. Forms off
411.a. Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
t-41l.b. Paper Out Gated W/FF
-
--
-
~
-
-
Page 54
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD BO CO DO EO FO
USOC: 4TV + 4TU + 4-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
7 a 3
7804
7
8805
8801
8
51
52 a A
53 a B
S4
S5 a C
51 aD
57
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC'
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
DceDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW 4
DEVICE ROW II
DEVICE ROW.
A
B
C
510
F
<
A G
B H
C :[
D I:
E
(
E
,.*
Q
\
D
K
L
RA
M
J
I
-
N
/
J
0
P
)
S
T
+
, •
. *
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
MONITOR
!------------.
ASCII
MONITOR 1----""\
EBCDIC
I (!)
KYBD
!
,
Note 2: If the customer requires
that pririt local operation be prohibited from all KDs, or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL
position of the appropriate KD
opcon(s).
MONITOR
KYBD
MONITOR
KYBD
~~=====-
(1 )
(4)
__________
-.J
**This footnote applies only when this DCC is
connected to a PROM SCC. Character in
parentheses is displayed as the device address
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 55
SECTION 582-200-201
C.
MCC- Mini-Cluster Controller Arrangement Forms
MeC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE.. CQOE: ASCII 0 EBCI)IC 0
USOC: 4TX + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: l-KD & I-PTR (Print Local)
PA'rTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
.""ONn
CARD I'OSITION
1
5
6
1
7
8
1
9'
1
10
I·
11
1 12. 1
114
13
-- -'~~~,~~ 00 ~ 00 ~ ~ ~ 0 0 0 0@~ ~ ~
o
o
o
•
o •
o •
o •
•
•o •o o
I
• •
• •• i ••
~-~
2. 2._.\1 2._•
~ ~ ~~---/l _• ..:.I!
I. ..
\~
0
20
-0 I 0
40
0
CONTINUE
SWI
·12
+12
~
00
O.
TROUBLE
•
___ PATTERNS ___ 0
=
TEST
f--o-Q _
MP
•
•
-" 11=
(/)
R
LA
0
••
10 I
PATTERN
LIGHTS
+5
-
' - '--
"
MCC
I.
• z .z Oz.
1
3.3.3
40
li:
'0
'.
"
i
4
4
•
SPC11
4O
,0' 0
606
10
20
3.
41e
'I!.o!
-j1
PIT/SID TP410403
SWITCH
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
NUJ\.lBER
1 AI.
1 81381
I
2
SP 5 SPBb SPBlS sPD20
3
4. 4. '.
_0
OPTIONS .410403
, • ClU TP4Ul4ONg-)
II. I
SPA.
1011.
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.), these
substitutions apply.
t2~
EBCDIC
ASCII
1.0 • • 0.
200. 00.
3.00 .00
'0 • • OlaO
SPAa
1
If internal numeric
~.g
ASCII
"CONTINt'E"
LIGHT PATTERNS
SPAB
10
SWITCH
POSITIONS
~
2
~
SPC15
~
I
817
0
•
It'\
0
4
5
0
6
0
0
0
0
7
6
I
17b
0
Q
0•
0
0
0
0
10
0
UJ
SPCl7·l
402
a 0
b 0
a 0
d
00
.0
O.
Intensified Only
Blink Only
Intensified &: Blink
SPCl' .
406_
b
0
SPCn·2·3
403
a 0
b 0
c 0
•
Continuous Alarm
1-Second Alann
Alpha in Num. Fld.
Alpha Not in N\lm. Fld.
•
0
404
a 0
b 0
SPCl7·5
Tenninate w/ETX
Terminate wI
a
0
ASCII
-c":-::D- .I;:BCDIC . .
407 (Num Loek S.F.)
a
Enabled
b 0 Disahled
0
PRINTER OPTIONS
83
PRINTER 110 SOCKET
--
Friction Ff't."d
Tractor Jo'E"ed 80 Col
Tractor .'eed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18.a. No aper •·..d OUt
1M.b. Papt"r FO on "'aM" Lou
-
,"
IM.c. Pfi,per FO on ""RM" Loll and ETX
19.d. 96 Charac •• r 8<>.
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
Ii
OPTION STATION POLL ADDRESS401 "lSTATION SELECT ADDRESS' OPTION rlst DEVICE ADDRESS
405 .-~nd DEVICE ADDRESS-(PTR)
*ASCII
- 410408
EBCDIC - 410409
**ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections.
Page 56
19.1', 64 Character 8f>t
19.1. Ext. A~"'~ I·~.t
20.8. SinJ(h' LF
20.h.
~ l.a.
21.b.
22.8.
22.h.
39.8.
0
•
•
•
SPCl7·6
408
=
--
Douhl. LF
Lowf'r and Upper Cue Print
>Lower Case Prinla .. UDDer Cue
Low ... r Cue Prin ..... Eno,
Lower Cue Printa II UDDPr C... fForms on
39.h. Forms orf
4R.a. PapE" Out Not Gated W/FF
4K.h. PaPer Out Ga ••d W/FF
f-
f-
0
SPC17-S
0
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
USOC: 4TX + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & 1-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
3
4805
5
MONITOR
I/O
SOCKET
DS
S2-B
S3
STATION
WORKSHEET
DATA SET
KEYBOARD/MON. III
PRINTER
12
1---------""'\
KYBD
PRINTER,
PRINT
LOCAL
Note 1:
If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited form the KD, place a 340701
over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon. Another method is to connect the printer to S4,
option 410403 so that the t~ird device address (B17) is the printer address, and turn all B15 switches off.
Note 2:
If printer is not part of station, option all B15 switches off.
Page 57
SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + (4TOX+'OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
(' ARD POSITION
2
I
I
I
4
I
6
I
10
o ="OFF"
I
11
• ="ON"
I " I 14 I
12
CARD NUMBER
------,
L
\
\
\
,
~
~
:;
~
r: :\==---,---t
10 I 0
0 I
r - r- 30
I
00
CONT1Nl'''f--~ 4 0
0
O.
~
LAMP
12~
g
~
..
•
"('ONTINIT"
•
'
••
20., o.
3.0 . 0
4 oj
0'0
CIU TN1 040NSPAS
10
21.
l!_
40
'0
+;
~lj
til
10
~
'--'- j
ASCII
-
1_
30
40
50
60
",;0
~0
I'
SWITCH
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
NUMBER
1 AI'> ,,:\ HI:\ 81
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
:-;1'(11
I
10
'0
"
".
,I
,
,
I.
J1
1st DEVICE ADDRESS
2nd DEVICE ADDRESS-- (PTR)_
(PTR), DEVICE ADDRESS
--
*ASCII -410408
EBCDIC - 410409
**ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections,
Page 58
SP{'15
10
10
2
0
SPA3
10
4. 4. 4
,,0
UH
"0
"~I~
0
0
0
0
0
0
OPTIONS
402
a
0
SPC17·1
Continuous Alarm
e
--%o¥- l-Sec0!l.i.~~ SPC17-2-~
0
b 0
a
Intensified Only
Blink Only
~
tJ
Alpha Not in Num. Fld.
~
~
~
~
~
410403
404
a
0
:080
"e17-5
Terminate w/ETX
00
aD
~ __ EBCDIC
ASCII
•
___ ~
407 (Num Lock S,F.)
a
b
0
0
SPC17-8
•o
Enabled
Disabled
0
eo
0
0
Te,minate W!SUB,~~
eo
0 'Intensified & Blink
oe
406----- -SPCf'7Cf
a 0 Alpha in Num. Fld.
e
c
b
8P,\3
••
••
2.
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.), these
substitutions apply .
~=
HI':'
SPC15
If internal numeric
r-;-O
/~
~rd
SWITCH
POSITIONS
f-;- 0
GRAPmc DESIGNATIONS
OPTION -{fTATION POLL ADDRESS
401
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
OPTION
405
0
=
'1.
MCC PIT/SID TP4104031
II
2. 2.
o o
•o •o ••o
• • • •
o
TROUBLE
0
,PATTERNS", 0
~.r,-.
8
~
--- ~vCDIC
SPB13 SI'B 15 SPD2Q
1. 10
20
3. 3.
4. 4.
5. 50
'0
..2..,Q
r=::-:-
TEST
'--
~ ~
+12.
LIGHT PAT'n:RNS
EBCDIC
ASCII
0
0
0
••
0
0
,., liI-c--!
-,~, I"r;-i
'" rz.~"
-~
'"' f-"
'5
~
~
•• •
•
••
••
•
o
I
PATTERN
LIGHTS
0
~
PRINTER OPTIONS
S3 S4
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
Friction FpPd
fTractor fo'ppd 80 Col
fTractor fo'eed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
ISpecify Left Margin
1 A.a. No Paper Feed Out
1H.b. Papt'r FO on 'r Spt
r19.r, Ext. ASCII Set
20,a. Sin~lp LF
r20.h. Douhle LF
21,8. Lowpr and Upper Case Print
r21.0. Lower Case Prints as Ui!2er Cue
22.a. Lowpr Case Prints as Error
22.h. Low£>r Cas£> Prints IUJi UODPr Cue
39.a, Forms on
r39.b. Forms off
4A.a Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
4H.h. PapPr Out Gated W/FF
-
-
-- r-
-
-
-
- r-
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
3
4&5
5
5
I/O
SOCKET
DS
S2-B
53
54
DEVICE
DATA SET
KEYBOARD/MON. (II
PRINTER
2
PRINTER
(31
Note 1:
If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD, place a 340701
blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon.
Note 2:
If only one printer is part of the order and the customer requires that print local operation be
prohibited from the KD, another method can be used: connect printer to S4, option 410403 card for
third device address (B17) to be the printer address, and turn all B15 switches off.
Page 59
SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
EBCDIC 0
LINE CODE: ASCII 0
USOC: 4TX + XX10 (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
•
I •
CARD POSITION
10
--~.~-~] ~ ~ ~ ~ 0000~
••o oo o
L_Q o •
o o
1.3. 2.3. 1.2.a.
'12~
6.7. ••
8.
'\
i
I
I
aO
CONTINUE
SWITCH
•
•
0
4
SPB12
BPe4
SPela
10
H2.
.0
+&
50
•
SWITCH
POSITIONS
'0
5
la
I.
0~ ~ ~
0
0
•o
••
••
••
1. 2.
••
SPAl
SPAl
10
aO
•
•
MCC
PlT/SID/elU TP410411
SWITCH SWITCH PACK LOCATION
NUMBER 2 Bl B2 B3 B4B& B6 B7 B6
1
2
a
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OIT T
IONS)"~
GRAPHIC DESIGNAT
OPTION STATION POLLADDRESS
401
STATION SE LECT ADDRESS
OPTION 1st DEVICE ADDRESS
2nd DEVICE ADDRESS (PTR)
405
3rd DEVICE ADDRESS (PTR)
** ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections.
Page 60
I
When internal nume~.c ~.
cluster opcon is used
"''''
(Option 410b.), these
~. ~
substitutions apply.
...
...
60
70
4
c"ON"
12
• ......-TROUBLE
•
PATTERNS----_ _ _
.....
RUN
LAMP
3
11
/
10 I 0
PATIERN....L_LoJ_'O
LIGHTS
I
OPTIONS 410411
BPB7·}
.0.
Continuous Alarm
a
b
1-8econd Alarm
0
.oa
SPB7-2-3
Intensified Only
00
b DBUnk Only
.0
c
Intensified & Blink
SPB7-4
.06
a DAlpha in Num. Fld.
b OAlpha Not in Num. FId. 0
.0.
SPB7·5
a 0 Terminate w/ETX
0
b OTenninate w/SUB. ENQ.
.08
SPB7-6
a DASCH
b OEBCDIC
0
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
SPB7-8
Enabled
0
b
Disabled
SPB7-7
414 Buffer Lock
a OEnabled
0
b
Dilabled
(Requires 410525
.
o
o
•
o
o
o.
•
.
o
o
o
•
•
•
•
PRINTER OPTIONS
sa S4
Friction Fppd
I- rTractor Ff'f"d KO Col
l - tTractor Feed 132 Col
17. Specify Right Margin
ISpecify Left Margin
18.a. ~o raper Feed Out
lI H.b. Paprr FO on ·'RM" Lou
r1M.c. Pl!l>!'r FO on "aM" Lo.. and ETX
19.d. 96 ~haract.r S.t
l - I19:t'. 64 Charactrr Srt
l - I19.1. EXkASl.'IL£.
20 a. Sin~h' LF
l - I20.h. Doubl. LF
21.a. Lowrr and Upper Cue Print
~~). Lower Cue Prin ... u U~J Cue l - I22.a. Lower Case Pfinta u Error
22.b. Lower Cue Print.&. as Upppr Cue t- I39.a< Forms on
t- t39.b. Forms orr
4R.a. Pappr Out Not Gated W/FF
t- t48.b. Pa'p~r Out Gated W/FF
PRINTER I/O SOCKET
-
~
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
USOC: 4TX + XX10 + (4TOX + OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
3
4&5
5
5
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
DS
DATA SET
S2-B
S3
S4
KEYBOARD/MON. (I)
PRINTER
Z
PRINTER
(3)
MONITOR
PRINTER,
PRINT
LOCAL
(See Notes.)
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD, place a 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon.
Note 2: If only one printer is part of the order and the customer requires that print local operation be
prohibited from the KD, another method can be used: connect printer to 84, option 410411 card for
third device.address (B6) to be the printer address, and turn all B5 switches off.
Note 3:
If printers are not part of station, option B5 and B6 switches off on 410411 circuit card.
Page 61
SECTION
582-200-~Ol.
MCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCIIO EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & I-PTR (Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
o = "OFF"
10 I
eMU) POSIT10:\
•
•
('():\TI:\1 'E
r-'
to
f--- =
I'~
<, •
-
,-,. 2i!
~
pD"
~
2
3
•
TIi':lC'''~
~:t\('UlC
•• ••
•
0
~I('C
TP41040~
'. 3.
CIU
SPAf:i SPB13 SPBIS SPD20
'.'
3.2. 4.3.2.2
4.
10
a •
2.
SPC'll
3
40
0
50 51. 50 50
6.
60 00
o.7.=
..2-~
.j
10
20
4~
SWITCH
~ITl\IBEH
1
5
0
7
R
0
speiS
1
SPA3
0
1
SPA3
0
1
SPA3
0
1.
4. 4. 4.'. '.
30303.3.3.
~i~~t~r~~c~~~Se~~ed~8-00;>;~~
7g
o (Option 410b.), these ~ ~.:;
~
I
substitutions apply.
- ....I
17 Al",\13111:l B 1[. A17 '17('U,
3
1
~
SWITCIII'ACK LO(,ATION
2
SWITCH
POSITIONS
Co o
PIT/SID TI'410403
1
8peiS
•
•
•
I-
~
0
-,
--'-~
ASCII
"('ONTIl\'['E"
LJ(;UT l'
ASCII
f'j'o E~
I-
'--
1
14
0
0
TROUBLE
PATTERNS
SPCI3
-
's'P"C4
S"l I{ II
'-
~
+\2.
.
I
13
r).
SWln'11
Hi'
e="ON"
12
o o • •
•• oo •o •o •
o o •
0
••
•
o
00
•o •o •o 0-----. • •• •• ••
~~~-/
--'--'-~
20 2. 20 2. 2.
"
~. 2Q
~
r!-.
1'.\T'1 ~:H\
l.1( ;fITS
[ \\IP
I
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
OPTIONS
402
a 0
h
0
'453- .
0
0
,·0
a
h
f--;wi
a
0
h 0
Continuous Alarm
I·HI·(·und Alarm
spet7·}
•
0
S]>('17·2-=-:,
Intt'nsifi!'!t Onl,
Bhnk Only
Inlt'nsifit'd & Blink
00
.0
O.
SJ>FiT4
Alpha in Num. Fld
Alpha Not in Num. Fld.
•
0
410403
404
a 0
SI'('l7·5
Tt'rmmatl' wlETX
0
TI'mlinall' w/SUB. ENQ. •
~.~
Srf'17·6
h
0
a
0
~)_U
ASCII
b
[I
•
f>:IWDIC
407 (Nurn Luck ,s,t'
a CJ Enabll·d
0
~
SPC17·H
•o
Disuhlt'd
PRINTER OPTIONS
PRINTER I/O SOCKET
S3
Friction Fppd
I-Tractor Fpf'd 80 Col
I-Tractor fo'eed 132 Col
17. Specify Righ~ Margin
1Specify Left Margin
18.a. No Paper Feed Out
IM.h. Pappr FO on "RM" LOM
I-IM.c. Paper FO on "RM" Lou and ETX
19.0.96 Charactpr Spt
I-19.1'. 64 Charactt'r St't
r-
GRA PHIC DESIGNATIONS
OPTIO N{STATION POLL ADDRESS401
STATION SELECT ADDRESSOPTIO N
405
1st DEVICE ADDRESS
2nd DEVICE ADDRESS-(PTR)3rd DEVICE ADDRESS
* ASCII - 410408
EBCDIC - 410409
** ANY D 1/0 CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections.
Page 62
19. r. Ext. ASCII S.
20.a. Sinl{lf' LF
20.h. Douhle Lfo'
21.a. LowE'r and Upper Case Print
~h. Lower Cue Prints as UDDer Cue
22.8. LowE'r Cast> Prints aa Error
22.h. Lower Cast> Prints as UDDer Cue
39.a. Forms on
39.h. Forms orr
4R.a Pap.. r Out Not Gated WIFF
4H.h. Pappr Out Gated W/FF
I-I-I--
i-
r'-
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
MCC (PROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & 1-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
4807
DS
S2-B
DATA SET
KEYBOARD/MON. (II
7
5807
53
S4-C
PRINTER
(21
KEYBOARD/MON. (31
3
Note: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD(s), place 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon(s).
Page 63
SECTION 582.200·201
MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDICU
USOC: 4TX + 4TY + XXIO + 2·(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2·KDs & l·PTR (Print Local)
PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS
o
CARD POSITION
2
a"OFF"
I
10
I
•
·"ON"
12
II
I
13
I'
1
--~-"-\,Jiill ~ 00 00 ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 0I~ ~
0I.0 .0... •
10 I 0
•
PATTERN.....~w~O
a
LIGHTS
CONTlNUl!
8WITCH
RUN
LAMP
.12®0
8
~
+12
+&
0
0
0
•
0
0
o.
0
0
SPB12
SPC4
spel3
2•
10
2.
3.
2.
a.
~
MCC
SWITCH
NUMBER
There are no
continue
patterns.
I
2
a
4
5
6
7
R
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNA
nONS
I.
_ _ _ _•
PATTERNS
SWITCH
POSITIONS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Oil t
B3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B4 85 86 87 88
0
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
~
ls
-li
*. ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
PRINTER OPTIONS
8a
II-
Specify Right Margin
ISpecify Left Margin
18.a. No Paper Feed Out
1H.b. Pap€'r FO on '"RM" L088
IM.c. P~ FO on "RM" Losa and ETX
f9.d. 96 Character SE't
I19.t,. 64 Character SN
I19.1. Ext. A' 'lISe
20.a. Sin~lp LF
I20.h. Double LF
21.a. Lower and Upper Cue Print
21.h. Lower Case Prints as UDI ,Cue r2'2.a. Lower Case Prints aa Error
22.b. Lower Case Prints as ~r GM..e I39.a. Forms on
39.h. Forms off
4R,a. Papt'r Out Not Gated WJFF
r4H.b. P~r Out Gated W/FF
17.
~
r-
See adjacent page for Connections.
Page 64
OPTIONS - 410411
402
SPB7-1
a o Continuous Alarm
b o 1-Becond Alarm
0
403
SPB7·2·3
a o Intensified Only
00
b o Blink Only
.0
c o Intensified & Blink
6.
406
SPB7-4
a o Alpha in Num. Fld.
b o Alpha Not in Num. Fld. 0
404
SPB7·5
a o Terminate w/ETX
0
b o Terminate w/SUB. ENQ.
408
SPB7·6
a DASCH
b o EBCDIC
0
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
SPB7·8
a o Enabled
b o Disabled
0
414 Buffer Lock
SPB7·7
a o Enabled
b o Disabled
0
(Requires 410525)
•
Friction Fped
Tractor Fped 80 Col
Tractor Jo'eed 132 Col
j
st DEVICE ADDRESS
2nd DEVICE ADDRESS (PTR)3rd DEVICE ADDRESc,-
U
"L
•
PRINTER !La SOCKET
.
•
•
PIT/SID/8IU TP410411
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
Bl B2
•
•
SPAt
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.), these
substitutions apply.
OPTION [STATION PO LL ADDRES
401 ~TATION SE LECT ADDRESS
OPTION
405
0-" TROUBLE
40
50
60
70 When internal numeric
8.
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERN
•
0
a•
,
40
50
6.
7.
••
•
0
I• ,. I.
I
1__0_
•
•
•
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200'201
MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form
USOC: 4TX + 2-(4TOX + OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & I-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
S
.1107
7
51107
If0
SOCKET
DEVICE
DS
DATA SET
S2-B
53
S.-C
KEYBOARD}!040N·_ll)
(2)
PRINTER
KEYBOARD MON. (3)
TO DATASET
Note 1:
If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD(s), place 340701
blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon(s).
Note 2:
If printer is not included as part of configuration, option B5 switches off on 410411 circuit card
and Qption B6 switches for 2nd KD.
Page 65
SECTION 582-200-201
3.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OUTLINE
0(1) Review configuration worksheet and cable
worksheet, (3.08).
O (2) Unpack
equipment (3.01).
0(3) Placement of equipment, (3.09).
0(4) Installation of controllers, preliminary,
O (5) (3.16).
Verify coding and options of 410403 or
410411 SCC/MCC, (3.18, 4.04, 4.05).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
401
402
403
404
405
406
(g) 407
(h) 408
(i) 409
(j) 410
(k) 414
(f)
[:=J
b
(Station Number)
b D
a D
b D
c D
a D
b D
a D
bCJc Ddc=:J
(Device Numbers)
bD
aD
bO
aD
b 0
a 0
b 0
a 0
a 0
b 0
bO (MCC only)
a 0
Self-test controllers without cables, (3.19) ..
ooo (6)
(7) Installation of controllers, final, (3.27).
(8) Installation of Attached KD, (3.44) or
Free-Standing KD (3.47).
o (9) Install
and option printers, (3.52 or 3.53,
4.07 through 4.15).
0(10) Install and option data .set or data service
unit, (4.16).
(11) Perform operational checkout, refer to
Section 582-200-501.
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS
3.01
Any special instructions necessary to open
a box will be affixed to the top of the box.
A sample instruction label is shown.
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1. TURN BOX BOTTOM SIDE UP. OPEN BOTTOM FLAPS
AND FOLD OUTWARD.
2. RETURN BOX AND CONTENTS TO AN UPRIGHT
POSITION, KEEPING BOTTOM FLAPS FOLDED
OUTWARD.
3. REMOVE BOX AND PLACE ASIDE. REMOVE INNER
PACKING DETAILS FROM AROUND PRODUCT.
4. REMOVE PLASTIC BAG AND ALL TAPE FROM
PRODUCT.
3.02
If the box has no instruction label, use
these procedures:
(a)
With box in upright position, open top
flaps and fold outward.
(b) Lift contents out of box. Remove inner
packing details from around product.
(c)
o
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Self-test controllers with cables,
Component operational checks,
Local test,
Perform on-line tests.
0(12) Have customer try out station arrangement.
0(13) Complete the installation:
(a)
Give How to Operate Manual(s) to
customer.
(b) Clean up.
(c) Complete service order.
Page 66
4OC,t,a
28130PK
Remove plastic bag and all tape from
product.
IDLABELS
3.03
Besides the Unpacking Instructions labels,
ID labels will· be affixed to boxes which
contain printers, opcons, pedestals, and controllers.
3.04
The ID label will identify the component
in the box as to whether it is a controller
or device.
3.05
The ID label on a box also includes the
identified controller or device ID and
associated component IDs. (See examples in
3.07.)
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
3.06
As given in 3.05, ID labels will be on some boxes, ID labels will also be located on the following
components.
ALL PEDESTALS
D LABELS
~
Note: Blank label
is 405247.
80-Column
Tractor Printer
(40P151jZZ or
40P154jZZ)
~~~~~~~~~IDLABELS
Opcons
( 40KI04jDAA,
40KI04DAB,
40KI05CAA, or
40K203GAB)
Friction Printer
(40PI0l/ZZ or
40PI02/ZZ)
(Bottom View)
132-Column
Tractor Printer
( 40P201/ZZ,
40P202jZZ, or
40P204jZZ)
Note:
See the following page for examples of information found on ID labels.
Page 67
SECTION 582-200 -201
3.07
Examples of labels for boxes and components are as follows:
customer premises (ie, to the rooms and post
numbers listed on the worksheet).
(ID label on box containing Station Cluster Controller 01)
Note: A copy of the customer's floor plan
(if obtainable) would aid in placing the equipment in the proper location.
Example 1 -
r;;;;::======rl
Circled item in box.
---I-SCCID
01
DCC 10
A-D
DEVICE ID _ __
L--_ _ _ _ _ _ _......J
Example 2 -
IDs of DCCs which
are connected to
SCC 01.
(ID label on box containing Device
Cluster Controller B)
Circled item in box.
10 of SCC to which
DCC-B is connected.
DCCID
DEVICE 10 _ _
Example 3 -
(ID label
Device 07)
SCC or
MCC 10
on
box
containing
ID of SCC to which
01/1 DCC-B is connected.
~
DCC 10
(DEVICE.ID
~
.ID of DCC to which
Device 07 is connected.
......J.-:L.
07
~_ _ _ _~~~~~I
,"-----
DEVICEID
Circled item in box.
STATION WORKSHEETS
Before proceeding any further, obtain the
Station Configuration Worksheet and
cable worksheet(s) (if present) from the box containing the SCC or MCC. The worksheet(s) are
located in the document holder of the SCC or
MeC pedestal. See 1.05 for purpose and 1.07
for samples of configuration worksheets. If a
worksheet is not present or does not contain
required information, obtain the service order
(see 1.09).
3.08
3.10
Example of How to Determine Component Placement: Refer again to the
Station Configuration Worksheet which includes
Station A in Room 500 (1.09). Notice that
device 00 has location post L1 written next
to it. All that is needed now is to find the box
which has the following ID label.
SCCor
MCCID
DCC 10
Device is circled
and ID is 00.
According to the worksheet, device 00 is a
4TOXG (attached KD). An ID label will be with
the opcon portion of device 00. The cabinet
portion of device 00 will most likely be packed
in the same box as the opcon; however, if it is
not, then any KD cabinet (40CAB251/ZZ +
405562 SOP) packed separately, can be used with
the opcon, since all KD cabinets are identical. If a
pedestal (4TM++) had been listed in the device 00
block, its box would also have an ID label with
"device" circled and "00" entered as the device
ID. Any monitor (40MN101) can be used with
the KD since all monitors are identical.
Note: Devices 01 and 03 on the Station
Configuration Worksheet are handled in the
same manner as Device 00.
3.11
Once it has been determined where the
boxes are to be located, they should be
moved to their locations (ie, using the above
example, device 00 should be moved to post L1,
in Room 500, device 01 to post L2 in Room 500,
etc).
3.12
If the following items are packed sepa-
STATION COMPONENT PLACEMENT
rately, it is not ,important that they be
assigned to a particular location, since each of
these items is identical to other items having
the same part number (ie, all paper winders
(40PWU101)
are identical, all monitors
(40MN101) are identical, etc).
Referring to the Station Configuration
Worksheet and the ID labels on the boxes,
move the boxes to their exact location on the
40CAB251 - KD Cabinet
40CAB201 - Cabinet for Friction Feed Printer
(40P101/ZZ)
Note: If the SCC or MCC box does not
include a pedestal, the Station Configuration
Worksheet will be taped to the outside of
the cover of the SCC or MCC.'
3.09
Page 68
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
40CAB351 - Cabinet For Tractor Feed Printer
(80-Column)
,
40CAB353 - Cabinet' For Tractor Feed Printer
(132-Column)
.
40CAB371 - Cabinet For Friction Feed Printer
( 40P102/ZZ)
40MN101 -Monitor
40PWU101 - Paper Winder
40BSE101 - Monitor Base
40BSE201 -Opcon Base
- Copyholder
401200
-Paper Rack
405544
-: Paper Guide (SO-Column)
407060
- Paper Guide (132-Column)
407061
- 8-1/2" Paper, Roll
KS8621
During component placement, the following items should not be searched for since
they will be assembled to or installed in their
respective components.
3.13
All printer type carriers and form-out belts
installed in printers.
All circuit cards installed in respective controllers.
All sets of parts assembled to respective cabinets.
All cables connected to respective controllers
(except 405239 cable, which is found with the
printer).
.
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
(PRELIMINARY)
3.14
Assuming that all boxes have been moved
to their proper locations, the controller
portions of the station should now be unpacked.
The boxes containing the controllers will be
identified by their ID labels. Controllers will
already be pedestal mounted and all cables terminating at the controller will be connected. If
controller is to be rack mounted, see 3.17.
3.15
All WES coded parts.
All pedestal tops and feet assembled to pedestals.
Whether the controller is pedestal or rack
mounted, perform the steps outlined in
Paragraph 3.16.
Page 69
SECTION 582-200-201
3.16
After installing the controllers at their proper location, the following should be performed for
each controller of the station.
PEDESTALAC
SWITCH
AC CABLE FROM
CONVENIENCE STRIP
Warning: Cables cannot go
through the front opening;
they must go through side
opening as shown. Do not
plug in ac power cord supplying the ac strip at this
time.
PEDESTAL
(40CAB901/AJ) _ _ _ _-/
341896 or 408()66
DATA SET CABLE
(Not Present on DCC)
FRONT OPENING
(See Warning)
VIDEO CABLES
(Not Present on SCC)
OPCON AND/OR PRINTER, *
CONTROLLER SSI CABLES
Use controller arrangement
form (taped to inside of cover)
to check for correct circuit
cards and position of circuit cards.
1
*Printer and/or opcon cables not present on SCC.
Controller SSI cables not present on MCC.
@ The above warning applies.
Check to see that circuit
breaker is in the on
position (down, white
band not showing).
AC OUTLET----J
FANS
Open pedestal door. If door is equipped
with safety latch on left side, release
the latch and lower the door.
DISPLAY
CONNECTORS
".......A--.
EIA CONNECTOR
(Not Present on DCC)
POWER SUPPLY
(40PSUI02)
CONTROLLER WITH
COVER OFF - _..... ,
® Press down on each card to
make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Some cards do not have rear
connectors and will "rock" when
pressed down at the front. They are:
410403,410461,410464,410465
and all the 4108NN, 4109NN and
4105NN series cards.
Page 70
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
3.17
(a)
Installation of controller on a relay rack:
Mounting brackets and hardware to be furnished by customer. Since 10-32 screws are 3/16 inch
diameter, holes in rack to mount module should be at least 1/4 inch diameter.
(b) Mount the logic module to relay rack bracketry using 10-32 screws. Mounting nuts are located in
each comer of the logic module. To prevent an interference between the tip of the mounting screw
and the back panel, the distance from the tip of the screw to the outside surface of the module shall not
exceed 0.216 inch.
(c)
Install the 405135 card slot identification label to the unpainted formed surface at the front of the
module so that XZ1lines up with the first card slot next to the power supply.
(d) Perform steps outlined in 3.16.
FRONT OF THE
LOGIC MODULE
,14'
I ."'z..e.~
~~.OI?~4-
1·.6G"..
MODULE HOLE
PATTERN
LFRONT
1.000
1
.0 11
ALLOW 2~MIN.
FOR CABLE
CONNECTORS
AND BEND
FRONT OF MODULE
I
.
- j \ 1 5 2 COIiER
ARC
~
t
4 INCH MIN.
SPACING
_ _ AIR FLOW
TYPICAL RACK
ARRANGEMENT
CONTROLLER SELF TEST (WITHOUT CABLES)
3.18 Changing controller options:
(a)
Controller options are enabled as received from the Service Center per the service order request
and are recorded on the controller arrangement form taped to the inside of each controller cover.
Samples of the controller arrangement forms are found on Pages 20 through 65 of this section.
(b) Check the controller arrangement form on the SCC or MCC controller to determine which controller options have been enabled. If any options are to be changed or checked, refer to paragraphs
4.04 through 4.06 for switch programming.
(c)
If any options are changed, the controller arrangement form should be changed. If necessary,
obtain blank copy of the corresponding form shown in 2. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS.
Page 71
SECTION 582-200 -201
(d) If any station or device numbers (IDs) are changed, it will be necessary to remark the associated
ID labels.
3.19
Perform Steps 1 through 3 of controller self test in Section 582-200-501.
CABLE ID TAGS AND CABLE ROUTING
A.
Cable ID Tags
3.20
Each end of every cable in the station, with the exception of the ac cables and data set cable, will
have an ID tag attached to aid in determining where the cables are to be connected.
3.21
The ID tags are color coded so that a specific colored tag next to a connector defines where that
connector is to be connected. The following color codes are used.
TAG
405243
405209
405242
3.22
IDTAG
COLOR
Yellow
White
Orange
CONNECTED TO
SCC
DCC orMCC
DEVICES
(KD and printers)
The information entered on the ID tags is defined as follows.
Example 1:
(SCC)
I S201-0<:ilil- Yellow ID Tag
The information on the left side of the hyphen (-) always shows where the connector (next to ID tag) is to
be connected. The information on the right side of the hyphen shows what component is connected to the
other end of the cable. Using Example 1, we find that the connector is to be plugged into S2 socket of
SCC 01 and the other end of the cable is connected to DCC-B.
Example 2:
(DCC or MCC)
ISlB-SC011-White ID Tag
In Example 2, the connector would be plugged into Sl socket of DCC-B and the other end of the cable
would be connected to SCC-Ol.
Note:
If two 10-foot cables are to be connected between a SCC and DCC, both cables will be tagged at
each end. The cable assembled to the SCC will have yellow ID tags at both ends with identical information
on each tag, while the tags on the cable assembled to the DCC will be white with identical information.
Example 3:
(DEVICE)
I003-MC02}--Orange ID Tag
In Example 3, the connector would be plugged into device 03 and the other end of the cable would be
connected to MCC-02.
Note:
If two 10-foot cables are to be connected between the printer and DCC or MCC, the same infor·
mation (Example 2, Note) would apply except that the ID tags at the printer side would be orange, while
those at the DCC or MCC would be white.
Page 72
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
B.
Cable Routing
The two types of cables that are used to interconnect devices and controllers (or an SCC to a
DCC) can be called the single assembly type (example: 405306) and the stub cable type (example: 405237/CABLEt/405239).
.
3.23
Single Assembly Cables
3.24
If one of the following cables must be run through a cable run without space for pulling the
cable connectors, extract the terminals at the indicated end with a 402840 terminal extractor.
Wrap the terminals with tape. Pull the cable in the indicated direction. Unwrap and install the extracted
terminals in the connector using needle-nose pliers. Connection details are given later in Part 3. INSTALLATION.
Wire color designations are given in Section 582-200-401.
PART NUMBER(S)
CABLE USE
405311
and
405312
EXTRACT TERMINALS
AT
PULL TOWARD
SCC/DeC
DCCEnd
DCCEnd
405301 Through
405304,405139
and 405140
DCC or MCC/KD
KDEnd
KDEnd
405306 Through
405309
DCC or MCC/Printer
Printer End
Printer End
Stub Cable Assemblies
A set of stub cables, termination bo:x;es and a length of cablet can be used to proVide cabliIig
beyond the lengths available as single cable assemblies. Only the cablet may be routed through a
cable run; do not prepare the ends of the cablet for connections until after the cable has been routed.
Connection details are given later in Part 3. INSTALLATION.
3.25
3.26
The station configuration worksheet (and cable worksheet, if required) should provide routing and
cable identification information for the installation. The length of cablet should be determined
from the station configuration worksheet, however, the cable can be unwound directly from a spool.
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION (FINAL)
3.27
Connect the cables to each controller (SCC, DCC, or MCC) in the station using the information on
the ID tags.
SCC (or MCC) to Data Set
3.28
One of four cable lengths may be used between the controller and the data set:
CABLE:
TELEPHONE
LINE
408065 7 feet
(WES7J) 408066 12 feet
(WES7K) 408067 25 feet
(WES7L) 408068 50 feet
f
DATASET
CONNECTOR
DATA SET
201, 208 OR 209
(See Notes on next page.)
sec
MCC
CABLE
tShielded 4-conductor cable (2 twisted pair) (see 3.31).
Page 73
SECTION 582-200-201
Note:
341896 data set cable (5 foot) may be part of the station.
Controller to Controller
3.29
One of two standard cable lengths may be used between controllers:
CABLE:
405311
405312
81 to 86
81 or 85
~8_C_C~~·~----7,-----~~~,._D_C_C~
25 feet
50 fe,et
CABLE
Note:
3.30
Determine connections at controller from controller arrangement form (or cable tags).
For cable (SSI) lengths between controllers of up to 2000 feet, a specially made cablet may be
specified. See 3.31 and 3.39 or 3.42 and diagram below.
405389 TERMINATION
BOXE8
8CC _ _
DCC _ _
1--r~-=~--~----=-~~~81or85
405238 10 FT
CABLEt _FT _ _ _ _--'
405237 10 FT ________________
3.31
Caution - Because of noise problems which are primarily attributed to particular local and plant
wiring conditions, the use of cable other than the following specified or equivalent cable may
degrade system performance. Shielded cable from 406318 (500 feet), 406319 (2000 feet) or 406320
(5000 feet) is recommended for long SSI runs when unshielded cable does not pass the test of 50859S
Issue 2. This shielded cable consists of two twisted pairs of No. 24 AWG conductors covered with tape,
braided shielding and the outer jacket. Pair No.1 consists of twisted red and yellow wires while pair No.2
consists of twisted orange and green wires. Shielded cable insures the quality of 40/4 system performance
by minimizing the effects of radiated and conducted noise.
.
3.32
When a WE44A connector block is substituted for a 405389 termination box, spade terminals
must be installed on all cable connectors.
tShielded 4-conductor cable (2 twisted pair) (see 3.31).
Page ,74
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
Controller to KD
3.33
One of six standard cable lengths may be used between the controller and a KD (cable installation
at controller. see 3.35; at the KD, see 3.44 or 3.47).
CABLE:
405301
405302
405303
405304
405139
405140
3.34
6 feet
12 feet
25 feet
50 feet
DCC
MCC
75 feet
100 feet
OPCON
KD
MON
STANDARD
CABLE
For cable lengths of 100 to 600 feet, a specially made cable and use of a KDA (Keyboard-Display
Amplifier) is required. Refer to Section 582-200-210.
'
Note: For cable lengths less than 100 feet, a KDA can be used to allow the use of the smaller diameter TKS107t cable in restricted cable runs or to allow DCC(s) to be positioned next to an SCC. The
function of the KDA for these short runs is to provide the required dc voltages for the KD (the TKS107t
cable does not include dc voltage leads).
tTKS107 can be ordered under COM code 104873419.
Page 75
SECTION 582-200-201
Controller to KD
3.35
Video and SSI connections at the controller should be made as shown below; determine which
connections to make from the controller arrangement form (or cable tags).
CONTROLLER
(Rear View)
405210
CLAMP
PLATE
~
~
_
192009
~RMINAL
Si.l
.
~,"5208
--)~-_~1164 SCREW
{FT
"
l!I
~
The console is not
shown mounted to base
assembly for clarity.
Note:
I
I
I
TABLETOP OR
OPTIONAL DESK
MOUNTING
40BSE/201
~
.:.~ *1/4-20 BOLT (2)
...--::;:;.
.
I
*Customer-provided bolts are
not to extend more than one
inch into bottom of cradle.
40MNIOl
MONITOR
40BSE201
BASE'
TO CONTROLLER
-----
When 40K203/GAB
opcon is used, a 40BSE202
is required.
Page 84
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
PRINTER INSTALLATION
A.
Friction Feed
3.52
(a)
Friction Feed Printer (40P101/ZZ or 40P102/ZZ)
Unpack printer and cabinet (40CAB201/ZZ or 40CAB371/ZZ).
(b) If four 400409 immobilization screws are present (see 3.53 for approximate location), back them
off 7 or 8 turns.
(c)
Printer options are installed per Service Order and entered on Controller Arrangement Form
attached to controller to which printer is connected. (See 4.07.)
(d) To check or change options, refer to Section 582-210-702 for removal of printer circuit card.
(e)
Install printer in cabinet.
If pedestal is provided with the printer (per Station Configuration Worksheet), unpack pedestal,
place printer and cabinet on pedestal top, open the pedestal door and route ac cable from printer
cabinet into ac convenience strip inside of pedestal.
(f)
(g)
If printer cabinet is not mounted on a pedestal, connect ac cable to an ac outlet.
(h) The controller to printer cable has already been routed to the printer location. Connect the cable
to the PTR connector at the rear of the printer. Also connect the separate ground terminal to the
cabinet ground lug.
(i)
Installation of Paper Winder ( 40PWU1 0 1).
(j)
Install paper and ribbon.
(k)
Connect ac cable from pedestal (if pedestal mounted) or from printer cabinet and paper winder (if
used) to 115 V ac outlet.
40CAB371/ZZ
OR +407100 MOD KIT
If pedestal mounted,
route ac cable to convenience
strip in pedestal.
ON/OFF
SWITCH
I
I
----t .:,;;-J.---181204
L/i
:
156768---l~3646
Note: A 407192 paper guide
is included with 40CAB371/ZZ
cabinet.
Page 85
SECTION 582-200-201
B.
Tractor Feed
3.53
(a)
Tractor Feed Printers (40P161/ZZ or 40P164/ZZ - 80-Column
and 40P201/ZZ, 40P202/ZZ or 40P204/ZZ - 132-Column)
Unpack printer, cabinet and pedestal.
(b) Printer options are installed per Service Order and entered on Controller Arrangement Form
attached to controller to which printer is connected. (See printer options in 4.08 or 4.10, as
applies.)
To check or change printer options, refer to Section 582-210-702 for removal of printer
circuit card in 80-column printer. (Options for 132-column printers are changed without
removing circuit card.)
(c)
(d) Install printer into cabinet as follows.
0Back off the four
black shock mount
immobilizing screws
(7-8) turns.
®Place cabinet on pedestal with
opening in bottom of cabinet
over slot in pedestal. Open
lid by depressing latches on
either side of lid and then
raising it until it locks.
402539
IMMOBILIZATION SCREWS
(4 Places)
Page 86
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
o Install printer in
tracks until detents _______~~~~~~~~,~~
are seated.
Note: With printer
properly seated, all
power and SSI connections will be made.
(e)
Place cabinet on pedestal. Open pedestal door. Connect ac cable at rear of printer cabinet to ac
convenience strip inside of pedestal.
(f)
Connect printer cable to printer, see 3.52 (f).
(g)
Install paper and ribbon.
(h) If printer cabinet is mounted on a pedestal, connect ac cable from pedestal to 115 V ac outlet.
(i)
Assemble paper guide as shown.
(j)
If included with order, install 405544 rack as shown.
407060
PAPER GUIDE
(80-Column)
OR
407061
PAPER GUIDE
(13 2-Column)
400544 RACK
(USOC 4TNOO'80-Column Only)
Page 87
SECTION 582-200-201
OPTIONS
4.
GENERAL
4.01
This part includes all options that are utilized in the DATASPEED 40/4 station and associated
data sets. It also covers handling of circuit cards, location of circuit card switch packs and information on how to activate or change switch positions.
Controller option switches are enabled per the service order request and should be checked per the
Controller Arrangement Form included with each controller. This form will be taped to the inside
of each controller cover. Samples of the Controller Arrangement Forms are found in 2. CONTROLLER
ARRANGEMENT FORMS of this section.
4.02
If any field options are to be changed, turn off power and remove cards using the following pro-
4.03
cedures. Check card to see that pins are not bent before reinserting. Examples of the relationship
between the controller worksheets and options is given in 2. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS.
Note: Changing of options without turning off power will not alter options since switches are only
sampled during station initialization (power up).
Caution: Wear 346392 ground strap
(see Page 2 of this section).
CIRCUIT CARD
PART NUMBER
EXTRACTOR
HANDLE
EXTRACTING CIRCUIT CARDS FROM
CONTROLLER
(a)
Lift up on the extractor handles
of the circuit card.
(b)
Lift circuit card straight up.
CIRCUIT CARD
POSITION LABEL
CIRCUIT CARD
BRACKET
CIRCUIT CARD
LOCATING SWITCH PACKS ON CIRCUIT CARDS
Example: SP A
Note: Number "1" is always
at the top; "ON" is always
switch thrown to the left.
ACTIVATING OPTIONS OR CHANGING SWITCH POSITIONS
=.
Switch OFF (open) = 0 (Depress right side or throw to right.)
Switch ON (closed)
(Depress left side or throw to left.)
ROCKER·TYPE
SWITCH
(Press to operate.)
¥'
TOGGLE-TYPE
SWITCH
(Throw to operate.)
/'
ORANGE
STICK
SWITCH
NUMBERS
Page 88
ISS 4, SECTION 582·200·201
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
4.04
Option 401 is determined by the station number entered in the SCC or MCC portion of the
Station Configuration Worksheet. Option 401.b. must be selected. Do not choose 401.a.
401 - Station Poll and Select Address
a.
b.
None (Does Not Provide Proper Operation)
Station Number (Specify a Station Number
From 00 to 31)
410403 (SPA15, 17)
410411 (SPB1, 2)
(See Tables A and B
for ASCII and Tables
C and D for EBCDIC.)
Page 89
SECTION 582·200·201
TABLE A
ASCII
OPTION 401- STATION POLL ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)
STATION
NUMBER
00
01
02
B
C2
03
04
C
43
C4
05
06
E
07
(;
Ol!
II
09
I
49
10
[
5B
AE
BC
AS
F
.(PERIOD)
12
13
<
14
+
(
AB
Al
15
!
16
17
&
J
26
4,\
CB
II!
K
19
L
·IC
20
:\1
CD
21
S
22
2:l
0
CE
-IF
P
DO
2·1
l~
51
25
R
52
26
]
5D
27
$
21!
•
44
2,\
29
30
I
29
31
Page 90
D
45
46
C7
CS
11
Note:
STATION POLL
ADDRESS
HEX
CHARACTER
SPACE
20
Cl
A
;
3B
/'.
5E
410403 SPAI7) or 4'10411 SPBl)
1
5
6
4
S
2
3
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
• •
•
• •
• •
• • •
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
0
0
0
•
•
•0 ' • 0 • •0 0
• • • •
0
0
•0 • •0 •
0
0
• •
• •0 00 0• 00 •
•
•0
0
0
•
•
•
0
• 00 • 00 00
• 0 0
• •0
0
•
•
•0 0 • • 00 00
• • •
•0 •0 •0 •0 0 00
•0: 0 00 00 : . 00
•
•
•0 00 • 0• 0• 0
• '0 •
0
•0 00 • ,0
•
•
•
•
•0 • 0 • • •0
• • • •
I
I.
I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 10
010
0
0
0 . 0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•0
0
0
0
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The "HEX" addresses shown above do not necessarily relate to the setting of the switches.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
TABLE B
ASCII
OPTION 401- STATION SELECT ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)
STATION
NUMBER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
STATION SELECT
ADDRESS
HEX
CHARACTER
AD
- (MINUS)
2F
/
D3
S
T
54
U
D5
D6
V
W
57
X
58
Y
D9
DA
Z
: (VERTICAL
LINE)
, (COMMA)
r;,
12
_ (UNDERSCORE)
13
14
>
15
'?
16
o (ZERO)
1 (ONE)
17
18
2
3
19
-----20
·1
-- - - - f--;;
21
- - - - - - - f------- - - - - - - --22
6
23
7
--I
H
24
\)
25
26
27
28
7C
2(:
25
DF
3E
BF
BO
31
32
B3
34
B5
B6
37
38
------+---
"
29
30
31
~--.----
'"
I
;
----
,.
B9
BA
23
40
A7
3D
A2
410403 (SPA15) or 410411 (SPB2)
1
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
•
0
0
0
•
•
0
•
•
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
• •
• • •
•
•
• •
• •
•• •• ••
• •
• •
• • •
• • •
• •
•
•• •• •• ••
• • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• • •
• • • •
•
• •
• • •
•
• •
• •
•
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
·1·
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• • Note 2
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
•
• ..2..0
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note 1:
The "HEX" addresses shown above do not necessarily relate to the setting of the switches.
Note 2:
If monocase font is used," : "will be displayed as " \ " during "LOCAL TEST".
Page 91
SECTION 582-200-201
TABLEC
EBCDIC
OPTION 401- STATION POLL ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)
STATION
NUMBER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
STATION POLL
ADDRESS
CHARACTER
HEX
SPACE
40
A
Cl
B
C2
C
C3
C4
0
E
C5
F
C6
G
C7
H
C8
I
C9
¢
4A __
410403(~PA17)or410411(SPBl)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•0
•
•0 0•
• 0
•
• 0•
• 0
•
. (PERIOD)
4B
•
•
0
0
<
4C
40
•
4f;
•
4f'
I
•
•
- - --50
• 0
02
•
03
•
•
M
04
0
N
__
•
06
•
P
07
•
•
08
09
R
•
5A
•
--,---- - - 58
•
•
5C
•
50
•
5E
•
---,
5F
• •
0
0
0
0
(
+
0
----
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
-27
-28
29
30
31
LEGEND:
Page 92
0
&
0
0
K
L
0
----
()
(~
!
0
o~_
0
0
0
0
0
$
--_._-----
0
)
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
I--- - -
Dl
J
•
•
•
0
0
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
is "logical OR" (see Station No. 15).
---, is "logical NOT" (see Station No. 31).
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Q0
0
0
0
7
8
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
f---
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•~
• ...2..
• 00
• 0
• 0
•
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
TABLE D
EBCDIC
OPTION 401- STATION SELECT ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)
STATION
NUMBER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Note:
STATION SELECT
ADDRESS
CHARACTER
HEX
- (MINUS)
60
61
/
S
E2
T
E3
U
E4
V
E5
W
Eft
X
E7
Y
E8
Z
E9
6A
: (VERTICAL
LINE)
,(COMMA)
6B
7,
6C
- (UNDERSCORE)
6D
>
6E
?
6F
O(ZERO)
FO
1 (ONE)
Fl
2
F2
3
F3
4
F4
F5
5
6
F6
7
F7
F8
8
9
F9
7A
#
7B
@
7C
7D
7E
=
"
7F
If monocase font is used,
"i
410403 SPA15) or 410411 SPB2)
1 2
3
4
7 8
5
6
0
•
•
•
0
_.
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
•
• •
0
• •
0
0
•
0
•
•0 0•
0
0
0
0
0
•
•0 0 •
• •
•0 0• •
• 0 00
•
• 0• 0
•
•0
•
• •
• • •0
0
• O· 00
•
•0 0•
•
• 0 •
• •
• • •
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
O.
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • 00
• •
• • •
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
Note
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•0
0
0
0
0
0
"will be displayed as "\ "during "LOCAL TEST".
Page 93
SECTION 582·200·201
Options 402-411 are determined from the Service Order and Station Configuration Worksheet
and apply to either ASCII or EBCDIC Stations. Either 410403 or 410411 will be present.
4.05
402 - Type of Alarm on Receipt of Alarm Write
Control or Copy Control Character
Continuous - ("Local" Must be Depressed to Stop Alarmt
a.
b. One Second (Alarm Sounds Only Once)
a.
c.
Intensified and Blink Fields are Intensified
Intensified and mink Fields are Blinked
Blink Fields are Blinked. Intensified Fields are
Intensified. Mixed Intensified and Blinked Fields
on the same Display are minked.
a.
b.
c.
d.
None (Does Not Provide Proper Operation)
First Device (Specify Device No.)
Second Device (Specify Device No.)
Third Device (Specify Device No.)
0
0
•
•
•
•
0
•
0
404 - Type of Block Abort Procedure Used When
Station Abnormally Stops Sending On-Line **
Terminate With ETX
a.
b. Terminate With SUB ENQ and Prime Alarm Flag
405 -:- Device Addresses (MeC Only)
'410411
SPB7·1
*
410411
410403
SPC17·2 SPC17·3 SPB7·2 SPB7·3
0
0
0
d
403 - Display Field Intensities
h.
410403
SPC17-1
*
•
0
410403
SPC17·5
0
410411
SPB7·5
..
6
•
410403
SPB 13, 15, or 17
(See Table E for
ASCII and Table
F for EBCDIC,)
0
*
...
410411
SPB4,B5, or B6
As for
410403
Note. 405..
a must not be selected
410411
406 - Numeric .Field Override
410403
(Applies to typewriter style opcons)
SPC17·4
SPB7·4
a.1 Alpha Data Can be Entered in Numeric Field
0
0
b.1 Alpha Data. Cannot be Entered in Numeric Field
*
Note: In Option 406 a. or b.; when entering or trying to enter alpha data in numeric field, alarm will
sound.
•
407 - Numeric Lock Special Feature
(Applies to internal numeric cluster style opcons)
a; I Enabled
b·1 Disabled
.:ON
=OFF
*Factory optioned.
**Install Option 404b. unless
otherwise specified.
Page 94
•
410403
SPC17-8
410411
SPB7-8
•0
0
•
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
408.
(410408
present)
410403
SPC17-6
Line Code
•
a. I ASCII
b. (EBCDIC
409.
a.
b.
c.
Note:
N.A.
Up-Low/Monocase
Font for KD
(410409
present)
410403
SPC17-6
(No 410408
or 410409)
410411
SPB7-6
•0
N.A.
0
Type of D I/O Card
in DCC or MCC
EBCDIC
R~liired
AISL;II
Up-Low
Monocase
Line Drawing
(ASCII Only)
410431
410434
410432
41~
Al.!l43.6.
N.A.
For printer type font, see Options 19.d and 19.e.
Cards Required
410.
Typewriter/Internal Numeric
Cluster Opcon
PROM Version
DCC
MCC
EPROM Version
MCC
DCC
a.
DCC or MCC Will Accept
Typewriter 'Style Opcon
(ASCII or EBCDIC)
410809
410911
410808
410909
410910
410509 410512
410513
b.
DCC or MCC Will Accept
Internal Numeric Cluster' Style
Opcon (EBCDIC Only)
410810
410907
410812
410914
410915
410510
414.
Buffer Lock
a.
Enabled
b.
Disabled
(Requires 410525)
(410408 or
410409 present)
410403
(Required, see applicable
controller arrangement
form.)
(Not Available)
410514
410515
(410411
present)
410411
SPB7-7
•
0
•
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
N .A. Indicates option is not available.
o
Page 9,5
SECTION 582-200-201
TABLEE
ASCII
OPTION 405 - DEVICE ADDRESS (MCC)
DEVICE ADDRESS
DEVICE
HEX
NUMBER CHARACTER
SPACE
A
B
C
D
E
F
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
G
H
I
[
. (PERIOD)
<
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Note:
Page 96
l
+
!
&
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
1
$
-.l
*
)
;
/\
- (MINUS)
I
S
T
20
C1
C2
43
C4
45
46
C7
C8
49
5B
AE
BC
A8
AB
A1
26
4A
CB
4C
CD
CE
4F
DO
51
52
5D
44
2A
29
3B
5E
AD
2F
D3
54
410403 (SPB13, B15 and B17) or
-- 410411 (SPB4, B5 and B6)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
•0
•
0
•
0
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
• •
• •0
0
0
0
0
•
•0
0
• 0•
•
0
•
0
•
•0 0•
• 0
0
•
•0 0•
• 0
0
•
• 00
0
0
•
• 0
• •
0
•
• 0
• •
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
• 0•
• • •
• • •0 •
0
• 0 •
0
•
•
0
0
0
•
• 0 00 0•
0
• 0 0
0
•
• • 00 00
• •
• • 00 00
• 0•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
0
0
0
•
•
•0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
• • •
•0 0 00 • 0
• 0 • 0
0
•
•
0
• • 0• 0
• • •
•
• • 00 • 00
• • •
•0 •0 0 00 • 00 •
•
• •
0
0
The "HEX" addresses shown above may not necessarily reflect the position of the switches.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
TABLE F
EBCDIC
OPTION 405 - DEVICE ADDRESS (MCC)
DEVICE ADDRESS
DEVICE
NUMBER CHARACTER
HEX
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
LEGEND:
SPACE
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
I
4F
&
50
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
G
H
I
)
c
.(PERIOD)
<
(
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
!
$
*
)
;
-,
- (MINUS)
I
S
T
410403 (SPB13, B15 and B17) or
410411 (SPB4, B5 and B6)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•0
•0
•
0
•0
•
0
•
•
•
•
• •
• •0
0
0
0
0
•
• •0
0
•0 0
•
• •
0
0
0
•0
•
•0 0•
• •
0
0
0
0
•
•
• •
• •0 0•
0
• 0 00
0
•
•0 0• 0
•
•0 0 •
• •
• •0 •0
0
• 0 o·0
0
•0
0
•
• •
•
•
•
0
•
• •
• •
• •
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• o·
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• 00
• 0
•
•• 00
• 0
• • 00
• •
• • •
• • •
is "logical OR" (see Device No_ 15).
-, is "logical NOT" (see Device No. 31)_
Page 97
SECTION 582-200-201
PRINTER OPTIONS
Refer to 4.07 to determine which paragraphs apply to the printer(s) in a given station.
4.06
4 07 Printer Option Reference Guide
PRINTER CODE
DESCRIPTION
COMPATIBLE PRINTER
LOGIC CIRCUIT CARD
FF 80-COLUMN
40P101/ZZ
FOR OPTIONS, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS
410640
4.08 and 4.10
4.mS and 4 • . Z
4.08 and 4.12
4.08 and 4.10
4.08 and 4.12
4.08 4.13 and
4.09,4.11 and
4.U9. 4. L4 and
4.09,4.14 and
4: LJl (o
40P102/ZZ
40P151/ZZ
FF 80-COLUMN
TF 80-COLUMN
40P154/ZZ
40P201/ZZ
TF 80-COLUMN
TF 132-COLUMN
40P202/ZZ
TF 132-COLUMN
410076
410640
410076
410071
410729
410 )72*
410072
4.15
4.15
4. L5
4.15
FF - Friction Feed
TF - Tractor Feed
*Use of the 410072 card in a 40P201jZZ printer requires use of a 402980 lower pan assembly. The 402887
modification kit includes both a 410072 card and a 402980 lower pan assembly. The 402980 lower pan
assembly is compatible with either the 410729 or 410072 circuit cards.
Note: Selected printer options must be entered on the Controller Arrangement Form lo.cated in the
DCC or MCC to which printer is connected.
PRINTER
4.08
Location of "Forms" and "LF" Switches
on All 80-Column Printers
LINE FEED
OPTION
SWITCH
DOUBLE
1
SINGLE
80-Column
Tractor Feed
Location of "Forms" and "LF" Switches
on All 132-Column Printers
4.09
LINE
FEED
OPTION
e eI Off
e
Off
PRINTER COVER (Top View)
~~TIB~~)
SINGLE
~
FORMS SWITCH
TEST SWITCH
1·2 LINE FEED SWITCH
Page 98
80-Column
Friction Feed
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
4.10
Printer Options For 410640 Circuit Card (See 4.07.)
410640 PRINTER LOGIC
CIRCUIT CARD
(Toggle switches
may be present.)
ColO
17. Printer Right Margin and
Form Length
c. , Last Character on 80th Column
Last Character on 79th Column
Last Character on 78th Column
d.(X) Last Character on 77th Column
Last Character on 76th Column
Last Character on 75th Column
Last Character on 74th Column
Last Character on 73rd Column
- - - -- -- - - -
- - -
- - - - - - - -
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17.c.
(X) - Indicates desired column number.
Note:
C-ll
5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4
-
••0
•••
•• • •
.•• •• •• ••
••••
0
- - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
•
-
-
If printer right margin specified is 36 through 72, a 410076 circuit card must be used.
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
("RM" is Receive Message)
a.
No Paper Feed Out
b.
Paper Feed Out on "RM" Loss 16 Lines
Paper Feed Out on "RM" Loss
c.
orETX
ColO
1 2 3 4
•0
0
C-ll
5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0
0
••
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18.c .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 99
SECTION 582-200-201
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
1
19. Character Set
C-I0
1 2 3 4 5
6
--
Printers with 96 Character Set (Up-Low)
0 - l'nnters with 64 Character :set (Monocase) - 0
- Printers with Special Carrier (Line Drawing) - 0 0 - -
d.
e.
~.
<=)
'---
C-ll
6 1 2 3 4 5 6
-
- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -
Use of 400629 U) or 400784
type carriers require selection of 19.d.
Use of 400645 <~) or 400785 <~) type carriers require selection of 19.e.
pse of 400775 (~) type carrier requires selection of 19.f. (internal use only).
See 4.08.
20. Line Feed on Printer
I Single
b. 1 Double
*
L
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20.a.
C-ll
C-10
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1-2l. Foldover on Up-Low Printer
&.
1 Lower Case and Upper Case Print
--
- -
b.
1
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - - -
-
-0 -
-
-
Consider only with selection of 19.d. or 19.f.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21.a.
a.
b.
C-10
Foldover on Monocase Printer
I- 22.
1Lower Case Not Folded Over
1Lower Case Printed as Upper Case
Consider on1 y with selection of 19.e.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22.b.
a. IOn
b. I Off
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39.a.
*
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
Page 100
C-ll
-1-1-1-1-1- -1-1-1-1-1- *
See 4.08.
1 I
o
-
11213141516 11213141516
-1-1-1-1-1- -1-1-1-101-
39. Forms (Tractor Printer Only)
-
-*
r I
I I
1 1 1 1
1
I I I I
I I I I
I
I
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
4.11
Printer Options For 410729 Circuit Card (See 4.07.)
410729 - Printer Logic Circuit Card
(Printer Circuit Card
Viewed From Beneath
Printer - Access to
Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan
of Printer.)
o
Dll D13
SWDll
654321
DaaODD
(Toggle switches may
be present.)
17.
Printer Right Margin and Form Width
D13
D11
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
e.
Last Character on Column 132
Last Character on Column 131
Last Character on Column 130
Last Character on Column 129
Last Character on Column 128
Last Character on Column 127
Last Character on Column 126
Last Character on Column 125
Last Character on Column 124
Last Character on Column 123
Last Character on Column 122
Last Character on Column 121
-- -- -0 00 e- - *
- - -- -0 0 eo - - -- -- -0 oe e- - - - -- -0 eO e- - - - -- -0 ee 0- - - - - - - oe ee - - - - - - -e 00 e- - -- -- -e oe D- - - - - - -e oe e- - -- - - -e eo e- - - - -- -e ee 0- - - - -- -e ee e- -
f.(X)
-
-
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17 .e.
(X) - Indicates desired column number.
Note:
If right margin specified is 73 through 120, a 410072 circuit card must be used.
e Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 101
SECTION 582-200-201
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
b.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on RM Loss - 16 Lines
c.
Paper Feed Out on RM Loss or ETX
a.
Dll
D13
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
.- ---
-- - - - - -0
- - - - -0
0-0 - - - - - - - *
- -
-
•
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18.c.
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
Not Printed on Parit Error
19. Character Set
- -d.
-
Printers With 96-Character Set
lUl)-Low~
-e.
Dll
D13
6 5 4 3 2 165432 1
Printers With 64-Character Set
(Monocase)
.0 - --
o. -
--
-- -- -
-- -- -- -- -
~~ of 400777 (~) or 400783 (~) type carriers, require selection of 19.d.
Use of 400780 (0 or 400887 (;) type carriers, require selection of 19.e.
20.
Line Feed on Printer
See 4.09.
I I I I I I I I I 11 *
a·1 Single
b·t Double
I I I I I I I I I I I
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20.a.
,.....
21. Foldover on Up-Low Printer
a. I Lower Case and Upper Case Print
b.1 Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
only with selectIOn of 19.d.
*'Consider
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21.a .
• Indicates on.
OIndicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 102
Dll
D13
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
- -
-.
- - -- - - - - 0 -- -- - - --
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
D11r-
011
6 5 413 211 6 514132 1
22. Foldover on Monocase Printer
r--
- --i- -\-
h.1
a. \ Lower Case Prints as Error Sy~bol
Lowt'r Case Prints as Upper Case
--1-
-I-
==1=1"*
-
e--
*
a-jConsider only With selection of 19.e.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22.b.
39 . Forms
Refer to 4.09.
I
I
1-----r-"{.~.I-g7.:--~f-=----=--=--=-=-=----+--,-Ir--r-TIl--r-rlI-.--r-I1 '-'-'1
1 l--,---il *
1
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39.a.
48. Incomplete Form Suppresses
Paper Alarm
a.
h.
No (Paper Out Not Gated With
Form Out)
Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
011
6 5!4 3 2 1 6
- -
-
-
- -
-
-
-.
D13
514J3F 1
--1-1-1I
-- 0- -1-1-1- *
I
Unless otherwise specified, choose 48.b .
• Indicates on.
Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
o
Page 103
SECTION
4.12
582-200~201
Printer Options For 410076 Circuit Card (See 4.07.)
410076
CmCUITCARD
17.
Printer Left Margin and FOrni Width
1
a.
b.(X)
First Printer Column - Column 1
First Printer Column - ColUmn 2
First Printer Column - Column 3
First Printer Column - Column 4
First Printer Column :..-. Colwnn 5
first Printer Column - Column 6
First Printer Column - Column 7
Fii'st Printer Column :..-. Column 8
First Printer Column Column 9
First Printer Column Column 10
First Printer Column Column 11
First Printer Coiumn . (Jolumn 1~
:1"irst .I'nnter (Jolumn . (Jolumn llS
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17 .a.
(X) - Indicates desired column number.
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 104
2
3 4
E7
5
6
7
•• •• •0 ••
0 0
•
0 0
- - •
0
- - 0• 0 • 0
- - 0 0 0
- - 0 • 0 •0
0
0
- -- -- •00 0 ••0 • 0• - - • •
•
•
0
0
- - •
- - 0 • • •0 - - - -
8
- - *
- - - - - - - - -
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
17.
c.
d.(X)
Printer Right Margin
Last Char Printed
Column Number
80
73 61 49 37 25
74 62 50 38 26
75 63 51 39 27
76 64 52 40 28
77 65 53 41 29
78 66 54 42 30
79 67 55 43 31
68 56 44 32
69 57 45 33
70 58 46 34
71 59 47 35
72 60 48 36
and Form Width
E1
1 2 3 4 5
- - - - 0
-
-
-- -
-
-
-
-
6
7
•• •••
•• 0•
•0
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
•••• --
-
-
- - -
- -
-
...,.
0
0
0
0
0
0
9 1 2 3
0 - - -
••• 0•
E2
4 5
-
-
0
0
0
-
- -
0
0
--
-
0
- - --
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
0
0
8
1
2
3
•• •• •• •• -•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
••• ••• ••• ••• •• •• •• •• -•• •• •• •• -
- - - - - -
- -
•• ••
•• •• •• •• •0
7
6
- - -
0
0
-
8
-
E7
4 5
6
8
7
- - - - - - - - *
-
-
- - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
To obtain counts:
73
61
49
37
25
through
through
through
through
through
80
72
60
48
36
program
program
program
program
program
as
as
as
as
as
shown.
shown,
shown,
shown,
shown,
then
then
then
then
operate
operate
operate
operate
E7
E7
E2
E2
position
position
position
position
2
1
7
8
to
to
to
to
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17.c.
x-
Indicates desired column number.
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
1
a.
b.
c.
•
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM
0
Loss - 16 Lines or One Form
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss
0
or ETX - 16 Lines or One Form
2
-
3
4
E1
5
6
7
S
9
1
2
3
E2
4 5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6
7
0
-
0
-
•-
Unless otherwise specified, choose lS.c.
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
c.
1 Not Printed on Parity Error
E1
11213141516171819
-I-Ielel-I-I-I-L- *
Re q uired Selection
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 105
SECTION 582-200-20J
19. Character Set
-1
d.
e.
f.
I Printers With 96-Character Set (Up-Low)
J Printers With 64-Character Set (Monocase)
J Printers With Special Carrier (Line Drawing)
1
2
E2
4 5
0
0
0 0
3
••
- - - - - -
-
6
7
8
- - - - - *
- - -
r-
Use of 400629 (:) or 400784 (:) type carriers require selection of I9.d.
'- Use of 400645 (:) or 400785 (~) type carriers require selection of I9.e.
Use of 400775 (~) type carrier requires selection of I9.f. (internal use only).
'--
See 4.08.
20. Line Feed on Printer
a.
b.
I Single
I I I I I I I
J Double
I
I I
I I
*
I I
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20.a.
E2
4 5
21. Foldover on Up-Low Printer
a. I Lower Case and Upper Case Print
b. l. Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
1
2 -3
- 0
- -
•
6
8
7
- - - - - -
-
-
-
*
'-Consider only with sele ctIOn 0 f 19.d. or I9.f.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21.a.
22. Foldover on Monocase Printer
r-
1
a. I Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
b. J Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
2
- - -
3
0
•
E2
4 5
-
6
7
8
- - - - - - - *
c...-IConsld eron I y wlth selectIOn 0 f 19.c.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22.b.
R'f~ to •.08.1
39. Fo=,
1~-~j~~----------~I~I~I~II~I~I *
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39.a.
;-
48. Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
1
a. I No (Paper Out Not Gated With Form Out)
b. I Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
. h Fri cti 0 n Feed Printer .
L...o-Po sition of sw·ltch h as no e ffe ct Wlt
For Tractor Feed Printer, unless otherwise specified, choose 48.b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
'
Page 106
-
2
•
3
0 -
E2
4 5
6
-
-
-
-
-
7
-
- -
8
-
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
54. Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
a.
b.
I
I
1
Character After ESC Printed as Received
Printing of Character After ESC Suppressed'
3
4
-
2
0
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
•
-
..
'-INot ApplIcable - Position of sWitch does not affect operatIOn .
SI/SO Detection Not Used
SI/SO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
8
7
- - - -
9
-
*
E1
55. SI/SO Detection
a.
b.
E1
5 6
5
6
- - - - - - - - - -
7
0
-
-
•
-
-
7
8
8
9
*
--Not A pp licable - Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration.
56. Friction Feed /Tractor Feed Printer
a.
b.
Friction Feed Printer - Motor Held on After
Paper Alarm
Tractor Feed Printer - Motor Turned Off After
Pap~r Alarm
2
0
- - - - -
•
3
4
1
E2
5 16
-1- -
- *
-
-1- -
FnctlOn Feed Prmter - Choose 56.a.
--'Tractor
Feed Printer - Choose 56.b.
57. SSI/OEM Interface
J
a. ) SSI
Required Selection
58. Idle Line Motor Control
2
1
a.
b.
Disabled - Motor Held On Indefinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled - Motor Turned Off After 40-Second
Idle Line
3
E7
4 5
-
-
- -
-
-
7
6
- - -
- - -
-
-
8
0
*
•
Unless otherwise specified, choose 58.b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 107
SECTION 582-200-201
4.13
Printer Options for 410071 Circuit Card (See 4.07.)
410071 Printer Logic Circuit Card
(Printer Circuit Card Viewed From Beneath
Printer - Access to Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan of Printer.)
E5
E8
E9
C1, E5 AND E8
17.
Printer Left Margin and Form Width
a.
First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column -
b.(X)
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Column 5
Column 6
Column 7
Column 8
Column 9
Column 10
Column 11
Column 12
Column 13.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17 .a.
(X) - indicates desired column number.
• Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
o
*
Page 108
1
2
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - -
-
-
-
-
3
4
E5
5
6
7
8
-
-
-
-
•• •• •0 ••
•• 0• 00 00
0 0
•0 0 0 0 • 0
• •0 00 -0
•0 0 • • 0 • 0 • •• 0• •0 •0 -0 • • 0 -
-
-
-
-
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
17.
c.
d. (X)
Printer Right Margin and Form Width
Last Char Printed
E9
Column Num.ber
1 2 3 4 5
80
0
0
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
6
7 8 9 1
• •• ••• ••
0 •
•• 0• 0• •
•
0 •
0 •
0
0
•• • • 0•
O+~
~
.+.g. r-- (5•• r£'=
• - 0 00 =o• -j
-
.--, 0
-
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
2
•••
•
••
•• •.•• •
3
-
E5
4 5
6
7 8
- - -
- - - - - --
-
- - -
••
••• •••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
••
1
~
2 3 4 5
6
7 8
••
•••
•••
••
••
--
-
.-
*
.~
-
•
To obtain counts:
73
61
49
37
25
through
through
through
through
through
80 program as shown.
72 program as shown, then
60 program as shown, then
48 program as shown, then
36 program as shown, then
operate ES
operate E5
operate E5
operate E5
position
position
position
position
S to
1 to
7 to
S to
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17.c.
(X) - Indicates desired column number.
lS.
Printer Paper Feed Out
a.
b.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss 16 Lines or One Form
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss or ETX 16 Lines or One Form
c.
1 2
3
ES
4 5
e
- 0 0 - - e a - -
6
7
S
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
Unless otherwise specified, choose lS.c.
19.
Printer Errored Character Symbol
c.J
Not Printed on Parity Error
E9
1 J 2 j 31 4 j 5 J 6ci. 7.1 81 9
- j - J - j - j Je e j - j -
Re quired Sele ctlOn
• Indicates on.
a Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 109
SECTION 582-200-201
19.
Character Set
d.
e.
f.
Printers With 96-Character Set ( Up-Low)
Printers With 64-CharacterSet (Monocase)
Printers With Special Carrier (Line Drawing)
2
1
3
E8
5 6 7
0 0
0 0 -
4
8
••
- - - - - - - -
-
- *
-
E~e of 400629 (:) or 400784 (:) type carr!ers requ!re select!on of 19.d.
Use of 400645 (.) or 400785 (0) type carners reqUire selectIOn of 19.e.
lli~e of 400775 (~) type carrier requires selection of 19.f. (internal use only).
See 4.0S.
Line Feed on Printer
20.
a. I Single
b.1 Double
*
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20.a.
21.
Foldover on Printers With 96-Character Set
a. I
b·1
Lower Case and Upper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
1
0
•
2
3
ES
4 5
6
7
S
- - - - - - - - - - -
*
"---- Consider only with selection of 19 d or 1 9 ..
f
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21.a.
22.
Foldover on Printers With 64-Character Set
a. I
b·l
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
-
1
0
•
ConSIder only wIth selectIon of 19.e.
2
3
4
ES
5
6
7
8
- - - - - - - - - -- - - - *
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22.b.
39.
a. I
b.
See 4.08.
Forms (Tractor Printer Only)
I
On
Off
*
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39.a.
48.
Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
a. I
No (Paper Out Not Gated With Form Outl
Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
b.J
Unless otherwise specified, choose 4S.b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 110
1
2
3
4
E9
5
6
7
8
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9
I~
0
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
54.
a.
Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
I
h.J
2
1
E9
4 5
3
6
7
Character After ESC Printed as Received
l'rintmg Of IJharacter After ESC Suppressed
8
0
~-
8
9
•
*
~otApp licable - Position of switch does not affect 0 peration.
E9
55.
SI/SO Detection
a.
b.
SIISO Detection Not Used
SIISO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
2
3
0
4
- -
•
- - - - - -
1
-
5
6
7
*
..NotApplicable - Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration .
d
57.
a.
I
SSI/OEM Interface
SSI
Required Selection
58.
Idle Line Motor Control
1
2
3
·Disabled - Motor Held On Indefinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled:"" Motor Turned Off After 40-Second
b.
Idle Line
'Unless otherwise specified, choose 58.b.
a.
59.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Speed Selection (Applies only if Option 57.b. is
selected)
75 Baud
150 Baud
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
.60.
a. I
b·1
Aux Alarm
Enable
Disable
-
8
7
6
*
0
•
2
3
•0 •
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•0
0
0
0
-NotApp licable - Position of switches do not affect 0 p eration.
-
E8
4 5
1
-
2 3
0 -
•
C1
4 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
8
7
0 0
0 0
0
0 0
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•0 • •
0 0
•
4
E5
5
6
7
*
8
- - - - - *
a er jam alarm) is installed in printer, choose 60.a.
"'-If 402920 modification kit (pp
Otherwise 60.b. must be chosen .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 111
SECTION 582·200·201
4.14
Printer Option For 410072 Circuit Card (See 4.07)
410072 Printer Logic Circuit Card
08 09 010
o
(Printer Circuit Card Viewed From Beneath
Printer - Access to Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan of Printer.)
D10
17.
Printer Left Margin and Form Width
a.
First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column
First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column
b.(X)
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3 ,
Column 4
Column 5
Column 6
Column 7 •
Column 8
Column 9
Column 10,
Column 11,
Column 12
Column 13,
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17.a.
(X) .' Indicates desired column number .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
_ Position of switch does not affect option.
'* Factory optioned.
Page 112
DB
1
2
3
-- -- •
4
5
6
7
8
;)
- -- -- *
-- -- - - -
•• ••• •00 •0•
0 0 0
- 0• 0 • 0
- 0 0 0
-- -- 0 0• 0 0•0 -- --- --•• • - - 0 0
- - •
- - 0
0
- -- -•
0
- - • •
••- - 0 0
- - • •
- 0 • • 0 - -
-
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
17.
Printer Right Margin and Fo~m Width
-Last Char Printed
D8
Column Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3
132
- - - r-njq 121 109 97 85 73
- ~
122 110 98 8614
-r-...::- -123 111 99 87 75
~ -- - - 124 112 100 88 76 - - 125 113 101 89 77 - -- - - -I126 114 102 90 78
- - - 127 115 103 91 79 - - - - - --;0-- ---128 116 104 92 80
129 117 105 93 81
-
• ••
•
.-
• •• •• • -=• ••
-. •
~810694-82 - r...:... lSI 119 107 95 83 120 108 96 84
- - - - -
-
••
••
••• -
•
-
D9
4 5
-
-
-
---
-
-
-
---
-
- - -
position
position
position
position
7 off.
S off.
7 off.
S off.
- -
6
7
8
1
2
0
3
•• •• • 0
--.:...- •
•
~ -=- ~ 0 • 0• •• - •
0
- •
•• 0•• •• -• 0•
- •
•
•
•• 0• 0• -
D10
4 5 6
0 0 -
••
•
0
0
0
••
••• --
-
•• 00• •0
0 0
0
0
0
7 8
- - -
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To obtaill counts:
121
109
97
S5
73
through
through
through
through
through
132
120
IDS
96
S4
program
program
program
program
program
as
as
as
as
as
shown.
shown,
shown,
shown,
shown,
then
tlwn
then
then
operate
operatp
operate
operate
09
09
OS
OS
(X) - Indicates desired column number.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17.e.
IS.
Printer Paper Feed Out
a.
b.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss 16 Lines or One Form
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss or ETX 16 Lines or One Form
c.
1
2
- - 0
-
•
3
D9
4 5
• -0
0
-
6
7
8
-
-
-
-
- - - -
*
Unless otherwise specified, choose lS.c.
19.
1 c.1
Printer Errored Character Symbol
Not Printed on Parity Error
[
Required Selection
• Indicates on.
Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
o
Page 113
SECTION 582·200·201
D8
1~.
Character Set
d. I
e. I
Printers With 96·Character SeUU~Low~
l'rtnters WIth tl4-(;naracter l::let~~onocase1.
"'--,Use of 400777 LD,)
:Ai
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
2
3
D9
4 5
6
7
8
1
0
2
3
D9
4 5
6
7
8
2
0
••
or 400783 LM)type earners, requlre selection of 19.d.
0
:A:
Use of 400780 (!t) or 400887 (~:!)type carriers, require selection of 19.e.
120.
Llne 'oed on PrlnW
a.1
b.
SingIe
Double
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20.a.
'r-
21.
a.
Foldover on Printers With 96·Character Set
Lower Case and Upper Case
Lower (Jase ~ as~pper~ase
I
I D. I
•
onsider onlY with selection of 19.d.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21.a.
'-0- C
-
22.
Foldover on Printers With 64·Character Set
a·l
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
J..ower liase rnntB as upper liase
b·1
•
*
j'.OO.
I
-Consider only with selection of 19.e.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22.b.
I'a'l.' .""'" < -
Prlntor Only)
On
Off
b.
'
I
1 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 1 I·
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39.a.
48.
a..lI
,b.
Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
1
No {Paper Out Not Gated With Form Oull
Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
2
D9
4 5
3
•
- - -
6
7
8
0
*'
Unless otherwise specified, choose 48.b.
r-- 54.
a.
Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
I Character After ESC Printed as Received
0'1
rnnung 01 linaracter~r~uppressed ,
..
" - 'Not Applicable -PoSltion of sWItch does not affect operation.
• Indicates on.
o 'Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
Page 114
1
-
2
3
4
D10
5 6
7
8
0
•
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
- 55.
a.
b.
DlO
SIISO Detection
SIISO Detection Not Used
SIISO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
1
2
- -
- -
.. of sWItch does not affect operation.
L-.lNot ApplIcable - POSItion
57.
SSIIOEM Interface
a.1
SSI
3
0
4
-
-
5
7
6
8
- - - - *
- - - -
D8
11213141516171819
,I 1 -I -I - I I -I -I-
*
Reqwred Selection,
58. Idle Line Motor Control
a.
b.
Disabled Motor Held On Indenfinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled Motor Turned Off After 40-8econd
Idle Line
1
-
2
D9
4 5
3
- - - - -
-
-
Unless otherwise specified, choose 58.b.
,- 59. Speed Selection (Applies Only if Option 57.b.
is Selected)
75 Baud
a.
b. 150 Baud
c.
300 Baud
d. 600 Baud
1200 Baud
e.
f._ 2400 Baud
g. ' 4800Baud
h_ 9600 Baud
~N otA pplicable
7
6
0
8
- - *
-
- -
C4
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
1
2
3
D9
5
- 0
2
0
4
0
0
-
•0
5
0
0
0
0
0
6 7 8
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 00
0
0 0 0
0 0
0 0
••• *
•
- Position of switches do not affect operation.
60. AuxAlarm
a. I Enable
lb. 1 Disable
--
- -
-
-
4
-
•
6
7
8
- - -
*
-402920 modifIcation
kIt (paper Jam alarm) IS mstalled m prmter, choose 60.a. OtherwIse
60.b. must be chosen .
'--1If
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
* Factory optioned.
•
Page 115
SECTION 582-200-201
4.15
Printer Options For 410151 Circuit Card (See 4.07.)
410151 Circuit Card
(Component Side of
Circuit Card)
SCREW A
c-
61. Regulator Grounding
Circuit Gnd to Frame Gnd)
a. SSI
b. (OEM) At Printer
c. (OEM) Ext to Printer
Screw A
Component Noncomponent
In
In
In
Screw B
Component Noncomponent
In
In
In
-
c......Either 61.a. or 61.b. must be chosen for p ro p er 0 Perabo.
n
DATA SET, DATA SERVICE UNIT, AND
INTERNAL MODEM OPTIONS
4.16
BSP References:
201B Data Set (DS), 2400 BPS - Section
592-011-ZZZ and Tech Ref Pub. 41201. The
201B is manufacture discontinued.
201C Data Set (DS), 2400 BPS
Section
592-029-ZZZ and Tech Ref Pub. 41210.
208A Data Set (DS), 4800 BPS
592-027-ZZZ and Tech Ref Pub. 41209.
Section
209A Data Set (DS), 2400 BPS, 4800 BPS,
7200 BPS, 9600 BPS - Section 592-032-ZZZ.
Page 116
500A - Ll/2
BPS; 500A 4800 BPS; and
(DSU), 9600
Data Service Unit (DSU), 2400
Ll/3 Data Service Unit (DSU),
500A - Ll/4 Data Service Unit
BPS - Section 595-200-ZZZ.
4.17
The three tables that follow list options
for DSs and DSUs. The SCC or MCC
should be connected to the DS or DSU. After
making the connection and checking the options,
go to Section 582-200-501.
4.18
A 201B, 20lC, 208A or 209A Data Set
can be used with the station arrangement
provided there is access to a private line system
with 2000 or 3002 conditioning (the 208A and
209A require 3002).
ISS 4, SECTION 5S2-200-201
201- AND 20S-TYPE DATA SETS
DATA SET AT DATASPEED 40/4 STATION
DESCRIPTION OF RECOMMENDED
DATA SET OPTIONS
WITHOUT AUX DATA SET 8280R829'
NEW SYNC NOT USED
600 or 900 OHM IMPEDANCE
4·WIRE SWITCHED CARRIER (Note 1)
ECHO DELAY
EIA INTERFACE
XMIT LEVEL (Opt.ional)
REC LEVEL (Optional)
COMPo EQUALIZER·IN ...
INTERNAL XMIT TIMING
DSR "ON" IN AL-MODE
NO COMPo EQUAUZER TEST
RETRAIN AUTOMATICALLY
I·SEC. HOLDOVER ENABLED
EQUAUZER ADJ. (Note 2)
201B-UST
201·B3
ZJ
W
ZL
Yor X
B
ZR·ZT
201C·L1
YJ
YA
ZQ or ZR
XA
ZB
T
ZD·ZF
YK,YG,YE
G,F,E,B,A ZA···ZP
S,R,Q,N
ZU
ZS
YC
-
*
*
*
SWITCHED RTS (Note 1)
CaNT. REC. BIT CLOCK IN
DATA SET AT CUSTOMER LCU
SAME AS ABOVE, EXCEPT:
0
4·WIRE SWITCHED CARRIER
M I·SEC. HOLDOVER ENABLED
I
NEW SYNC. NOT USED (Note 3)
T
CONTINUOUS CARRIER
A I·SEC. HOLDOVER· DISABLED
D
D NEW SYNC. USED (See Note 3
if required at Cust. machine)
201C·LlD
YJ
YA
-
XA
-
YK
-
YC
YM
-
-
-
201B-UST
B
201·B3
ZB
ZL
-
-
208A·L1
S3C·DOWN YJ
S4C·DOWN YA
S4B·DOWN
XA
-
YO
201C·Ll
XA
201C·LlD
W
ZA
YA
XB
YA
XB
ZK
YB
YB
XA
S3A·DOWN
SIA·UP
SIB·UP
S3B·UP
S4A·DOWN
S2B·UP
S2C·UP
SIC·DOWN
208A·LI
S4B·DOWN
S4A·DOWN
S4C·DOWN
S4B·UP
S4A·UP
S4C·UP
YC
YM
YQ
YU
YX
ZS
Yfj
XA
YX
YA
XB
YW
YB
*Required for 20SA-Ll.
Note 1: In a single 40/4 station telephone
channel to a customer's equipment station,
Continuous Carrier and Continuous RTS options
are pre felTed at the 40/4 station.
Note 2: For switched carrier operation, correct
setting of the Compromise Equalizer must be
determined using the Compromise Equalizer Test
in Section 592-027-500.
Note 3: In multipoint station arrangements, the
data set at the customer LCU may use NEW
SYNC OPTION to quench timing signals in the
data set and condition the receiver for the next
message - if required, refer to customer LCU
requirements. Not required at LCU for pointto-point station arrangements.
Page 117
SECTION 582-200-201
209A DATA SET - RECOMMENDED OPTIONS
DATA SET AT 40/4 STATION
OPTION
WN
WK
WS
WF
WH
WP
-.
WB
WD
YJ
YM
XF
YX
YC
WJ
DESCRIPTION OF OPTION
Compromise Equalizer Receiver
Phase Out
Compromise Equalizer ReceIve
Slope In
Compromise Equalizer Transmitter
Phase Out -Elastic Store Enable 3 Out
Elastic Store Enable 4 Out
CompromIse -~qualizer Transmitter
Slope In
Elastic Store Enable lOut
Elastic Store Enable 2 Out
828 or 829 DAS Not Used
DSR On in AL Mode
4-Wire Switched Carrier and
Automatic Retrain
l-Second Foldover In
Internal Timing
Slave Out
SWITCH
AND STRAP
Sl-2
Sl-4
Sl-7
S2-4
S2-8
S3-1
S3-4
S3-6
S3-8
S5-1
S5-3
S5-5
S6-2
S6'4
DATA SET AT CUSTOMER LCU(Same as above except)
XF
OMIT
YX
XG
ADD
YW
4-Wire Switched Carrier and
Automatic Retrain
l-Second Holdover In
4-Wire Continuous Carrier
and Automatic Retrain
l-Second Holdover Out
* For Point-To-Point Operation, option as shown above except:
Omit: XF - 4-wireswitched carrier and automatic retrain - S5-3.
Add: XI - Continuous RS and automatic retrain - S5-8.
Page 118
S5-3
S5-5
S5-6
S5-4
*
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-201
A 500A-Type Data Service Unit (DSU)
can be used with a station arrangement
provided there is access to a synchronous digital
data system. The 500A-Ll/2 operates at 2400
BPS and uses the HNI and HPI circuit cards. The
500A-Ll/3 operates a 4800 BPS and uses the
HN2 and HPI circuit cards. The 500A-Ll/4
operates at 9600 BPS and uses the HN3 and
HPI circuit cards.
Note 1: Option WV required only under guidelines of Section 886-100-115 when local cable pairs
are too short for proper operation of receiver.
4.19
Note 2: DSUs are not capable of near-end
analog loop-back.
Note 3:
details.
Refer to Section 595-200-series for
500A-TYPE DSUs
CIRCUIT
OPTIONS OPTION
PHYSICAL
OPTIONS
FEATURE
WV
Fixed line build-out network installed (Note 1)
WW
Fixed line build-out network removed
YK*
YL
YS**
Y'l' *
YQ
YR*
XK
XL *
XM
XN*
XO*
XP
Signal ground connected to frame ground
Simal ground disconnected from frame ground
Continuous reauest-to-send (permanent RTS)
Switched request-to-send
Circuit assurance installed (Note 2)
Circuit assurance removed
System status installed (Note 2)
System status removed
Switch LED assembly installed to rear
Switch LED assembly installed to front
LL spring clip installed
LL spring clip not installed
SWITCH
SWITCH POSITION
SIA
SIB
SIC
SIA
SIB
SIC
S2
S3A
S3B
S3C
3
5
9
2
6
8
IN
OUT
CP
HNI
or
HN2
or
HN3
2
3
6
5
9
8
HPI
HNI
or
HN2
or
HN3
*Recommended Options
**(1) In a point-to-point station arrangement, it is recommended that continuous RTS (YS) option be
selected instead of switched RTS (YT).
(2) Continuous RTS (YS) option should always be chosen at customer LCU regardless of whether
system is in point-to-point or multipoint environment.
Page 119
SECTION 582-200-201
5.
5.01
5.02
ADJUSTMENTS
The only adjustments in the station are
in printers and monitors.
Monitor adjustments are given in Section
582-213-700.
Page 120
5.03
80-column printer adjustments are given
in Section 582-210-700.
5.04
132-column printer adjustments are given
in Section 582-210-700.
ISS 4, SECI'ION 582-200-201
6.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES (ALL STATIONS)
6.01
The following tools and supplies may be required for installation or servicing of DATASPEED 40
apparatus. Most of these items should normally be present in standard maintenance tool kits.
6.02
Tools
Wrench
3/16" socket
125752
Wrench, open end
3/8"
125765
3/16" and 1/4"
129534
Wrench, open end
5/16" and 3/8"
152835
Wrench, open end
3/4"
129537
Wrench, open end
Nut driver
Handle
135676
Nut driver
1/4"
89954
5/16"
89955
Nut driver
Nut driver
1/4"
135677
5/16"
135678
Nut driver
1/8",2" blade
95368
Screwdriver
1/4",6" blade
100982
Screwdriver
Screwdriver
(blade less than 5/32")
94647
Allen wrench
0.062
124682
Tweezers
151392
Spring hook (pull)
142554
Spring hook (pull)
75675
Spring hook (push)
75503
Scales, spring (802)
110443
Ruler,6"
95960
Cleaning brush (type face)
151394
Long-nose pliers
108285
Cutting pliers
108286
Retaining ring pliers
160396
Terminal extractor (data set type connector)
341983
Keyswitch extractor
346257
346260
Keytop extractor
Static ground strap
346392
400610
Gauge (Friction Feed Printer)
Gauge (Tractor Feed Printer)
402617
Cable tag (orange)
405242
Cable tag (yellow)
405243
Blank label
405247
Cable tag (white)
405249
Terminal extractor (40-type connector) (MOLEX HT2285) 402840
6.03
Supplies
All purpose grease -- 145867
Oil- KS7470
Thermal compound - 402640
Ribbon - 402444
Paper (friction feed) - standard 8-1/2" wide, 5" dia roll
Paper (tractor feed)
Degreaser (Trichlorotrifiorethlyene) - KS20406 L-1
Page 121
121 Pages
SECTION 582-200-300
Issue 2, January 1979
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
MAXI-CLUSTER AND MINI-CLUSTER STATION ARRANGEMENTS
MAINTENANCE CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL .....................
1
2.
CIRCUIT CARD
SUBSTITUTIONS ................
1
The 410400, 410401, 410406 and all
41043N circuit cards do not have equivalent type circuit card substitutions and, must
therefore be replaced with circuit cards having
the same TP numbers.
2.
MAINTENANCE CONTROLLER
ARRANGEMENTS ...............
3
4.
REFERENCES ..................
82
1.
GENERAL
3.
1.04
1.01
This section provides the craftsperson
with methods and procedures for maintaining C400 controllers using circuit arrangements which are other than those shown in the
controller arrangements of the installation Section
582-200-201.
1.02
This section is reissued to specify that the
410525 circuit card can replace the
410513 card.
Note:
When ordering replaceable components
unless otherwise specfied, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410400).
1.03
Whenever a C400 controller has been
determined by controller self-diagnosis or
other testing to contain a defective circuit card,
that circuit card should be replaced with a circuit
card having the same TP number. If that circuit
card is not available, then this section should
be used to determine an equivalent controller
arrangement (see 3. MAINTENANCE CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS) and circuit cards (if
available) contained in that arrangement should
be used.
Note: Before replacing PROM or EPROM
circuit cards, see 4. CIRCUIT CARD COMPATIBILITY in Section 582-200-501, Issue 3 or later.
CIRCUIT CARD SUBSTITUTIONS
2.01
This paragraph describes which circuit
cards can be substituted for those circuit
cards which are found to be defective but are not
readily available.
2.02
A 410411 circuit card combines the
features of the 410409, 410408 and
410403 circuit cards and may be substituted for
these circuit cards when they are found to be
defective. If a 410411 circuit card is used in a
SCC which features the 410804 PROM circuit
card or MCC which features the 410808 PROM
circuit card, PROMs 450013, 450014, 450015
and 450016 contained on each of these circuit
cards must be Issue 3 or later in order to perform
a proper controller self-diagnostic test.
2.03
The 410409 (or 410408) and 410403
circuit cards may be substituted for the
410411 circuit card in a "PROM version" controller. Substitution of the 410411 circuit card
with 410409 (or 410408) and 410403 circuit
cards in a "EPROM version" controller will
result in an identical self·test trouble and
continue pattern and therefore is not recommended.
2.04
EPROM (4105NN series) circuit cards
may be substituted for PROM (4108NN
and 4109NN series) circuit cards, however, if
present in the defective controller, 410409 (or
410408) and 410403 circuit cards must also be
replaced by the 410411 circuit card because of
the condition described in 2.03.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
©1978 and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 582·200·300
Caution: Since EPROM (4105NN series) circuit
cards offer additional features, they should never
be replaced by PROM (410BNN and 4109NN
series) circuit cards.
2.05
Since EPROM (4105NN series) circuit
cards contain the features of the following
modification kits (which may be part of the PROM
(4108NN and 4109NN) series circuit cards),
no special considerations will be necessary when
replacing PROM circuit cards (containing the
following modification kits) with EPROM circuit
cards.
Modification Controller
Affected
Kits*
408788
408789
408796
408804
408798
408800
MCC
MCC
SCC
MCC
SCC
MCC
Circuit Card(s)
Affected
410909
410409 and 410910
410804 and 410905
410909 and 410910
410804 and 410905
410909 and 410910
2.06
All RAM (41046N series) circuit cards are
directly interchangeable. The 410461 and
410465 circuit cards are 4K RAM while the
410464 circuit card is an 8K RAM. The 8K
RAM (410464) circuit cards should only be used
to replace 2·4K RAM circuit cards, however,
an 8K RAM may be used to replace 1·4K RAM
. when the 4K RAM (410641 or 410465) circuit
cards are not available. If an 8K RAM circuit card
is used to replace a 4K RAM in a controller that
contains 2·4K RAM circuit cards, the second 4K
RAM should be removed. The use of only 1·4K
RAM in a DCC or MCC that employs EPROM
circuit cards will result in an identical trouble and
continue pattern and no video display patterns
during self·test and therefore, 2·4K RAM or
1·8K RAM should always be used in this type of
arrangement.
2.07
*These modification kits only improve system
operation.
Page 2
The following table summarizes the
preceding paragraph 2. CIRCUIT CARD
SUBSTITUTIONS.
ISS 2, SECTION 582·200·300
Con troller( s)
Affected
Circuit Card(s)
to be Replaced
Circuit Card
Replacemen t(s)
see or MCC
410409 (or 410408)
and 110403
410411
sec or MCC
110411
110409 (or 4 I 0408)
and 4 10403
SCC
DCC With
Typewrih'r
Styi<' Opeon
DeC With
Internal Numc!ri('
Comment
If present, 410804 or 410808 must
contain Issue 3 or later of the following PROMS: 450013, -t500J.l.
450015 and 450016_
Replacement applies only if PROM
(4108NN and 4109NN series) cards
are part of controller_ (See Note 3.)
4 IOH01 and 11090"
IIO[;OH
(S",' Note I.)
11 OK09 and 11091 I
·110[;09
(See Notl' 2.)
·11 OK I 0 and ·110907
·110:,10
(S('(' Noh' 2.)
·11 OKOK. 110909
and ·11 O!J I 0
·1 I 0:) I 2 and
110:)I:I(or410525)
(SI'" Notes I and 2.)
110:) 1·1 and
Clustpr () >con
MCC With
Ty(wwritf'r
Sl.vi<· O,eon
MeC With
Int-prnal Num('ric
11 OK 12. ·11 O!J 11
and ·IIO!JI:)
Cluster Opeon
SCC,DCC
or MCC
DCC or MCC
2·1101GI
SCC.DCC
or MCC
DeC or MCC
2 .. 1 10·1 M)
DCC or MCC
·11 (J.1!i1
1II0Hii
1·110·H;:)
11 Of> t;)
11 O·H);) or
·1101(i1
2 ..11016;' or
l·lI04(i I and
I··IIO·H;:) or I ·IIOHi·1
·IHJ.1 GI or
110·1(i·l
2·IIO·IGI or
1·11 01fi:> and
1··11 01G I or I .. 1101!il
2 ·IIO·Hil or
2 .. 110·1(;:) or
1-410461 and 1-4104G:,
(S('(' NolI'S 1 ilnd 2.)
USE' ·11 O·\H·I only II ·11 u·I!>:> IS
110t
availahlp_
lISE·IIO·Hi·1 only 11·IIU·llil
IS
not. availahlp.
If present, the 410409 (or 410408) and 410403 eir"uit cards must hI.' rl.'placed with Ow 410411
circuit card.
Note 1:
If only 1-4K RAM (410461 or 410465) circuit card is in controlll.'r, an additional 4 K RAM must
he added or; remove the 4K RAM and install an 8K RAM (410464) circuit card.
Note 2:
Page 3
SECTION 582-200-300
3.
MAINTENANCE CONTROLLER .
ARRANGEMENTS
3.01
This paragraph includes tables of all the
Maintenance Controller Arrangements
including those which are of the standard type
shown in the installation Section 582-200-201
and those which are of the maintenance type
shown in this document.
3.02
Finding a Maintenance Controller Arrangement equivalent to the arrangement
being worked on can be found by:
(a)
Page 4
Find the type of controller: SCC, DCC or
MCC. (Each type includes its own table.)
(b) IfSCC type, find number ofDDCs handled.
If DCC or MCC type, find number of
devices handled.
Example: A DCC which handles 1-KD and
1-PTR has a defective 410911 circuit card and
no spare is available. By observing the table in
2. CIRCUIT CARD SUBSTITUTIONS it is
noted that a 410509 circuit card (which is
available) can be substituted for the 410911
and 410809 circuit cards. Scanning downward
in the table, we find under "HANDLES" 1-KD
and 1-PTR, an arrangement which does include
a 4105NN circuit card. This arrangement
should then be used. Note also that in this
arrangement, a 4K RAM must be added to the
controller to avoid an identical trouble and
continue pattern.
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
3.03
Station Cluster Controller (SCC) Arrangements - 40C401 *
CARD TITLES
:SCI~iJBCDIC
CIU
1408
40N ~09
403
406
HANDLES
UP TO
4
DCCs
6
DCCs
CIRCUIT CARD POSITIONS
3
40N
40N
411
411
411
40N
40N
411
411
411
4
5
7
6
403 905 461 406
403 905 46N 406
46N 406
905
46N 406
508
465 406
508
403 905 461 406
403 905 46N 406
46N 406 406 905
46N 406 406 508
465 406 406 508
8
-
t
tt
411
9
10 11
12
13
14
804
804
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
t
8
10
12
804
tt
406 804
406 804
804
46N
*
PIT/SID
SSI
t
14
16
18
tt
804
508
905
PROM
EPROM
PROM
465
61
464
ia
----t
RAM
CIU PIT SID ASCII or EBCDIC
410400 and 410401 circuit cards are in position 1 and 2.
All circuit card numbers are preceded by 410.
Standard PROM version - see Installation Section 582-200-201.
Standard EPROM version - see Installation Section 582-200-201.
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-300
Device Cluster Controller (DCC) Arrangements - 40C402* .
3.04
--1
~31-
43N
RAM
HANDLES
UP TO.
l-KD
&
I-PTR
l-KD
&
5-PTRs
·2-KD
&
O-PTR
2-KD
&
4-PTRs
3-KD
&
3·PTRs
4·KD
&
2·PTRs
4
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
431'11
43N
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
5
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
43N
43N
43N
43N
43N
4~!i 43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
-1]11-
EPRO.M
* +
++
~61~411..
465 - 4K
46N.=J.
464-8K
CIRCUIT CARD PO.SITIONS
3
6
90780910509-
-
.7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
461
465
9NN
9NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
5NN
5NN
461(5~
461
40 \0
461
461 5
464
461(5)
461
465
46!i5~
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
40S
406
43N
431'11
43N
431'1
43N
1
PRO.M
32
434435436-
ASCllUp·LO.W
ASCII LINE DRAWING
r-D 1/0.
ASCll MO.NO.CASE
EBCblC UP-Lo'W
EBCDIC MO.NOCASE_
461
461(5)
461
46!iU
464
461(5~
406
406
406
406
406
4Uo
.'106
406
406
406
461
401 5
l"uO
'4u6
406
406
406
~
l.'i.".'l5
461
461 5
464
461(5)
461
461 5
464
461 5
461(5~
464
9NN
9NN
9NN
461(5)
464
9NN
9NN
9NN
461 5
464
406 -- SSI
TYPEWRITER STYLE O.PCO.N
~
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE O.PCO.
. 9NNTYPEWRITER STYLE O.PCO.N
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE O.PCO.
8NN
TYPEWRITER STYLE O.PCO.N
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE O'PCOJ- 5NN
C
410400 and 410401 circuit cards are in position 1 and 2.
All circuit card numbers are preceded by 410.
- Standard PROM version - see Installation Section 582-200·201.
- Standard EPROM version -see Installation Section 582-200·201.
Page 6
46!i5~
464
9NN
9NN
9NN
461(5)
464
9NN
9NN
46!iU
464
9NN
9NN
9NN
REFERENCE
PAGE NO..
+
20
22
++
+
24
26
28
++
+
30
32
++
+
34 & 36
38 & 40
~
++
+
"0
48
00
++
+
~
54
56
++
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
3.05
Mini-Cluster Controller (MCC) Arrangements - 40C403*
40N --n08 - ASCIQ- CIU
409-EBCDIC
{ 432
" -43N
434 435 436 -
I
_A_-..
r
HANDLES
UP TO
4
3
40N
40N
411
40N
40N
40N
411
411
4 1
411
40N
40N
40N
411
411
411
411
I·KD
&
I-PTR
l-KD
&
2-PTR
2-KD
&
I-PTR
5
43N 406
43N 406
43N 406
43N 406
43N 406
43N 406
43N 406
4;jN 406
14 ;jN
406
43N 406
43N 43N
43N 43N
43N ·43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
43N 43N
I
403 - PIT/SID
I
I
6
ABCn
ASCII -- UP-LOW
INTERNAL DRAWING
ASCII - MONOCASE .
f-- D I/O
EBCDIC - Up·LOW
EBCDIC - MONOCASE
l
46N -{161465 - 4
4K
464-8K
.J..
7
CIRCUIT CARD POSITIONS
9
10
8
403
403
1I(;1{")
403
403
403
11
461
465
251Al **
461
461
461(5) 461(5)
464
461(5) 461(5)
464
4(;1 5
403
403
403
461(5)
464
461(5)
464
406
406
406
406
406
406
406
461
461
46115) 461(5)
464
46HIi)
RAM
12
13
14
91N
91N
91N
91N
91N
91N
91N
91N
461(5
464
91N
91N
91N
91N
91N
461(5)
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
8NN
9NN
51N
51N
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
9NN
51N
51N
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
5iN
51N
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
8NN
51N
51N
REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
+
58
60
+
62
64
66
US-
W
++
+
72
74
76
78
80
++
I
L406-SS1
411- CIU/PIT/SID (ASCII OR EBCDIC)
{ " - TYPEWRITER STYLE O>'CON
PROM
EPROM
PROM
J-"N-
J-J-J--
915 - INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
909 - TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
914 - INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
-f'
OR 525 - TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
515 - INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
512 - TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
514 - INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
NN
9
51N
51N
~12
808 - TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
8NN
- INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCoJ-
* - 410400 and 410401 circuit cards are in position 1 and 2.
+ ++ -
All circuit card numbers are preceeded by 410.
Standard PROM version - see Installation Section 582-200-201.
Standard EPROM version - see Installation Section 582-200-201.
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-300
SCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII [l EBCDIC D
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
~"'H>H r;l Q Iil !;l rJ r;l Q
------\\ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~l ~
CAR"
I. ..
'':,
1
I'ATTEHN
LIGHTB-+-+~
I,.--L--,
I
0
•• 0
0
00.
O. 0
0
I--0
I
('ONTINUE
SWITCH
~
TEST
Rllt\
•
I
2
3
4
r2-!
.0 .0
.0 .0
00 00
••
-.
O•
2!
~~
~~
410461,410465, Of 410464 may
bp used in position 6, however, a 410464
should be used if 410461 or 410465
are not available .
Note:
OPTIONS
402
a 0
I
""""
20
2
•
•
0
3
4
5
6
7
8 .
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
OPTION - STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
- 410408
EBCDIC - 410409
See adjacent page for Connec tions
and Terminal IDs.
:°3 0
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
C11 A17 A15 A13 B13 B15 B17 C17 C15
0
0
••
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 a
00
00
r-Tl1
0
b
PIT/SID TP410403
I
0
SWITCH
POSITlONS
3. "'" -
EBCDIC
SWITCH
:-.lUMBER
Page 8
~!
~~
~~
.2.Q
ASCII
"CONTINIJE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
ASCII
EBCDIC
*ASCII
SPA3
1.
~. ~~ ~rQ
--=
•
401
•
TROUBLE
.-PATTERNS
f-r-= f-::-F-
-12~
'12 •
+5
•
•
•o •o ••
•o •o •o
10 '10
"2.
3". r?-Q
SPA3 rsFl SPCi3
r-;-'j
SWITCH
LAMP
00000
n
U ~~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
o.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~
SPC17 -1
b
0
•
CONTINUOUS ALARM
1 SECOND ALARM
0
'YGI
INTENSIFIED ONLY
B ~;~~~s~~I~1
406
a 0
TP410403
.0
o.
& BLINK
BPCI7 - 4
•
•
•
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN NUMERIC FIELD
0
SPCI7 - 5
4U4.
a
b
-6-6
0 TERMINATE W/ETX
0 TERMINATE W SUB ENQ_
0
408
SPCI7-6
a 0 ASCII
b o EBCDIC
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
a o ENABLED
b
DISABLED
0
SPC17-8
•
o
0
PER STATION WORKSHEET,
HIGHEST Dec CONNECTED TO sec IS
A
SPA13-1
SPA13-2
SPA13-3
SPA13-4
B
C
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
••
••
0
0
0
0
0
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
CARD
!'OSITION
7
7
7
7
3
STATION
I/O
SOCKET
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
ADDRESS.
51
DCC-A
Sp A B C
52
DCC-B
DCC-C
F
c;;
G
53
54
DCC-D
K
L
OS
DATA SET
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics ~
are the same, except for
I
ASCII
[
I
o
I
[
+ .
a.
o
H
M
N
E
•J
P
1 EBCDIC j
1 ,*(-')**1
I ( I )
I
I
TO
DCC-A
TO
DCC-B
TO
DCC-C
TO
DCC-D
TO
DATASET
* *Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 9
SECTION 582-200-300
SCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII
EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
rillril 0
I. .0...
1'.\'1''1'1-:1{;-'; 1.1I;!ITS(IH S\\ITCII j'(lSIT1()\S
("\lill!'lhll'll)'\
I
('.\"I>~'·"HEH
1
ril
!
~~ ~
r;l
r;l~ ril~
1.0
.0.
o.
••
o.
: 0
1--0
0.0..
00. 0
0
------\\~ ~,
I'.\TTEI{\
I.II:Jrrs+--r-.-<:
CON'fIN('E
SWITC'II
TEST
1.
fJ'O
f-~
'12~
+12 •
r2-! ~t!
r2-! r2-t!
~~
~~
r-2-~
•
••
0
.---
~~ ~t!
r--i
r2-~ ~~
r2-t!
r2-i!
~~
. ,e
II
I
,:<
I "
0 0 0 0 00
~~
'SPl SPCi3
SWITCH
+5
'"
TROUBLE
-PATTERNS
..
SWITCH
POSITIONS
...:.~ ..i.~
~Q
I
.
CIU IPIT ISID
S\\I1('1I
"(,ONTINllE"
UGHT PATTERNS
#
~I ;"lHhH A21 B12 Bl
o
o
o
•• •••
••
••
•
2
3
•
0
0
·1
5
0
0
0
0
6
7
8
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
OPTION
401
STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SELE CT ADDRESS
Caution: PROM's
450013,
450014,
450015 and 450016 on 410804 must
be j8$ue 3 or later.
See adjacent page for Connections
and rerminal IDs.
0
0
0
0
B4 B5 B6 B7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
b 0
:°3 0
a
~
CONTINUOUS ALARM
1 SECOND ALARM
0
•
PEl{ STATION WORKSHEET.
HIGIIEST Dec CONNECTED TO sec IS
SPB3-1
SPB3-2
I
& BLINK
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN NUMERIC FIELD
SPB3·3
SPB3-4
L.!::::::::=-
OPTIONS 410411
404
SPB7-!
a 0
•
-
6
SPB7INTENSIFIED ONLY
B ~;~~~s~~k1
406
a 0
B8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~t
402
h
Page 10
B2 B3
0
1
Note: 410461,410465 or 410464 may
be used in position 4, however, 410464
should only be used if 410461 or 410465
are not available.
TP41041I
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
0
~
~~
SPB7-4
•
0
b
0
0
0
('
II
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
SPB7-5
ASCII
b 0 EBCDIC
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
b
H
0
~~~~:~m ~/~0~ ENO
408
a 0
a
"
ENABLED
DISABLEn
0
•
•0
SPB7-6
SPB7-8
•
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
STATION
WORK SHEET
5
5
5
5
51
52
53
54
DCC-A
DCC-B
DCC-C
DCC-D
3
D:o
Sp A
F G
B C
H I
D
+ !
K
M N
a
o P
....
L
[
E
•J
DATA SET
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
TO
DCC-A
DEVICE
ADDRESS'
TO
OCC-B
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 11
SECTION 582·200·300
sec -- Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII
EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 4·DCCs
\TTEH~
I'
I
L1C:IITS OR
(.\HIlI'IlSlTI'"
I
I
I
10
I.IC;IIT"-+-~<
('ONTI~t'E
0
HI'J\'
o
L,nlP
12~
2., 2-'
2
3
4
I
0
I
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
STATION l>OLL ADDRESS
STATION SELE CT ADDRESS
•• •••
••
••
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B2
B3
B4 B5
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
00
00
m
I
II
OPTIONS -4 10411
B6 B7
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
00
""
"b
•
B8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPB7-!
o
o
CONTINUOUs ALAR M
1 SECOND ALARM
:U"O INTENSIFIED ONLY
~ B ~;i~~sO~lE1 BLI NK
&
•
o
SPB7·2 ·3
00
.0
0
406
"b
:U4
b
408
a
0
0
0
0
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN NUM ERIC FIELD
TERMINATE W/ETX
TERMINATE W SUB EN'.
SPB3·2
o
•o
SPB3·4
B
('
])
0
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
0
0
0
0
••
0
•
SPB7·6
SPB7·8
PER :iTATION WORKSHEET,
A
0
o
•
0
HIGHEsT DeC CONNECTED TO sec IS
SPB3·1
•
SPB7-5
ASCll
b o EBCDIC
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
a o ENABLED
b o DlSABLEO
SPB3·3
Page 12
• • "ON"
13
410461,410465 or 410464 may be
used in position 4, however, 410464 should
only be used when 410461 or 410465 are
not available.
Set' adjacent page for Connections
and tenninal IDs.
I
Note:
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
:-.II '!\.IB~ H A21812 Bl
••
"Oft'"
402
S\\ITCII
0
<
12
TROUBLE
PATTERNS
TP410411
CIU/PIT/SID
5
OPTION
401
~~
2-2
60
70
-=
II
SWITCH
POSITIONS
~F- -
~~ ~.Q
#
1
"2,.
r-:-Ij
3..2 3...!
-
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
SPAl
~
10
-.;::; -.!...!
"~
•
1.
SPl
SWITCH
8
+12 •
+S
o~,--TEST
-
••
•.----.
••o oo •o
o •
o
o •
P.HTEH:\
S\\ITCII
o
SWITCIII'OSITI()~S
I
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up To 4-DCCs
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
STATION
WORK SHEET
5
DEVICE
ADDRESS'
5
5
5
51
52
DCC-A
DCC-B
53
54
DCC-C
...
F G H I
+
... J
DCC-D
K
o
3
os
DATA SET
Sp A
L
B
C
M N
0
[
E
•
P
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
TO
DCC-A
TO
DCCS
TO
DCCC
TO
DCCD
TO
DATASET
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 13
SECTION 582-200-300
sec -
Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCIIO EBCDICD
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 6-DCCs
o
"OH"
•
"1)\"
I
II
I"
II
{'()~TI;-"'I'E
S\\ 1'1'('11
SPc13 SPc13
n:sl
III '\
1..\\11'
'SPA:)
- = r--= r=
.2..!
~!
2-1 r-2-!
r2-~ t2i! __
2--'
~! r2c!
~~ ~~ ~~
S\\-IT('II
50 C,O
~'*O f--~O
~r- ~~
7
~'"'-=-
"(,()~Tlr-;('E"
#
1
2
3
4
LI(;IfT PATTImNS
ASCII
EBCDiC
•• ••
0
•
0
0
EBCDIC
--'II I
I'.
SPBD SPill') SPD2011
'01.'0
2.2.2020
J •
3 •
3 •
3 I.
40 4 • 4 . 4 0
505.5050
8.
~:
7
Note
410461,410465 or 410464 may he
USf'd in position 4, howE'Vf'r, 410464 should
0
only bt, uS('d when 410461 or 410465 an>
nut availahh'.
I.--L.:::::::
ASCII
'---c-r-U-T-p-41-0-=40=N=*
SPAS
0
~g60
()PTI()NS
I
I'J'ISII)TPI1010,l
SVo,I
\\
SWITCH PACK LO(,A nON
J("
;"IH~H Cl1~17A15A13B13B15B17C17C15
1
a
:1.
"0
'.
5
X
"X
X
X
7
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
a
aaa a
000 a
000 a
000 a
000 a
0000.0
0000 a
r--- 11
OPTION - STATION POLL ADDRESS ---=====~~
401
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
000
~
B ~~~~~.1i~i;;1
406
a 0
and tenninal IDs.
Page 14
00
.0
& BLINK
SP('1 7· ·1
0
:04 0
n;RMINATE WIJo:TX
b 0 TERMINATE WiS BENt.
b
0
" ..
ALPIIA IN NUMJo:H.IC FU:LJ)
ALPHA NOT IN NUMERIC }o~IJo;LJ)
s
ASCII
0 F.BCDIC
407 (Nurn Lock S.F.I
0
·5
SP('j
, ·6
SP('I
·8
0
ENABum
0 DlSABLEI)
-
PER STATION WORK SHEET
HIGHEST DCC CONNECTED TO sec IS
ABCDEF
SPA13-1
SPA13·2
SPAI3·4
SPAI3·6
••
0
0
0 0
)IC
0 IC
)IC
0
•
0
b
a
b
•
•
,I
.
408
a 0
SPAI3·5
See adjacent page for COnn('l'tions
•
CONTINUOl;S ,\LARt'1
0 1 SJo:COND ALAHM
:"'0 INTENSIJo'IEf} ONLY
b
SPAI3·3
-- 410408
EBCDIC - 410409
TP410403
spe} 7· I
402
a 0
H
*ASCII
SWITCH
POSITIONS
0 )0 0
0 0 0 0
I. 0 0 0
0 lQ
0
IC ). 10
IC 0 I.
•
•0
I
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up To 6-DCCs
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
3
OS
7
7
7
7
51
52
53
54
55
56
8
8
STATION
WORK SHEET
DATA SET
5p A
DCC-C
<
DCC-D
"'LMNOP
Q R I $
)
; 1\ / 5 T
DCC-E
DCC-F
are the same, except for
DCC-A
TO
OCC-B
.- G
B C
HI
o
DCC-A
DCC-B
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
TO
DEVICE
ADDRESS·
E
l
+ ! .. J
(
•
ASCII
A-
t=l!
EBCDIC
I
(
!
4)
**
(I)
'*I (,)
(! )
TO
DCC-F
TO
DCC·E
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 15
SECTION 582-200-300
SCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 6-DCCs
0000
r;l Ml~ r;l Q r;l Woo
------'\\~ ~, ! ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~
L\IW\l'\lHEH
.0.
0.0. •
I 0
:.
I 0
I__Q
1' .. \TT~:It:\
"I<"l'rs;--+---<
CONTINI'fo:
SWITC'!I
0
•
. 0• • •
HI'!,;
•
0
•
0
•
•
•
.'
1.
I.
1.
2.
3. 3. 3. 3.. ••
'.
00. 0
TEST
SWITCII
LA!\.fP
0
0
0
•
SPI
0
SPCI3
SPCI3
20
SPA3
.,
SP A3
" ' " TROUBLE
PATTERNS
10
10
2.
20
40
40
sO sO
0
50
0
70
2 •
3 •
SWITCH
_ _ POSITIONS
'
Note: 410461,410465 or 410464 may be
used in position 4, however, 410464 should
only be used when 410461 or 41046'5 are
not available,
OPTIONS 410411
"CONTINI IE"
LImn PA'ITERNS
402
a 0
b
There are no
continue
patterns
SWITCII
:\"['\IBEH
1
2
3
PROMs 450013.4500 14,
450015 and 450016 on 410804 m ust
be issue 3 or later.
Caution:
,
5
6 _
7
8
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
OPTION
401
STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SF.LE'CT ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
A2 BI2 BI B2 B3 B4
•• •••
••
••
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B5 B5 B7 B8
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 00
0 0 0
0 00
0 00 0
0 0 00
~I
•
0 1 SECOND ALARM
:U'0 INTENSIFIW ONLY
~ B~~~~S~~iE1 BLINK
405
TP410411
CIU/PIT/SID
SPB7-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.:U4
b
b
"'
~~
SPB7-4
•
•
•
0
SPB7-6
0
TERMINAU: W/ETX
TERMINATE W SUB ENO,
SPB7-5
.B
~
~~ggIC
0
SPB7-8
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
o
o
•0
ENABLED
DISABLED
PER STATION WORK SHEET
HIGHEST DCC CONNECTED TO SCC IS
A B C D E' F
SPB3-1
SPB3-2
SPB3-4
SPB3-5 _
SPB3-6
Page 16
00
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN NUMERIC FU:LIl
SPB3-3
SeE' adjacf.>nt pagf' for Connf>Ctio
and tenninal IDs.
0
SPB7-2 3
&
0
0
0
0
408
b
•
CONTINLlOUS ALARM
)0 0
.0
0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0
)
0 .IC 10
elC
0
IC 0 I .
IC
••
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up to 6-DCCs
CARD
POSITION
3
5
5
5
5
WORK SHEET
OS
DATA SET
51
DCC-A
SZ
DCC-B
DCC-C
6
53
54
55
6
56
DEVICE
ADDRESS·
..
lOp A
(
K L
DCC-E
DCC-F
Q
R
f\
OCC-B
;
COX
I
[
+ ! .. J
<
TO
•
H
G
DCC-D
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
TO
DCC-A
STATION
I/O
SOCKET
M N
t $
-
ASCII
A-
~
!
/
0
P
•
S
JT
EBCDIC
.., (¢ ) **
! (I)
'*I (..,)
(I )
TO
DCC-F
TO
DCC-E
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 17
SECTION 582-200-300
SCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCIIO EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TT
HANDLES: Up To 6-DCCs
1'.\TTEn~ I.](~IITS
("SI"<>' \
.\
••o oo •o •o ••
o •
o •
o •
o •
I',YITI';I{:-\
I.J(;IITS+-+---<
{,O:"TI!,;!'!':
HWIT('II
•
o ;--TEST
~
SWI'I'('I!
HI'!,
1.,\:\11'
-0
,,,
\
"OFF"
I~
II
\
1:<
•
"()!\"
\
II
\
__________ TROUBLE
PATTERNS
o
o
~
410461,410465 or 410464 may be
used in position 4, however, 410464 should
only he used when 410461 or 410465 are
not available.
Note:
-
-1
OPTIONS 410411 _ _ _ _ _
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERN
402
a 0
I
CIU/PIT/SID
s\\II< II
There are no
continue
patterns
I
.,
:1
I
:J
C;
7
H
9
CONTINUOUs AI.An""
h O I SECOND ALARM
TP410411
SWIT(,IlI',,{'K L()(',\TJ(}j\;
\1 \JBI- H A21 B12 Bl
•• •••
••
••
•
82
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
83
84
85 B6
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
00 0
00 0
SPB7-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
87
o.
0
88
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INTENHIFIEI> ONLY
h
·106
a 0
AI.PIIA IN :"JI!MERJ(' FIELD
B H~:I.~~~:~i;:1 .
h
I;OR 0
TERMINATE W/}o:TX
401
HT ATION POLL ,\UURESS
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
0 ASCII
0 EH{'UlC
0 I)ISABLEIJ
~
I
HIGfi:sl!r
~tcTb~%~~c';.~~~~~CC IS
ABCDEF
SPB3-1
See adjact"nt page for Connections
and tenninal IDs,
SPB3-2
SPB3-3
SPB3-4
SPB3-5
SPB3-6
Page 18
~
0
----S"'P!;!B"'7_~4----l
•
0
TERMINATE II' SUIl E"<;"--------,S;:-;p"'B='7_:~
107 (Nurn Lock S.F.1
a [) ENABLED
h
SPB7"l>-5
0 ALi'IIANOTINNllM}O:HI{L·£;FI",E-",I.I~'_S"'P;;;B"70~5____l
:u~o
a
h
HI, NK
GRAPHIC DES)(iNATIONS - - - - - - - - - 1
OPTIO~
•
0
;u; 0
••
0 0
0 0
0 0 0 0
0
0 0 0
0 0
0 I. 0
0
0 .Ie
0 )
IC 0 0 0 0 I.
•
•
0
SPB7-8
•
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
SCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: Up to 6-DCCs
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
STATION
WORK SHEET
3
05
DATA SET
5
5
5
5
6
6
51
S2
53
DCC-A
DCC-a
DCC-C
DCC-D
DCC-E
DCC-F
54
55
56
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
TO
DCC-A
TO
DCC-B
DEVICE
ADDRES5 •
"PAaCDE
F G H I
I
( + ! • J
KLMNOP
<
R
; 1\
Q
J
$ •
)
-
/
T
ASCII
A
H
S
EBCDIC
, (4) **
! (I)
!
'* (,)
I
(I )
TO
DCC-F
TO
DCC-E
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code_
Page 19
SECTION 582·200·300
DCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A 0 B 0 C
DOE 0 FD
USOC: 4TV + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1 KD & 1 PTR (Not Print Local)
••oo •o
•
•
TEST
SWITCII
SPCI3
10
I •
•
4. •
2 •
'12~
+12 •
+5
SPC4
TROUBLE
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PATTERNS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SPA2
SWITCH
_ _ _ _ _ _ POSITIONS _ _ _ _ _ _
SPA3
20
4.
4.
40
50
60
7 0
When internal numeric cluster opeon
' "
is'used (option 410b.), these substitutions ~
apply.
"COSTINI'F.·'
~~
a::
~
~ ~
"'"
"'"
LIGIIT PATTERNS
#
10.CO.
PRINTER OPTIONS
~OO.O.
' • • • 00
1000 • •
PRINTER 110 SOCKET
Friction eed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17.
~pecify Ri~h~ MargIn
Sooci!" Left Man!'fn
1~.a.
!"o ape' """"yut
18.b. Paper FO on "RM" Loss
IS.c. PaPer FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
l~.d.
96 Character Set
19.e. 64 Character Set
19.f. Ext. ASCII Set
20.a. ~ingle LF
20.b. Double LF
~l.a.
*41043N - Any D I/O circuit card
See adjacent page for connections
and device addresses.
Page 20
21.b.
22.a.
22.b.
t~::~ ~!Utrin:s ~as:;:~~tcase
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as UDner Case
a~.a.
arms on
39.b.
Forms off
.~.a.
p:::~ g~i ~~~~~~~ {J!'J!'
48.b.
SPA3
10 10
3 •
•
•o ••
•• C ••
1.
• 4.•• ••
0Q
S7
=
--
=
-
.-I
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 1-KD & 1-PTR (Not Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
4
4&3
4
S5
S6 & A
S7
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
PRINTER N LOCL
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
DCC
DEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
AIBlclDIEIF
F
K Q
L R LA
A G (
lip
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics I
are the same, except for
I
<
ASCII I EBCD~~
A
I ---. (¢)**
**Character in parentheses is displayed as the device
address in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 21
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD B 0 COD 0 E 0 FD
USOC: 4TV+ (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1 KD & Up To 1 PTR ( 1 Print Local) (See Note.)
(Note 2)
••o
o
o •
•
•
1'.\rJEH~
1.1"'ITH-+-+~
('O!\'TI1\;('r;
S,\\TI'C'II
TEST
SWITCH
S
SPC4
SPCI3
0
I.
4.••
12
.+12.
+, •
2•
SWITCH
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ POSITIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
3.
0
70
When internal numeric cluster
opcon is used (Option 410b.),
this substitution applies and
switches on 41046Ns must be
positioned as shown.
Ll(iIlT I'ATIERSS
q
1
-
..
1
0.00
00.0
••• 0
000.
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
Same trouble pattern for both
41046Ns - if pattern occurs, replace
41046Ns one at a time until pattern
no longer appears,
I9.e,
19.1.
2 .a.
...
20.b .
21.b.
22.a.
22.b.
.8.
a9.b.
.8.
48.h.
Page 22
SPI
I.4. I.4.
BPI
SP!
20 2 .
30 30
OR
Note 2:
Se£' adjacent pagE' for Conn€'ctions
and device addresses.
BPI
onnson
Fanus off
aper t ot ate
Pa r Out Gated W/FF
SPA!
10 10 1.
2. 20
0
PRINTER OPTIONS
Note 1: Positions 12 and 13 may contain
2-4104658 or 2-4104618 or 1-410465 and
1·410461.
*41043N - Any D 110 circuit card
00
O
4.
60
"(,()!'\Tr1'Ii('F:"
••
•• •• ••
• 4.••
0
TROUBLE
_ _ _ _ PATTERNS _ _ _ _ _
S7 S8
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 1 KD & Up To 1 PTR (1 Print Local) (See Note.)
CARD
POSITION
"
".3
"
4
I/O
SOCKET
S5
51. A
57
58
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER IN LOC)
PRINTER (LOC)
DCC
DEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
A
B
Ilip F
A
G
H
B
ASCII
A
]
MONITOR
C
<
(
D
K
L
+
M
E
F
Q
R
]
A
-
EBCDIC
--, (¢J**
!
(i)
1----------------1
Note:
KYBD
If the customer requires that printer not
be "print local" place printer in Socket 7.
**Character in parentheses is displayed as the device
address in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 23
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A Q B 0 COD 0 ED FD
USOC: 4TV+ (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1 KD & Up To 5 PTRs (1 Print Local)
l' \ rn:B\ L((;IITS of{
C.\HI1I'OSITI():'\i
PATTERN
I.J""TS+-+<,-<
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
1
10
••o •• ooo
o •
o •
10
.+12.
'2~
•
11
12
'. '.•
BPeI3
2.
2 •
3.
3.
4.
40
0
SPCI3
SPI
SWITCH
_ _ _ _ _ POSITIONS _ _ _ _ _ _
20
50
0
60
70
7 0
80
80
13
o
o
SPI
10
0
2.
0
4. •
30
40
0
I
•o
• •• ••
TROUBLE
•
...-----PATIERNS __________•
SPC4
LAMP
+5
o'''on'' e: "ON"
S\\,IT(,IlI'()SITI()~S
I
4.
._.'.-
SPA3
10
3.
4.
"('0\''1'1\''"':''
Lf(;IIT I'Arn:H:-.;'s
I
3
4
O • .J
OC.
•••
OO\~
PRINTER OPTIONS
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
Note: Positions 11 and 12 may contain
2 - 4104655 or 2 - 4104615 or 1 ·410465
and 1 - 410461.
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
Specify Right Margin
17.
Specify Left Marcin
~~:~: ~~pe:~~ o~e~R~~' Loss
IS.c.
19.d.
19.e.
19.f.
20.a.
20.h.
~~.a.
*41043N - any 0 I/O circuit card
Spp adjacl'nt page for Connf'etion5
and device addreSSf'5.
21.b.
22.a.
22.h.
~:.a
39.h.
;~.a.
48.b.
Page 24
PapeJ Io'O on "RM" Loss and ETX
~~ Character Set
64 Charactt>r Set
Ext. ASCII Set
Single LF
Double LF
Lower R?u Upper Lase Print
Lower Case Print!i. .as U
r Ca~
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
ormson
Forms off
aper \Jut at ua~~~ I
Paper Out Gated W/FF
14
••
••
••
'.
SPA3
4 •
~~
Wht>n internal numeric
is used (Option 410b.), these substitu- ------.. ~
bons apply.
#
2
I
S7 S8 SI 82 83
~
I
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 5-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
•
.a,
••
5
5
S
I/O
SOCKET
SI
SI
A
S7
58
51
52
53
a
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (5CC)
KEVBOARD DISPLA V
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER LOC
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW'
DEVICE ROW.
DEVICE ROW S
DEVICE ROW 15
Note: If the customer requires that no printer
be "print local", place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD
opcon.
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
~P
A
B
C
D
E
B
P'
G
H
I
.
C
<
+
I
D
E
K
L
Q
R
•
F
A
M
N
&-
o
J
P
I
.'Ii
lit 5
)
T
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
ASCII
EBCDIC
[
!)
! ( I)
I (
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
WCAL
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
WCAL
PRINTER,
PRINT
WCAL
(See Note.)
MONrN)R~-----------------------------I
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed
as the device addresses in local test when
using EBCDIC line code.
Page 25
SECTION 582·200·300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: ABO COD 0 E 0 F 0
USOC: 4TV + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1 KD & Up To 5 PTRs (1 Print Local)
o '( I~ ~
,I
1"
/"/1'
i
I{ \
r.1(,ln:-.-+-+~
('()'\:'IT\I'~
~\\
1'1 ell
TEST
HI',\:
.
SWI'ICH
1.:,,1/'
I.• 2.
SPC'
SPC13
'0
• •
• o0
.,'I.'~
~ ~
SWITCH
_______
POSITIO~S
__________
3 •
'0 10
·c, •
fl
o
o
flO
o
kO , 0
SPA3
2.
o
Wh,"'n JnLf-·mal numf'rJ( duswr
()I'('on If> u&pd (Optlf)f' --110h./
th(,'>f- suhstnutlonf> appl:--
PXM~.H~'"
PHJ\TEH
,
UVII():,\~
Si S8 51 52 S3
PR];';l IH I '() SOCKE"r
J
FndlUn FPN/
Tractor Ft'l.'d ISU {'fit
Tral:wr Fet'd 132 ('01
SrHo't'lfy Right '1argm
S w(,lrv Left ;"Iarl!;n
. 0
19 d
19.f'
19.f.
20.a
20.11
21a
96 rharaeu'r 5pl
64 Charaewr S(·t
Ext. ASCII Spt
Smg]", LF
Double LF
21.b.
"'.tl04.'3~
- Any D I'Odrc'UI! card
s ..,- adJal:f"nt pagt' for
and t!pvj('f' addresSf'S.
l'Onnt'I'tJCm",
22.a
22.11
39.a
39.h.
' •. a
-IK.h
Page 26
arl:'r-F~p(r
18.a
lS.h
18.('
lit
Pap(;'r FO '>n "!{.1\1" IhSS
Pa;)f'r FO on .. }t!\1 . Los:. and J::TX
t~:.:~ r!l~l;;~:s ~:r ~~e~\'
£R
Low..r Cast' PnnU a& Error
Lower Case Pnntl> as l'poer Case
Furm~ on
Forms off
art'r ut :\01 ~at.f'd W Fl
Papt'r Out (;att-J \\ F '"
SPA3
10 10
,- '~''''(,(''''''~'''T''''~''''''''''~'. -...,
Llctions
and device addresses.
I.
4 •
0.0
OC.
SPAI
• ., •
••
BPI
positioned as shown.
.".
SPI
10 10
0
"0 'I.
4.
When internal numeric cluster
opeon is used (Option 410b.),
this substitution applies and
switches on 41046Ns must be
'-.
SPI
••
••
S7 SS 81 S2 S3
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 5-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
P051TION
•
••
•• 3
5
5
5
STATION
WORK SHEET
I/O
SOCKET
55
51. A
57
58
51
52
53
DEVICE
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
STATION C/C (sec)
KEYBOARDjDI5PLAY
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER LOCJ
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
PRINTER N LOC
Note: If the customer requires that no printer
be "print local", place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD
opcon.
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW.
DEVICE ROW 5
DEVICE ROW I
B
:Sp F
A G
B H
C 1
D
E
A
c:
.
C
D
E
<
+
K
Q
L
M
R
I
/SJ
N 5
F
,"
I
O~S
)
P
T
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
ASCII
I:
EBCDIC
.. (.)**
I ( I )
!(I
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
,
)
(4)
LOCAL
**Characters in parentheses are displayed
as the device addresses in local test when
using EBCDIC line code.
Page 29
SECTION 582-200-300
pec -- Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: ABO COD 0 E 0 FD
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & O-PTR
tJII
('()~'JT'\I'E
S\\ ITCII
TERT
SWITCH
HI '\
L\'"'
'12~
.. .
.
o
o
o
+12 •
+5
•
••o oo
o
o •
o •
2. ,,02. 3.
4. 4.
•
•
1',\ I'II'.H\
1.J(;!lTS+-~-<
o
o
SPC4
SPC4
10 10
TROUBLE
....-----PATTERNS
"('()!'\TINt'}o:"
#
1
2
.C J.).
;]
4
PAn'ER~S
O.
JO
••
OC • •
*41043N - Any D I/O circuit card
Se!' adjacent
pa~w
for connections
and dpvi('f' addrf'SSf's.
Page 30
I
'I)H
•
'f).'\
•o ••
•• •• ••
1.
2.
3. 2.
SPA2
SPC13
SWITCH
1 : . . . . - - - - - POSlTlONS _____________
:1.
0
5 0
"0
70
o
0
~0
.
".
SPA3
SPA3
4. I. 4.
10 10
20
;]
4
~o ~~
Whpll intf'mal num.eric cluster
__
IS uS,f'd (.oPtIOn 410b.), ~ ~
~
thesp suhstItutlOns apply.
~
~
opcon
L1(;IIT
II
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KD & O-PTR
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
I
•••
I ••
51
52. A
53. B
5TATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD DI5PLA Y I
KEYBOARD DISPLAY Z
DCCAIBlclDIEIF
DEVICE ROW I 15p F
K Q
DEVICE ROW Z
A G ( L R A
<
**Character in parentheses is displayed as the device
address in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 31
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A 0 B [1 C
D [' E f' F 0
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KD
[
I \1: II 1'(
~Slll(
.0
I
1\
]1:
'(lFJ.'·
II
1<
•
I
'1)\"
II
--~~'~'"::::, ~ ~ 00 00 ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 @"'~ ~
"
I. .0..
/
'I
1',\lTEI{\
LJ ( ; IlTS
-t-+.-.(
0
0
LQ
SWITCH
TEST
Hl'l\'
SWITCH
J.A~ll'
o
o
~
.,.
.,.
o
o
~
.. ('n\·TI~( 'I-:"
•
TROUBLE
• ______ PATTERNS-----
0
0
0
SPC4
.•
SPC4
2.
SPCl3
•••
LICHT PAT'I EIP';S
2
:l
4
.C)
o.
)
)
••
OC.
Note 1
Positions 12 and 13 may contain
2 - 4104658 or 2 - 4104618 or 1 - 410465
and 1·- 410461.
Note 2
SamE' troublp pat1Rm for both
41046Ns - If pattern occurs, TPpiac('
41046Ns one at a timf> until pattrml no
longer appears.
*41043N - Any D I/O circuit card
SP{' adja(·(·nt pagf' for ('onnections
and dt'viep addresses.
Page 32
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
.•
• •~
I.
'.
SPI
SPl
SPAt
:1.2.
10 I 0 1.
10 10 1 •• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ POSITIONS
SWITCH
_________
2. 20
2.
:l 0
:1.
0
4
40
' 4
'
50
<\ 0
SPI
SP!
0
1
Wh{'n internal numeric clustRr opcon is
1
used (Option 410b.), this substitution
20 2.
applies and switchf's on 41046Ns must
bE' positioned as shown.
:l 0
.10
#
1
---...
0
0
I
('()~Tl:-;('E
(Note 2)
•
•
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KD
I/O
CARD
POSITION
SOCKET
•
•••
51
5Z. A
5S.8
•••
DEVICE
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE ADDRESS
*
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEY80ARD/DISPLA Y I
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y Z
DCCA1BlclDIETF
DEVICE ROW 1 15 p F
K Q
(
A
DEVICE ROW Z
A
G
L
R
<
**Character in parentheses is displayed as the dpvice
address In local tpst when using EBCDIC linp code.
Page 33
SECTION 582·200·300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: ABO COD 0 E 0 FD
USOC: 4TV + 2·(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2·KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)
••o •o ••
o •
o •
o
IJ•.\'I'TEltr-."
J.l(aITS+-+~
(,ONTINI'~;
SWIT(,H
TEST
SWITCH
RUN
LAMP
SPC4
10
10
••
'12~
+12.
+5
SPC4
•
4.
20
3 •
4.
o
oo ..oo----
I.•• I.
SPCI3
~
•
TROUBLE
PATIERNS
zO
·-~-::i!o%S
0
0
70
o
o
•
SPI
BPCI3
o
40
•o ••
•• •• ••
2.o 3. • 1.•
4. 4. 4. 4.•
•
•
-----1... 0
o
BPI
SPA3
10
10
20
30
3 •
60
70
.
~~
i$
0
Note 2:
..
1
2
3
4
00
o.
••
Printer associated with
I/O socket 84 will be print local for
KD in I/O socket 82 & A. Printer
in 1/0 socket 87 is print local to
KD in 110 socket 86 & B. If no
printer is in 110 socket 87. the
printer in [/0 socket 84 will be
print local to both KDs. See Note 3.
PRINTER OPTIONS
00
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
T:~~ ;:;'80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
u.
~~.&.~~:~':r-:.:n
1~:~: p:per:~ ~~Rv;;. Loss
IS.c.
! ~.a.
19.e.
19.f.
~~.a.
20.h.
p~ FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
~ Charscter Set
64 Character Set
Ext. ASCII Set
Single LF
Double LF
'-ill: _=~uJ:'~~case
*41043N - ANY D 110 CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
Page 34
01
0
When internal numeric cluster _ _ ,.: - - ,.:
opeon is used (Option 410b.),
these substitutions apply.
Note 1: Positions 11 and 12 may
contain 2 - 4104658 or 2 - 4104618
or I ·410466 and I ·410461.
"CONTINUE"
LiGHT PATIERNS
BPA3
22.a.
22.h.
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as ~ Case
I 39~·. F~:: ~~f
I ;~.a. P ; O~: G~:.d~iFF I ..
48.h.
S S4ls!! ~
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES; 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
5
5 Ilk 3
5
5
6 Ilk"
6
6
I/O
SOCKET
51
52 Ilk A
53
54
55 Ilk B
56
S7
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC)
DCCKEYBOA RD/DISPLA Y DEVICE ROW I
PRINTER N LOC
DEVICE ROW 2
PRINTER 'NOTES)
DEVICE ROW 3
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY DEVICE ROW 4
PRINTER (N LOC)
DEVICE ROW 5
PRINTER(NOTES)
DEVICE ROW 6
Note 3: If the customer reqUires
that print local operation be prohibited from both KDs or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking key top
over the PRINT LOCAL position of
the appropriate KD opcon(s).
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
S"
A
B
C
D
E
B
F
G
H
C
<
(
D
K
L
Q
M
]
N
$
I
+,
[
&. 0
J
P
*
F
E
R
/
*
)
•
A
S
T
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics are
the same, except for
ASCII
(
EBCDIC
4 ( · ) **
I (
I )
!(I
)
,(~)
PRINTER,
PRINT
LOCAL
(See Noles.)
(See Noles.)
MONITOR
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device addresses
in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 35
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A 0 B LCD DOE 0 F 0
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)
o
I'\IIII:\.I.:(,II:~(IH ~\\Ijt 111'(I~rJl(I"~
( \
I~ II
1'( 1:-;1 I II)\,
I
11)
••o oo •• oo
o •
o •
o •
2. 2. 2. 3.
!'.\]'n,j{\
LH;j ITS
-+-+.-<
TROUBLE
SPC4
SPC13
10
10
1.
:,0
3 •
'".. '.
o
o
~
SW1TCH
•
~ 0 ~POSlTIONS~
0
40
4
50
50
60
60
70
7
0
•o
• •• ••
2. •
,.
'. I.
SP1
SP1
SPA3
10
10
10
20
10
.
a •
a.
When internal numeric cluster
opean is used (Option 410b.),
these substitutions apply.
"('Ol\TINl'E"
LH;IIT I'ATTEBNS
o•
••
PRINTER OPTIONS
PR1NTER I 0 SOCKET
Note 1: Positions 11 arid 12 may contain
2 - 4104658 or 2 - 4104618 or 1 - 410465
and 1 - 410461.
Note 2: Printer associated
with 1/0 socket 84 will be
print local for KD in 110
socket 82 & A and S3 & B.
See Note 3.
::riction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
Specify Right Margin
17.
Specify Left Manzin
1M.a.
lS.b.
IS.c.
19.d.
19.e.
19.f.
20.a.
20.b.
~i~.
*41043N - Any D I/O circuit card
See adjacent page for connections
and device addresses.
Page 36
22.a.
22.b.
: "".a.
39.b.
I 48.a.
48.b.
~:pe:~~ ~~RU~;' Loss
Paver FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
~~ ~~aracter Set
64 Character Set
Ext. ASCII Set
Single LF
Double LF
~wer and Upper Case mnt
Lower Case Prints as Uuper C se
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as Uoper Case
~ormson
Forms off
ape' lJut ~ot {j~"'d::V/'
Paper Out Gated WIFF
I
"II~"
1I
••
••
SPA3
••
:I •
4.
~"'--~
o
~
~
S
~ ~
.0
00
•
];,
o
o
•
0
SPC13
"OF!-"
12
./PATTERNS~ •
O~
SPC4
11
S4 S5 S6 S7
'"..".
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
5
5 III 3
5 III 4
5
II
II
II
Note 3:
I/O
SOCKET
51
52111 A
S3 a. B
54
55
511
57
.TATION
WORK .HIEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (5CC)
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DI5PLA Y
PRINTER (NOTES)
PRINTER (N LOC)
PRINTER IN Loel
PRINTER IN LOCI
If the customer requires
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
ROW I
ROW 2
ROW 3
ROW"
ROW 5
ROW II
ABC D E F
Ip F ( K Q ;
A G ( L R A
B H
M ]
I NIS /
C J
-
+
D t
E •
l!
•
0*5
J P
) rr
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
that print local operation be prohibited from both KDs or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking key top
over the PRINT LOCAL position of
the appropriate KD opcon(s).
MONITOR
DCC-
DEVICE ADDRESS
ASCII
[
EBCDIC
.. ( -,) **
!)
! (I )
I (
1-------..
,
(¢)
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the devin'
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line codp.
Page 37
SECTION 582-200-300
Dec -.- Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: ABO C
DOE 0 F n
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)
o
__ m_,\,~r;l r;l~, ~~ ril~ r;l~ r;l~
(\lwm,"",
I. .
I
I'.\'I'TI':H\
1.1(;II"1"S-+-+--<
0
: 0
I__Q
('()!\:TIr.;("E
SWfT('11
TEST
HI';":
2.3.
2. 3. I.
4.
SPC4
'-)WITCIl
1. ..\\11'
•••
0
•
0..
0
0
0
SPC4
SPCI3
10 10
".
4 •
'"
3 •
0
60 60
PATTEIL"';~
OJ
2
••
JO
3
4
SPA3
o
See Adjacf>nt page for Connections and
Device Addresses.
!I]
•
•
•
•
SPA3
PRINTEr I 0 SOCKET
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed SO Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17.
Specify !tigh~ !"argin
SPecify Left Marl{fn
H:.'.a. ~''IO aper reed _(!ut
18.b. Paper FO on "RM" Loss
1S.c. Pauer 1<'0 on "RM" Loss and ETX
~~.d. ~~ Character Set
19.e. 64 Character Set
19.f. Ext. ASCII Set
20.a. Single LF
20.b. Double U'
21.a.
Utrin:s ~~I~~~tCase
21.b. ~::~
22.a. Lower Case Prints as Error
22.b. Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
I 39.a. onns on
39.b. J<'ormsoff
d HO ('01
Note 1,' Printer associated with 110
socket 84 will he print local for KD
in I/O socket 82 & A and S3 & B.
See Note 2.
Trador Ft't'J 132
('01
!~.a.
Spt'cify Ri~ht Margin
S 1t'l'lfy Lt'ft Maoo!l
~u al)t>r l'l'd, lit
lH.h.
IH.{',
PapI'r FO on "HM" Lo!iS
I'a IN FO on "Hl\1" Luss and ETX
7.
~~:~.' ~~ ('~::~:~:~ ~::~
I9.r.
20.a.
20.h.
.~~:~'.
22.a.
22.11.
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent pqe for Connections
and Device Addresses.
Page 40
:!9.a.
:m.h
I ·IR.a,
·IK.h.
Ext. .\S(,II St'l
I. '
Doublt, I.F
Sin~lt'
:::::::~ ~~~.(;!;:~~s ~'~L~I~~t
Low\'r Casl' I'nnts as ":rror
towN ('01.'11.' Pnnll'> as II l lPr Cast'
~'nnns Oil
Forms off
Papl'r Out, ot .a~'( WI
l'apl'r Out ('att·1I \\ Wt'
S4 S5 S6 S7
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -.. Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
"OSITION
,
'.3
,,
••
..
6
I/O
SOCKET
51
S2. A
81. B
S.
5'
56
57
STATION
WORK SH!lET
DEVICE
STATION C/C rSCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER NOTES)
"RINTERJ.N LOCi
PRINTER IN LOC)
PRINTER IN LOC)
Note 2: If th(' l'ustomt'r rpquires
that print local operation hp prohihited from hoth KDs or just one
KD, plact' a 340701 hlocking key top
owr thl' PRINT LOCAL position of
thl' appropriatt' KD opeon(s),
MONITOR
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW.
DEVICE ROW'
DEVICE ROW.
DEV~CE
ADDRESS
•
ABC D E PK Q'
~
A G ( L R
B H + M ]
C J IN l!.1'
D C l!. 0 * S
E • J P I
,. <
-'"
*ASCII and
ImCDlC graphics
are the same, l'xcept for
ASCII
EBCDIC
t
• (.,) **
"
., (¢)
I (! )
r-~--+--:::! ( I )
1----""
PRINTEH,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
**(,hara('tt'rs in part'ntht'st's an' displaYt'd as tlH' dl'vit'"
addn'sst's in Im'a! \,t'st when lIsing EBCDIC lint' (,011.,.
Page 41
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: ABO COD 0 E 0 F 0
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)
(Note 1)
('ARD
- -
:".a'~1HEH
----,
\
\
\
,~ ~
,\
I
I
I
I
I'.\TTEIC\
U(;IITS -+-+~
I
SWITCII
0
0
SWITCH
LA~lP
12~
•
0
SPC4
SPC4
10
10
2.
20
'.
SPC13
SPC13
4. •• ••
3.
TROUBLE
PATTERNS
0
1.
3.
+12 •
+5
(Note 2)
0
0
0
TEST
Rl'.'\
~
0
0
I-_Q
('()~T[NI'E
rn
~ ~ ~ 0 00 0 0 ~ ~. ~
• •• •• ••• O·
•
I
\
~
20
3 ••
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
SW1TCH
POS1T10NS
When internal numeric cluster
opeon is used (Option 410b.),
this substitution applies and
switches on 41046Ns must be
positioned as shown.
••
••• •• ••
••
0
0
SPI
SPI
SPAI
10
10
1.
2.
30
0
3 •
4.
4.
SP!
1.
20
30
4 •
''('ONTINl,'E''
LIGHT PATTERNS
"1
2
3
•
2.
30
Note 2:
CO
O.
••
00
Same trouble pattern for
both 41046Ns. If pattern occurs,
replace 41046Ns one at a time until
. pattern no longer appears.
PRINTI.;R OPTIONS
PR1NTER 1 0 SOCKET
Note 3:
Printer associated with
JiO socket 84 will be print local for
KD in I/O socket S2 & A. Printer
in 1/0 socket S7 is print local to
KD in I/O socket S5 & B. If no
printer is in I/O socket S7, the
printer in 1/0 socket S4 will be
print local to both KOs. See Note 4.
'~'R~M~"~L~o~ss~~=t~§§~
*41043N - ANY D 1/0 CIRCUIT CARD
See adjacent page for Connections
and Df'viep Addresses.
20.8.
20.b.
2 .a.
21.h.
22.8.
22.b.
.8.
39.h.
.a.
48.h.
Paper FO on
Pa r FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
9 Character Set
64 Character Set
Ext. ASCII Set
Single LF
Double LF
wer an
pper as£> Print
L wer Case Prin s as
er C
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as U
r Case
onns on
Forms off
aper ut at
ate
f
Paper Out Gated W/FF
4 •
'.
•• ~
SPI
Note l' Positions 12 & 13 may
contain 2 - 4104658 or 2· 410461&
or 1 ·410465 and 1 - 410461.
19.e.
19.f.
Page 42
0
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -. Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
5
5
a
3
1/0
SOCKET
DEVICE
SI
52 a A
5TATION CIC (SCC)
53
54
5
5
la4
••
Note 4:
55
a
51
57
B
5TATION
WORK SHEET
DCCKEYBOARD/DISPLAY DEVICE ROW I
PRINTER N LOC
DEVICE ROW 2
PRINTER 'NOTE:~)
DEVICE ROW 3
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY DEVICE ROW 4
DEVICE ROW 5
PRINTER IN LOC)
PRINTER(NOTES)
DEVICE ROW I
If tht> customt'r reqUlrt>s
that print local opt'ration 1)(' pro·
hihited from both KDs or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking key top
over the PRINT LOCAL position of
thl' appropriatt> KD opcon(s).
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
B
C
Sp F"
<
A
B
G
H
(
C
D
E
I
[
+I
D
K
L
M
N
&.0
J
P
*
E
F"
Q
R
A
]
-
$
I
)
T
*9
*ASCII and
EBCDIC graphics an'
the same, except for
ASCII
[
EBCDIC
• ( -,) **
I
( ( I )
r-.
-, (¢)
! (
I)
MONITOR r-----------------------------------~
KYBD
**Characters in part>nthest>s arl' displayed as thl' devil!' addn'ss('s
in local test when using EBCDIC line ('ode.
Page 43
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DeC: ABO e 0 DOE r:J F 0
USOC: 4TV + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)
1',\1'[ EH\
1.11 a ITS
4-+.-<
1'4)~T[:\I'E
S\\"j'J'('11
TEST
SWITCH
HI"'
1..\\11'
SPC4
0
SPC4
1
0
'. '.
1
oO ____
o
SPC13
..
~
0
"('()'TI:'IO'l'E"
L!l;IIT 1',\rr~;H!,;S
"
When mternal numeric cluster
oJ)con IS used (Option 410h.).
this substitution applies and
switches on 41046Ns must bt'
positiont'ci Wi shown.
.:)
O•
••
00
Nul~' I
POIntwns 12 & 13 may contain
2-41046560r2 1104ij!sorl 410465
and 1 ·410461.
N~)h'
2'
Sanlt~
troublt.· pat.tern for bot.h
41046N~. If Pllttt"m occurs. replacp
41046Ns un", at a timl' until paLt.l'm no
long,'r apl)t>ars.
Note J
Prtnwr BlJSodated wlt.h IjO
sockt·t S-l will bl' print local for KD
in J/OSUl'kf't S2 & A and S3 & B.
He(' Not,l·4.
I'HI~
*41043N .- ANY D ItO CIRCUIT CARD
Page 44
•
•
0
11'\ h
0
SP1
10
0
I',I\,.-r 1)111 (,al.-,j \\ I'"
.".
SPA1
·1
I. 1. ~
:to
2
~O
nm OI'Tlo!'\S
I'IU:\ I Eit I 0 SocKt:'!
FrldlUll ,,'t'4,,!
Tral'lur F''4'd XII e"l
I ral illr ,"",.! L12 (,'u!
1.
SI~"'lfy Ihlolhl \1arJ.,"n
S 1t"'lf I.,·ft :\lar'Ul
. n al~'r t... ·.'II.(~~lt
I'ap.'r F( I lin .. It \1" I.,,~
!',tlN )o"().,Il··H:O'I··1.0:o.... iUlllt:·IX
! ,
9) C'haral'I!'r S,'t
lill'haradl'T Sd
IH"
E1I.t. .\S('II St'l
Itt f
2() a
Sint!!!· U'
:.w II j)"uhl,·
_.1
,uwpr alii 1 Jlllt'r C'al\t' "rml
:.!II.
L"Wt'r ('a~' i'rlllh a:. l' I , '
~2.a
1.1I'A"l'r ("a:;,.' !'rml:. Ill> ":rrnr
:!:!.h
!."",,'r l'..;,· j'nllb a:. \. , It'r (',ll>!'
:m a
'''nll~tln
:I!I h
F"rm:. "ft"
IX ;!
ap"r I III ~ul .ilLt,.1 W F:
I."
Set.· adJact'nt pagt· for Connl:!ctions
and lJt>vict, Addresses.
0
0
30
·1
~.
10 ·0
0
0
HO 60
0
0
0
SPI
SWITCH
POSITIONS _ _ _ _ _ _
I.
2 •
:,0
o
TROUBLE
PAITERNS----
SPC13
I
••
• • ••
2. :,. 2.'
• •• •
INot.to21
••o ••
o •
o • •
•• 2.
3.•
o
o
o
84 S5 S6 S7
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC _. Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
5
5a3
5 a 4
5
e
e
e
I/O
SOCKET
51
52 a A
53 a B
54
55
se
S7
.TATION
WORK .HIEET
DEViCE
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
PRINTER {NOTES)
PRINTER (N LOC)
PRINTER (N LOC)
PRINTER N LOC
Note 4:
If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibited from both KDs or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking key top
over the PRINT LOCAL position of
the appropriatp KD opcon(s).
DCCDEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
ROW I
ROW 2
ROW 3
ROW 4
ROW 5
Rowe
DEVICE ADDRESS
..
A BCD E F
( K Q ;
I ..
A G I L R
B H
hi ]
C 1 I N$ /
D c: 1& o
5
E •
J P ) T
•
'"-
+
*
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
ASCII
c
EBCDIC
.(')**
I (! )
!(I
MONITOR
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
1------..
,
)
(¢ )
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
**Charactprs in parentheses arp displayed as thl' devicp
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line ('odt'.
Page 45
SECTION 582·200·300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A B C [' DOE [1 F 0
USOC: 4TV + 3.(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 3·KDs & Up To 3·PTRs (2 Print Local)
0 ' ..010· ...... ·"C)S··
1'.\'jrEI{:\ 1.I(fIITS ()H SWI1'('III'()HiTI()SS
I
I
C',\lW I"SITIO=<
1
I
I
2
10
11
12
I ,,! I
11
(Note 1)
("AHI) Nl':\.fBfo:R
-- ----
\
\
\
\
,~ ~ ~ ~ ~
\'
I
I
I
I
0
0
L~Q
T~;S'f
SWITCH
.12~
+12.
+5
8...
...::1
•
00 00
I
• •• • •• ••• •
I
\
0
0
0
0
0
0
BPC4
SPC4
SPC4
10
10
10
2.
2.
20
a.
aO
a.
4.
4.
4.
~
c
...~
0
0
0
0
I. a.
0
SPC13
2.
~ 0~
00 00
• • ••
• •• •• ••
2. a. a.•o 3.1.2.
40
50
0
BPI
SPAa
0
20
aO
o
o
0
70
~"1~
If internal
numeric
cluster
opeon
is used
g
(Option 410b.). these~ ~
substitutions apply.
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
#
1
.,
:I
I
0
••
PRINTER OPTIONS
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
I !:ncUon !·eed
0
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
Npte 1;
Positions 11 & 12 may contain
2 . 410465t or 2 - 4104618 or 1 . 410466
I
I'··
and 1 ·410461.
!
Note 2: Printer in 1/0 socket 58 is
print local to KDs in 1/0 sockei 56 &:
A and 87 & B. Printer in I/O socket
S3 is print local to KD in 1/0 socket
81 & C. If no printer is in 1/0 socket
83, printer in 1/0 socket 88 will be
print local to all KOs. See Note 3.
i8:~·. ~:pe:~ ~~~~. LOBS
Paner FO on "RM" LOBS and ETX
19.e.
64 Character Set
Ext. ASCII Set
19.1.
~~.a.
20.b.
~~.a.
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
Page 46
~. ~haracter ~et
~~~eL~F
~~.a. ::::"",::,!!o~u~~V.:;:tC'"
22.h.
*41043N - ANY D 1/0 CIRCUIT CARD
Specify !'il!n~ !"argin
SpecifY Left Margin
lB.c.
! ~.Q.
~I!.a.
39.h.
SPAa
10
4. 4. 4. 4.
3.
0
0
0
TROUBLE
•
, . . . PATTERNS - - - - . . .
BPI
SPCla
SWITCH
I •
10
2 0 , - - - POSITIONS .............
40
~~
!-ower ,?ase Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as UPDer Case
!,:onns on
Forms off
:~t p:::~ O~: G~~~~;'"
SBS3 S2
fI-
f= f=
r- r-rI~ lr-rrI-
f= ~
f- r-rf- f- fl - I- Il - f- fI-
r-r-
~
;
I
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 3-KDs & Up To 3-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
IOOSITION
.....••
... 3
7 .. '
7
7
I/O
SOCKET
S5
S. . . A
S7 .. B
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C C (SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
se
SI .. C
52
53
MONITOR
PRINTER
PRINTER
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW ..
DEVICE ROW 5
DEVICE ROW II
DEVICE.AODRESS
A
S
A
B
C
D
E
B
C
F
<
G
H
(
J
0
P
I
I
[
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
KYBD
+
D
K
L
M
N
E
*F
Q
R
A
:J
$ /
*5
)
T
ASCII
[
I
'*I
J
.,
'"
..
EBCDIC
( .,)
(.,
(!)
(
)
)
Note 3: If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibitec:
from all KDs, or just one KD, place a
340701 blocking keytop over the
PRINT LOCAL position of the
appropriate KD opcon(s).
MONITOR
t------------'
KYBD
MONITOR ~-----------------------------~
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 47
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: A 0 B 0 COD 0 E 0 F 0
USDC: 4TV + 3-(4TDX+ DR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 3-KDs & Up To 3-PTRs (2 Print Local)
"\!'ILH' I.HanSlli(
I
~\\IT('11
o
PCISITHf\S
I
"on"
0
0
0
0
------'\,~ ~, ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
i
(\Hll '" 1:--1 I '11'\
('AHlImIHEH
r;l r;l ril ril ril r;l r;l
I.0.0...
I
",\T'!'EHX
l.lt;ll'l'S-+-+~
('()STINI'~:
0
nOST
Ht',,"
SWIT('l1
LA~ll'
S
12
.+12.
+5
•
0
SPC4
"0:-';"
~
Q !;l
~ ~
0
0
••
0
•
0
0
TROUBLE
O.____PATTERNS--O.
.0 • •
.0 0
•
•
•
0
0
•
••
•
•
I
:__Q.
SWITCII
•
_
,I
I"
SPC4
SPC4
0
SPC13
SPC13
2. 2. • o ___
4.• 4. •• • •
10 10 10 1.
0
30
40
0
0
0
1•
SPA2
1.
3.• 3.2.
SPA3
SPA3
10 10
SWITCH
POSITIONS-- 2
0
4.• 4. 4.
40
sO
o
70
~~
Ii:
'-'
.
When internal numeric cluster
opeon is used (Option nOb.),
these substitutions apply.
"('OSTINt'E"
LIt:lIT PATI EHSS
:il
~~ ~
v
••o
1·ItI~T~:H
I'IU:\TEH 1'1)
Note 1: Printer in 110 socket S8 is
print local to KDs in 110 socket S6 &
A and 87 & B. Printer in 110 socket
sa is print local to KD in 1/0 socket
81 & C. If no printer is in 110 socket
53, printer in 110 socket
will be
print local to all KOs. see Note 2.
sa
ss sa
IR.a.
IH.h,
IH.I'.
-
,U apl'r l't' F
A
B
C
D
E
C
~ 0
J
P
*S
) T
ASCII
EBCDIC
[
ct
(-')**
I
I
(!)
J
A
(I)
.,
(of)
Note 2: If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibitec
from all KDs, or just one KD, place a
340701 blocking keytop over the
PRINT LOCAL position of the
appropriate KD opcon(s).
MONrrOR
I-----------.J
KYBD
MONrrOR
I----------------...J
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 49
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AD B 0 COD 0 E 0 F 0
USOC: 4TV + 3-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 3-KDs & Up To 3-PTRs (2 Print Local)
••o •o •• oo
o •
o •
o • •
2. 3.
4.
o
o
o
I',HTEI{\
1.[(:llTS+-+~
('O~TI1\"I''';
SWITCII
SPC4
SPC4
BPeI3
".'. '.
•
1
2
3
4
0
SWITCH
~ PATTERNS _________
When internal numeric cluster
opeon is used (Option 410h.),
this substitution applies and
switches on 41046Ns must be
positioned as shown.
l' Positions 12 & 13 may contain
2 . 4104655 or 2 - 410461s or 1 - 410465
and 1 - 410461.
Printer in 110 socket 88 is
print local to KDs in 110 socket 86 &
A and 87 & B. Printer in 110 socket
S3 is print local to KD in liD socket
81 & C. If no printer is in 1/0 socket
S3, printer in I{O socket 88 will be
print local to all KDs. See Note 4.
Page 50
'SPl -2.P2...
1-=
~!
~g
,.::.Q
..!..!
2.!
2..Q
Note
Note 3
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
,. 1..I.
SPl
I'HINTl':J{ OPTIONS
S8 83 82
1'!{Jr'\'! U{ 1'0 S()('KE',
Friction Ft'l'd
--'-
rral'tor Ft't'o HO ('uJ
--I-
fraclor h'l;'d 132 ('01
17
lR.,.
IH,h
IH.!
19.<1
1\1.1'
1!J.f
ZO,a
~o
\,
21.<1
21.1l
22.:1
22.11
S!II;'('ify Hi~ht ~1ar~n
~ It'I'If,, Ll'ft \1ar'ln
\u U]WT Pl'd lit
l'apPT FO on "H~" Lus;;
I'a 't'f FO Uti "1t:'>.1" Lus;; and ETX
91l Charadt'f St'I
1)·\ ('haradt'r Sl't
Ext. .\SCIJ :-il't
Smglt'I.F
l)ouhlt,I.F
[,ow\'r and I 'ppt'T Ca.o;t' Print
!.uWl'l ('Ust' I'nnb as
l' )
~'r ('Utit'
1,()Wl'T ('USI.' I'nnh as Error
Luwt'r
(·'l.~t'
"nnb
a.~
I' ) Jt'r {'ast'
.19,
F'JnllSOIl
:!\I,II
Ra
lx,l,
apl'T (ul"""",,! 'UtA'l \" FF
I'apt·r ()ut (;att'd \\' FF
,"",mb uff
SPAl
10 '0 1.
2. 20 2.
3 •
0 "
L...!.~ ~~
Note 2' Same trouble pattern for both
41046Ns. If pattern occurs, replace
41046Ns one at a time until pattern no
longer appears.
*41D43N - ANY D 110 CIRCUIT CARD
•
SPl
SPC13
0·-
••
00
---....
"CONTINllE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
"
••
• • ••
00
TROUBLE
0 _______ PATTERNS
____
10 1 0 10 1. 12 •0
2. 20 2.
,,0
3 •
3 •
40 '0
5 0
50
nO 60
70 70
.12~
•12.
+i)
SPC4
(Note 2)
--I-
--------------I--,--I-
~
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC -- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 3-KDs & Up To 3-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
t-
....
•
•
•• 3
7 ••
7
7
I/O
SOCKET
S5
S'. A
57". B
S8
SI. C
(52
53
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC)
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
PRINTER (N LOC)
PRINTER (NinES)
MONITOR 1 - - - - - - " " " \
DCCDEVICE ROW I
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
DEVICE ROW 4
DEVICE ROW 5
DEVICE ROW 6
DEVICE ADDRESS
A
Sp
A
B
a-
B
F"
G
H
I'
Ii [
E
*ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
KYBD
*F"
E
I
D
K
L
M
N
$
/
~
J
0
P
*
S
T
C
<
(
+
Q
R
A-
:J
)
ASCII
EBCDIC
[
~
.-A' '"
~
Positions 11 & 12 may
contain 2·4104655 or 2 - 4104618
or 1 410465 and 1 - 410461.
Note 2:
Printer in 110 socket 84 is
print local to KDs in 110 socket 82 &
A and 83 & B. Printer in 110 socket
87 is print local to KDs in 110 socket
85 & C and S6 & O. If no printer in
I/O socket 87, printer in 110 socket
84 will be print local to all KUs.
Se~
Note 3.
i'HINTEH OI'TIONS,
i'HI]\;T~;H
I () SOCKET
Fril'tion Ft'l'd
Tr,\('tor Fl't'd HO Col
Trador Ft't'd 132 ('01
17
Sp('('ify Right MarJ.,oln
S It'dfv Lpft Mar 'in
t't'(j.~~~Lt
IM.a
• 0
IH,h
IH,('
I'alwr FO on "HM" Lu;;.o;
I'a IN H) un "HM" Lu;;.o; and ETX
96 CharadA.'r !4t't
f\.1 Chara\'t.('r Sd
Ext. .\S(,II Spt
Sin!.:lt' U'
Jlouhlt, LF
Lowpr and (TpJlt'f ('as\, Print
l!hl
l\lJ'
IUJ.
20.a
:'!O.h.
21.a
See adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
SPl
Note 1
continue
patterns
ANY D 110 CIRCUIT CARD
•o ••
•• •• ••
3.2. •:,.2.•
••
these substitutions apply.
There are no
~
"0'"
o
o
~g
*41043N
•
l:lIiiJ
10 10 10 10 1.
pg~!!r~%S 1 0 10 10
20 20 2. 2 .
0 /
'\. 2 . 20
3.
:1. 30 3 . 3 0
'30 3 •
••
·0 40
50 50
00
70
..,.
"CONTINUE"
WGtlT PATTERN
"OFF"
T"
:,! l.ll
22.a
22,h
.19.a.
:m.b
apt'r
[.uwt'r Cast' Prints as tTI)[)t'r C
LOWN ('aSl;' "rints as Error
Lowt'r ('ast' I'rint::; as U ) IN Cast'
'orms 011
Forms off
S4 S7
1---
1--1---
1---
r--
1-r-1-r--
1-1--
Page 52
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC _.- Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
763
764
7
865
86 Ii
8
51
526 A
53611
54
556 C
516 D
57
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC'
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
PRINTER (NOTES)
DEVICE ADDRE. .
•
DCeA B C
DEVICE ROW I
!5p F"
DEVICE ROW &
A G j
DEVICE ROW 3
B H
I
DEVICE ROW 4
C J:
DEVICE ROW S
D I:
DEVICE ROW I
E
J
<
+
D
K
L
M
N
,
. .
0
po
E
Q
\
"J
A
•
I
-
*•
)
T
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphiCS
are the same, except for
MONITOR
+------------,.
MONITOR !---"""\
1'0
KYBD
ASCII
EBCDIC
[
I (! )
!
see
,
MONITOR
(I)
(4)
Note 3: If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibited from all KDs, or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL
position of the appropriate KD
opcon(s).
KYBD
MONITOR
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 53
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: ABO COD 0 E 0 F 0
USOC: 4TV + 4-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
I' \ ]'11<1{\ 1.1(;IITS(lH S\\IT('11 i'()SITUf\S
!
. 0
!
"OFF"
. I
0
0
0
------'\\~ ~, ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
i
1. •
(\j{]ll'uSII\ll'\
(IHI>
~1"HEI{
I"
r;l r;l ril ril Iil
1
: 0
1__Q.
(,()~TI.,\(''':
.sWITCII
+12 •
+ii
•
r;l r;l
•
0
•
0
•
0
0
•
•
0....
0
0
0
0
0
TEST
IU':\'
SWITCH
L.U1P
.I"S
0
~
.,o
.,o
~
SPC4
SPC4
8PC4
SPC4
SPCI3
11
II
•
~ ~
• •
3.
'.
~ ~
0
TROUBLE
.0..
0 ~PATTERNS~. 0 0
•
0
O. •
•
•
•• •
•
SPCI3
SPA2
SPA3
.~"-""."'"-~~~
continue
pattE-tns
I'HINTElt
Page 54
SPA3
3.4.
•
opeon is used (Option 410b.).
these substitutions apply.
There are no
Set' adjacent page for Connections
and Device Addresses.
r;l
10 10 I .
10 10 10 10 I . I .
SWITCH
2 0
2. 2.
2 0 20 2. 20 .....-------PATTERNS'-...,...
2.
2.
3.
3.
30 3 •
3. 30
4 •
•0 40
4.
1 •
50 50
60 60
70 7 0
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERN
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT DARD
"ov'
I "
Note l' Printer in 110 socket 84 is
print local to KDs in 110 socket 82 &
A and S3 & B. Printer in 1(0 socket
87 is print local to KDs in I/O socket
85 & C and 56 & D. If no printer in
I/O socket 87, printer in 110 socket
84 will be print local to all KOs.
See Note 2.
Oi'TI()~S
i'\ti!\n:l{ J '0 S()('KE"
Jo'nl"\lOn F~'1'd
I'rac\or FpI'd riO ('01
I'ractor ~\'I.'J 132 ('01
SpI,t'lfy Hight !'.laq.,rin
S 'PI'lf LI·ft Mar 'Ill
. (f
apl'f ('I'( lit
i'apN V() on "1{\l" Loss
tH.(
I'a 'I'r H> on "ID1" L\Js.~ and ETX
19,d
91) Charal'tt'T St't
1).1 ('hara('\t'r St'!
HI.t'
Ext, .\S('J] St't
lU.f
Slng!p LF
:W.a
Iluubl., Ll'
:.Wh
l.OWl'( and I 'PPt'f Casp Print
21.a
IMWt'r ('as<' I'nnb as l' 1 Jl'f CaM'
:!l.h
LdWI'r (':1St' I'nnt.~ as Error
22.a
I.ower ('ast' I'nnt~ as I' ) Jt'r ('ast'
22.h
F',rms (Ill
.19.a
:1\1.11
h'rIll!'o off
apN ( lit .~(>I ,att'd. \"F '
IRa
I'«l'l'r ()ut (,,(10'01 \\ "F
Hi h
84 87
-f-f-
---
-,
f-f-f-ff-ff-r--
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
7
7
a.
a.
51
52 a. A
53 a. B
3
4
7
8
8
a.
a.
54
55 a. C
511 a. D
57
5
6
8
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
DEVICE A.DDRESS
STATION C/C (SCC'
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
PRINTER (NOTES)
DCCDEVICE ROW 1
DEVICE ROW 2
DEVICE ROW 3
KEYBOARDjDISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
PRINTER (NOTES)
DEVICE ROW'
DEVICE ROW'
DEVICE ROW.
A
Sp
A
B
C
D
E
B
F
G
H
C
<
(
+
[
E
Q
R
N
f
0
J
P
*
...
;
A
J
, *
I
I
D
K
L
M
)
I
S
T
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
are the same, except for
MONITOR
r--------------.
MONITOR ~--"'
KYBD
ASCII
EBCDIC
(
• ( -,) **
1_-+_-;.-1-';-(-',-!-',-)---t
J
!
,
(I)
(0+)
If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibited from all KDs, or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL
position of the appropriate KD
opcon(s).
Note 2:
MONITOR
KYBD
MONITOR
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as the device
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line code.
Page 55
SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
DCC: AOBOCODOE OFO
USOC: 4TV + 4-(4'rOX+ OR 4TPX+).
HANDLES: 4-KDs &- Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
__ ~~'~C::::, ~
\,
I'.\TTEH!':
I.I(;JITS+-.....~
('O!':TISt'fo;
SWITCH
Rl-~
LA~I~
~ ~ ~ 00 00 ~ ~ 0 0 0 ~-'rn ~
I
I
LQ
0
o
n:ST
SWITCH
•
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
There are no
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
0
0
0
0
SPC4
SPC4
SP<:4
SPC4
SPCI3
10
10
2.
+12 •
10
10
1
20
20
2
:I •
30
3
• 4. 4.
3.
30
4 •
4.
Note 1:
Positions 12 & 13 may contain
2 - 4104658 or 2 - 410461s Of 1 - 410465
and I - 410461.
Same trouble pattern for both
41046Ns. If pattern occurs, replace 41046Ns
one at a time until pattern no longer appears.
*41043N - ANY D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
Page 56
SPCI3
•• •o
• •
1
-pg~~g~s
4 0
5 0
6 0
6 0
7 0
7 0
__
4 0
•
•
SPI
SPI
1 0
I
3 0
I 0
2 0
3
4
4
4
2
0
When intemal numeric cluster
opeon is used. (Option 410b.),
this substutition applies and
switches on 41046Ns must be
positioned as shown.
•
•
•
•
•
SPI
SPI
1
2 0
2
!l 0
3 0
4
4
1'H.INn:H. OI)TlONH
I'lu:\n:H. 1'0
~O('KET
Trat'tur Ft't'd HO ('01
Trador FI't'd 132 ('01
Sp('('lfy Hi~hl MargIn
17
S "'t'lf' Lpft :\1an!1Il
:;00 apt-r 1'1'.<:'-, ut
~".a.
IM.b
l'alN'T f-'() on "I{M" LtJSII
IM.t·
I'a I('r "'0 Oil "'){:\," Luss and ETX
Ill ..!
9 l CharadA't St't
19.('. fi4 ('haral'lt'T ~t,t
HU.
Ext. .\S(,II St't
Sin~11' LF
20.a
I)ouhlt, U'
20.h
.... a. LowI'ralu I'PIH.-T 'a.,*' Print
21.1>. Lu ..... '·r (':.u;(' Print.::; as l :Illx'r ' " St'
Low ..r ('ast· I'nnts as Error
22 a
22.11. Lowt'T ('oL"I' I'nllt:. as I' ) I('r ('ast'
Furm~ on
39.a
:mh Form.\ooff
lXa
apN ul. 01 latA:'(I.~~ I
!'apt'r ()III (;ah'd \\. FF
·IM.b
S4 S7
I- II- -
-
~
SPAI
••
•• ••
••
•~
1
Fri\·ti()n_~'('t'd
Printer in 1/0 socket 84 is
print local to KDs in I/O socket 82 &
A and S3 & 8. Printer in I/O socket
87 is print local to KDs in 110 socket
85 & C and sa & D. If no printer in
110 socket 87. printer in 110 socket
84 will be print local to all KDs.
See Note 4.
See adjacent page for Connections
•
Note 2:
Note 3:
and Device Addre88es.
...
.
.0.0.0
00.
•
0
0
•
•
0 _ _ ::.?T~':t~S _ _0
0
•
_12~
+5
0.... 0
(Note 2)
10
:.
=
f- ff- f-
f- f-f-f-f-
-t-
2
3
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
DCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 4-KDs & Up To 2-PTRs (2 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
7 803
7804
7
8805
8 a I
8
SI
S2 a A
53 a B
S4
SS a C
SI 800
S7
STATION
WORK SHEET
DEVICE
STATION C/C (SCC'
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
PRINTER (NOTES)
KEYBOARD DISPLA Y
KEYBOARD/DISPLA Y
PRINTER (NOTES)
DEVICE A'DDRE"
DCC- A B
DEVICE ROW I
5,. F'
DEVICE ROW Z
A G
B H
DEVICE ROW'
DEVICE ROW.
C l:
DEVICE ROW S
0
DEVICE ROW.
E
c:
,.•
C
D
IE
<
K
Q
\
L
M
N
0
P
"J
A
(
+
, *
I
J
$
I
)
S
T
* ASCII and EBCDIC graphics
ar" the same, except for
MONITOR
r-------------.
ASCII
[
MONITOR ! - - - ,
EBCDIC
.. (')**
(! )
! (I )
I
KYBD
,
(4)
Note 4:
MONITOR
If the customer requires
that print local operation be prohibited from all KDs, or just one
KD, place a 340701 blocking keytop over the PRINT LOCAL
position of the appropriate KD
opcon(s).
KYBD
MONITOR
KYBD
**Characters in parentheses are displayed as thl' dpvicp
addresses in local test when using EBCDIC line emit-.
Page 57
SECTION 582-200-300
Mec -
Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC 0
U80C: 4TX + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: l-KD & l-PTR (Print Local)
umrrs OJ{
P.\TTI·:W'';
I
.\ISITIj.!y).t'ft M PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon.
Note 2: If only one printer is part of the order and the customer requires that print local operation be
prohibited from the KD, another method can be used: connect printer to S4, option 410403 card for
third device address (B17) to he the printer address, and tum all B15 switches off.
Page 65
SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCnO EBCDICO
USOC: 4TX + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & 2 PTRs (1 Print Local)
rillril
00r;l~ ~ 00!;l~ r;l~ r;l~
(Note)
ril
ril
___ U_'\,~~ ~, ~ ~ ~
CARD Nl'''R>:R
I'ATTERN
I.IGHTS-+-+~
('ONTINlTE
SWITCH
1 0
:.
I 0
1 0
---
.0. 0
• •• 0
0.0.
00. 0
neST
SWITCH
RUN
LAMP
+5
r!-~ ~!
2.
r!-~
~J!
It
•o
•
I
•••
••
•
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
I
4
5
6
7
8
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNATlONS
STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
1st DEVICE AD DRESS
2nd DEVICE AD DRESS (PTR)
3rd DEVICE AD DRESS (PTR)
Caution: PROMs 450013. 450014.
450015 & 450016 on 41080 8 (if
used) must be issue 3 or tate r.
See adjacent page for Connec tions.
B2 B3 B4
..i.~ ~
L.-=
0
0
:uo 0
INTENSIFIED ONLY
~~
~~~
B7
B8
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~
g B~~~~s~~~1
B5 B6
.
PRINTER OPTIONS
0
0
0
0
CONTINUOUS ALARM
I SECOND ALARM
406
a 0
b 0
2'.
If internal numeric
~
~ ~ ;;
cluster opeon is used ______ ~ ~ S
;::
(Option 41Ob.), these
"
Lowpr Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
arms on
Forms' off
~::::: ~:~: ~~~~~~/~~ IF>
S3 S4
-- ff- -- -f- f- f- ffff- r
-
2nd DEVICE
DEVICE ADDRESS
ADDRESS (PTR)
3rd
(PTR) :==========~~
* ANY
D I/O CIRCUIT CARD
Caution: PROMs 450013.450014,
450015 & 450016 on 410808 (if
used) must be issue 3 or later.
See adjacf'nt page for Connections.
402
a 0
b
0
:°30
~
b
0
0
.
OPTIONS - 410411
404
SPB7-1
CONTINUOUS ALAH\f
I SECOND ALARM
INTENSIFIED
8 ~~~~~2Nr';;1
406
a
Page 68
84
0
o~
9
GRAPHIC DESIGNATiONS
•••
••
•
0
•
•
~~
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
I
•
0
SPA2
If internal numeric
cluster opcon is used
(Option 410b.), these
substitutions apply.
TP410411
:-,;t \lB~,H A21 B12 B1 B2 83
•
OPTION
405
••
-
"CONTINltF,"
LIGIIT PATTERNS
OPTION
0
0
TROUBLE
O.
PATTERNS-oO
~
O~LY
&
BLINK
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN !',WMEHIC FIELD
•
0
",B7~ ~
~~
SPB7·4
•
0
SPB7·5
0 TERMINATE WIETX
b 0
408
TERMINATE W SUB EN
~
B~~~glc
a
0 ENABl.ED
0 DISABI.ED
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
b
0
•
•
•
SPB7·6
0
SPB7-8
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
3
4&5
5
5
I/O
SOCKET
DS
S2-B
53
54
DEVICE
DATA SET
KEYBOARD/MON. (I)
PRINTER
(2)
PRINTER
(3)
MONITOR
PRINTER,
PRINT
LOCAL
(See Notes.)
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD, place a 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon.
Note 2: If only one printer is part of the order and the customer requires that print local operation be
prohibited from the KD, another method can be used: connect printer to S4, option 410411 card for
third device address (B6) to be the printer address, and turn all B5 switches off.
Note 3:
If printers are not part of station, option B5 and B6 switches off on 410411 circuit card.
Page 69
SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC 0
USOC: 4TX + (4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 1-KD & 2 PTRs (1 Print Local)
1'.\"1''1'1-:1{.'\ LI( ;IITS (Ji{ SWITCII I'()SITIO:'\S
('
I
\ll!lI'()~IT[()\
I
••o oo
o
o •
I'.\TTEI{:\
LI( ;IITS
- - L _........~
(,()~TrSI'E
---
SWITCII
TEST
HI','\;
~12S
+12 •
•
2-' ~r!
~~
.2"
o
••o
slll1(11
\1 \lB,"U
,
.,
Note l'
Positions 9 & 12 m ay
contain 2 - 410465s or 2 - 41 04618
or 1 - 410465 & 1 - 410461.
"
~,
Same trouble pattem
for both 41046Ns. If pattern
occurs, replace 41046Ns one
at a time until pattern no
longer appears.
Note 2:
"
"
7
8
9
GRAPIII(' DESIG:o-JAT!ONi-i
OPTIO:\
401
OPTION
405
POSITIONS
ST ATIO!'-l P )Ll . ,\DDRESS
:-:iT,.\TION SELl-;( 'T ADDRESS
1st DEVICE e\1 )l)H.ESS
2nd DEVICE e\ DlJRESS(PTR)
3rd DEVICE AIJORESS (PTR)
•••
••
•
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
B2
B3 B4
If internal numeric
B5 B6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
59
"h
0
0
('():\T1;-"'\'()[·S .\J...\H\1
0
l:\lE:\SIFIEI> O:\I."J
See adjacent page for Connec tions.
B7
J t1
OPTIONS
410411
SPB7-1
·10,1
a 0
& BI.J\h
•
0
SPB7~2
-3
.0 .0
~~
8PB7-4
0
0
.\1.1'11.\ 1:\:\\ '\!EH[C FIEI.I)
\I.I'I\.\ :\(JT 1:\ :\L'\lEH[(' FIEJ,]J
•
.a
h
0
n:u;"ll:\xn: \\"E'I:\
\\' SI'B L\(
rER~ll:\.\TE
~
0
0
,\SCiI
EHClJlC
1071:\ull1 l.o('k SF,)
0 E\,\B!.E[J
h
0 1)IS,\HIYIJ
"
414 BUFFER LOCK
a
0
0
S3 S4
r--r---
r-r- -r-r-
f= f=
f-- I-
-r-r-I-
-r-
SPB7,5
0
•
•
SPB7·6
10M
"h
b
Page 70
-JiI"'"
...,....,.
PIUNTEH I (, SOCKET
f"ridion FI,t'li
Traetor Ft·t>d HO ('01
Tractor Ft>t>u 132 ('01
Sp('('ify Right Margin
17
s I('cify Lpft Mar 'in
18.a. !"o aper cpd ut
IS.b. i'apt'f 1"0 on "HM" Loss
18.e. I'a )I.'r 1"0 on "I{;"!" Loss and ETX
I9,d. 96 ('haradt'r St't
19 ..,
6.t Character St't
Ext. .\S('II St't
19.f
20.a. Singlt> LF
20.h. Douhll' LF
2I.a. LOWN and UPpl'r {'as(' Print
21.b. Lowl'r ('ase Prints as It) l'r CaSt'
22.a. !.owt>r Cast' Prin ts as Error
22.b. Low('r Cast.' Prints as II ))(>r ('as/.'
ormson
39.a.
Forms off
39.b
apt'r ut. ot t.:~tA'd \ ',.M~a.
l'apl'r Out (;att'd \\"FF
·tR.h
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 .-iEC():\1l .\L.\I{;"!
B :~:~,;~::~/,::i')
~~
.;t;:;;
I'KINTl':l{ OI'T1U!\iS
B8
~
I(Hi
"h
(Option 410b.), these
substitutions apply.
0
10.
"h
,.
...i."
clus~r opcon is used ~ ;::
W2
*ANY D 1/0 CIRCUIT CARD
~i!
SIlIT(,III'A('KLO(,ATIO~
A21 B12 Bl
~
-=
2..! r2-~
-0
3..-* 2..! r-:.-rt
2.Q 2..! r2-~
~~ ~~
~Q
TP410411
••
••
•o
••
SP1 SPA!
-"""'r-:.-!
c2.Q
I
1.
~!
SWITCH
~~
~~
CIU/PI'I Ism
~
~
2! r!-! --
o
o
"('O!\'TIN('E"
L1(ll1T PATTERNS
"
0
TROUBLE
. " "OS"
11
11
o ~PATTERNS""""'" 02>
.-----.... • .g
o
.~
~-2 ~!
. ".
o
o
"o
•
~ ~
SWIT('H
1.,,\,\11'
+5
'0
ENABLED
DISABLED (REQUIRES 410525)
0
SPB7·8
•
.0
,SPB7·7
•
0-,
ISS 2, SECTION 582·200·300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: l·KD & Up To 2·PTRs (1 Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
OS
3
4
a
I/O
SOCKET
5
5
5
SZ·B
53
54
DEVICE
. DATA SET
KEYBOARD/MON. (1)
PRINTER
Z
PRINTER
(3)
MONITOR
PRINTER,
NOT
PRINT
LOCAL
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD, place a 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon.
Note 2: If only one printer is part of the order and the customer requires that print local operation be
prohibited from the KD, another method can be used: connect printer to S4, option 410411 card for
third device address (B6) to be the printer address, and turn all B5 switches off.
Note 3:
If printers are not part of station, option B5 and B6 switches off on 410411 circuit card.
Page 71
SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC ['
USOC: 4TX + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & 1 PTR (Print Local)
•o •o
•o •9
1'.\ rTEIC\
1.J(;Jrrs+-+~
('():\TI~I'E
swrn'll
l{t';":
•
•
•o
o o
•o •o ••o
• • •
0
0
TROUBLE
PATTERNS.
/
"0•
••
••
1..\:'.11'
ASCII
EBCDIC
'TOr-.:TINt'E"
LIGHT PATTEnSs
••o ••o
• o
"
.\"ell
EBCDIC
t
~_ _- r_ _I_'I_T_S_"_)_T_P_'I_O_IO_:l_ _ _ _~11
11
SWITCH f-"'T'"_S,"_n_'T'I_'_P'T\(_'K-r"'_)(_"r\'_I'I-,°r!'-,-t
PRINTER OPTIONS
NUMBER Cll AI7 AI5AI3 813 BI5 BI7 (;17 CI5
I
SPA5 8PH13 81'B15 SPD20
0
0
0
0
10 1 . 1 0 1 •
2.2.202.
•
•
0
-0-.'.'0
505.5050
&.
&0&0
7.
70
X
X
X
X
0
0
em TP41040N*
3.3.3.30
8.
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
0
11
0
0
-
Trw'tor Ft ... ·d XO Col
Trat'tor F"I'd 132 {'ol
Sp~'l'lfy
17
-
HL!-:ht \1ar~'1n
S wnf' Left \lar'LL\
:~t,
lH.r
19.d
19.4'.
19.f.
20.a
:W.h
21.a
:.!l.h.
22.u
:!2 h
• (I
Ulwr ('1'(
lit
l'apt'T F(l nil .. It \-! " 1.0!iS
POI ){'r
un "It:\'" Lo!>,.,> i.Uld ETX
ro
96 Charadl'r Sl't
!).I <'hurut'h'T SI't
Ext. .\S{,II St't
SIJl~lp
1.1'
Douhle LF
and \'ppt·r C~t.~t' Prill!
LuWt'T ('aSt' Pnnts as l~IH)t'r CaSt'
('aSt' I'nnt~ a~ Error
I.owt'r Cast' I'nnt~ as t· ) )('T ('ast'
LOWI'T
1.0WI'T
'oml~
on
Furnls off
GRAPHIC DESlG:d HO ('oj
Tractor Ft't'd 132 ('01
Rpt-dry Right Mannn
.U.
IS.h.
18.1',
.d.
19.1'.
19.r.
20.a.
20.h.
.a.
21.b.
22.3.
22.h.
.a.
S x'l'if I."ft Mar "n
() apt'r t~
ut
I'apt'r 1<'0 on "I{M" Loss
I'u )('r FO on "R!\I" Loss and i'~TX
9 f'harat.'f.t·r Rt't
64 Charadt'r l-M
":xt. :\8('11 SI·t
Singl(> LF
Douhlt' LJo'
I.owt'r and l Tppt'r ('35(' Print
Luwt'r ('ast' Prinh as l') er Cast.'
I.uwt'r CaSE' Prints as Error
Lowt'r ('ast> Prints as lJ )cr Cast·
omlson
~'orms off
apt'r ut. nt .all·
I
I'apt'r Out (iatl'd \\' IFF
OPTIONS -- TP410403
SPCI1-1
402
STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SELE CT ADDRESS
1st DEVICE ADDRESS
2nd DEVICE ADDRESS
36
a
h
I~TE!l:SIFIEI>()!l:I.Y
B :~::.~~~:~I;:iJ
o
o
&
HII!l:K
,\I.PH,\ 1;\1 XI'~IEHI(, FIELD
,\1.1'11,\ SOT IS Xl'~lEHI(' ~·IEI.D
~
~
S()"K~:T
~
S3
-
Tractor f.'eed 80 Col
Tractor l<'eed 132 Col
7.
-~)(>cify RiJ!h~ Margin
IM.a,
S )(>cirv I.l'(t Marmn
~() 81)E>r I.!('(iyut
IS.h.
IS.c.
19.d.
19.t>.
19.r.
20 ...
20.h.
I'a lef 10'0 on "RM" Loss Wld ETX
Characf;€'r Set
64 CharacU'r S,·t
";xt. ASCII Set
Single U'
Double U'
Papl'r FO on "RM" I.oss
--
i~t T~::r~!l~:'a~I~~~\:aGP 2208. l..owl'r CIlSE" I'rints as F.rror
22.b. I.ower Case Prints as lJnoer Case
onnson
39.h. rurmsoff
48.a. PliIX"r\)uL. "LUau-a ' \0'
48.h. Papt-r Out (iat.t>li
~I
('O:-':TIXI'O('S AL,\H"
1 ~~;(,O:-':IJ '\L:\H~I
.
~cLion_Ft>NI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~6
39~:'.
\\'/Jo'~'
OPTIONS - 410411
·104
SPB7-1
.
~"
PRINTI:R OPTIONS
PRINTER I ()
t t t
·102
~~
.-~':!------ ~OO1
~
0
~~ ~~
c!.~ L.!..~ L.!..~
substitutions apply.
TP410411
0
0
0
0
0
0
.---
.-,--
~,
~~
~,"." ,,,. "..,"".
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
••
••
2.Q .2..Q ~!
SW[TCH
2. .Q ~, ~!
~~-POS[TIONS- ~,
~~
3
Page 76
2!'~
c2.Q
.,
405
•
•
""==""",
...:!.~ ..!.~ ..!.~ r!-~
~,Q
CIU/PIT/SID
•o
•• -••
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
0
2.! ~P- ~12 ~!
I
OPT[ON
"lit'
NUMBER A21 B12 Bl B2 B3 B4 B6 B6 B7 B8
continue
OPTION
401
0
0
0
•
2., ~"
r~
There are no
•
0
•
0
-
'-= '1.
'15
r-P.::: r!-Q H~
2..g
"CONT[NUE"
L[GHTPATTERN
...
'sPC4 'SPi" 'SPCi3
SPC4
TEST
SWITCH
.
•
..
I
10', 0
20
0
...
•
a
h
00
:~
0
SPB7-2 3
~~
SPB7-4
•
0
408
o
o
SPB7-5
n:liMi~ATE II' SUI E~(
B f~;;::glC'
··107 ISum L(J('k S.F. J
E!l:AHI.W
a
h 0 IJlS.\BI.EII
o
0
n:lt~lIs,\'n: \\"~:TX
.
•
SPB7-6
•
0
SPB7-8
•
0
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & 1-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
3
os
DATA SET
.1107
7
5 a 7
S3
S.-C
S2-B
KEYBOARD/MON. (I)
(z)
PRINTER
KEYBOARD/MON. (3)
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD(s), place 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon(s).
Note 2: If printer is not included as part of configuration, option B5 switches off on 410411 circuit card
and option B6 switches for 2nd KD.
Page 77
SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCII 0 EBCDIC 0
tJSOC: 4TX + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & 1-PTR (Print Local)
Ql~ ~
r;l
------'\,~~ ~, j ~ ~
,'''HIl'II'''Hf:H
I'.\TT";I{~
I 0
:.
('()N'I'INI',,;
i__Q
1,lml'I'S-+-+~
.0.
• ••
0.0
00.
0
•
0
0
••
0
0
""iWC4 SPC4
o
SWIT('II
R~r~~11
I{('N
0
0
0
0
r;l r;l
! ~
~ ~ ~
~
r;l
00
O.
00
••
•
0
•
•
•
0
0
•
•
•
••
0",,----____ TROUBLE _____• • •
SPAt 'SPCi3
PATTERNS
SPAa' rsPAi' SPA3
'-to3. 2..2::9 "'2. 3'i __
LAMI'
2.
'12~'
+12 •
+5
1
~O 10 ~.
2~
'30
-:-1 -=. --.. '-4 -=. - -=0
_ =
=
~ -=
50
10 '1'6 ~!
20 ~. ~!
r-;-. ~.
f-"-';:. f-"-Fa
c.!..c:::;
.2..~
'-=
.j
•
SWITCH
POSITIONS_
I
Th('l'('aJ't' no
I!ontinut>
OPTI()~
401
OPTION
405
...-4
"II'
poj
....
....
..
sWITCJlI',\('K (.()('ATl(lN
O.
O.
O.
0
0
0
00
00
O.
0
0
0
O.
O.
0
0
---'::==:::O=~9?
o
o
o
o
o
o
.0
o
,'KINT ..:lt OPTIONS
l'IUNTJo:U I () S()(:K ..:T
Jo'rit"tion Jo'I't't
Tral'Lor ,,'('('(1 KO ('01
Trut'tor fo'(·t·LI 132 ('ut
7.
I".n.
IH.h.
IH.t',
,.t,
19 .• '.
HU,
20.11.
20.h.
t t t
~~ :r,',
22,l1,
22,h,
39.',
:m.h.
·IM ... ,
,IH,h.
STATION !J(H,1.. ADDltBSS
STATION SEU:C'I' ADDlU:SS
Spt'('ify U~ht Margin
S Il'('iry 1.I'rt. Margin
~u upt'r l't'tl_~~~lt
"apt'r )0'0 un "ltM" Luss .
I'a It'r Jo'O un "ltM" I..utlli III K'r ('am'
S3
r-
-
---
-
Furmsorr
III-
1I\1I'r ~ ~lIt ,ut ,att>t .~~,
1'III1I'rOut.Cflltt'li \\")0')0'
r-
~:unmun
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~=L--;==-;;;--;~==============~,
2nd UJo;VI('f>: ADIlRf>;SS(PTR)
ani
1lf>:VIC..: ADUlU;SS
ADDRf>;SS
1st. Uf>:VI('Jo:
'ANY D 110 CIRClliT CARD
Caution: PROMs 450013,450014,
4S0015 & 450016'on 410808 (if
UIH!d) must be issue 3 or later,
He" adjacent. page for Connections.
·102
a D c'OSTI!':I'ot'S .\ 1.,\ H\1
h D I SE('ONIJ ,\L\H~1
.:"; 0 I~TESSIFI":D O:-';!.Y
:IonB:~:I'~~~:~II~:i")
II
h
Page 78
If internal
numeric
cluster
opeon
is used ---""""
(Option 410b.), these
suhstitutions apply.
TP410411
SWITCH I-""T"--.r-"r'-"T-r-""T"-,r-"T'"--r-i
NUMBER A21 B12 Bl B2 B3 B4 B6 ~ B7 B3
patwrns
GRAPIII(' m:HIGNATIONH
7'0
-=
('IV/PIT/SID
...:. =
~; --oo:!:--~~
60
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATIERN
c!.
r- . .
0
0
"
BI.I~K
.\1.1'11.-\ I~ :\1'~IEHI(' FIELD
.\LI'II.\ ~an IS SI'~IEIU(" "'IEI.II
OPTIONS -- 410411
·IM
SPB7-1
•o
SPB7·2-3
11
0
h 0
·lOH
SPB7·6
TEHMISATE \\' E"I X
n;H~U:-';.\TE \\. SL 'U E!\(
00
~ ~,
SPB7-4
•o
·H171~um
a
h
0
0
o
•
•o
•o
SPB7~
I.nt'k S.F.I
E:-.;:\UU:D
IHS.\IH.i':1I
SPB7-8
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & I-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
,
.67
7
567
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
DS
DATA SET
S2-B
S3
S.-C
KEYBOARD MON. I
PRINTER
(Z)
KEYBOARD MON. (3)
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD(s), place 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon(s).
Note 2: If printer is not included as part of configuration, option B5 switches off on 410411 circuit card
and gption B6 switches for 2nd KD.
Page 79
SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
LINE CODE: ASCIIO EBCDICO
USOC: 4TX + 2-(4TOX+ OR 4TPX+)
HANDLES: 2-KDs & I-PTR (Print Local)
••o oo •o oo •o
o •
o •
o •
• •0_____.
1';\'I'T~;ItN
LlCiHTS
CONTINUE
SWITCH
RUN
LAMP
-I2~
+12.
+5
•
0
~---
o
0
c
~
~
-
TEST
SWITCH
TSPC4 rsPC4 fSP"l 'SPCi3
t-;.
t-'e
rt'O tJ'o
~'e
'1'6
rlj
3
t-Ij
~'i
t-t;::
SIj S'O
.~
~
c
3
r-:;-Ij
r-:;-.
~~ ~-
~'i
r.-ro rsD0
3
TROUBLE
PATTERNS
SWITCH _
POSITIONS
4
~~
~
I
SWITCH
There are no
continue
patterns
"m_'_
•••
••
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
1
3
Note 1:
Positions 6 & 12 m ay
contain 2 . 410465s or 2 . 41 04618
or 1 - 410465 & 1 . 410461.
4
5
Note 2:
Same trouble pattem
for both 41046Ns. If pattern
occurs, replace 41046Ns one
at a time until pattern no
longer appears.
6
7
8
o.
9
0
GRAPHIC DESIGNATIONS
OPTION
405
SWITCH PACK LOCATION
NUf\IBER A21 B12 Bl B2
2
OPTION
401
STATION POLL ADDRESS
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
1st DEVICE AD DRESS
2nd DEVICE AD DRESS (PTR)
3rd DEVICE AD DRESS (PTR)
0
'0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B8
402
a 0
b 0
:U"0
See adjacent page for Connections.
~
0
0
0
0
I ~:.d. ~~ g~::~~:!
19.e.
0
I ~~.a.
0
~~
INTENSIFIED ONLY
406
a 0
b 0
& BLINK
ALPHA IN NUMERIC FIELD
ALPHA NOT IN NUMERIC FIELD
~l?a.
•
0
SPB7-2 3
00
~~
SPB7-4
•
0
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19.r.
20.a.
20.b.
Ext. ASCII Set
Single LF
Double LF
21.b.
22.a.
22.b.
~wer ~ct ~pper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Uuuer Case
Lower Case Prints as Error
Lower Case Prints as ~ Case
::orms on
Forms off
P::;::
~~: 8~~~'W!~; I"
410411
404
a 0 TERMINATE W/ETX
b 0 TERMINATE W SUB ENQ .
408
a 0 ASCII
EBCDIC
b
407 (Num Lock S.F.)
a
ENABLED
b
DISABLED
414~8UFFER LOCK
a 0 ENABLED
DISABLED (REQUIRES 410525)
b
o
o
o
o
Page 80
~Ope:':~ o~e~ Rur:;~ Loss
18.b.
IS.c.
48.b.
SPB7-1
CONTINUOUS ALARM
1 SECOND ALARM
I
I ~~.a.
39.b.
I 4~.a.
~J
B~;i~~ ~~I~1
PRINTER I 0 SOCKET
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17.
Specify Right Margin
SPecify Left Margin
r£0
1
_____
~'
:g
~
PRINTER OPTIONS
B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
OPTIONS
*ANY D I/O CIRCU IT CARD
3
cluster opeon is used
cg
(Option 410b.), these~ ~
substitutions apply.
TP410411
•
•
tz
r-Fe
r-3
3
r;--~Fe ~t-;te t-; o
t-:- Pc)
t-;;-tO
CIU IPIT ISID
tj o
L-
'---'=
"CONTINUE"
LIGHT PATTERNS
'SPl 'SPAi 'SPA
tt .. tj ..
t-; D tzFe
_
••
••
•o
••
S
rrrtrrtrtt-
tt-
SPB7-5
0
•
SPB7~
•
•
•0
0
SPB7-8
0
SPB7·7
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-300
MCC - Controller Arrangement Form
HANDLES: 2-KDs & I-PTR (Print Local)
CARD
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
DEVICE
3
DS
DATA SET
.67
7
567
52-B
53
KEYBOARD/MON. I
PRINTER
2
KEYBOARD/MON. (31
s.-c
Note 1: If the customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the KD(s), place 340701
blocking key top over the PRINT LOCAL position of the KD opcon(s).
Note 2: If printer is not included as part of configuration, option B5 switches off on 410411 circuit card
and option B6 switches for 2nd KD.
Page 81
SECTION 582-200-300
4.
REFERENCES
BSP Section
4.01
The following list of literature pertains
to the DATASPEED 40/4 Maxi- and MiniCluster Stations.
BSP Section
582-200-101
582-200-201
Page 82
82 Pages
Titles
Description and Operation
Installation
582-200-212
582-200-401
582-200-701
582-200-751
582-200-210
Keyboard-Display Amplifier
Wiring Diagrams
Disassembly /Reassembly and
Parts
Routine Maintenance
Keyboard Disable Lock
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCoStandard
SECTION 582-200-401
Issue 3, January 1979
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
MAXI-CLUSTER AND MINI-CLUSTER STATION ARRANGEMENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL .....................
1
2.
WIRING DIAGRAMS .............
3
CONTENTS
B.
C.
MAXI-CLUSTER (SCC/DCC)
ARRANGEMENTS ...............
3
D.
MINI-CLUSTER (MCC)
ARRANGEMENTS ...............
4
E.
410200 BACK PANEL (Early
Design) - PHYSICAL LAYOUT .....
5
F.
410201 BACK PANEL (Late
Design) - PHYSICAL LAYOUT .....
6
G.
405150 INTERCONNECTION
MODULE - PHYSICAL
LAyOUT ......................
BACK PANEL AND INTERCONNECTION MODULE WIRING ......
H.
PAGE
405311 and 405312 Controller/
Controller Cable Assemblies SCC,DCC ..................
405237 and 405238 Controller/
Controller Cable Assemblies SCC,DCC ..................
Controller/Printer Cable
Assemblies - DCC, MCC .......
405237 and 405239 Controller/
Printer Cable Assemblies DCC, MCC ..................
Opcon/Monitor Cable
Assemblies - DCC, MCC
(Controller-KD) ..............
346333 Opcon Base Cable
Assembly - DCC, MCC ........
40BSE101 Monitor Base DCC,MCC ..................
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
7
GENERAL
1.
8
This section provides wiring diagrams and
cable components for the DATASPEED
40/4 equipment with the following exceptions:
1.01
BACK PANEL INTERNAL
WIRING .......................
14
40PSU102 POWER SUPPLy ........
22
OPCONS .......................
24
1.
2.
24
3.
4.
5.
25
6.
A.
B.
40K104/DAB (Early Design)
Opcon .....................
40K104/DAB (Late Design),
40K105/CAA, or 40K203/GAB
Opcons ....................
CABLE ASSEMBLIES ............
A.
Data Set Cable Assemblies SCC,MCC ..................
Monitor, see Section 582-213-400.
Monitor Support Cabinet, see Section
582-212-400.
Printer Cabinet, see Section 582-210-400.
Printer, see Section 582-210-400.
40KDA101 Keyboard Display Amplifier,
see Section 582-200-212.
Keyboard Disable Lock Feature for
Attached KD, see Section 582-211-210.
26
1.02
26
This section is reissued to provide coverage for the 40K203/GAB opcon.
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
©1976, 1977, and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 582-200-401
This section is a general revision, therefore marginal arrows have been omitted.
1.03
Abbreviations in this section are defined
. in Section 582-200-101.
This information when used in conjunction
with Testing and Troubleshooting Section
582-200-501 will. aid in locating cabling faults.
1.04
Page 2
1.05
Voltage levels are provided in power supply diagrams only.
Note: When ordering replaceable components,
unless otherwise specified,prefix each part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
s::
>
><
~
h
-
t'"
CABLE
(Fig. H)
DATASET
Note: 40BSE202 keyboard base required
for free-standing 40K203/GAB Opcon.
346936 mod kit required for attached style
40K203/GAB.
c:::
00
~
l;I;l
:xl
00
C')
-C')
t::I
C')
~
:xl
Z
0
t::I
>
0
:xl
>
s::
00
.9
>
:xl
40CAB901/AJ
PEDESTAL
:xl
40C401 STATION CONTROLLER
---- ---- --- ..........
40C402 DEVICE CONTROLLER
~
....
40CAB351/ZZ + 407026 =
40CAB351/AA CABINET
40MN101/AA
......... \
MONITOR'Q
CABLES:
405306- 6 FT
405308 - 25 FT
405237LUP TO
40523952000 FT
40P151
PRINTER ,,..'_ _ _--',
\
\
\_~
l~l IU40''''
i~"=,
I
== ,
Box with paper will
not fit in 40CAB901
cabinet; will fit in
40CAB902 cabinet.
PAPER
UMULATING
ACC RACK
40BSE101
MONITOR
BASE~
CABLES:
405301- 6 FT
405302 - 12 FT
405303 - 25 FT
405304 - 50 FT
405139 - 75 FT
405140 - 100 FT
40CAB251/ZZ + 405562 =
40CAB251/AC CAWNET
(See note.)
i
ry
~
l;I;l
s::
l;I;l
z
~
0
00
j/' 4011500PCON
CONNECTOR
~
Yo\.
405611
ACCORD
401149 OPCON \ "\
CONNECTOR
40K105/CAA,
40K104/DAB, OR
40K104/DAA
OPCON
"_
Fil
00
L r J ' 3 4 6 3 3 3 CABLE
0-,_
(Supplied With
v\:A)
40BSE201
KEYBOARD BASE
(See note.)
40BSE201 Base)
401150
CONNECTOR
00
l;I;l
~
01
00
1>:1
~
l
\:A)
o
o
,i..
o
....
i
~
~
II'>-
~
::c
40CAB901/AJ
PEDESTAL
i:
C".:l
9
~
~ga
40BSE101
MONITOR
CABLES:
BASE
405301- 6 FT
405302 - 12 FT
405303 - 25 FT
405304 - 50 FT
405139 - 75 FT
405140 -100
is:
t':l
~
·00
2::J.--_
"'.l
ciQ"
~
/
40K105/CAA,
40K104/DAB, OR
40KI04/DAA
OPCON
-
401150
CONNECTOR
Note of Fig. 1 applies.
Box with paper will
not fit in 40CAB901
cabinet; will fit in
40CAB904 cabinet.
346333 CABLE
(Supplied With
40BSE201 Base)
~
§
~
01
00
~
~
~
....o
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
410200 BACK PANEL (Early Design) - PHYSICAL LAYOUT
".
.,.
viC .
.,.
======:!J::III!:::::II:===i:::==::!.I::11
l!::W
(Rear View)
(Top View)
Note: +12 V
and -12 V are
used at opcons.
-
0
N
~
~
0
N
N
0
~
CCl
SS!to
S5 through 88
N
CC2
88! to
81,2and3
CC3
S8! to 84,
+5 V, +12 V
and -12 V to 81
through 88
Note: +12 V
and -12 V are
used at opcons_
,
Fig. 4
Page 6
.
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
405150 INTERCONNECTION MODULE - PHYSICAL LAYOUT
Note: A 405150 interconnection module for an SCC is illustrated. Interconnection modules not
illustrated are 405151 for a DCC and 405152 for a MCC.
(Top View)
405181 FUSE
F1- +5.V
F2-+12V
F3 - -12 V
F4 - +5 V
F5--12V
F6 - +12 V
F7 - +5 V
Sl to S4
SltoS4
Sl to S4
FOR ALL MONITORS
S5toS8
S5 to S8
S5 to S8
CABLE WITH CAl
AND CB1 NOT ON
40C403 (MCC)
DATASET
CONNECTOR
NOT ON
40C402
(DCC)~
EARLY DESIGN
(Late design has fuses under
the pane!.)
405150
/
J
~
P
P
Fl
F2
n
.'-
fI
[
[
"
[]OC] [8J IT]
7 9
7
51
9
52
7 9
7 9
54
53
"
S9 NOT USED
P
:::>
:::>
..
,.
F5
Q "
[
[
[
[
,.
.. "
'. [;J
"
"
(Front
View)
~
SSII/O PORTS
0
0
57
[!J
[;]
"
58
0
~
0
25
0
(Not present on
late design)
I'
I!/ 0
~S9
56
"-
S5 THROUGH S8
SSI I/O PORTS NOT
ON 40C403 (MCC)
0
(Side View)
FUSES F5 THROUGH F7
NOT ON 40C403 (MCC)
Fig. 5
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL AND INTERCONNECTION MODULE WIRING (Continued on Pages 9 through 13)
PART OF 410200 OR 410201 BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY
(See Page 10, Note)
CC connects to
CBonPage 9
115VAC
~ FANMOTOA
w-'G BI< -PIOI
(I OF 4 SHOWN)
3
25 __~I---·i..
~----'-TD----C-C~~-~9(
~~_1',
e~I~>-'+--,(-=BN:"I_ _-:-::R,.-ES:::'::-D:='::t-_X_ZO-+,I_A_THRU
Xll4A
"12
58859
26 __Ti__-J..~--~I~T~D----i~I~0(
"0-+--,(,,-P,-1~"'
...-,--=-+SV,--",SE,,-N=S=t---,E
1
I
r:
I~~..-,+-_ _-_-,S,-,IG",.",GN",D"-.t-.I
....
i -70671
.
POWER 9 0- t--J
!~P:SLJ 80-t------l.
.....
+sv
70-j---It----jr
. . .~~-t_)L- r-'3I T5 ''''...,+----R-I -,
ITe: 6
"~'3I
(7)0-,+---------'-'=-"(
I -.
no
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~------------------_
_
• I
I
• I
37
-
SSI"O
}
PORT S.
I
___________ ...J
~f.,
Fig. 6 (Cont)
(Interconnection module
continued on Page :\.1)
Page 9
SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL AND INTERCONNECTION MODULE WIRING (Cont)
(Back panel continued from Page 8)
-.-
PART OF
PART OF
OPCONI
410200
OR
CC connects toCB
on Page 11 or 12
410201
64 8 65
n
1.4
~
MONITOR~
13
10
8)
8
10
6)
4
3
3
~8,~~ ~
~
6
I
14
II
"c" ~
i?
~
?
~
2
12
1(,4
I
5
7)
,
9
II)
9
15
I
12
I
13)
14
I
~2
I
('
I
e'
'" 3 I
(7 I
~
XZ05B
I
71-VERT. GRD.
I
70-VERT.
I
69-HORIZ. GRD.
I
68-HORIZ.
I
I
I
I
I
10 I
t i
-~I----~+~12~V~_I~--~I---2~:._-_~:45
i
r t ! ~ ~(
i
-12V...
I
(Note)
v2C
I
",B
I
",6
I
(4
cc
XZOIA THRU XZI4A
BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY
MONITOR CABLE
68
VIDEO "c"
OUTPUT
(NOT USED
66·VIDEO
IN40C401)
65- HALF INTEN. GRD. (SCC)
64-HALF INTEN.
';" I
2-2<
...
66 8 67
869-;!----~+~5~V---I.~I--~1--~::~:5
67-VIDEO GRD.
+5v FUSED
...
I
+5V FUSED _
t I ~~~<
2
70 8 71-li____-"S""G~.""G"'NO"'.__-fo-
MONITOR?
"0" ~
40MN ~
10lAA ~
~
~
7
~
3
6
Ie
I
2
12
-
I)
I
I
I
8
6
4
I
I
I
I
I
3
5
7
9
!
14
,9
15
10.
-;<
13
V2D XZ06B
~ 21
I 71- VERT. GRD.
I
(23
70-VERT.
I 69-HORIZ. GRD.
(25
I
(27
68-HORIZ.
'" 28
( 26
",24
( 22
I
I
I
I
~I
I.
VIDEO "0"
OUTPUT
(NOTUSED
65- HALF INTEN. GRD. IN 40C401)
(SCC)
64-HALF INTEN.
67-VIDEO GRD.
66-VIDEO
+5v FUSED
..
!
>2,,-1_ _ _..
~_....-_ _ _ _ _ _ _• F3
Tr;::::
S"2t~8
n.
V3A
55 6,7.8
2
.
1
~3~~~---~---~~
51,2,3,4
~
F2n
I
7
To SSI I/O
Ports
PORTS 1 TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
< PORTS 1TO 4
51_
6 _.7_,B_ _...;7,-«
A ·'_S--i
~~.~·_V
__33_A'
PORTS 5 TO 8
'----+0 3~
5,,2.3,4
5
PORTS 1 TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
PORTS 1 TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
SIG. GND.
PORTS 1 TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
: 1
<
Page 12 shows the late design interconnection module circuits.
Page 11
SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL AND INTERCONNECTION MODULE WIRING (Cont)
Examples of connections via
Sl-S8 are shown on Page 13_
(Interconnection module continued from Page 9)
CB connects to
CC on Page 10
CS
(Late Design)
PART OF INTER CONNECTION MODULE
3-3 CA
(See Page 10, Note)
51,2,3'6
~_____-~12~V~) ~~.~~~,----------------~~o---~~
l
2.5A
To SSI I/O
Ports
I 8~
55,6.7,8
PORTS I TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
51,2,3,4
~F2~' ________________~<7'-
/
+5V
'-"2.5A
P
L
55(,7,8
~F3
~
~I~
~~~
NOT USED
Fig. 6 (Cont)
Page 11 shows the early design interconnection module circuits_
Page 12
I ~~
PORTS I TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
51,2,3,"9
pr,7,8
I 9~
r.h~5,6J.8--_t_;
IS5!",7, 8 I <
L __________ SIG. GND. _________
~t:::;::------7}
__~
PORTS I TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
51,2,3,4
44(
PORTS I TO 4
PORTS 5 TO 8
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401·
BACK PANEL AND INTERCONNECTION MODULE WIRING (Cont)
PAR'i'OF
DCC OR MCC
INTERCONNECTION
MODULE
81
THRU
88
, ITO 1(
~
ITC
Page 11
or 12
ITC
6(
-12V
8(
+12V
7(
+5V
5(
{
9(
rJ7
,.
PART OF
OPCON/MONITOR
CABLE
8
THRU
88
ITO I 1(
:b ~
2i
II
II
II
CONTROLLER/PRINTER
CABLE
See
Page 9
~
Page 11
or 12
2(
ITC
3(
ITC
6(
-12V
8(
{~
'"
Page 9
~{
Page 11
or 12
I
~9:
I
1
PRINTER
I
I
I
I
I
~9:
I
{
+12 V
I
:9
PART OF
81
DCCINTER·
THRU
CONNECTION
88
MODULE
ITO
1(
-12V
C:~
::06! ~
7(
+12V
~8:~
:DG
I
I
I
lTD
:o~
I
ITO
OPCON (Fig. 9 or 10)
I
2(
3(
ITO
See
Page 9
Examples of connections
to an opcon, printer and
another controller.
CONTROLLER/CONTROLLER
CABLE
m
81
PART OF
THRU
SCCINTER·
88
CONNECTION
)3 ITC MODULE
)6
ITO
2(
ITC
3(
6(
)1
ITC
ITO
)2
ITO
-12 V
ITC
-12V
8(
)8
+12V
7(
)7
+5V
5(
)5
9(
)9
rF,
'12V
+5 V
}~ 9
Page
}
See
Page 11
or 12
rh
Fig. 6 (Cont)
Page 13
SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Continued on Pages 15 through 21)
COMMON SHIELDING
COMMON BUSING
XZOIA
TO
XZ14A
See Note 1.
SIGNAL
SHIELD
)
1
'" 1/0 eLK
)
3
'" BUS ENABLE CLK
)
6
'" MEMCLK
'a lNTR
'a DEVICE B ENABLE
'a DEVICE A ENABLE
'a TRAP
'a CO
'a Cl
'a C2
) 10
) 12
) 13
) 17
) 19
) 21
) 23
)
25
'" D/A(O)
) 27
'" D/A(I)
) 29
'a
) 31
'" D/A (3)
) 33 :
'a
'a
'a
) 36 :
) 37 :
) 39
) 41
) 43
)57
Note 1:
>>-2___~. Indicates multiple connection, ie,
terminal "2" is common to all
connectors "01A" to "14A".
Fig. 7
Page 14
'II
'II
D/A (8)
D/A(9)
'II
)55
TO
'" D/A (7)
) 49
)63
XZ14A
D/A (6)
)51
45
) 47
XZ01A
D/A (4)
D/A (5)
'a D/A(10)
'a D/A (11)
'a D/A (12)
)
CIRCUIT
COMMON
I
D/A(2)
D/A (13)
'" D/A (14)
'a D/A(15)
'a SPARE
· ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
INTERRUPT GRANT
WIRING
410400
CARD
ASSEMBLY
(IXLA)
XZ01A
I
I
8
I
I
I
Z01A
410401
CARD
ASSEMBLY
(IXLB)
XZ02A
I
8
I
I
I
Z02A
XZ03A
- .-/
L
.,
410·· •
CARD
ASSEMBLY
I
I
I
Z03A
I
to
I
I
I
~
.txita:!
l=--l
Note 2:
The Interrupt _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Grant wiring continues
4J1RD'
from card Z03 to Z04
ASSEMBLY
etc, through Z14. Pin 7
into card, pin 8 out of
Z13A
I
~
:
I
I
I
___ JI
to -
-XZ14A
410· _.
CARD
ASSEMBLY
Z14A
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 15
SECTION 582,200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
POWER AND MISCELLANEOUS WIRING
These wires connect to
40PSUI02 power supply.
X~::ij> --'-,...-,...-,...-
o
c.D
r-
!XI
:l,... -
1
RESERVE
12/ BR
>-~I~~--------~---------.
I
I
+5 V
STANDBY
21
G
I
I
1
sT1~riBY r=4T:__R"'-_ _ _ _-,
I
I
I
-12 V
STANDBY
31
Note 3: The +5 volts for video is interrupted to
complete +5 V circuit. Associated interconnection
module must be connected.
w
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 16
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
CC2
XZ04B
XZ06B
XZ08B
XZ10B
XZ12B
I
I
ITC1
I ~
ITC1
~
I
112 (
XZ03B
XZ05B
XZ07B
XZ09B
XZllB
)281
)27 I
1
1
)26 :
~:
1
I
)23
!
)241
I
I
)21
ll(
)
28:
27:
~
ITC1
~
ITC1
8(
7(
I
~
ITD1
~
ITD1
10 (
9(
)
26:
~
ITD1
)
25
~
ITD1
6(
5(
1O(
~ ITC2
14 (
)
23
~
ITC2
ITC2
13 (
)
24
~
ITC2
)
21
~
ITD2
12(
)
22
~
ITD2
11(
)
19
~
ITC3
14(
) 20
~
ITC3
13(
~
~ ITD2
NONCONNECTED
TERMINALS
I
16 (
)22
~
ITD2
15 (
)19
~ ITC3
18 (
)20
~
ITC3
17 (
)17
~ ITD3
20 (
) 18
ITD3
~
19 (
CC3
I
ITC4
)16
~
~
ITC4
7(
)
13
~
ITD4
9(
)
14:
~ ITD4
8(
y5
)
CC1
I
6(
XZ03B
TO
XZ12B
29
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XZ03B
TO
XZ09B
53
XZ08B
AND
XZ09B
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
9(
I
~
ITD3
15(
~
ITD3
16(
)16 :
~
ITC4
)
~
ITC4
::.
ITD4
2(
ITD4
1(
)18 :
)17 :
I
I
15:
4(
3(
I
I
)14 :
) 13:
::.
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 17
SECTION 582.200·401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
VIDEO A
XZ03B
TO
XZ07B
XZ03B
AND
XZ07B
I
I
71 I
I
71 I
I
I
I
VERTGRD I
I
I
70
VERT
70
69
69
68
HORIZ
68
67
67
66
VIDEO
66
65
65
64
64
+5 VOLTS
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 18
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
VIDEO C
VIDEO B
XZ04B
XZ05B
V1B
V2C
I
I
)71
VERTGRD
)70
VERT
)69
HOIiIZ GRD
)68
HORIZ
)67
)66
)65
)64
I
I 21)
I
I 23)
I
I 25)
)71
VERTGRD
8)
)70
VERT
6)
)69
HORIZGRD
4)
27)
)68
HORIZ
2)
VIDEO GRD
28)
)67
VIDEOGRD
1)
VIDEO
26)
)66
24)
)65
HALF INTEN GRD
22)
)64
HALFINTEN
HALF INTEN GRD
HALFINTEN
+~
VIDEO
::~
+~
I
3)
5)
7)
190~
1~
18
VIDEOD
XZ06B.
V2D
I
)71
/0
/9
/8
)67
)66
)65
)64
VERTGRD
I
I
I
VERT
I
HORI%GRD
HORIZ
VIDEOGRD
21)
23)
I
I 25)
I
I 27)
I
I 28)
I
VIDEO
I 26)
I
HAL~' INTEN GRD I 24)
HALFINTEN
+~
22)
::~
17
SIGGRD
FRMGRDI
18
15)
J\
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 19
SECTION 582.200·401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
XZOIB
I
I
LOAD
1
OSCEN
MUXEN(L)
1<
<
3
4(
R2
XZ02B
XZOIB
XZ02B
1
I
)36:
CYCTRLI
)37 : CYCTRL.
)38 : ACCCLK
)39 :SEQCTRL +
)40 :
36(
37(
38(
39(
40(
)23 1
DAIO
25 (
DAIl
26 (
DA12
27 (
DAl3
28(
DAl4
29(
) 66 : MUX SEL 3
: 66 (
DA16
30 (
STAT CTRL 2 : 32 (
)66:
)67:
)69:
MUXSELI
166(
1
: 67(
: 69(
STAT CTRL 1:
33 (
) 70:
RUN IN
: 70 (
STAT CTRL.
I
34
) 71
MUXSEL+
,71 (
:
36<
STAT CTRL 3 : 31 (
CNTEN
<
I
MUXSEL2
See Note 4.
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 20
Note 4:
Two other
circuits exist but are
not used. One is
XZ01B.55 to
XZ02B.55. The
other is XZ01B.68
to XZ02B.68.
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
BACK PANEL INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
DAA
XZI0B
TO
XZ12B
XZ03B
TO
XZ09B
I
I
I
)71
~
~
XZ03B
TO
XZ12B
'- DPC
) 70
'-DCT
)69
'- D2
y8
'- TTO
I
)33
I
I
'- RT
~--'-AT
30
I
)12
I
~;--~CUT
)11
I
I
I
'-VTE
)66
'- TOOH
) 65
'- ST
)64
'- MC
)63
DA
I
)-!Q--+--~ RO
) 44:
'- SCR
) 43
'-. SCT
) 42
'- RI
) 41
) 67
,
'- DRI
'- DTI
6(
5 /
) 60
,-DR
"-
y9
'- DT
9(
) 58
'- RI
5(
10(
) 57
'- CCT
4(
11(
)56
\, DA
)55
'- OH
,
)38
'- CO
12(
~'
'- SRD
13 (
'- RTS
'- SD
)34
,-STD
I
1:
~
) 54
I
) 53
9(
8(
\
6(
I
t
14 (
15 (
t
I
I
) 61
)39
~'
I
: 10 (
) 62
)40
) 35
LA
7(
'. RD
'- DSR
, CTS
'- TODA
'- TST
'-. SH
'- -12 V
'- +12 V
1:
:
2
1:~
: 1\
I 16(
1
XZ03B
TO
XZ12B
) 52
'- NB4
17 (
) 51
'- NB3
18(
) 50
'- NB2
19(
) 49
4. NBI
4. DPR
4. PND
4. DLO
4. CRQ
20 (
)48
) 47 '
) 46
)45
Not used
21(
: 22(
: 23 (
r
: 24(
Fig. 7 (Cont)
Page 21
SECTION 582-200-401
40PSU102 POWER SUPPLY
BK
TI
II
I
II
J
101
P
(3~,
W-G
II
106
I
(4)
ZOVAC
P
-
I
I
107
I
TP403725
HEAT SINK
I~,~~~-.J
I'
(1),
I
L-2RL-~~====~~~G~-----------A
I
~--='--+--~(2)1
'liJ
I
P
I
II (5)
r.-_R!!--.,.<
103
I
I
I ~"'35-V':"'ilC--i-< '~4
II 5 VAC
INPUT
III I
112
I
I
I
('':7):---I.>.R--i-(
1~5
BRAID
(NC)
BRAID
BRAID
G
L--J-,=~112
L-_ _-I
L -____________________~~~
GND
I -, ,+5
U50MS
'~O
119
I
J
+ 48VOC ,
,
118
L -____________________~~-------------------B
~------~------~-._------------C
~--------------------------------~-------------------D
Note 1:
Straps A, B, and C must be left installed.
Note 2:
ML-1 and ML-2 are components on 410010 circuit card.
Fig. 8
Page 22
ISS 3, SECTION 582·200-401
40PSUI02 POWER SUPPLY (Cont)
125 2
113 I
A
~'23
,
I
P- -
P
tPY_j-J
I /129
~ .. I
"
W
J
"~~
°
P
I
115
I
I
I
'
,,~
,
I"
BK
~
P
,I
II
,
9
"
8
I
6
5
I
..
/
..
~L
3
4
L-
tJ.-~
~:
°
°
II~ ~~
~
(7)
R
(8)
BK
(3)
P
~
122
I
2
TP410011 CC
J
!12V DC
r;=ULATOR
-+<
~
~
:/
I
140
I
2
4
G
(5)
-+<
~
-2...(
I
(6)
I
I
B
S
TP403726
HEAT SINK
P
(4)
J
06
3
,JOT USED
BK
R
-l_X
(6)
G
P
P-
3
TP410012 CC
+5V DC
REGULATOR
I
P
118 , I
I '1
-
131 2
.(111
...L5 )
Y~
P
120" I
bJ
G
o·
I
113
R
f,0
7
R
2
1
102
I
G
/m~nlSEt.lBLY
W{;
1 ,.
116
1/130
"p
121 , I
L
J
G
P~
-'-I
3
P
I'
135
I
2
J
S
QI
3
4
Jl
110 I
P¥
- -
c
D----------------------------------------------------------~-
Fig. 8 (Cont)
Page 23
SECTION 582-200-401
OPCONS
A.
40K104/DAB (Early Design) Opcon
J1
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (N)
...-..........-o-f-4 A12 )--0 VSS (+12 V DC)
All
)--0 +12 V
Jl ALARM
ON
ALARM OFF
-12 V
~ +12 V
r
A10 ,------ -12 V..J
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (I)
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (N)
3
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (I)
6
r
A9 ~ +_1102 Vv
,-----..J
LOOP-BACK ENABLE ON
LOOP-BACK ENABLE OFF
LOOP-BACK TEST ON
LOOP-BACK TEST OFF
AS
)--0 2 HZ CLOCK
A7
)--0 VDD (-12 V DC)
+12 V /1 /1
-12VJ U L
B3
SPARE
B4
SPARE
0
VSS (+12 V DC)
VDD (-12 V DC)
S
CHASSIS GND
9
(P)
B1
(W)
B2
Not
present
on some
opcons.
J1 CONNECTOR
(401149)
A6 '--------'" +12 V r SPACE
,------ -12 V...J MARK
A5 '--------"'112 KHZ CLOCK +12 V
,------12 V
A4 '--------'" +12 V r
,------ -12 V..J
A2 '-------56 KHZ CLOCK +12 V
".----..
-12 V
A1
LEGEND
• Male Pin
x No Pin Present
)----0 VCC (-7 V DC)
410054
ON KEYBOARD SIDE FRAME
Fig. 9
Page 24
SPACE
MARK
A3 '---------56 KHZ CLOCK +12 V
".----..
-12 V
(Viewed From
Terminal Side)
JlJl.
JlJl.
JlJl.
ISS 3, SECTION 582·200·401
B.
40K104/DAB (Late Design), 40K105/CAA, or 40K203/GAB Opcons
I
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (N)
/
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (I)
2 /
J1
(S)
,....,
B8
"'
(BL)
B7
"
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (N)
3 /
(Y)
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (I)
6 /
(R)
B5
"
(BR)
B3
5 L
(G)
B4
VSS (+12 V DC)
7 /
(P)
B1
8
/
I (0)
B2
V24 (-12 V DC)
"
I
SPARE
CHASSIS GND
4
~
3
"'
4
~
1
B6
VGGl (OV)
2
/
"
"
"' II
9
I
/ I
" I
(G)
'-'
Jl CONNECTOR
(401149)
"•••,
..
I
.~
3
6
L":
9
~
(Viewed From
Terminal Side)
LEGEND
• Male Pin
KEYSWITCH LOGIC
ONKEYBO ARD SIDE FRAME
Fig. 10
Page 25
SECTION 582-200-401
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
A.
Data Set Cable Assemblies - SCC, MCC
PART NUMBER
LENGTH
341896
408065
408066
408067
408068
5 Ft
7 Ft
12 Ft
25 Ft
50 Ft
These cables are shown
on following page.
D
341977
341978
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
(
1
BK
1
(
2
BR
2
(
3
R
3
4
0
4
(
(
(
(
(
(
5
Y
5
(
6
G
(
7
BL
6
7
(
II
P
8
( 11
S
11
(
12
15
17
(
(
(
(
( 12
W
( 15
W-BK
(
W-BR
17
W-R
(
22 I
WoO
,
W-y
/'
I
(
(
20
22
(
23
(
/
DATASET
END
\
(
(
SCCORMCC
END
3"972("J~~.....----
341978
341873
341973 (15)
Fig. 11
Page 26
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
A.
Data Set Cable Assemblies - SCC, MCC (Cont)
341977
341978
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
OUTER SHIELD
BR
R
i!ii
o
y
G
INNER SHIELD
~
~
~
I I I I
12 I
15
I
i : :i
17 I
20 I
22 I
<
<
23 I
25 I
I::I
I I
II
u )
p
S
W-G
12
~
23
<
BK
W-BR
W·R
W·O
W-y
BL
25
<
\
SCCORMCC
END
I
400~Q
<
341973 (16)
341978
Fig. 11 (Cont)
Page 27
SECTION 582-200-401
B.
405311 and 405312 Controller/Controller Cable Assemblies - SCC, DCC
401623
401623
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
I
(
(
(
(
(
1 II"'''
II
2 Iii
3 I I'
6
I' I
"
9 IX
I' ,
I
LATE
DESIGN
EARLY
DE\GN*
I
I
1
I
I
R
W-R
W-Y
W-G
WOo
I3
y
G
0
SHIELD
SHIELD
I
6
I
2
I
)
)
)
1
/
DCC
END
\
IDTAGS
~-337826
401716~. ~
~
~
401623
~
~341648(5)
~'01'"
~'01'"
~337826
~
337826
*Early design cables contain two
unused wires (W-BR and W-BK).
Fig. 12
Page 28
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
C.
405237 and 405238 Controller/Controller Cable Assemblies - SCC, DCC
LATE DESIGN _ _--,.
(Shielded)
405389 TERMINATION BOX.
WESTERN ELECTRIC
\
42A CONNECTOR BLOCK
(4 Terminals) OR EQUIVALEN'l
'c.
BK
-('1-- - ~'--4--!+---=-_---'-I (#')-+---(~'-+"-+---~
~~+----'-'----'-'-I
h- - - -
(#)-+----I-j -t - - G;0-I--\-t.j- - -
-r----t'-<.IJ
1-=-----+-'t-+-7
--,-.--..-...."
I-=c:.----+T-ir---O
--J---H~ 1-=~--::"'---4-t--7--?
l.6'\-I-----I.-l- - - -
-.-------r-v/)
31248RM OR TELEPHONE
COMPANY SUPPLIED CABLE
(Note 2)
Note 1: If shielded cable is used,
late design cables with colors shown
(or 405311 cable cut in two) and l!-.
Note 2: Telephone Company
supplied cable must consist of
two twisted pairs of wire.
337826-~
~~401716
~_
W-337826
401716~
~
.,""~~'"~'-
~
L~~~
~
\--:~~~~
ll!tll """") '\,
320410 (5)
~
~
_
~
405243
(Yellow)
"L,)~
~-,"m6
401623
341705
I
401716
n-337826
A
-"""'337826
Fig. 13
Page 29
SECTION 582-200-401
D.
Controller/Printer Cable Assemblies - DCC, MCC
PART NUMBER LENGTH
6 Ft
405306
405308
25 Ft
LATE
DESIGN
401623
..
"
EARLY
DESIGN
401150
CONNECTOR
/1,,,
\R
I
R
,Il(
/2111
"3
II
Y
G
0
G
12(
3
0
Y
!6(
'\:
I II
CONNECTOR
S:'::
~~--=---+!..~________ ~!"':!'_ -"~L!' ___ ~
Dee 0;:;;;:
I
I
""
END
\
401~623
~05209
~".
180904__
(4)
~341647(1-
341705 (4)
~"'716
~t a:
341691
CONNECTOR
.: _______ ~!!~!!~ _____________ ....J~!-4_<<: a@
I I
W·O
(S): 3 <
M
V
I
D
E
o
N
o
N
I
>
> 10
I
II
Y
(W)
I
I
I
G
(W·BK)
>12
I
II
P
(W.Q)
I
\,J
fj
<
111 <
12
114
T
o
R
<
Note 1: Gray vinyl cables (SSI side) have two spare wires (W-O and P). Refer to Section 582-200-210 for
application of an opcon/monitor cable when a KDA is part of the station.
Note 2:
See Page 33 for cable parts.
Fig. 16
Page 32
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
F.
Opcon/Monitor Cable Assemblies - DCC, MCC (Controller-KD) (Cont)
337826~
V
401623
/,....-...405136
~
~
.~
f?_405209
.~
(White)
I~.
Q
401150
'.
'-~
,
341648 (8)
~405136
n__
337826
405090
~405208
1~
312918
CABLE TIE
2
Fig. 16 (Cont)
Page 33
SECTION 582-200-401
G.
346333 Opcon Base Cable Assembly - DCC, MCC
(Application: Free·Standing KD)
401623
401150
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
-Elil
"
R
-E2
-E 3
I I
y
0
I I
II
<4
I i
I I
I I
G
-E 7
::
I
.< 5
...
(6
8
I I
I I
l(
2(
3<
"
4<
W-R
<
II
6<
: i
7<
W-Y
I I
8<
W
I I
I I
I
"
II
I I
II
BL (See Note)
I I
II
5
~--------~~---------~
~ITOR
/
END
337826
"\.
401623 ,
~
,
\
"1717~
OPCON
_
\
401150
E/
~\U
""-'4164' (9)
~
401717
320420
~
337826
Note:
Late design cables may not have unused blue iead.
Fig. 17
Page 34
G
GROUND SCREW
ON OPCON BASE
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-401
H.
40BSElIll Monitor Base - DCC, MCC
(Application: Free-Standing KD)
f::=~'::::::::lj- POWER SWITCH
11 BK
1
BK
G
3
3
0 0 0
1
·0 00
o 0 0
TOJ14
OF MONITOR
OOO~
IP 0
W
405614 AC
DISTRIBUTION
ASSEMBJ,Y
ffi
l
O:!
CL
405611
CABLE
ASSEMBLY
(Not Part of Base)
0:\
Fig. 18
Page 35
35 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-501
Issue 4, ,January 1979
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
MAXI-CLUSTER AND MINI-CLUSTER STATION ARRANGEMENTS
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL....................
1
Troubles isolated to the data set, telephone lines, or associated systems are not
analyzed in this section.
2.
TESTS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.04
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST. .. . . ..
3
LOCAL TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
A.
.
.
.
12
14
.
27
ON-LINE TESTS ............... .
30
B.
C.
D.
A.
KD/ConLlOlier Local Test ....
Printer Local Tests .........
KD Local Test .............
Data Set Analog Loopback
Self Test .................
Preliminary On-Line
Testing ..................
On-Line Test Methods .......
Checkout of Received
Printer Message ............
Checkout of Received
KD Message ...............
Completion of End-to-End
Installation Test ...........
7
.
.
30
30
.
34
.
34
.
35
3.
TROUBLESHOOTING .......... .
35
1.
CIRCUIT CARD
COMP ATIBILITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.
47
GENERAL
1.01
This section includes all testing of the
Synchronous DATASPEED 40/4 maxicluster and mini-cluster station arrangements
(hereafter referred to as 40/4 type). It also
includes trouble analysis.
1.02
The reason for reissue of this section is to
delete information for the 251A1 TDU
since it will not be offered with these stations.
1.03
The correction of troubles in this section
is based on replacement of defective
major subassemblies (eg, monitor, opcon, printer,
power supply, etc). Field level repair of the major
subassemblies are given in Service Manual 325-057 .
Note:
Before replacing PROM or EPROM circuit cards in a controller, see 4. CIRCUIT CARD
COMPATIBILITY.
1.05
See Section 582-200-701 for grounding
strap locations.
Note: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each
part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
1.06
Test switches and indicators are shown in
Fig. 1.
Note: The operation of test switches and indicators should be done under the direction of
Parts 2. TESTS and 3. TROUBLESHOOTING of
this section or referenced sections.
1.07
Reference Sections
582-200-101 _.
582-200-201 582-200-212 582-200-300 582-200-401 582-200-701 582-200-751 582-211-210 -
Description and Operation
Installation
Keyboard Display Amplifier
Maintenance Controller
Arrangements
Wiring Diagrams
Disassembly /Reassembly and
Parts
Routine Maintenance
Keyboard Disable Lock
1.08
ASCII indicates American
National
Standard Code for Information Interchange. EBCDIC indicates Extended Binary Coded
Decimal Interchange Code.
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
© 1973,1975,1976.1977,1978, and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 582-200-501
----,
Free-Standing
KD
,
(Rear View)
Attached KD
(Mounted on Pedestal)
40BSE101
KD BASE
16
HIGH
VOLTAGE
j
19 (FILAMENT)
r),..
i"l! -~
r
l,'"
SCC, DCC, MCC
(Controller)
DATA
INDICATORS
PS2
CABINET AC SWITCH
(Also Located on Rear
of 40BSE101 KD Base)
PATTERN
LAMPS
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT BREAKER
,":J
'f))"
/
I
Indicator
TS -- Test Switch
F -- Fuses and Circuit Breaker
PS - Power Switch
FS - Functional Switch
IS -- Interlock Switch
Tractor Feed Printer
(in cabinet)
/
CONTINUE
SWITCH
Friction Feed Printer
(in cabinet)
OFF
(132- Column
Only)
PSI
PHI:\TEH \'()\n:l{
S\\IT('II
Page 2
PSI
PEDESTAL
ACSWITCH
Fig. 1
RUN
LAMP
405181
(Earlier)
321955
(Later)
FUSES
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
2.
TESTS
2.03
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST
The Controller Self-Test should be performed on each controller in the station.
This test requires the use of the Controller Arrangement Form whic.h is taped to the inside cover of
the controller.
2.01
2.02
If during a controller self-test, a circuit card
is indicated to be defective per the selftest trouble pattern, perform the following before
replacing the card:
(a) Remove card and check for bent connector
pins.
(b) If circuit card contains sockets, make sure
all IC packs are firmly seated.
(c) Reinstall circuit card and make sure card
is firmly seated in connector.
(d) Perform the self-test agam.
Chart 1 is divided into two parts; Steps 1
through 4 and Steps 5 through 7. In the
first part, each controller is checked before cabling
is connected to other controllers or devices. In
the second part, the controller cabling is connected
to other controllers or devices.
Warning:
removin1{
Til(' ac [Jower must be OFF before
repiacinga circuit card.
()r
1
2
3
PA'ITERN LAMPS
CONTINUE SWITCH
TEST SWITCH
RUN LAMP
40PSUI02
-{12 ~
VOLTAGE LAMPS
+12 0
+5 0
If the circuit card is still indicated as defective,
then replace the card.
4
.:;: -.,...,.
o
o
o
o
o
J.<'ig.2
CHART 1
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
1
PRO(,EDl1hE
('olllw('1
at· ('ahll' from
to powl'r soun·l'.
Tlirn on lll'dl'stal at·
switt-h.
(On ral'k mount, plug in
('ontrolll'r lIl' powl'r ('ord
10 liS \' al'.)
pl'(h~stal
.\'01" :
!-\t.
SlIn'
CORRECT RESPONSE
All pOWl'r supply voltagl' lamps
lit.
ANALYSIS
P('rform 40PSUI02 pOWl'r
supply analysis.
thaI
l"I\\'l'r sLlppl~' l'irl'lllt
hrl'akl'r is on (down I.
2
( )hSt,rv('
Run lamp lit on 410400.
1st pattern lamp (toward
rear of controller) on
410401 is dimly lit.
a. Check switches on all
circuit cards per Controller Arrangement Form.
b. Perform power supply
analysis (even if all lamps
are lit).
Note: If run lamp is blinking, go
to Chart 7.
c. Remove all circuit cards
except 410400, 410401,
4108XX and 4109XX
(PROM version), or
4105XX (EPROM version),
If two 41046X cards are
present, remove only the
one closest to the power
supply.
(Continued on Pagl'
·1)
Page
a
SECTION 5R2-200-501
CHART 1 (Cmt)
CONTIWLU:({ SELF-TEST I'IW(,EIlt:RES
sOn:!'
I'HOCEDl'HE
(,OR({E(,T HES!'ONSE
,\N;\LYSIS
,
2
(Cont)
;1
If run lamp is still off but correct
power supply voltages are
measured, one of cards present
(or back panel) is at fault. If
lamp is on, replace removed
cards one at a time until lamp
goes off. Card causing lamp to
go off is at fault.
Depress and hold TEST
.switch (Fig. 2).
All pattern lamps on 410401
circuit card light.
u. I \()·I01. ·110·100.
It. I"'rforlll Jl()wt'r 'lIppl~'
al1al~·sis.
I
Release self-test switch.
,
All pattern lamps go off.
Pattern and run lamps may
flicker during test. While
observing light patterns,
disregard the display on
monitor(s) connected to
a DCC or MCC.
If trouble pattern appears on
pattern lamps, match the
pattern against those shown
under the circuit cards on
Controller Arrangement Form;
replace circuit card to which
the pattern relates.
Note 1: Disregard lamps on
410408, 410409 or 410411
circuit card during test.
Note: If troUble pattern
that appears is shown under
two .circuit cards, replace cards
one at a time. Card replaced
prior to trouble pattern not
showing up is at fault.
After 1 to 2 minutes, the
pattern lamps should blink
sequentially for about 15
seconds; however, if a continue pattern appears during
test (refer to applicable
Controller Arrangement
Form); depress the continue
switch. The pattern lamps will
again go off and test will
resume.
Note 2: There may be more
than one continue pattern.
Each time a continue pattern
occurs, depress the continue
switch. Run lamp extinguishes
when continue pattern appears
and blinks during sequential
sequence. After sequential
blink pattern on pattern lamps,
run lamp should light indicating
test in completed.
Page 4
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 1 (Cont)
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
5
PROCEDURE
If performing the first part
of Chart 1, Steps 1 through 4
(cabling not connected to
other con trollers or devices),
the self-test is completed;
turn off power to controller.
CORRECT RESPONSE
ANALYSIS
The display pattern appears
corresponding to the 41043N
circuit card used. Sample displays follow (Fig. 3). Check
that cursor moves through all
positions on display.
If performing the second
part of Chart 1, Steps 5
through 7 (cabling connected to other controllers
or devices), check the pattern on the monitor and
continue with Steps 5
through 7.
• Monitor support cabinet or
support base ac switch off.
• Monitor power switch off (turn
counterclockwise for on).
• Monitor brightness low (turn
counterclockwise for high).
• 41043N circuit card associated with monitor.
ASSOCIATED
41043N IN
MONITOR CONNECTED
CARD POS.
TO VIDEO CONNECTOR
3
A
t------ 4_______
B
1-----5
C
6
D
• Monitor fuse on interconnection module.
• Cable (KD).
6
If there is more than one
Same as Step 4.
Same as Step 4.
Opcons are enabled (local
light(s) on). Cursor in home position on all monitors. Run lamp
ON. 1st pattern lamp (toward
rear of controller) is dimly lit.
If local lamps on opcons do not
light, determine which SSI
sockets the opcons are connected to and check the associated 410406 circuit card and
fuses per the following:
monitor, depress continue
switcht and check monitor
2. Repeat this step for all
monitors associated with
the DCC or MCC.
7
To return controller to normal operating mode, push
continue switch. Proceed
to Chart 2, KD/Controller
Local Test Procedures.
!
OPCONS
ASSOCIA TED
I ASSOCIATED INTERCONNECT MODULE FUSES
CONNECTED :
410406 CIRCUIT 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------TO ~~I ~QJ:t TS -t~-A~D IN_C;:AltD PO§,: _I EAR!.._Y"y_EBSlQ~J~_o~_21. __LAJ'~_VER~IQ.l'i_
r:t"THROUGH 4
5 OR 7
.i
F2 AND F3
F1 (+12 Volt) and
4 OR 6 OR 8
5 THROUGH 7
F5 AND F6
F2 (-12 Volt)
j
I
tIt th!' continue switch is not depressed, the display pattern will remain on monitor for approximately
fivp minutes. The pattern will then automatically switch to the next monitor. This is especially useful
wlH'n monitors are located in different rooms. Disregard the display on other monitors connected to a
DC'C or MCC whilp checking a monitor.
Note 1: After performing the first or second part of Chart 1, it may be necessary to turn the ac power
off, then on. If this action is not performed, the Chart 2, KDjController Local Test Procedures may be
pH.'vented from operating when LCL/TST key is depressed.
Note 2: Early version interconnects module fuses F1 on DCC or MCC, F7 on DCC, and F1 through F7
on sec are not used at this time and may bp used as spares.
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 1 (Cont)
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST PROCEDURES
Display Pattern for a 410431 D I/O Circuit Card - ASCII - JJp-Low
* NORMAL
SH Sx Ex ET EQ AK BL BS.
UNDERLINED
HALF
INTENSIFIED
@ A
,
#
"
.!
a
$
%
&
=VT FF-SO
( ) ,
/
B
C
0
E
F
G H I J
b
c
d
e
f
9
h i j
SI DL 0 I O2 0 3 D~ NK Sy EB CN EM SB EC FS Gs Ps Us
+
I
0
K
L M N
k
I
m n
~
3
5
6
7
8
9
<
>
,
,
P Q R
S
T
U
V W x
y
Z
q
5
t
u
v
x
y
z
p
0
2
r
w
[
J
?
..... 11
Display Pattern for a 410432 D I/O Circuit Card - ASCII - Line Drawing
* NORMAL
UNDER LI NED
HALF
OI23~,678
"#$%&/()'
@ A
C
0
L
J
•• 1111'
INTENSIFIED
E
G H I J
8
F
K
L M N
I
-- I
0
P Q R
I
I
STU
UNDERLINED
@
A
INTENSIFIED'
A
HALF
"
#
"
#
$ % & /
%
&
/
C
\
A
8
C
abc
,
J "
0123~5678
<
> ?
o
<
>
~
I
5
6
7
8
r-'J"
0
E
F
G H I J
d
e
f
9
h
i j
K
L M N
kim
n
?
~lonocast'
~.
EBCOIC
?
l 'p-Low
0123~56789
@
[
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
UNDERLI NED
INTENSIFIED
Z
~'J"
Display Pattt'rn for a 4104350 I/O Circuit Card
HALF
y
>
PQRSTUVWXYZ
DEFGHIJKLMN
8
W x
<
\
Display Pattern for a 410434 D I/O Circuit Card - ASCII
• NORMAL
V
:
0
P Q
R
STU
V
W x
Y
Z
0
P
q
r
stu
v
w
y
z
x
:
<
-,
,
:
<
>
I
?
¢
DIsplay Pattern for a 410436 D I/O Circuit Card - EBCOIC' :'.lonocasl'
"
• NORMA L
UNDERLINED
HALF
%
#
&
/OI23~56789
/
0123~56789
"#$%&1
@A8CDEFGHIJKLMN
I NTENS I F I ED @
ABC
0
E
F
G H I J
K
L M N 0
Fig. 3
Page 6
P
Q R
P
Q R
STU
V
W x
Y
Z
-,
,
I
>
?
>
?
¢
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
test is performed during customer operations of
the other KD devices (if present), SEND operation
will be momentarily interrupted during the test.
LOCAL TESTS
A.
KD/Controller Local Test
2.04
ChaIt 2 procedures should be performed
on each KD device in the station. After
successful completion of the chart for all KDs,
proceed to Chart 3, Printer Local Test Procedures. If printer is not part of station, proceed
to Chart 4, KD Local Test Procedures. If this
Note:
If maxi-cluster station is EBCDIC but
SCC is not EPROM version, the following four
characters: -, , ! , I , and ¢ will be displayed
in place of the ¢ , I , ! , and -, device addresses,
respectively. This only pertains to local test,
refer to Fig. 4.
CHART 2
KD/CONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
1
CORRECT RESONSE
PROCEDURE
Note: Start with Step 1
if KD has a typewriter
style opcon. Start with
Step 7 if KD has an
internal numeric cluster
style opcon.
Depress LOCAL if the key
is not lit. Request a local
test by depressing the
L/TST key while CONTROL key is held down.
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
The following message is displayed on the monitor.
-If Step 1 is attempted
following a controller self
test, it may be required to
tum ac power off then on to
allow operation.
-Check cabling.
-Check fuses on interconnect
module.
/
LOC.\L TEST \IODE
l;See Note 5.
TEST \IESS.V;E
TilE (WI(,K IlHo\\S FOX ,Jl"\IPED OVE]{ TilE L\ZY
DO(;'S 1l.\CK 01Z:j·I;'67H\l TI\IES.
I
TO TEST L()OP·Il.\CK I'ltESS S I l - - - - - - - - f / TO I{ESET PHESS C L F \ I { _ - - - - - -_ _ _---;l.../
SU: \1.\:\1.\1, FOH IWl.\ILS
I
r==
this area, replace the D I/O
circuit card (41043N) for
device being tested.
(See Chart 1, Step 5.)
1
the wrong line code appears,
[~==:~.... --------tl--I,
7
check SPC17-6 of 410403 or
I 01----;7-
(- -
lV-See Note 3.
~If the word BAD appears in
-)~
If
-
SPB7-6 of 410411 circuit card.
SWItch ON = ASCII
Switch OFF = EBCDIC
Dependmg on the line code chosen, the word
ASCII or EBCDIC will appear in this area.
DEVICE ~DDRESS (See Note in 2.04.) e
STATION SELECT ADDRESS (See note ci
STATION POLL ADDRESS (See Note 4.)
In
~If addresses are incorrect per
Fig 4 If
Note 1: If the above message is not responded to within
20 seconds, the display will clear and the test will be automatically canceled.
Note 2: The QUICK BROWN FOX ... message may be
changed provided that the first character remains a "T".
If "T" is changed to any other character, the display will
clear and the test will be canceled when SIR is depressed.
)
.
customer order and FIg. 4,
check switches selected on
410403 or 410411 circuit card
and all controller and device
connections per Controller
Arrangement Form.
(Notes 3, 4 and 5 on Page 8.)
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 2 (Cont)
KDICONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
PROCEDURE
CORRECT RESPONSE
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
Note 3:. Besides CLEAR key, depression of any P A or PF key will clear display and cancel
test. MCC only: Test should be run to completion (Step 2), failure to do so will cause Print
Local operation to fail; to correct, perform Steps 1 and 2.
Note 4: Three address characters will be present within the parentheses. If an address
character(s) is not displayed, it is assumed that the address character(s) is SPACE.
Note 5: For EPROM version SCC, the words "OR ENTER" will appear after "SIR". For
EPROM version MCC with Internal Numeric Cluster Opcon, the word "ENTER" will appear
in place of "SIR".
2
Depress SIR key.
• If SIR indicator is flashing, go
If received without error, the
following message will appear
on the monitor. If optioned
for I-second alarm, alarm will
sound once and LOCAL indicator should light. If optioned
for continuous alarm, alarm will
sound repeatedly until LOCAL
key is manually depressed.
to Step 4, Local Test Analysis.
.If <'test failed" message is
received, go to Step 4,
Pro -edure.
THE lil'WK HIW\\,:\ FOX ,j{'\IPElJ ()\,EH THE
LAZY ()()(;'S BACK 0l2:ll;,67HH Tl\IES.
Note: If any characters in th(' QUICK BROWN FOX, , .
message wer(' changed befon' depressing SIR indicator,
those charact('rs will appear in the abov(' message.
3
·1
Page 8
Depress CLEAR key.
Depress LOCAL key if
station is not connected to
LCU.
If message is received with
an eITor, the following
m('ssage will be displayed
on the monitor.
Test is complet('d. Display is
cleared. Proceed to Step 6.
II
l
I
S~m2tom
/
-- Flashing SIR
Indicator
• Normal Local Test:
Replace 410408 (or 41040H
or 410411 ) or chec k cable
between SCC and DCC.
/'
'\
• Analog Loopback Test:
'*TEST F.\ILE()*·
Check data set or data set
cable. Replace 410408 (or
TEST \IESSA(;E
4104090r410411). Replace
(~ontroller back panel or interTHE lil'l('K BIW\\\ H)X .Jl\ll'EI> O\U{ 1m:
conn('ction module. (Data set
LAZY D()(;'S B.\(,K 0l2:ll;)f;7H~1 Tl\IES
DSR not "on" in AL mode
-See
can cause this failurp.)
lu:n:ST J.()()J'B.\(,K. I'Hl·:SS S I{ - Note
• Far-End Digital Loopback
TO HESET I'I{ESS ('U:.\I{
5 of
Tt'st: Cht'c k far-end data set
SU: \1.\\I.\L H)i{ m:I.\ILS
Step 1.
or ('hec k facilities betw('en
data sets.
I
I
(- -)
Note 1: Local test is cancplpd
by symptom.
Note 2: Deprpss LOCAL key
Go to Step 5.
to stop flashing SIR indicator.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 2 (Cont)
KD/CONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
PROCEDURE
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
CORRECT REPONSE
5
Depress LOCAL key if
station is not connected to
LCU. Retry Steps 1 and 2
once, then cancel test by
depressing CLEAR key,
If test still fails, run controller
self-tests. Replace associated
410406 circuit card (see
Chart 1, Step 7). Replace
410408 or 410409 or 410411
circuit card.
6
If local test of all KD devices is successfully completed, continue to Chart 3 and Chart 4.
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
(Steps 7 through 15)
Requ"st a local test by
depressing the L/TST key
and the ALPHA key
simultaneously.
7
/
The following message is
displayed on the monitor.
- If Step 7 is attempted
following a controller self
test, it may be required to
tum ac power off, then on
again to allow operation.
1.0(',\1. TEST \IODE
-Check cabling.
.Check fuses on interconnect
module.
TilE (~I'ICK Bl{()\\:\ FOX ,Jl'\IPEIJ ()VEl{ TilE L.\/.Y
D()C'S HACK 012:lt:J67HfJ TI\IES,
~SeeNote
5 fS
(
~r-
1-)
c:;:::==:J---
7-
--
J
The word EBCDIC will
,
,
appear III thIS area.
I I
-
._1
-DEVICE ADDRESS (See Note in 2.04.)}
-ST,\TIO:\ SELECT .\IJIJIU:SS
'-----STATI():\ POLL ,\DDRESS
Note 1 '
If the above message is not responded to within 20
seconds, the display will clear and the test will be canceled.
Note 2: The QUICK BROWN FOX ... message may be
changed provided that the first character remains a "T".
If "T" is changed to any other character, the display will
clear and the test will be canceled when ENTER key is depressed.
tep
1
.
TO TEST LOOPB,\(,K PRESS S I{ ~
~See Note 3.
TO RESET PRESS CLEAI{ -- SEE \1.\:\1' \1. FOR DET \ILS
C:=---~=I1If~he word BAD appears III
thIS area, replace the D I/O
41043N circuit card for
device being tested.
0
'
(See Chart 1, Step 5.)
If the wrong line code
appears, check SPC17 -6 of
410403 or SPB7-6 of 410411
circuit card.
Switch OFF = EBCDIC.
.
If addresses are Illcorr,ect per
customer order and FIg. 4,
check switches selected on
410403 or 410411 circuit
card and all controller and
device connections per Controller Arrangement Form.
Note 3:
Besides CLEAR key, depression of any PA or PF key - - - , See Note 4 of Step 1
will clear display and cancel test. MCC only: Test should be
run to completion (Step 8), failure to do so will cause Print
Local operation to fail; to correct, perform Steps 7 and 8.
Page 9
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 2 (Cont)
KDICONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
8
PROCEDURE
CORRECT RESPONSE
Depress ENTER key.
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
If received without error, the
• If SIR indicator is flashing, go
following message will appear
on the monitor. If optioned
for I-second alarm, alarm will
sound once and LOCAL indicator should light. If optioned
for continuous alarm, alarm will
sound repeatedly until RESET
key is manually depressed.
(TilE
(~l!I(,K HIWWN FOX JP\IPED OVER TIIEJ
TI\IES.
LAZY DOG'S HACK
/
to Step 4, Local Test Analysis.
• If "test failed", message is
v
received, go to Step 13,
ooure
0123-t567H9
9
Note: If any characters in the QUICK BROWN FOX ...
message were changed before depressing ENTER kev, those
characters will appear in the above message.
Depress CLEAR key and
Display is cleared.
then RESET key.
10
Request a local test by
depressing the LITST
key and the NUMERIC
key simUltaneously.
The message of Step 7 is
displayed.
Replace opcon,
11
Depress ENTER key,
(As given in Step 8.)
(As given in Step 8.)
12
Depress CLEAR key.
Test is completed. Display is
cleared. Proceed to Step 15.
13
If message is received '
I
with an error, the following message will be displayed on the monitor.
/
(As given in Step 4.)
I
**TEST FAILED*-
'\
TEST !\1 ESSA(~ E:
TilE {~lJICK HROWN FOX ,Jl'\II'ED OVER TilE
LAZY DOC'S HACK 012:l4567H9 Tl\IES.
t-See
RE·TEST LOOP·BACK. PRESS S R - - - Note
TO RESET PRESS CLEAR
5 of
SEE \L\:-.il' AL FOR DETAI LS
Step 1.
\...
Page 10
(-
-
-)
I
I
Go to Step 14.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 2 (Cont)
KD/CONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
14
15
PROCEDURE
CORRECT RESPONSE
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
Depress RESET key if
station is not connected
to LCU.
Retry Steps 7 and 8 once
then cancel test (depress
CLEAR key).
If test still fails, run controller
self-tests of Chart 1. Replace
associated 410406 circuit card
(see Chart 1, Step 7). Replace
41040~4104090r410411
circuit card.;.
If local test of all KD devices is successfully completed, proceed to Chart 3.
SIn
or
See Note 2.
SCC/DCC:
Displayed in Local Test
O.ce
No.
A
S
S
A
Stn
-
SP
A
B
I
S
()4
0
T
u
c
()6
f
() 7
G
,
08
H
Y
rag r-----
j-
I
10
B
1_
f-
.If;
$
*J
1Y
\
I
-
I
--~
>
:,- t-0
&
1
J
f-;C;-
~
1--]0
31
]7
~
- -I-11
34
0
A
K
.L
I--,i- f-,;,-~~
. -
6
,
--
:
~--
-
-~
.• .
r---,-
"
SCC/DCC:
Displayed in Local Test
~
•
,
See Note 2.
~
ro
pQ
"1
"-
-I -n. -
13
17
p
H
<
&
J
- ~
"\,
16
n
-
)'-
<
!
",
'
,1
12
15
-
n
(~
/
14
','
_.-
(
--
[!l (I)
,
n
r,-t
EBCDIC
1
20
-
l
I
-
J
l
~.
--
E
,~~
S
p
No
A
-
",
"J
Ovce
SP
-
1 Ii
or
A
00
(
A
S
S
A
0
01
02
03
~
~l'l(')
S
p
-~
J
~
(') III
\
EBCDIC
/
(--,) I¢ I
I
S
.~
V-'
Note 1: This figure is used with Steps 1 and 7 of Chart 2. This figure indicates all station and device identification for ASCII or EBCDIC coded
stations except where noted otherwise, see Note 2.
Note 2: SPA and DA characters for EBCDIC coded stations at 10, 15, 26,
and 31 are located within the parentheses. The graphic character displayed
on the screen during local test is enclosed within the brackets (SCC/DCC) or
is within the parentheses (MCC),
Note 3: In local test only, a monocase D I/O 410434 or 410436 circuit card will
cause fold-over of the SSA of Station No.10 from tto '\ (" '\ " will be displayed
instead of" : ").
Fig. 4'-ASCII or EBCDIC Station and Device Identification
Page 11
SECTION 582-200-501
B.
Printer Local Tests
CHART 3
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
Note:
If a printer is not part of the station, proceed to Chart 4.
STEP
1
2
.
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
Preliminary requirements of printer:
a.
Ribbon and paperloaded.
Printer motor is off.
b.
Switches (top right or left of
printer, cabinet cover raised).
LF-1
Test-Off
Forms (Tractor Feed Only)On
Note: Fan in tractor feed
printer cabinet must be ON
(air flows).
c.
Cabinet cover closed and ac
power switched ON.
Momentarily depress PAPER button
(red) on cover of printer cabinet.
Paper feeds out as long as
button is depressed.
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
Refer to Section
582-210-700 of
Service Manual
325-057 or FIMP
579-505-350.
-Check for:
a. Printer cable
not connected .
3
TRACTOR FEED PRINTER ONLY:
Depress and release FORMS
ADVANCE button (black) on
printer cabinet cover. (See Note in
Trouble Analysis column.)
Paper feeds out until first
line of next form is reached,
then stops.
Note: See chart on ton of
printer to determine the correct form-out selection.
4
Unlatch and raise printer cabinet
cover.
None
5
Raise cover interlock switch to
maintenance position.
None
6
Page 12
Set test switch to ON, allow
Printer turns on and prints
printer to print several lines,
font identification symbol
then turn test switch OFF.
repeatedly in all columns
Note: On printers which have later
until switch is turned off.
version 410071, 410072 and 410076 --':"(See Note.)
circuit cards, the font identification
See Section 582-200-101 for
symbol will not be printed in the columns
font ID symbols.
margined per Option 17.
b. Printer cable
defective or
miswired.
c. Defective
410406 circuit
card (DCC, MCC).
Refer to Section
582-210-700 of
Service Manual
325-057 or FIMP
579-505-350.
Note: Continuous
feedout will occur
if form selector
lever not fully seated in slot 1, 2, 3,
or 4.
Refer to Section
582-210-700 of
Service Manual
325-057 or FIMP
579-505-350.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 3 (Cont)
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
7
PROCEDURE
FRICTION FEED PRINTER:
j:..ift paper roll to simulate a paper
alarm. Lower paper roll, guide paper
through window, and close cabinet
cover.
TRACTOR FEED PRINTER:
Tear off next form at perforations
under pedestal top, then depress
PAPER button on cabinet top until
last form passes through printer.
Reload forms, guide first form
through window, and close
cahinet cover.
8
RESULTS
Type some text on the display
(lower case and capitals if possihle)
and then depress PRINT LOCAL key.
PAPER indicator ligh ts.
PAPER indicator goes out.
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
Refer to Section
582-210-700 of
Service Manual
325-057 or
FIMP 579-505-350.
80-Column Printer With 410640
Circuit Card - PAPER indicator
lights and printer motor turns off.
80-Column Printers With 410076
or 410071 Circuit Cards And All
132-Column Printers - If Option
48a is selected, PAPER indicator
lights and printer motor turns
off when last form'ispartly
through printer. If Option 48bis
selected, PAPER indicator does
not light and printer motor does
not turn off until form is completely out of printer and end of
form contact is sensed.
PAPER indicator goes out.
LOCAL indicator extinguishes
and PRINT LOCAL indicator
lights and then goes off when
printer buffer receives the mes;
sage; LOCAL indicator lights.
• Flashing PRINT
LOCAL indicator
indicates:
a. Printer cabinet lid open.
Printer copies entire display
(24 lines):
b. Form or
paper-out
condition.
Monocase Printer - All
display characters print as
capitals. See Note following
Step 5 of Chart 4.
c. Printer ac
power is off.
Up-Low Printer - All display
characters are copied as
displayed.
(Continued on Page 14)
d. Printer is not
print local to
the KD.
e. Printer cable
defective or
miswired.
Refer to Section
582-210-700 of
Service Manual
325-057 or FIMP
579-505-350.
,
Page 13
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 3 (Cant)
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
8
(Cont)
PROCEDURE
RESULTS
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
• Option 18c not
installed in
monocase printer.
Note 1: Friction feed printer
mayor may not feed out 16 lines
of paper before turning off,
depending on Option 18. Tractor
set of
feed printer mayor may not form • Character
type carrier in
feed before turning off depending printer does not
on Options 18 and 39.
match Option 19.
Note 2: After printer is finished
• Option 19c not
copying, the motor will remain
installed in
on for approximately 10 seconds
printer.
before turning off. Later version
printer circuit cards will allow
Refer to Section
printer motor to remain on for
582-210-700 of
40 seconds or indefinitely,
Service Manual
depending on Option 58.
325-057 or FIMP
579-505-350.
(a)
Each KD in the station must be checked
using the procedure given in 2.06 and
Chart 4. Locations of various control and data
keys referred to in the chart are given in Fig. 5.
Turn on power to the set or station
(LOCAL indicator lights on each opcon).
(b)
Turn on power to the display and adjust
j:'rightness.
2.06
(c)
Perform Steps 1 through 42 of Chart
4. KD Local Test Procedures.
KD Local Test
C.
2.05
Follow these instructions before begin·
ning Chart 4:
r----------OPERATIONAL CONTROLS - - - - - - - - - - ,
LOCAL LOOPBACK
TEST INDICATOR
i
EXTERNALl
NUMERIC
CLUSTER
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
-
0
~
us
-,
*
/
~
(SIR)
Note: The, (comma), *, and / keys located within the External Numeric Cluster are not functional
with DCCs or MCCs which employ PROM version circuit cards and, therefore, may be coverpd with
blocking keys.
"
40K203/GAB Key top Layout
(External numeric clusl;er style opcon --- In test procedures, treat as typewriter style 0lwon.)
Fig. 5-0pcon Key top Layouts
Page 14
/
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST
INDICATOR
LAMP
----OPERATIONAL CONTROLS--------,
LINE
IN8RT
L--------------KEYBOARD----------------~
CURSOR
MOVEMENT
CONTROL
KEYS
Cd
D
I:ILOCKI!"(;
KEYTOP
REPEAT KEYS
EDIT KEYS
(To Alter
Information
on the Display)
""
(Typewriter style opcon)
/
' - - - - - - - 40K104/DAB Key top Layout - - - - - - - - - '
THESE KEYS
ARE BLOCKED
LOCAL LOOPBACK
TEST INDICATOR
\.
EDIT KEYS
(To Alter
In(ormation
on Display)
CL.EA
TAB
HOME
/TST
RESET
\'------------ KEYBOARD
---------I
CURSOR MOVEMENT
CONTROL KEYS
The only locking key top is NUM LOCK, depress
to set (lights), depress to release (light goes out).
Note:
(Internal numeric cluster style opcon)
\~_ _ _ _ _ _-'-- 40Kl 05/CAA Key top Layout _ _ _ _ _---'_ _-JI
Fig. 5 (Cont)
I'age 15
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 4
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
1---+-------------,---+---------- -"
Note: Start with Step 1 if any KD of the station has typewriter style opcon (typewriter style includer
external numeric cluster style). Start with Step 21 if KD has an internal numeric cluster style opcon.
1
a. Place typewriter style opcon into
the caps mode by depressing and
latching the CAPS LOCK key.
(Opcons with no CAPS LOCK
key require no action.)
• If raster is not
b. At each KD:
• Observe that the raster is barely
present when brightness control
is turned up fully.
1/2".-::r~{VC". CUR~OH
!F01(-; .~
Ii: (::-j.
jl.
I
(
•
..... .
.
.
.
.
:1' I I
• When cursor is in home position, it is approximately 1/2 inch
from left side of display.
~
;: i '
T
ri
!'
!
II~_-
• Enter a line of Es at top and
bottom of display, then HOME
cursor. Requirements are met.
5·1/4"
±1/8"
1
Requirements:
- Raster aligned vertically and horizontally.
- All Es sharply defined.
-Height and width of display as indicated.
-Es uniform across full width.
- Height of Es same at top and bottom lines.
Page 16
present, go to
Chart 8 .
- If a requirement is not met,
refer to adjustments of monitor in Section
582-213-700 of
325-057 Service
Manual or FIMP
579-505-350
to meet requirement .
• If E cannot be
entered, go to
Chart 9.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 4 (Cant)
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
2
I
PROCEDURE
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
Home the cursor and depress a few
keys on the keyboard portion of
the opcon.
I
Lower portion of depressed
keys are displayed.
j
_\
Each key top need
not be checked except for
'a trouble call. Each key top
shall function each time it
is depressed.
Note:
Causes cursor to return to
HOME position and clears
any characters to the right of
and below cursor.
/
1; 12131~~ 15161 ~ 18191 01 ~ 1 ,J Q 1w EI RI Tlyl ul I 0 p 1 :1 ". ":
1::~; I 1,,~sT ,~s'l D I F1G H 1'~ 1K 1L I ' I; . " '"T
\1 I z I X I c I V I BIN IMI ~ I >1: 1 5""'1 I~
TAB
(
SHOP
\ 1···1
Not present if
hlocking key top
is used.
{
~
\
O"TRO~
l
~()t ..d
I liSpl
PROTECTED NONDISPLA YED FIELD>
NUMERIC FIELD> ...
-------------------------Line 5
80
CHARACTER ROW OF X'S= (May be 132 character row of Xs.)
==
<=
<=
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
(May have "END OF TEST" on line 24.)
Line 8
>C <
Fig. ·,---SYNC 40 Test Message
If the station is to remain ASCII, all testing is complete at this point. Confirm
system operation with customer's equipment.
2.21
2.22
Verify correct in-service station operation
with customer's equipment or system.
(h)
All testing is completed.
If the station is to be converted back to
EBCDIC, go to E. Completion of End-toEnd Installation Test.
E.
(g)
2.24
If an ASCII station successfully com-
pleted the End-to-End Installation Test,
all testing is complete.
Completion of End-to-End Installation Test
3.
Requirements after successful completion
of End-to-End Installation Test of converted EBCDIC to ASCII station:
TROUBLESHOOTING
2.23
(a)
Turn off ac power on SCC or MCC controller.
(b)
Remove 410408 (or 410411) circuit card.
If applies, install original 410409 circuit
card into position formerly occupied by
410408 circuit card.
(c)
(d)
Remove 410403 circuit card. (If a 410411
circuit card is present, it was removed in
(b).)
(1)
Reprogram SPA and SSA using EBCDIC
Tables C and D given in Section 582200-201.
3.01
The troubleshooting procedures for the
mini-cluster controller, station cluster
controller, and device cluster controller are
included in the controller self-test procedures
(Chart 1).
3.02
A brief troubleshooting reminder on the
monitor is provided in Chart 8. For
detailed analysis, refer to Section 582-213-200 of
Service Manual 325-057 or FIMP 579-505-350.
3.03
Limited troubleshooting for the opcon
is provided in Chart 9. For detailed
analysis, refer to Section 582-211-500 of Service Manual 325-().57.
(2)
Reprogram SPC17-6 (or SPB7-6) to
OFF position.
Trouble analysis for the printer is not
provided in this section. Refer to Section
582-210-500 of Service Manual 325-057 for
printers. Until Service Manual 325-057 is available,
refer to FIMP 579-505-350 (80 column) or Section
582-200-250 (132 column).
(3)
Reinstall 410403 (or 410411) circuit
card.
3.05
«(0)
Turn on ac power on SCC or MCC controller.
(f)
Repeat Chart 2, KD/Controller Local Test.
Perform test on one KD only.
3.04
The use of Controller Arrangement Forms
(Section 582-200-201) is necessary to
troub;eshoot using self-test.
3.06
For detailed analysis of the power supply,
refer to Section 582-214-500 of Service
Manual 325-057.
Page 35
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 7
STATION ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
1. Are all power supply voltage
indicators lit?
Go to 2.
Go to Chart 10, 40PSU102
Power Supply Analysis.
2. Is run lamp on or blinking and
1st pattern lamp (toward rear
of controller) on 410401 circuit card dimly lit when controller is not in test mode?
Go to 3 (if run lamp is
blinking).
Perform steps below one at a
time until problem is corrected.
~
O
2K
POSITION
~
o I
~h
I
~
a.
40PSU102 Power Supply
Analysis beginning at Step 2.
b. If used: Check 4108NN circontroller for
positions
"2K" and "30K". Strap can
be 22 AWG wire.
30K
cuit card(s} in
POSITION .il ~required strap
...4108NN CARD
c. If used: Check 4109NN
..........._circuit card(s) in controller
for required strap in position
"4K". Strap can be 22 AWG
wire.
d.
3. Is run lamp blinking when
controller is not in test mode?
Go to 4 (if run lamp is
steadily on).
Use (c) in analysis column
of Step 2 in Chart 1.
Perform steps below one at a
time until problem is corrected.
Note: If removal of
a. Remove SSI cables to opcons
SSI cable to another
and other controller(s} one
t i l t th
at a time (connectors at right
con ro er correc s e
side of controller).
problem, that controller ---:---!See Note.)
may be at fault.
b. Replace 410406 circuit card.
c. Replace 410200 or 410201
back panel.
4. Depress and hold test switch.
Do all pattern lamps light?
Go to 5.
Replace in order:
410401 circuit card, repeat
Step 4.
410400 circuit card, repeat
Step 4.
4108NN or 4105NN circuit
card(s), repeat Step 4.
All other circuit cards until
defective circuit card is found.
Page 36
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 7 (Cont)
STATION ANALYSIS
ANAL YSIS QUESTION
5. Release test switch.
Does controller pass self-test
of Chart 1?
This includes display patterns
when checking DCC or MCC.
6. Does the local test work?
(CTRL (or ALPHA) and
L/TST keys on opcon.)
7. Depress the LOCAL (or,
RESET) key on the opcon.
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Go to 6.
Note: If display pattern
appears with errors or is distorted, replace associated
D I/O 41043N circuit card.
Go to 8.
Replace circuit card indicated by
pattern lamps, however, if more
than one trouble pattern appears,
replace card indicated by last
trouble pattern first. Repeat
Step 5.
Go to 7.
Check the cabling from the
opcon to DCC, the DCC to
SCC, and the DCC to monitor (or opcon to MCC) as
applies. Refer to Section
582-200-201.
Go to Chart 9, Opcon Analysis.
8. In the local mode, do all keys
on the opcon function
properly? Refer to KD Local
Test, 2.05.
Go to 9.
Replace opcon. Replace 410406
circuit card interfacing opcon in
trouble.
9. Input data on the monitor.
Depress PRINT LOCAL key?
Go to 10.
Is the LOCAL indicator lit?
OCb"'k ,"',...
R,p"", print",
Replace associated SSI 410406
circuit card.
Does the print local printer
print the data properly?
OPCONOR PRINTER
CONNECTED TO SSI
PORTS 1 THROUGH 4
PORTS 5 THROUGH 8
ASSOCIATED 410406
IN CARD POS, 5 OR 7
IN CARD POS, 4 OR 6 OR 8
10. Does the station pass the
on-line checkout?
Place in service.
Go to 11.
11. Do RD lamps flash on 410408,
410409, or 410411 circuit
card during polling or selecting?
Go to 12.
Check data set options. Check
data set and data set cable (EIA
pin 3).
12. Does RS lamp light on data
set after polling or selecting?
Go to 13.
• Check data set cable (EIA
pin 4).
• Replace 410408, 410409, or
410411 circuit card (as applies).
13. Does CS lamp light on data
set after polling or selecting?
Go to 14.
Check data set or data set
options.
~--.-
Page 37
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 7 (Cont)
STATION ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANAL YSIS QUESTION
14. Do SD lamps flash on 410408,
410409 or 410411 circuit card
after polling or selecting?
a. Check data set.
b. Check data set cable
(EIA pin 2).
c. Replace 410408, 410409
or 410411 circuit card (as
applies).
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
- Check data set cable (EIA
pin 5).
- Replace 410408, 410409, or
410411 circuit card (as
applies).
CHART 8
40MN101 MONITOR ANALYSIS
15
RED
DRIVE
410852
ANALYSIS QUESTION
1. Is red drive lamp 15. lit?
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Go to 2.
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
- Check cables.
-DeC, MCC: Check 405181 fuse,
F4 (early version) or 321955
video fuse (late version) on
interconnection module.
-DCC, MCC: D 1/0 (41043N)11.
- 410656 in monitor.
\, 41043N- Any D I/O ClrcUlt card.
Page 38
-
J
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 8 (Cont)
40MN101 MONITOR ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
2. With PS1 and PS2 on, is
pilotl7 lit?
Go to 3.
3. Are 14 and 13 lit?
Go to 4.
Replace 410852 circuit card.
4. Is 12 lit?
Go to 5.
- Replace 410853 circuit card.
: Check 341578 fuse F3 (1.4
SL-BL), cables.
-Replace Ql.
5. Is Illit?
410853
Go to 6.
6. Is 16 lit?
See Note below.
- Replace 410854 circuit card.
- Replace 410656 circuit card.
Note: If 19 (CRT filament) is not lit or if problem still exists in the monitor, go to Section 582-213-200
of Service Manual 325-057 or Part 4 of FIMP 579-505-350 for a detailed trouble analysis.
CHART 9
OPCON ANALYSIS
Note: Start with Question 1 if KD has typewriter style opcon. Start with Question 4 if KD has
internal numeric cluster style opcon.
ANALYSIS QUESTION
1. Depress ERASE INPUT and
QUOTES keys together with
additional force. Does TST
indicator remain lit when
keys are released?
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
-DCC,MCC:
Check 405181 fuse (early
version) (F2 or F3 for S1-S4 or
F5 or F6 for S5-S8) or 321955
video fuse (late version) on interconnection module.
Go to 2.
-Check for +12 V and -12V to
opcon. Refer to Section
582-200-401.
- Replace opcon.
Note: If lamps flash or the alarm sounds clear by depressing
ERASE INPUT and P keys, then repeat Question l.
I
Page 39
SECTIO~
582-200-501
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
A~AL YSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
QUESTION
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
2. Do the following:
(See Note below.)
Depress / I
Indicator
Keys
Key
Condition
SHIFT
1\
0N'CTRL R/TST SIR
OFF
SHIFT
C
ON
CTRL
C
,LOCAL
OFF
SHIFT
F
PRI~T
O~
CTRL
\
LOCAL
OFF
~I
FLASH
~C~T~R~L-~~C~'~ILOCAL
OFF
a.
Do all indicators operate as
described?
Depress ERASE INPUT
and P keys together with
additional force to terminate test. TST indicator
light goes out.
Go to 2b.
Replace opcon.
Is the 40K104 opcon a late
design or is 40K203 opcon
present?
Interface/bell card not
present.
Interface/bell card present.
Note 1: Late design opcons
are sometimes called OPCON
II and have a single card of
new design. Early design opcons (interface/bell card present) will not cause alarm to
ring when ERASE INPUT key
is depressed.
Go to 2c.
Go to 3.
Note: If opcon has CAPS
key when depressing A, C or
F, CAPS key must be in
latched position (ON) or
SHIFT key must be depressed.
If opcon has no CAPS key, do
not depress SHIFT key.
b.
Note 2: To check the vintage of an opcon, it is sufficient to remove opcon from
cabinet (or base) and look
through the slot at the rear
for the interface/bell carel.
Page 40
I
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
c.
On late design 40K104 opcon
(interface/bell card not
present) or 40K203 opcon,
fully depress ERASE INPUT
key.
Does the alarm sound repeatedly as long as the key is
depressed?
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Go to 3.
Replace opcon.
Replace opcon.
Opcon OK.
Note: The alarm loudness
control may require adjustment
to hear the tone.
3. Does the opcon fail to
generate proper characters?
[NTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER OPCON ANALYSIS
4. Depress CONSOL TEST and
LINE INSERT** keys
together. Does CONSOL TEST
indicator remain lit when keys
are released?
Opcon is in loopback mode.
Go to 5.
**Fully depress LINE INSERT
key.
• Check 405181 fuse (early
version) (F2 or F3 for S1-S4
or F5 or F6 for S5-S8) or
321955 video fuse (late
version) on interconnection
module.
• Check for +12 V and -12 V
to opcon. Refer to Section
582-200-40l.
• Replace opcon.
Note: If lamps flash or the alarm sounds more than once or continuously, clear by depressing CONSOL TEST and RESET keys,
then repeat Question 4. (Use RESET key adjacent to PF1 key.)
5. Do the following in
the order given:
Indicator
Condition
Depress key( s)
Key
A
SIR
On
C
LOCAL
On
M
INPUT
INHIBIT
On
F
PRINT
LOCAL
On
-.
Notes
If entered loopback mode from LOCAL,
LOCAL indicator is already on.
(Question 5, continued on Page 42)
Page 41
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
5.
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
(Cont)
Depress key(s)
I
Key
Indicator
Condition
NUM
LOCK
Notes
On
Depress ~ R/TST key.
SIR
Flashing
On & Off
(Cursor right)
LOCAL
Flashing
On & Off
LINE DLETE
INPUT
INHIBIT
Flashing
On & Off
L/TST
PRINT
LOCAL
Flashing
On & Off
NUM LOCK
NUM
LOCK
Flashing
On & Off
ALPHA & A
SIR
On (no flash)
ALPHA &C
LOCAL
On (no flash)
ALPHA &M
INPUT
INHIBIT
On (no flash)
ALPHA & F
PRINT
LOCAL
On (no flash)
ALPHA & I
NUM
LOCK
On (no flash)
NUM & R/TST
SIR
Off
LOCAL indicator cannot be turned off while in
loop back mode.
ERASE INPUT
INPUT
INHIBIT
Off
PRINT LOCAL indicator cannot be turned off
while in loopback mode.
TAB
NUM
LOCK
Off
Depress TAB key not CURSR TAB key.
R/TST
SIR
Flashing
On & Off
SIR
Off
R/TST
-
ALPHA & R/TST
Page 42
Depress only L/TST key.
Depress only RITST key.
(Question 5, continued on Page 43)
I
ISS 4, SECTION 582·200·501
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
5.
(Cont)
Indicator
Condition
Depress key(s)
Key
CONSOLTEST
(See note to the right)
I
Notes
Opcon attention bell sounds repeatedly
as long as key is depressed.
Replace opcon.
Do all indicators and bell
operate as described?
Depress CONSOL TEST and
RESET (adjacent to PF1)
keys to terminate test.
Go to 6.
6. Does the following occur?
All three conditions are
met. Go to 7.
Replace opcon.
Replace opcon.
Opcon is OK.
a.
I
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
CONSOL TEST indicator
goes out,
b. PRINT LOCAL indicator
goes out,
i
I c. LOCAL indicator stays
I
on.
7. Does the opcon fail to gen·
erate proper characters?
Page 43
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 10
40PSUl02 POWER SUPPLY ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
1. With the set plugged in and
power on, are all LED
indicators on?
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Go to 2.
Go to 5.
Tum power off and
back on again.
Go to 3.
Tum off power. Remove all
connections from back panel
to power supply. Retighten all
power supply connector screws.
Tum on power. Go to 14.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
2. Are all voltages correct at
the output terminal block?
Check voltage using voltmeter
having 20,000 ohms/volt
sensitivity.
o
NOT IN USE - - -
v DC ---+--ji;;;l<..,.
v DC :!:0.10 V DC - - -
+5 V DC :0.10
+5
+5 V DC :!:0.10 V DC - - GROUND--GROUND--"+12 V DC :!:0.4 V DC - - ·12 V DC :0.4 V DC - - +12 V DC :0.4 V DC - - ·12 V DC :!:0.4 V DC - - - _
+5 V DC :0.25 V DC - - POWER ON RESET - - - ..
~,
Output Terminal Block
3.
a. If power supply is part of
SCC (Station Cluster
Controller):
(Continued on Page 45)
Page 44
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 10 (Cont)
40PSU102 POWER SUPPLY ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
3. (Cont)
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Put power supply in
service.
Does run lamp light?
b.
If power supply is part of
DCC (Device Cluster
Controller) or MCC
(Mini-Cluster Controller):
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Momentarily jump terminal 7
(Ground) of the output terminal
strip to terminal 1 (POR) of the
output terminal strip.
Go to 4.
Does run lamp light?
Is cursor in home position
on KDs connected to DCC
or MCC?
Is local lamp of opcons
connected to DCC or MCC
lit?
Note: Local lamp may
flash ON/OFF, etc.
.!.
Repeat Question 3 .
Replace power supply.
Trouble is in logic module.
See Chart 7, Station Analysis.
5. Are all LED indicators off?
Go to 6.
Go to 11.
6. Is circuit breaker in ON
position? (Down-white band
not showing.)
Go to 7.
Depress circuit breaker.
Go to 10.
7. Is ac power connector at
rear of power supply
connected?
Go to 8.
Connect ac connector.
Go to 1.
Go to 9.
Check main power input
switches, cabinet wiring, and
connectors, etc, per Section
582-200-401.
Correct problem.
Go to 1.
0
Note: Power supply
mounting screw must be
removed and the power
supply slightly raised to
check power connection.
S.
Is there 115 V ac at power
supply connector?
Page 45
SECTION 582-200-501
CHART 10 (Cont)
40PSUI02 POWER SUPPLY ANALYSIS
ANAL YSIS QUESTION
9. Are fans at rear of logic
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Turn off power. Remove
cables from logic package
to power supply terminal
block. Retighten all screws.
Turn on power.
Go to 13.
Correct problem in fan assembly.
Go to 1.
10. Did circuit breaker pop back
to OFF position?
Replace power supply.
Go to 1.
11. Is the +5 V dc LED indicator
the only indicator off?
Turn off power. Wait
approximately 30 seconds.
Turn power back on.
Go to 12.
Turn off power.
Remove cables from logic
package to power supply.
Retighten all screws. Turn on
power.
Go to 13.
12. Did the +5 V dc LED
indicator come on?
Go to 2.
Turn off power.
Remove cables from logic
package to power supply.
Retighten all screws. Turn on
power.
Go to 13.
13. Are all LED (3) indicators
on?
Go to 14.
Replace power supply.
14. Are all voltages correct at
the output terminal block?
Turn off power.
Reconnect all leads.
Remove one (any) logic
card from controller.
Turn power on.
Go to 15.
Replace power supply.
Turn off power.
Replace logic card that
was removed.
Power supply OK.
Continue removing logic circuit
cards (see Caution below) until
voltages are correct at output
terminal block. Circuit card
removed prior to voltages being
corrected at output t.erminal
block should be replaced.
module operable?
Note: See Question 2 for
values.
15. Are all voltages at the output terminal block
now correct?
Caution:
Page 46
The ac power must be OFF, before removing or replacing a circuit card.
ISS 4, SECTION 582-200-501
4.
CIRCUIT CARD COMPATIBILITY
4.01
The following paragraphs contain information pertaining to PROM and EPROM circuit card compatibility. When replacing a PROM or EPROM circuit card, always replace that circuit card with
another having the same or a higher issue number. Failure to do so may result in an operational failure
which may not be immediately apparent.
If PROM or EPROM circuit card contains a modification kit, the replacement circuit card must
also contain the same modification kit.
Note:
4.02
The following PROM (or EPROM) circuit cards must be treated as unique sets and cannot be
intermixed with PROM (or EPROM) circuit cards of other sets in the same C400 controller.
(a)
410801 PROM Circuit Card
410901 PROM Circuit Card
(b)
410802 PROM Circuit Card
410902 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARKI-DCC
(c)
410803 PROM Circuit Card
410903 PROM Circuit Card
410904 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARKI-MCC
(d)
410804 PROM Circuit Card
410905 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARKII-SCC
(e)
410809 PROM Circuit Card
410911 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARK II - DCC With Typewriter Style Opcon
(f)
410808 PROM Circuit Card
410909 PROM Circuit Card
410910 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARK II - MCC With Typewriter Style Opcon
(g)
410810 PROM Circuit Card
410907 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARK II - DCC With Internal Numeric Cluster Style Opcon
(h)
410812 PROM Circuit Card
410914 PROM Circuit Card
410915 PROM Circuit Card
}
MARK II - MCC With Internal Numeric Cluster Style Opcon
MARKI-SCC
(i)
410508 EPROM Circuit Card - EPROM Version SCC
(j)
410509 EPROM Circuit Card - EPROM Version DCC With Typewriter Style Opcon
(k)
410512 EPROM Circuit Card}
410513 or 410525
EPROM Version MCC With Typewriter Style Opcon
EPROM Circuit Card
(1)
410510 EPROM Circuit Card - EPROM Version DCC With Internal Numeric Cluster Style Opcon
(m) 410514 EPROM Circuit Card }
. . .
.
410515 EPROM Circuit Card
EPROM VersIOn MCC With Internal NumerIC Cluster Style Opcon
rage 47
SECTION 582-200-501
4.03
The following PROM or EPROM circuit
cards of each set are only compatible with
each other when matched by the issue numbers as
shown. The issue of each circuit card is found at
the top of the circuit card.
(a)
410801 and 410901 Circuit Cards
410801 - Issue 4A or Lower
w/410901 - Issue 3A or Lower
OR
410801- Issue 5A Through 7A
w/410901 - Issue 4A Through 5B
410802 and 410902 Circuit Cards
410802 - Issue 3A or Lower
w/410902 - Issue 3A or Lower
OR
410802 - Issue 4A Through 7A
w/410902 - Issue 4A Through 5B
(b)
410803,410903 and 410904 Circuit Cards
410803 Issue 3A or Lower
w/410903 - Issue 2A or Lower
and 410904 - Issue 2A or Lower
OR
410803 - Issue 4A Through 7A
w/410903 - Issue 3A Through 4B
and 410904 - Issue 3A Through 4B
(c)
(e)
410808,410909 and 410910 Circuit Cards
410808 - Issue 1A Through 6A
w/410909 - Issue 1A Through 3A
and 410910 - Issue 1A Through 3A
Note: The 410910, Issue 3A is also referred
to as MARK II - Issue 2.
(f)
(g)
Note: The 410804, Issue 4A or higher and
410905, Issue 3A or higher are also referred
to as MARK II - Issue 2.
Page 48
48 Pages
410810 and 410907 Circuit Cards
410810 - Issue 2A or Lower
w/410907 - Issue 1A
(h)
410812,410914 and 410915 Circuit Cards
410812 - Issue 1A Through 3A
w/410914 - Issue 1A and 2A
and 410915 - Issue 1A
(i)
410508 Circuit Card
410508 - (See Note below.)
(j)
410509 Circuit Card
410509 - (See Note below.)
(k)
410512 and 410513 Circuit Cards
410512 - Issue 1A
410513 - Issue 2Att and 3A
(or 410525)
(I)
410510 Circuit Card
410510 - (See Note below.)
(d)
410804 and 410905 Circuit Cards
410804 - Issue 3A or Lower
w/410905 - Issue 2B or Lower
OR
410804 - Issue 4A
w/410905 - Issue 3A
OR
410804 - Issue 5A and 6A
w/410905 - Issue 4A
OR
410804 - Issue 7 A
w/410905 - Issue 5A
410809 and 410911 Circuit Cards
410809 - Issue 1A Through 3A
w/410911 - Issue 1A Through 2B
(m) 410514 and 410515 Circuit Cards
410514 - Issue 1A
410515 - Issue 2Att
tt No earlier issues shipped.
Note: Since 410508, 410509 and 410510 circuit
cards are not part of a set of EPROM circuit cards,
there are no compatibility considerations.
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-701
Issue 3, January 1979
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
MAXI-CLUSTER AND MINI-CLUSTER STATION ARRANGEMENTS
DISASSEMBL YIREASSEMBL Y AND PARTS
1.
GENERAL ....................
1
tions. This section also includes locations of test
switches and indicators used in trouble analysis
and testing of the station.
2.
DISASSEMBL YIREASSEMBL Y ....
3
1.02
....................
3
OPCON .......................
3
PRINTERS ....................
5
Friction Feed Printer.........
Tractor Feed Printer (80 or 132
Column) ..................
5
This section is reissued to add coverage
for removal and replacement of components in station cluster controllers (SCCs), device
cluster controllers (DCCs) and mini-cluster controllers (MCCs). This issue also adds coverage for
the 40K203/GAB opcon. This section is a general
revision, therefore marginal arrows have been
omitted.
6
1.03
PEDESTALS AND CABINETS .....
7
CIRCUIT CARDS ...............
7
40PSU102 POWER SUPPLy .......
8
CONTROLLER .................
9
Ventilation Assembly ........
Interconnection Module ......
Back Panel. ................
Cables ....................
10
11
12
12
PARTS .......................
15
INDEX 0 F REPLACEABLE
PARTS .......................
20
CONTENTS
MONITOR
A.
B.
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
1.
PAGE
Information on the 40KDA101 keyboard
display amplifier is given in Section 582200-212.
1.04
Abbreviations used in this section are defined in Section 582-200-101.
1.05
To disassemble or reassemble parts (or
units) of this section, the following tools
(or equivalents) are required:
Screwdriver, 1/8" blade
Screwdriver, 1/4" blade
Socket wrench, 1/4"
Socket wrench, 5/16"
Open-end wrench, 1/4"
Static ground strap, 346392 (required only if
circuit cards are handled)
Terminal extractor, 402840
GENERAL
1.01
This section contains all necessary information on the removal and replacement
of various components of DATASPEED 40/4 Sta-
Note:
When ordering replaceable components,
unless otherwise specified, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
© 1975,1976,1977, and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-701
Grounding Strap Locations
1.06
Note:
Remove strapping only when necessary.
Green insulated
grounding straps
of video cables
(up to 4) installed
in this area.
GRIOUlI'iIDI!NG STRAPS
Inside controller
grounding strap
must be installed
in this area.
GREEN INSULATED
GROUNDING STRAP
BRAIDED
GROUND CLIP
40BSEIOl
BASE
PTR
CONNECTOR
Rear of Tractor Feed
Printer Cabinet
BLACK INSULATED
GROUNDING STRAP
Rear of Friction Feed
Printer Cabinet
Page 2
Friction Feed
Pririter Cabinet
ISS 3, SECTION 582·200·701
2.
DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBL Y
Caution: Remove all power from the set before performing any component replacement or conversions.
This does not apply to cover removal for access to test switches, or to power on adjustments of the
monitor.
MONITOR
2.01
To remove the monitor: See C!).
To remove only the monitor housing,
see 0.
C!) Removal of entire monitor unit from set:
Grasp monitor by sides near supports
and simply lift up. Electrical cable
connectors are part of support assembly.
o Removal of monitor housing:
Tilt monitor back and disengage latch.
Slide housing back partially.
Position monitor to its normal position
making sure it locks in that position.
Remove housing completely.
LATCH RELEASE
2.02
TILT RELEASE
(When Housing is
Removed)
To replace the monitor, reverse the removal procedures of 2.01. For further disassembly of the
monitor, refer to Section 582·213·701.
OPCON
2.03
To remove the opcon use the appropriate steps given below or on following page:
Attached KD
CD Place thumb on inward tab of opcon (both sides).
® Press downward into unlatched position (each side).
(!) Remove opcon by pulling straight away from the cabinet.
ALIGN
LOCATING PINS
(Each Side)
Page 3
SECTION 582-200-701
Free-Standing KD
40K104/DAA,
40K104/DAB,
40K105/CAA,
OR 40K203/GAB
OPCON
o Remove base by moving
base straight away from
the opcon.
I
Note:
To replace opcon,
spread sides of opcon cover
slightly to aid engagement.
2.04
Place opcon upside-down on
a smooth surface. (Avoid
scratching or marking the
key tops).
To replace the opcon, reverse the removal procedures of 2.03. When replacing opcon, make sure
locating pins are fully engaged before pushing latchlevers into locked position. For further disassembly of opcon, refer to Section 582-213-701.
Page 4
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-701
PRINTERS
A.
Friction Feed Printer
2.05
To remove the entire printer assembly:
Note:
The circuit card can be removed
after Step 4 of disassembly. If printer is
not being removed omit Steps 2 and 3.
Remove controller from pedestal.
Note 3: A green wire is
part of each D I/O cable.
2.15
To replace the controller, reverse the removal procedures of 2.14. See Note 1.
Page 9
SECTION 582-200-701
A_
Ventilation Assembly
2.16
I
To remove the ventilation assembly:
® Remove circuit cards ---7~~S::
from electronics package
(see 2.10).
Q) Loosen four 156720
screws. Remove 408007
shroud from controller. - - - - - -
Disconnect ac cord.
Remove four
198670 screws
from top. Loosen
two 156740 cover
thumbscrews
(each side), then
remove cover.
----_~~Remove
six
198670 screws.
® Disconnect ground strap from
back panel (circuit card).
6
Disconnect ac power
connector from power
supply.
o Remove ventilation
assembly from
controller.
2.17
To replace the ventilation assembly, reverse the removal procedures of 2.16.
~'
k_
1
1
II
IJ
-1
/''j
I(
/ ' '"
1°
'" '" '"
---III.....
r1
/ ' '"
L-'......
/' .;-
---=r::::- ,,/
--_ -_
® Disconnect
®Remove 3598 nut,
92260 lockwasher,
407066 clamp and
181249 screw.
----~~--
/'
I
181392 ground
terminal of the cable from
cabinet ground lug.
•
..
;"',/
;",/
~/
1
-
...... '"
11
181249
SCREW--
/
/
(
UPPER
___
EAR
401623
(i) Remove cable from cabinet through opening
at rear.
OPCON
CONNECTOR
2.25
To install opcon/monitor cable to attached
KD, either reverse the removal procedures
of 2.24 or use Section 582-200-201. Observe an
orange identification tag is on the KD end of the
cable. A 312918 nylon strap (not supplied) is
required.
2.26
181392
GROUND TERMINAL
To remove opcon/monitor cable from free-standing KD:
r.::.:'Y'- ....
• . . :..J:~
-405097
I
98642--i
151723~
Fig. I-Overview of Controller Components
Page 16
05150 (SCC)
405151 (DCC)
405152 (MCC)
ISS 3 ,SECTION 5 82-200-701
/~
198670
405357
//:.:>'--- -
408015
~
312918
F'19, 2 - 40536 o Ventilati on Assembly C
olnponents
Page 17
SECTION 582-200-701
156740
I
I
I
VENTILATIONASSEMBLY
--- --
--~
,@J,
-
__
-_
--2191------ ___ _
7002
-~
ACPOWER
CONNECTOR
------
405097
Fig. 3-MountiJlg Hardware for Fan Guard, Ventilation Assembly, and Cover
406313
(SCConly
late design)
\
181240
405210
-r&X
(DCC,MCC,
1
I
··~t~~~~
/
LOGIC MODULE
GROUND STRAP
Fig. 4-Ventilation Assembly Detail
Fig. 5 - Clamp Plate Components (At Rear of Controller)
Page 18
ISS 3, SECTION 582-200-701
405179
AND
90951
",,"
~@
Note: 405192 is illustrated. 405171
has no panel connector (DeC only).
405181
(4) ON
410481~
(7) ON 410480
0/._
90951
@~
(1'~ \
/
90951
76167
Fig. 6-405150, 405151, and 405152 Interconnection Modules
Page 19
SECTION 582-200-701
INDEX OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
3_04
The index below contains field replaceable parts. The index shows the section or page number of
this section on which access is provided.
Note:
When ordering replaceable components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with
the letterS "TP" (ie, TP410055).
APPLICATION
Monitor
PART NO.
40MN101/AA
341578
Monitor
Fuse, 1.4 Amp
3
582-200-751
40K104/DAA
Opcon (ASCII,
Typewriter Sty Ie)
Opcon (EBCDIC,
Typewriter Style)
Opcon (EBCDIC,
Internal Numeric Style)
Opcon (EBCDIC, External
Numeric Cluster Style)
3,4
40BSE101
40BSE201
40BSE202
346333
Base (Monitor)
Base (Opcon, narrow)
Base (Opcon, wide)
Opcon Base Cable
582-200-201
582-200-201
582-200-201
582-2QO-201
40P101/ZZ,
40P102/ZZ
40P151/ZZ,
40P154/ZZ
40P201/ZZ,
40P202/ZZ
143306
Prin ter, Friction Feed
5
Printer, Tractor Feed80 Column
Printer, Tractor Feed 132 Column
Fuse,l Amp SL-BL MOL-I
6
6
40C40l/type
40C402/type
40C403/type
40PSU102
405150
405151
405152
405181
405360
408015
410200 (Early
Design)
410201 (Late
Design)
Various Numbers
Controller (SCC)
Controller (DCC)
Controller (MCC)
Power Supply
Interconnect Module (SCC)
Interconnect Module (DCC)
Interconnect Module (MCC)
Fuse, 3 Amp
Ventilation Assembly
Fan
Back Panel
9
9
9
8
11, 16, 19
11, 16, 19
11,16,19
582-200-751
10, 16
17
12
Various Codes and
Numbers
405301-405304,
405139,405140
341896,408065408068
405306-405309,
405237,405239
405311,405312,
405237,405238
40K104/DAB
Opcon
40K105/CAA
40K203/GAB
Free-Standing KD
Printer
Controller
Cable
Page 20
20 Pages
SECTION OR
PAGE NO.
DESCRIPTION
3,4
3,4
3,4
582-200-751
Back Panel
12
Circuit Cards
Cabinets and Pedestals
7 (Locations Given
in 582-200-201)
582-212-700
Opcon/Monitor Cable
12
Data Set Cable
15
Controller/Printer Cable
15
Controller/Controller Cable
582-200-201
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-751
Issue 2, April 1978
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES...........
2
3.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . .
2
4.
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT . . . . . .
4
1.
GENERAL
MONITOR
HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
NECK AREA
1.01
This section provides the routine maintenance procedures and methods for a
DATASPEED 40/4 Station, hereafter referred to
as 40/4 type.
1.02
This section is reissued to provide coverage
for Single Display Stations (SDS).
1.03
Abbreviations used in this section are
defined in Section 582-200-101.
Note: When ordering replaceable components,
unless otherwise specified, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
Fig. 1
Warning: To avoid possible internal damage to
circuitry, wear a 346392 static discharge strap
connected to ground to allow static discharge
before handling circuit cards for removal or
replacement. Avoid touching circuit lands or
components as much as possible (Fig. 2).
The following dangers and warning are to
be used as safety measures for the apparatus and the craftsperson.
l
Danger 1: Turn off all power and signal sources
before removing or replacing any component.
1.05
1.04
Danger 2: Wear approved safety glasses when
the housing of the monitor is removed, as the
display tube· is fragile in the neck area and is
subject to implosion if broken. Be careful not to
strike the glass of the tube with tools or components when working in its vicinity (Fig. 1).
rj ....... _
ground strap
tightly to wrist.
~ttach
clip end of
static discharge strap
to frame ground.
Fig. 2
Perform the routine maintenance at the
customer's convenience. Consider any
special maintenance or corrective action requested
by the customer or operator.
1.06
This routine is for field use only. Do not
attempt repairs without notifying the
customer and your supervisor.
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
© 1973,1975,1976 and 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-751
2.
2.01
•
•
•
•
Cabinets, Pedestals and Opcon
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
(a)
Clean all ventilating screens; use a soft
bristled brush to remove debris, while
vacuuming, see Fig. 3.
Tools required for routine maintenance:
Static discharge strap (346392)
Safety glasses or goggles (approved)
Soft bristled brush (1/2 inch collar)
Vacuum, hand-held (battery or ac type).
2.02
(b) Clean exter,or surfaces:
(1) Wash with mild detergent solution.
Supplies requirEd forroutine maintenance:
(2) Rinse with damp cloth.
• Soft wiping cloths (lint-free)
• Mild detergent (J:lousehold)
• Container for detergent solution.
(3) Buff dry With soft cloth.
Monitor
3.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The routine required is primarily for the
mechanical facilities of each device. This
routine is to be performed on each device of a
station arrangement, after one year or 2000 hours
of service by the station arrangement (whichever
occurs first). Routine intervals should be shorter in
dirty or corrosive environments.
(a)
3.01
Obtain a station release from attendant,
test board, or customer's communication
center (give the approximate length of time the
station will be out of service). Turn off all power.
Clean all ventilating slots (top, bottom
and rear).:
(b) Clean exterior surfaces and buff.
wash, rinse
Warning: Do not use sharp objects, harsh
abrasilJe cleaning agents or sollJents which
could scratch or damage plaStic surfaces.
3.02
3.03
Cleaning routine
Note: On customer location, avoid cleaning
methods that spread dust and debris to surroundingareas.
(c)
Interior - brush and vacuum. (See 3.06
for fuse check.)
Note: Dismantlirig for cleaning shall be kept to
a minimum. For monitor disassembly/reassembly
procedures, refer to Section 582-213-701.
Fan Assembly - brush and vacuum.
AND REAR OF MONITOR
S~~I!3:~-:Bo~rT()M OF MONITOR
UNDEROPCON
REAR WALL OF
PEDESTAL
PEDESTAL FLOOR
Fig. 3-Ventilating Screen Locations
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-751
3.04
Cabinet, pedestals, monitors and opcons
do not require routine lubrication.
ground strap locations, see Section 582-200-701,
(1.04).
3.05
Check. for and correct any defects in the
general appearance of the station:
3.06
• All connectors are seated properly and securely.
• Look for pinched or crimped wires or cables.
• Doors and panels open and close properly.
• Latches open easily and close securely.
• Covers are secure.
• Grounding straps.
During servicing or prior to operational checkout,
make sure all grounding straps are connected. For
Monitor
F3 (1.4 Amp)
Check fuses, condition and ratings (fuse
ratings are critical, no higher rating than
specified shall be used). Refer to Fig. 4 for
locations:
Printer = 1 Amp SL-BL MDL-1 (143306)
Controller = 40C400 type only
Early Design - 3 Amp (405181)
Late Design - 2;5 Amp (321955)
Power Supply = 40PSU101 (Used in 40C304
Controller only)
5 Amp SL-BL (129920)
Monitor = 1.4 Amp (Special fuse must be
marked number 341578).
3.07
For printer maintenance routine, see
Section 582-210-750.
Tractor Feed Printer
Friction Feed Printer
40C400 Controller (Early Design)
40C400 Controller (Late Design)
FUSES
(F1 Through F7
are 3 Amp)
40C304 Controller
40P8U101·
Power Supply
Legend: F = Fuse
Fig. 4-Fuse Locations
Page 3
SECTION 582·200·751
4.02
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT
4.
4.01
Perform the KD/Controlier Check:
For typewriter style opcon: (See Fig. 5.)
• Depress LOCAL key, if the key is not lit.
• Request a local test by depressing the L/TST
key while CONTROL key is held down.
For internal numeric cluster style opcon: (See
Fig. 5.)
• Depress RESET key, if the LOCAL key is not
lit (INPUT INHIBIT key is lit).
• Request a local test by depressing the LrrST
key while ALPHA key is held down.
Check the monitor display for:
• Brightness
• Size
• Distortion
• Proper message.
Note: For monitor adjustments, see Section
582·213·700.
4.03
Checkouts for printers are covered in
Section 582·210·750.
If checkout was successful, routine is
complete. If the checkout responses indio
cate a need for more testing, refer to Section
582·200·501 (Maxi· or Mini·Cluster Stations) or
Section 582·200·505 (Single Display Station).
4.04
Typewriter Style Opcon
Internal Numeric Cluster Style Opcon
CLEA
CHAR
LINE
LETE OLETE
LjTST
REPT
ALPHA
Page 4
4 Pages
Fig. 5-0pcon Key Locations
SECTION 582-200-205
Issue 2" November ;1978
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCoStandard
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
SINGLE
DISPLAY STATION ARRANGEMENTS
,
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
i
PAGE
GENERAL ................... .
1
STATION WORKSHEET ........ .
2
PREPARATION OF STATION
WORKSHEET ................. .
2
BLANK WORKSHEET. . . . . . . . . . .
3
EXAMPLE WORKSHEET........ .
3
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTFORMS .•...............
6
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT IDENTIFICATION ....... .
6
INTERPRETATION OF CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT
FORMS ...................... .
7
INSTALLATION .............. .
18
INSTALLATION OUTLINE ...... .
18
STATION CONFIGURATION
WORKSHEET ................. .
18
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS ... .
18
UNPACKING EQUIPMENT ...... .
18
PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT ... .
19
MONITOR INSTALLATION ..... .
20
OPCON INSTALLATION ........ .
20
PRINTER INSTALLATION ...... .
21
A. Friction Feed ...•..........
B.Tractor Feed .............. .
21
22
CABLE INSTALLATION ........ .
24
CONTENTS
PAGE
OPTIONS .................... .
26
CONTROLLER................ .
26
PRINTER - 80-COLUMN .. , .... .
33
PRINTER - 132-COLUMN ...... .
44
DATA SET, DATA SERVICE
UNIT, INTERNAL MODEM,
AUTOMATIC CALLING
UNIT, AND TELEPHONE
SET ......................... .
52
5.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES ......... .
60
6.
ADJUSTMENTS ............... .
60
1.
GENERAL
4.
1.01
This section provides installation information for all units and components contained in a DATASPEED 40/4 Single Display
Station hereafter referred to as 40/4-Type (SDS)
equipped with a 40C304/AA/001 Single Display
Controller (SCD).
1.02
The reason for reissue of this section is to
add installation information for the Single
Display Station Dial-up version.
Note: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
1.03
Abbreviations used in this section are
defined in Section 582-200-101.
1.04
The following warnings and danger are
to be followed as safety measures for
the apparatus and the craftsperson.
Warning 1: Turn off all the power and signal
sources before removing or replacing any com.
ponent.
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
©1973, 1975, 1976, 1977 and 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-205
Warning 2: To avoid possible internal damage
to circuitry, wear a 346392 static discharge
strap connected to ground to allow static discharge before handling circuit cards for removal
or replacement. Avoid touching circuit lands or
components as much as possible.
t
Attach static
ground strap
tightly to wrist.
ffi
ttaCh clip end
of static discharge strap to
frame ground.
Warning 3: Place listed card in an RM150592
static bag immediately after removal from unit.
Do not place any printer paper in the bag with
the card. Keep the card in the static bag at all
times. Never handle the card outside the bag
without wearing a properly grounded 346392
static ground strap.
Danger: Safety glasses must be worn whenever monitor cover is removed or whenever
monitor is replaced.
Cards List
Printer (410071,410072,410076,
410640, or 410729)
Controller - All Cards
(Not Monitor Cards)
PREPARATION OF STATION WORKSHEET
1.06
Instructions for preparing 40/4-Type SDS
worksheet. (See examples on Pages 4 and
5).
(a)
Use a separate worksheet for each station
ordered.
(b) In the upper portion of the configuration
worksheet, include all information as
required.
(c)
In the SDC area of the configuration worksheet, list the Station Poll Address (SPA)
and Station Select Address (SSA) graphics for
Private Line Version or The Station Identification Graphics For Dial-Up Version. Also, use
Xs in boxes following the option numbers to
show the selected option.
(d) Private Line Version Only: Option405bis
the KD device number; fill in the line in
the SDC box and list the KD device address in
the box marked OPCON.
(e)
Private Line Version Only: Option 405c is
the PTR device number; fill in the line in
the SDC box and list the printer device address
in the box marked PRINTER.
(f)
List the printer code on the line provided
in the box marked PRINTER.
Options 408, 409 and 410 grouped by the
controller as OPT4; mark the proper box
with an X for station configuration purposes.
(g)
(h) In the DATA SET/DATA AUX SET box,
mark an X for either DATA SET or
DATA AUX SET and transmission rate (1200,
2400, or 4800). List the proper code on the
line provided.
On the line between the SDC box and
DATA SET/DATA AUX SET box, line
out the unused connecting cable number.
(i)
STATION WORKSHEET
The Station Configuration Worksheet
provides the craftsperson with an understanding of the station configuration prior to
installation. A blank sample of the worksheet is
given on the following page. When the W-Plan for
SDS (W-4ECXG) is available, its worksheet will be
the preferred sheet to use.
1.05
Page 2
Note 1: In the example worksheet, entries
that are not used are lined out.
Note 2: Entering the character that should
be displayed for each "OPT" number (when in
the OPT mode) on the worksheet will be
helpful to the installer.
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
Blank Worksheet
40/4-Type Station Configuration Worksheet - Single Display Station (SDS)
STATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
SINGLE DISPLAY STATION
DATE _ _ _ _ __
TELCO _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CUSTOMER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TELCO CONTACT·
TEL. NO. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
USSO _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CKT. NQ. _ _ _ _ _ _ TELCO REQ. NO. _ _ _ _ __
WE REQ. NO.
SCHEDULE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SDcl
*
SPA*
SSA*
J.D:+- II_t_2'!!- sri!
4tL-
OPTIONS
401 b~~- OPT 1_*_
4020. I 402b.
402c.
402d.
4030.
403b.
---- }
--"
OPT 6 _ _
PRIVATE LINE VERSION ONLY
+ DIAL-UP VERSION ONLY
406036
OR
406066
6FT.
B
§
DATA SET
DATA AUX. SET
1200 BPS+
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
-
) OPT5 _ _
403c.
403d. _.J
405b~_ _ OPT 2_*_
405c. ~ _ OPT 3_ _
*
4060.
406b.
4070.
•
-- "
i-
OPT 7 _ _
PRINTER
4080.,409 o. a 4100.
408b., 409 o.a 410a.
407b.
-
-u
4080.,409 b. a 410 o. _
408b., 409 b.a 4100.
406039
)
6FT.
PTR. ADDRESS""
OPT 4 _
""'j
408b., 409 b. a 410b.
4110. ~
411 b. __
OPT 8 _ _
4120~_ _ OPT 1_+_
412b:'"_ _ OPT 2+_ _
412c"!"_ _ OPT 3_+_
413 + - - OPT 9
OPCON
KD ADDRESS·
PageS
SECTION 582-200-205
Example Worksheet - Private Line Version
STATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
SINGLE DISPLAY STATION
DATE
$-b-78
TELCO BE/.(.
CUSTOMER ZI c: /J P".c;'ss;"a Co.
TELCO CONTACT Joe. .s",;/~
TEL. NO. /2'3-46{'-7890
USSO ZIj,/- 9St?/-ct? CKT. NO. 3I:P2.5-1TELCO REQ. NO. 5-S9/83
WE REQ. NO.
SDcl
41- 3-SSf/4
SPA*
C
SSA*
I.D:f- Ist
_ _ 2'!L- 3ri!
SCHEDULE
74!l!....-
geIlgtl&
401
b~~~
402a.
X
402d.
402b. ..:..::
402c.
}
......;.
403b.
-_.J
405b!"~
405c~.i.er"\
-4Q4HI,. -4G&It:o
X
407a . .....
407b.
408a., 409 a. a 410a.
408b.,409 a.a 410a.
4080.,409 b. a 410 a.
OPT 6
@
OPT5
@
OPT 2 *
C.
411 o.
411 b.
>
-
.....,
406039
6FT.
()PT4~
15..J
:g)
SET
DATA AUX. SET
ZDSA-
~
1200 BPS+
2400 BPS
)( 4800 BPS
PRI NTER
OPT8...!t...
412b:'"_ _ OPT 2_+_
413 + - - OPT 9
j'age 4
6FT.
~ DATA
~
41 2 c:'" _ _ OPT 3_+_
C
-&R-4QSQSi
OPT7L
4120:_ _ OPT 1_+_
OPCON
KD AODRESS*
406036
OPT 3 * A
408b., 409 b. a 4100. _
408b., 409 b. a 410b.
PRIVATE LINE VERSION ONLY
+ DIAL-UP VERSION ONLY
X '\
403a.
403c.
403d.
OPT I*e
*
8- 8-78
@
4oPZo/
PTR. ADDRESS'll"
/I-
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
Example Worksheet - Dial-Up Version
STATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
SINGLE DISPLAY STATION
DATE 5 - t:,-18
BELL
CUSTOMER Bile *~ce$:S;1j Ce:>.
TELCO
TELCO CONTACT .z;:,,,~ Smif6
TEL. NO. 32/-6S4-0fB7
USSO 278/-943Z-0PCKT. NO. 6"FZJZo~ TELCO REQ. NO. ~-~0294
WE REQ. NO. 6/-~- 60Z.,4
SCHEDULE
B-B-78
~E..9 T.r::::
-'.
JSA~:JJ
OPTIONS
Iff2nt1
*
4!!!.l!{
401 b~,..- OPT 1_*_
402a. I 402b. I 402c.
402d.
rx
F
}
PRIVATE LINE VERSION ONLY
+ DIAL-UP VERSION ONLY
406036
~
"196968
OPT6L
6FT.
~DATA
SET
DATA AUX. SET
2/2-"
~ 1200
BPS+
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
-"
403a. I 403b.
OPT5L
403c. ~
403d. _,.I
405b~_ _ OPT 2_*_
405c~l'""!'_ OPT 3_*_
406a.
:&:'"
406b. _
408a" 409.. a. a. 410a.
408b., 409 a.a. 410a.
408a' 409 b. a. 410 a.
OPT 7
@
-4OH.
PRINTER
~
l
40Bb" 409 b. a. 410a.
X
406039
6FT.
)
OPT4~
40'PZ02
PTR. ADDRESS1t-
~
40Bb' l 409 b. a. 410b. """': i.I
a.~}
411
41Ib._
OPTS
@
412a:-L OPT I.::.L
412b:"~ OPT 2+:B
412c:"~ OPT3+ W
413 +-2- OPT 9...§...
OPCON
KD ADDRESS*
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-205
(SDS). The form should be filled out in pencil by
the service center and kept current by the craftsperson. A filled out form is required when performing the actions of Part 3. INSTALLATION.
The purpose of the form is to provide: Location
and type of circuit cards required, controller and
printer options selected, and required cable connections to controller.
2. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS
2.01 Identification of SDC arrangements are
provided in this part. Controller Arrangement Forms are also provided and discussed.
2.02 The Controller Arrangement Forms of this
.
part include a duplicate of the form which
should be kept with the Single Display Station
CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.03
Single Display Controller (SDC) Arrangements:
VENTILATION
ASSEMBLY
Connector in right
monitor support leg
(not on back panel).
CONNECTORS
NOT USED
Used if 251A1 TDU
is present.
Used if data set (not
251Al) is present.
POWER
SUPPLY
FUSE ~--_.!!llR
Used if printer is
present.
L..-_-"r---..J1I
I POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT C~RDS
BACK PANEL
Version I controllers
are equipped with 410290
in slot 7.
Version II or III controllers
are equipped with 410291 in
slot 6. (Also see Note
below).
I
40C304 CONTROLLER
Note:
This section uses the term "Version I controller" to mean a controller equipped with a 410276
back panel, 410290 circuit card, and a 410261 Issue 3A (or earlier) circuit card. A Version II controller is
equipped with a410277 back panel, 410291 circuit card, 410261 Issue 4A (or later) circuit card. A Version
III controller is equipped with 410277 back panel, 410291 circuit card and a 410262 (dial-up) or 410264
(private line) circuit card. The controller arrangement forms provide conversion and compatibility information.
Page 6
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
APPLICATION
PRIVATE
LINE
No Version I
251Al Version II or III
Version I
251Al
Ve18ion II or III
DIAL-UP
CIRCUIT CARD POSITION (All card numbers preceded by 410) REFERENCE
PAGE NO.
4
2
5
6
3t
7
8
9
1
14
287
NA
286
251
- 290 287
251
286
10
- 291 286
287
251
- 290 251Al NA
16
286
251Al
287
251
291
12
10
251
286
- 291 287
L(INTE~ODEM
ClU/SSI
ROM/IXL
RAM
DI/O
fl'he 41026N ROM circuit card is always piggybacked to the 410251 circuit card in Position 3.
INTERPRETATION OF CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS
This paragraph consists of examples of how a Controller Arrangement Form for the Private Line
Version (early design) controller can be f"Illed out (a form for the late design Private Line or DialUp Version can be filled out in a similar manner).
2.04
EXAMPLE:
This area lists circuit cards present and their respective tocations in the controller.
Blank indicates no
card present (card
connector is present).
Slot 5 has no card
connector (and
no card).
.0
•oo ••
••
Form applies if application is
private line and is Version I
with 251Al.
r1]
•
..
0
Position shown is for
410276 back panel.
If 410277 back panel
is used, insert 410290
in slot 6.
ROUBLE
PATTERNS
0 = OFF
= ON
'This pattern is for the 410261
card piggybacked on 410261.
(410261 must be Issue 3A or
earlier.)
If indicated card is not at
fault, refer to Section
682-200-606, Chart 7,
Step 3, "NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE column.
The area below the circuit card listing shows the trouble patterns that may occut in the pattern lights at
the rear of the 410251 card.
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-205
Example: (Cont)
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
(Displayed Characters)
OPT1 C
OPT2
OPT3 ~
) Mark the characters displayed.
OPT4
OPT5 '@
OPT6 '@
F
OPT7 II
OPT8 ~I'"
OPT9 "@
251Al OPTIONS
ZA,ZR,ZT
YA, ye, YD
&
\
Ii
\
In this example 251A1 is present. 251A1 is installed in
controller. Options given are
required for this application.
~
/
/
This area indicates the character displayed when the corresponding customer desired options are installed.
References to 4. OPTIONS will show that: the station number is 3; the KD is device 5; the printer is
device 2; EBCDIC line code is used; the opcon is typewriter style; the display font is up-low; Options
403a, 402b, 406b and 411b are installed and the required OPT9 selection is made.
PRINTER OPTIONS
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
If a printer is present, the printer option record----
(part of a controller arrangement form) must be
filled out; this example is for an up-low 80column tractor feed printer.
Option 22 a ppli~ only to mono_~
Option 48 applies only to 132-column tractor
feed printe r.
Qption 60 applies only if 402902 Modification
Kit is used.
Page 8
Tractor Feed 132 Col
17.
Specify Right Margin
Spf.'cify Left Margin
18a.
No Paper Feed Out
ISb.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss
lBc.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19d.
96 Character Set
1ge.
64 Character Set
191.
Ext ASCII Set
20a.
Single LF
20b.
Double LF
21a.
Lower and Upper Case Print
21b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
22a.
Lower Case Prints as Error
22b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
39a.
Forms on
39b.
Forms off
48a.
Paper Out Not Gated WIFF
4Sb.
Paper Out Gated WIFF
60a.
Aux. Alarm enabled
6Ob.
Aux. Alarm Disenabled
'x
r-'-'-
~
I---
r-x
r-KI---
rK~
I---
~
I----
rx
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
Example: (Cont)
CARD
POSITION
7
1
7
8
I/O
SOCKET
UYLUN,
MON
PTR
D~A
'"
STATION
WORKSHEET
OPCON1::::::
MON-.L1
PTR(2
DATAAUXSET
"
~ (1)
is Device No.1
(2) is Device No.2
The drawing below
illustrates this
column.
DAA used only when
251A1 is present. (EIA
used only when an
external data set is
present.)
.............. 406039 cable is present only
if printer is part of SDS.
MON
Monitor always connected
here.
OPCON
J------------:----Jll..-l- Opcon always connected here.
OPCON
Page 9
ElECTION 582-200-205
Single Display Controller (SDC) Arrangement Forms
SDC - Arrangement Form
Application:
Private Line (Version II or III Without 251A1) or Dial-Up Version.
I
~ ARD POSITION
I
1
I
001JlJ1f
000
2
I
6
7
I
I
8
I Position shown is for
9
.
CARD NUM8ER
410277 back panel.
E
c
~
~
PATTERN
.
LIGHTS "'-...[1 0
•oo oo•
20
30
!1
ROUBLE
PATTERNS
.
::
.~
SELFO
TEST
SWITCH
:;;
S
:;
Note 1:
is used, insert 410291
in slot 7 .
:;
.:I
r
If 410276 back panel
~
0 :
•
•
-
OFF
ON
This pattern is for the
41026N (See Notes) card
piggybacked on 410251.
If indicated card is not at
fault, refer to Section
582-200-505, Chart 7,
Step 3, "NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE column.
410261- Private Line - Version II
410264 - Private Line - Version III
410262 - Dial-Up
PRINTER OPTIONS
Friction Feed
Note 2:
If 410261 is used, it must be Issue 4A or later.
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
(Displayed Characters)
OPTl
OPT2
OPT3
OPT4
OPT5
OPT6
OPT7
OPTS
OPT9
Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18a.
No Paper Feed Out
r-
18b.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss
IIf-
ISc.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19d.
96 Character Set
1ge.
64 Chatacter Set
19f.
Ext ASCII Set
208.
Single LF
I-
) Mark the Characters displayed.
II-
'20b.
Double LF
21a.
Lower and Upper Case Print
21b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
'@
22a.
Lower Case Prints as Error
22b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
39a.
Forms on
t=
L.,..;,
See adjacent page for connections.
Page 10
17.
39b.
Forms off
488.
Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
48b.
Paper Oul Gated WIFF
60a.
Aux. Alarm enabled
60b.
Aux. Alarm Disenabled
t-t-t-t--
t-t-t-t-t--
r--
-
-
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
CARD
POSITION
7
STATION
WORKSHEET
OPCON/
MONlll
PTR (2)
DATASET
I/O
SOCKET
1
U~~U;'
7
PTR
7
E~
~
'7
,.....406039 cable is
present only if
printer is part
ofSDS.
EIA
MON
OPCON
Note: If customer reql,lires that print local operation be prohibited from the opcon, place a 340701
over the PRINT LOCAL position.
Page 11
SECTION 582·200·205
SDC - Arrangement Form
Application:
Private Line Version II or III With 251A1
I.._f_A_RD_POS_'_T'_O_·..1L-..1=--...1-=.2--L-.-:3:........1L-..;4=--.L1...::.5--L1-=6'--J1L-..;7=---.L1_8=--..L-:::9~1 Position shown is for
410277 back panel.
00~
.:r
~
~
PATTERN
LIGHTS ",",[1 0
•oo o•o
20
f
30
,..,
.. .!1
'SELF'
is used, insert 410291
in slot 7 .
ROUBLE
PATTERNS
••
.0
0
•
0 = OFF
• - ON
"'ThiS pattern is for the
410261 *(Version II), ,
or 410264 (Version III)
card piggybacked ,on 410251.
TEST
SWITCH
'"~
...,..,
~
If 410276 back panel
If indicated card is not at
*If 410261 is used, it must
be issue 4A or later.
fault, refer to Section
582·200·505, Chart 7,
Step 3, "NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE column.
251A1 OPTIONS
ZA, ZR, ZT
YA, YC, YD
PRINTER OPTIONS
Friction Feed
I
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
(Displayed Characters)
r-
OPT1
rOPT2
rOPT3
rOPT4
rOPT5
fOPT6 '-OPT7
--'
OPTS
OPT9 £
Mark the characters displayed.
4-
See adjacent page for connections.
Page 12
17.
Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
1Bo.
No Paper Feed Out
lSb,
Paper FO on "RM" Loss
18c,
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19d,
96 Character Set
1ge,
64 Character Set
19f,
Ext ASCII Set
20a.
Single LF
20b,
DoubieLF
2la.
Lower and Upper Case Print
21b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
228.
Lower Case Prints as Error
22b,
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
398.
Forms on
39b,
Fonnsoff
488.
Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
4Sb.
Paper Out Gated WIFF
60a.
Aux. Alarm enabled
60b,
Aux. Alarm Disenabled
C--
-
'-'--
,--~
'--
I-I-I-I-I-I--
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
CARD
POSITION
7
1
7
I/O
SOCKET
Ur\;Ul'l,
MON
PTH.
DAA
9
STATION
WORKSHEET
OPCON/
MON (1)
PTR (2)
DATAAUXSET
/406039 cable is
present only if
printer is part
ofSDS.
MON
OPCON
Note: If customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the opcon, place a 340701
over the PRINT LOCAL position.
.
.
.
Page
1~
SECTION 582-200-205
Single Display Controller (SDC) Arrangement Forms
SDC - Arrangement Form
Application:
Private Line Version I Without 251A1
CARD POSITION
1
I
2
6
CARD NtTMBER
'~"
~
00 00 00 DO
"...r ~ g •o o•
l30 o o
PATTERN
LIGHTS
r
....,
...~
'if
.0
1
I
8
Position shown is for
410276 back panel.
If 410277 back panel
is used, insert 410290
in slot 6.
S
;
ROUBLE
PATTERNS
••
••
• ~
SELF.
TEST
SWITCH
..
I
0•
0
= OFF
ON
•• =
This pattern is for the
410261 card piggybacked
on 410251. (410261 must
be Issue 3A or earlier.)
If indicated card is not at
fault, refer to Section
582-200-505, Chart 7,
Step 3, "NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE column.
PRINTER OPTIONS
Friction Feed
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
(Displayed Characters)
OPT1
OPT2
OPT3
OPT4
OPT5
OPT6
OPT7
OPT8
OPT9
Tractor Feed 132 Col
Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
r-
17.
If-
18a.
No Paper Feed Out
1Sb.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss
l-
l8c.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
) Mark the characters displayed.
19d.
96 Character Set
r-
1ge.
64 Character Set
19f.
Ext ASCII Set
I-
20a.
Single LF
~I'-
20b.
Double LF
210.
Lower and Upper Case Print
2lb.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
220.
Lower Case Prints as Error
I-
~
..:..
See adjacent page for connections.
Page 14
Tractor Feed 80 Col
22b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
39a.
Form80n
39b.
Forms off
48a.
Paper Out Not Gated W/FF
4Sb.
Paper Out Gated WIFF
60a.
Aux. Alarm enabled
SOb.
Aux. Alarm Disenabled
f-f-f-f-f-f-I--
-
-
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
-170-
CARD
POSITION
7
1
7
7
SOCKET
OPCON,
MON
PTR
EIA
STATION
WORKSHEET
OPCON/
MON (1)
PTR (2)
DATA SET
~
87
,...-406039 cable is
present only if
printer is part
of SDS.
EIA
MON
OPCON
Note: If customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the opcon, place a 340701
over the PRINT LOCAL position.
Page 15
SECTION 582-200-205
SDC - Arrangement Form
Application:
Private Line Version I With 251Al
LI-,-C.:.:.AR:.:.:0:..c"'-"'.::;S',,,T'.::.O,-'....1c.....;1:""-LI-=.2--L---=3:.....J1L--4:""-LI-=-D--L---=6:.....J1L--'-..L--=--:.y
CARD NlTMBER
...
1
!S
i
~
PATTERN
LIGHTS
""'I ~ g
r
L3
0
.,..'"
ROUBLE
PATTERNS
•oo o•o ::
•
SELF.
TEST
SWITCH
Position shown is for
410276 back panel.
If 410277 back panel
is used, insert 410290
in slot 6 .
~
~
0:
•• -
OFF
ON
This pattern is for the
410261 card piggybacked
on 410251. (410261 must
be Issue3A or earliPl'.)
~
...
If indicated card is not at
fault, refer to Section
582-200-505, Chart 7,
Step 3, "NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE column.
251AIOPTIONS
PRINTER OPTIONS
ZA, ZIt, ZT
YA, YC, YD
Friction Feed
Tractor Feed 80 Col
Tractor Feed 132 Col
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
(Displayed Characters)
r-
OPT!
IOPT2
rOPT3 i - ) Mark the characters displayed.
OPT4
OPT5
'-OPT6
OPT7
OPTS 4,
OPT9 ~
-
See adjacent page for connections.
Page 16
17.
Specify Right Margin
Specify Left Margin
18a.
No Paper Feed Out
lSb.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss
l8c.
Paper FO on "RM" Loss and ETX
19d.
96 Character Set
1ge.
64 Character Set
191.
Ext ASCII Set
20a.
Single LF
20b.
Double LF
21a.
Lower and Upper Case Print
21b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
22a.
Lower Case Prints as Error
22b.
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
39a.
Forms on
39b.
Formscff
48a.
Paper Out Not Gated WjFF
4Sb.
Paper Out Gated WIFF
60a.
Aux. Alarm enabled
GOb.
Aux. Alarm Disenabled
-
I--
I-r-I-r--
t--I--
I-r--
t---
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
C,\IW
POSITION
I/O
SOCKET
7
1
7
9
OI'CON,
MON
PTR
DAA
STATION
WORKSIIEET
OPCON/
MON (1)
PTRJ2~
J)AT A AUX SET
/406039 cable is
present only if
printer is part
of SDS.
MON
OPCON
Note: If customer requires that print local operation be prohibited from the opcon, place a 340701
over the PRINT LOCAL position.
Page 17
SECTION 582-200-205
3.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OUTLINE
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
(1) Review Service Order and Configuration
Worksheet.
(2) Unpack equipment (3.02 - 3.07).
(3) Placement of equipment (3.08 - 3.09).
(4) Installation of equipment (3.10 - 3.16).
(5) Verify and install controller options (4.01
-4.16).
(6) Check options in printer (4.17, 4.19 4.22).
(7) Check options in data set or internal
modem (4.23 - 4.28).
(8)Perform operational checkout (4.18),
refer to Section 582-200-505.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Self test with all cables installed,
Component operational checks,
Local test,
On-line tests.
o
(9) Have customer try out station.
0(10) Complete the installation:
(a) Give How To Operate manual(s) to
customer.
(b) Clean up.
(c) Complete service order.
STATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
3.01
Obtain the Station Configuration Worksheet. See 1.05 for purpose and examples
of a worksheet. If a worksheet is not present or
does not contain required information, obtain
the service order.
ID labels are not used; placement of
equipment is done from the configuration worksheet.
Note:
UNP ACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Any special instructions necessary to
open a box will be affixed to the top of
the box. A sample instructions label is shown.
3.02
Page 18
If there is no label on the box, use these procedures:
(a) With box in upright position, open top
flaps and fold outward.
(b) Lift contents out of box. Remove inner
packing details from around product.
(c) ·Remove plastic bag and all tape from
product.
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1. TURN BOX BOTTOM SIDE UP. OPEN BOTTOM FLAPS
AND FOLD OUTWARD.
2. RETURN BOX AND CONTENTS TO AN UPRIGHT
POSITION, KEEPING BOTTOM FLAPS FOLDED
OUTWARD.
3. REMOVE BOX AND PLACE ASIDE. REMOVE INNER
PACKING DETAILS FROM AROUND PRODUCT.
4. REMOVE PLASTIC BAG AND ALL TAPE FROM
PRODUCT.
28130PK
"oeAB
UNPACKING EQUIPMENT
3.03
The following KD and controller components are packed separately:
40CAB251/ZZ
+ Related Parts
40MN101
40K104/DAB,
40K105/CAA OR
40K203/GAB*
KD Cabinet (Includes
40C304 Controller
and a 406047 Cabinet
Modification Kit) and All
Set Cables
Monitor
Opcon
*If 40K203GAB Opcon is featured, Modification
Kit 346936 will be attached to 40CAB251 Cabinet.
ISS 2, SECTION 5S2-200-205
3.04
If a friction feed printer is part of the station, the following components are packed separately:
40PIOl/ZZ + Type Carrier or
40PI02/ZZ + Type Carrier
40CAB201/ZZ + Related Parts or
40CAB371/ZZ + Related Parts
40PWUIOl (If Present)
40PWU102 (If Present)
3.05
Paper Winder For 40CAB201/ZZ
Paper Winder For 40CAB201/ZZ or 40CAB371/ZZ
40P151/ZZ + Type Carrier or
40P154/ZZ + Type Carrier
SO-Column Tractor Feed Printer
(Includes Type Carrier)
40CAB351/ZZ + Related Parts
SO-Column Tractor Feed Printer Cabinet
Paper Guide
Paper Rack
If a 132-column tractor feed printer is part of the station, the following components are packed
separately:
40P201/ZZ + Type Carrier or
40P202/ZZ + Type Carrier
3.07
Friction Feed Printer Cabinet
If an SO-column tractor feed printer is part of the station, the following components are packed
separately:
407060
405544
(If Present)
3.06
Friction Feed Printer (Includes Type Carrier)
132-Column Tractor Feed Printer
(Includes Type Carrier)
40CAB353/ZZ + Related Parts
132-Column Tractor Feed Printer Cabinet
407061
Paper Guide
Unpack all boxes.
PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
3.0S
Place the monitor support cabinet on a flat surface near the desired installation location. With the
cabinet on its side, remove the mounting hardware (four places) from the cabinet bottom.
-,--L----
I
---~
$
~
&
3.09
Place the cabinet on the customer provided table or desk (a pedestal may be used). Access to
an ac outlet is required.
Page 19
SECTION 582-200-205
MONITOR INSTALLATION
3.10
40MN101 Monitor Installation to 40CAB251 Cabinet
CD Unpack monitor.
Q) Place the monitor on its corresponding
posts (there is no locking device
associated with the monitor support
posts, ie, it can be lifted off without
releasing any latches).
® Tilt the monitor back and remove
the 341719 packing clip (if present) from
the tube tilt mechanism. Retain the
clip for future repacking.
Caution: Wear
safety glasses:
@ Install the plastic bottom plate
(packed separately) - snaps on
with 4 studs that are part of the
bottom plate.
,l
341179
PACKING CLIP
(Only Present on Monitors
With Tilt Wheel)
OPCON INSTALLATION
3.11
40K104/DAB, 40K105/CAA or 40K203/GAB Opcon Installation to 40CAB251 Cabinet
CD Slide latches downward and position opcon so
that connectors are aligned and latches on left
and right side are fully engaged.
Remove shipping plates.
® Slide. latches upward and check
that opcon is firmly attached on
both sides before releasing.
Page 20
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
(e)
PRINTER INSTALLATION
If a printer is part of the station, install as
applies - A. Friction Feed or B. Tractor
3.12
The controller to printer cable has already
been routed to the printer location. Connect the cable to the PTR connector the separate ground terminal to the cabinet ground lug.
(f)
Feed.
Friction Feed
A.
3.13
(a)
40P101/ZZ or 40P102/ZZ Friction Feed
Printer
(g)
Unpack printer and 40CAB201/ZZ or
40CAB371/ZZ cabinet.
(h)
Installation of 40PWU101 Paper Winder
-(If Supplied)
Install paper and ribbon.
Prin ter options are installed per Service
Order and entered on Controller Arrangement Form attached to controller to which
printer is connected. (See 4.19.)
(i)
(b) If four 400409 immobilization screws are
present (see 3.14 for approximate location), back them off 7 or 8 turns.
(c)
If printer is not mounted on a pedestal,
connect ac cable to an ac outlet.
Install printer in cabinet.
If it becomes necessary to check or change
options, refer to Section 582-210-705 or
FIMP 579-505-350, Component Access for
removal of printer circuit card.
(j)
(d) If pedestal is provided with the printer
(per Station Configuration Worksheet),
unpack pedestal, place printer and cabinet on
pedestal top, open the pedestal door and route
ac cable from printer cabinet into ac convenience strip inside of pedestal.
(k)
Connect ac cable from pedestal (if
pedestal mounted) or from printer cabinet
and paper winder (if used) to 115 V ac outlet.
Note: If pedestal mounted,
route ac cable to convenience
strip in pedestal.
Late design cabinets
have two additional
mounting holes.
I
I
•
I
-~:~i~181204
156768~3646
Note: Do not use 40PW101
Paper Winder with 40CAB371/ZZ
Cabinet.
Page 21
SECTION 582-200-205
B. Tractor Feed
3.14 40P151/ZZ or 40P154/ZZ - 80-Column and 40P201/ZZ or 40P202/ZZ - 132-Column Tractor
Feed Printer
(a)
Unpack printer, cabinet and pedestal.
(b)
Install printer into cabinet as follows.
?
!(I)
o ZERO
&
lONE
J
2
K
3
L
4
M
5
N
0
6
7
P
8
Q
9
R
:
1( ! )
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
EBCDIC§
ASCIl=!: DEPRESS DISPLAY
27
28
29
30
31
[
\
1
A
-,
¢
$
\
\
*
I
¢
I
-,
)
;
A(,)
Characters in parentheses appear on EBCDIC opcons.
I is "logical OR" (see Station No. 15).
-, is "logical NOT" (see Station No. 31).
:j: ASCII indicates American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.
§ EBCDIC indicates Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
Page 28
#
@
,
-
"
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
4.06
OPTl, OPT2, and OPT3 List. Depress the corresponding key on the opcon. Check the OPT2
character to assure that the proper character is
now displayed.
Dial-Up Version Only: To enter the station
ID sequence, perform the following:
(See Note)
(a)
Find the desired 2nd character of the
station ID sequence in the OPTl, OPT2
and OPT3 List below. OPTI corresponds to
Option 412a. Depress the corresponding key on
the opcon. Check the OPTI character to assure
that the proper character is now displayed.
(b) Depress the Cursor Tab key. OPT2 corresponds to Option 412b. Find the desired
3rd character of the station ID sequence in the
Depress the Cursor Tab key. OPT3 corresponds to Option 412c. Find the desired
4th character of the station ID sequence in the
OPTl, OPT2 and OPT3 List. Depress the correspondingkey on the opcon. Check the OPT3
character to assure that the proper character is
now displayed.
(c)
OPTl, OPT2 AND OPT3 LIST (Dial-Up Version Only)
412. STATION IDENTIFICATION SEQUENCE
SP
(
!(I)
)
:#
+
$
,
%
&
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
"
*
/
6
7
,
8
@
H
9
A
B
I
:
;
<
=
J
K
C
D
E
>
F
?
G
L
M
N
0
P
Q
X
y
R
S
T
Z
U
V
W
](!)
...... (-.)
[(¢)
\
-
Characters in parenthesis appear on EBCDIC opcons.
Note:
The SDS ID sequence consists of 4 characters. The first character is preset (when option 408ASCII or EBCDIC is chosen) to "F" when the ASCII line code is chosen or "f" when the EBCDIC line
code is chosen. This first character is not displayed after OPTl, OPT2 or OPT3.
4.07
Depress CURSOR TAB key. Choose the desired operation from the OPT4 list for type of opcon,
display font and line code (408). Only one key top is depressed to select all three options. Depress
the required key top on the opcon. Check the OPT4 character column to assure that the proper character
is now displayed.
OPT4 LIST
Option 410
Opcon
a. l'voewriter
a. Typewriter
a. 1'ypewriter
a. Typewriter
b. Internal Num
Cluster
Option 409
Display Font
- ow
a.
a. Up-Low
b. Monocase
b. Monocase
b. Monocase
Option 408
Line Code
a.
b.
a.
b.
b.
(Depress/Display)
OPT4 Character
ASl
@
EBCDIC
ASCII
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
A
B
C
G
11 Factory
optioned (for SDC, refers to selection that provides corresponding operation for a SCC/DCC
or MCC).
Page 29
SECTION 582,200-205
Depress CURSOR TAB key. Choose the proper character from the OPT5 List. Depress the required
keytop on the.opcon for the option selected. Check the OPT5 character column to assure that
the proper character is now displayed.
4.08
OPT5 LIST
403. Display Field Intensities
Intensified and Blink FieldS are Int.ensifled
Intensified and Blink Fields are Blinked
Hlink t'lelds are Blinked, Intensified tlelds are
Intensified. Mixed Intensified and Blinked Fields
on the same Display are Blinked.
Blink Special Intensified Fields
All fields marked as intensified, protected and
alpha-numeric will be blinked.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.09
(Depress/Display)
OPT5 Character
@
A
B
D
Depress CURSOR TAB key. Choose from OPT6 List and proceed as for OPT5.
OPT6 LIST
402. Type of Alarm on Receipt of Alarm,
Write Control, or Copy Control
Character and Action Upon Opcon Entry of TAB
a.
b.
c.
d.
Continuous Alarm
TAB key erases field (inserts nulls) and moves
cursor to first character of next unprotected field.
Single Alarm
TAB key erases field (inserts nulls) and moves
cursor to first character of the next unprotected
field.
Continuous Alarm
TAB key erases field (inserts nulls), no cursor
movement.
Single Alarm
TAB key erases field (inserts nulls), no cursor
movement.
(Depress/Display)
OPT6 Character
H
@
I
A
Note:
A continuous alarm causes the opcon bell to ring repeatedly. Alarm and TAB have been grouped
into OPT6 for convenience. There is no relationship between TAB and alarm .
• Factory optioned (for SDC, refers to selection that provides corresponding operati~n for a SCC/DCC or
MCC).
Page 30
ISS 2, SECTION 5S2-200-205
4.10
Depress CURSOR TAB key. The style of the opcon determines whether Option 406 or 407
applies. Use the OPT7 List and depress key required for the option selected. Check the OPT7
character column to assure that the proper character is now displayed.
OPT7 LIST
406. Numeric Field Override (Used With
Typewriter Style Opcon - 40K104)
a.
b.
Alpha Data Can be Entered in Numeric Field
(Bell Will Sound)
Alpha Data Cannot be Entered in Numeric
Field (Bell Will Sound)
407. Numeric Lock Special Feature (Used With
Data Entry Style Opcon - 40K105)
a.
b.
(Depress/Display)
OPT7 Character
@
A
(Depress/Display)
OPT 7 Character
Enabled - Only Digits 0 to 9, Minus, DUP,
Period Can be Entered Into a Numeric Field.
(These are in the numeric cluster - see Note
below.)
Disabled - In a Numeric Field, Entry of
Unshifted Characters Causes Unshifted
Characters to be Displayed.
A
@
I
Note:
In operation, the numeric lock special feature can be temporarily overridden by simultaneously
depressing NUMERIC or ALPHA and a character key.
4.11
Depress CURSOR TAB key. Use OPTS List. Depress required key. Check displayed character.
OPTS LIST
411. External Data Set/Internal Modem Loopback Testing
(See Caution Below.)
a.
b.
c.
External Data Set
Internal Modem
Loopback Testing Only (See Section 5S2-200-505
for testing procedures.)
(Depress/Display)
OPTS Character
@
A
C
Caution: Option 411a or 411 b (For Private Line Version) or 411a only (For Dial-Up Version) is required
to provide customer operation. Option 411c is only used during installation or maintenance. As explained
in Section 582-200-505, operation with Option 411con the customer data channel can cause transmissions
to be scrambled and possibly halt all system operation.
11
Factory optioned (for SDC, refers to selection that provides corresponding operation for a SCC/DCC
or MCC).
Page 31
SECTION 582-200-205
4.12
Private Line Version Only: Depress CURSOR TAB key. Use the OPT9 List. Depress SPACE key.
Check that the @ character is now displayed.
OPT9 LIST (Private-Line Version Only)
1I
Reserved for Future Use
Depress
Key
(Depress/Display)
OPT9 Character
Proper Station Operation (required)
SPACE
@
Factory optioned (for SDC, refers to selection that provides corresponding operation for a SCC/DCC
or MCC).
4.13
Dial-Up Version Only: Depress Cursor Tab key. Use the OPT9 List below. Depress required key on
the opcon for the option selected. Check the OPT9 character column to assure that the proper
character is now displayed.
OPT9 LIST (Dial-Up Version Only)
413. Automatic Disconnect Timer (1 to 15 minutes)
Time-out
1 Min.
2 Min.
3Min.
4 Min.
5 Min.
6 Min.
7 Min.
8 Min.
Depress/Display
OPT9 Character
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Time-out
Depress /Display
OPT9 Character
9 Min.
10 Min.
11 Min.
12 Min.
13 Min~
14 Min.
15 Min.
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
4.14
Again check all options to make sure that displayed characters match these entered on Station
Configuration Worksheet supplied with station.
4.15
Option 404 is not used in a single display station because it does not apply. Option 404 is type of
block abort procedure used when station abnormally stops sending on-line.
4.16
Depress LOCAL or RESET key on opcon to exit the "OPT" mode. The controller will exit; go
through a power-up routine and begin normal operation. Lower and latch cabinet cover. Tilt
monitor forward to the operating position.
To check printer and data set (or internal modem) options, turn off all power and proceed to
(4.19 through 4.28) for printer options and (4.29 through 4.37) for the data set (or internal
modem).
4.17
4.18
To perform an operational checkout, refer to Section 582-200-505.
Page 32
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
PRINTER - 80-COLUMN
4.19
For options, refer to:
PRINTER CODE
DESCRIPTION
COMPATIBLE PRINTER
LOGIC CIRCUIT CARD
REFERENCE
PARAGRAPHS
40P101/ZZ
Friction Feed
410640
410076
4.20 and 4.21
4.20 and 4.22
40P102/ZZ
Friction Feed
410076
4.20 and 4.22
40P151/ZZ
Tractor Feed'
410640
410076
4.20 and 4.21
4.20 and 4.22
40P154/ZZ
Tractor Feed
410071
4.20, 4.23 and 4.28
Note 1:
Selected printer options must be entered on the Controller Arrangement Form.
Note 2:
Refer to 4.24 for 132-column printer options.
4.20
Location of "Forms" and "LF" switches on all SO-column printers.
PRINTER
PRINTER
LINE FEED
OPTION
SWITCH
DOUBLE
@
80-Column
Tractor Feed
1
SINGLE
80-Column
Friction Feed
Page 33
SECTION 582-200-205
4.21
Printer options for 410640 circuit carel.
(Toggle switches
may be present.)
410640 PRINTER LOGIC
CIRCUIT CARD
C10
Cll
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0 - - - 0
0
0 0
- - - 0
0 - - - 0
0
0
17. Printer Margin and Fonn Width
f-- ,
('
'Last Character on
Last Character on
, Last Character on
d.(X) Last Character on
Last Character on
' Last Character on
II
' Last Character on
Last Character on
....
'
-
80th Column
79th Column
78th Column
77th Column
76th Column
75th Column
74th Column
73rd Column
•• •• •
•• • •
•• • • ••
•• •• •• •
- -
- - --
Unless otherwise specified, choQse 17c.
Note:
If right margin specified is 36 through 72, a 410076 circuit card must be used.
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
a.
b.
c.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on "RM" Loss 16 Lines
Paper Feed Out on "RM" Loss
orETX
•0 -
- - - - - - - - - 1- - - - - - - -
0
-
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18c .
• Indicates on.
Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
** Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
Page 34
C-ll
C-10
2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
-
- -
- - -
-
-
-
0
0
• **
-
**
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
CI0
Cll
1
1\2\3\4\5\6 1\2\3\4\5\61
;--19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
-\-\-\e\e\- -\-\-\-L"l J
c. \ Not Printed on Parity Error
'---0-
Re q uired Selection
CI0
Cll
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
e 0
0 e
0 0
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
d.1 Printers With 96 Character Set
e. 1 Printers With 64 Character Set
f. I Printers With Extended ASCII Character Set
'---
Use of 400629 (:) or 400784 (:) type carriers require selection of 19d.
Use of 400645 (:) or 400785 (~) type carriers require selection of 1ge.
_Use of 400775 (~) type carrier requires selection of 19f (internal use only).
See 4.20.
Line Feed on Printer
20.
a. I Single
b. I Double
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20a.
I Lower Case and Upper Case Print
a.
b.
C·IO
1 2 3 4 5 6 I
Foldover on Up-Low Printer
- 21.
I
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
-
-
-
-
C-II
2 3 14 5 6
- - - - - - - - -
-1- 0
-I- e
-
**
, Consider only with selection of 19d or 19f.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21a.
f-- 22.
a_
b.
C-10
Foldovpr on Mono Case Printer
1 Lower Case Not Folded Owr
I Lower Case Printed as Upppr Case
C-ll
11213141516 1 \ 2 \3 \4 \S 16
--1--1-1-1-1- -1-1-\-\0\-
-1-1-1-1-1- -I-I-I-Iel- **
Consider only with selection of 1ge.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22b.
39.
a.
b.
Forms (Tractor Printer Only)
IOn
\ Off
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39a.
e
o
**
See 4.20_
**
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
Page 35
SECTION 582-200-205 '
4.22
Printer options for 410076 circuit card.
17. Printer Left Margin and Form Width
a.
b.(X)
First Printed Column - - Column 1
First Printed Column - - Column 2
First Printed Column - - Column 3
First Printed Column - - Column 4
First Printed Column - - Column 5
First Printed Column - - Column 6
First Printed Column - - Column 7
First Printed Column - - Column 8
First Printed Column - - Column 9
First Printed Column - - Column 10
First Printed Column - - Column 11
First Printed Column - - Column 12
First Printed Column - - Column 13
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17a.
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
**Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
Page 36
1
2
3
- - - •
4
E7
5
6
7
•• •0 ••
•
0 0
- •
0 0 0
- - •
0
- - •
0 0
- -- 00 0 •00 •0
- - • 0• • 0
- - 0 0 • •0
- - 0
•
0 - - • •
- - • 0• •0 • - - 0 • • 0 -
8
- - - - - - - - -
-
**
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
17.
c.
d. (X)
Printer Right Mar in and Form Width
Last Char Printed
E1
Column Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
80
0
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
- - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
--
E7
E2
1
9
0
••• 0•
••
0
••
••
•
0
0
•0• •0 -- 0•• •• 0 •
•0
0 • - 0 •
0 0 •• 0•
0 0 0 0
0
•
•
•••
0
2
3
4
5
- - - -
6
- - - - - - - - - - -
-
7
8
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
••
1
2
3
•• ••
•• ••
••• •••
••• •••
••• •••
4
5
6
7
8
**
-- - - -
To obtain counts:
73 through
61 through
49 through
37 through
25 through
80 operate switches as shown.
72 operate switches as shown,
60 operate switches as shown,
48 operate switches as shown,
36 operate switches as shown,
then operate
then operate
then operate
then operate
E7 position 2 to
E7 position 1 to
E2 position 7 to
E2 position 8 to
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17c.
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
1
•
a. No Paper Feed Out Out
b. Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM
0
Loss - - 16 Lines or One Form
c. Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss
0
or ETX - -16 Lines or One Form
2
3
4
E1
5
6
7
8
-
9
1
2
3
E2
4 5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7
8
•-
-
6
0
- - -
0
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18c.
119.
c.
I
Printer Errored Character Symbol
Not Printed on Parity Error
E1
1 1 2 1 3 I 4 15 I 6 J 7 J 8J 9
-1-1.'.'-- - - J
•
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
**
Page 37
SECTION 582-200-205
r-
rr-
19
Character Set
d.
e.
f.
Printers With 96-Character Set (Up-Low)
Printers With 64-Character Set (Monocase)
Printers With Special Carrier (Line Drawing)
E2
1
- - -
3
4
0
5
•
•
- -
-
~
2
6
7
8
**
0
0
0
Use of 400629 (:) or 400784 (~) type carriers require selection of 19d.
Use of 400645 ( ) or 400785 (~) type carriers require selection of 1ge.
,-Use of 400775 U) type carrier requires selection of 19f (internal use only).
20. Line Feed on Printer
a.1 Single
b·1 Double
See 4.20.
**
11111111111
I I 1111-1-1-1Ll
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20a.
21.
Foldover on Up-Low Printer
a. I
b. I
Lower Case and Upper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
E2
1
--
2
3
0
4
5
•-
6
7
8
-
**
'---Consider onlywt
i h selection of 1 9d or 1 9.
f
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21a.
22.
Foldover on Monocase Printer
a. I
b·1
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
E2
1
2 3
- -
0
•
4
5
6
7
8
- - - - -
**
"--- ConsIder only wIth selectIOn of 1ge.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22b.
9
:""".
I
800 4.20.
I
1t - - - r b . I - - = - - O f f - - - - + - .--r-rl
1--r-r1l--.---r1l-.---r'11-r-T"1I-r---11 **
:
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39a.
48.
a.
b.
Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
I
I
No (Paper Out Not Gated With Form Out)
Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
"--- Position of switch has no effect wit h f nctIOn
.
feed prmter.
For tractor feed printer, unless otherwise specified, choose 48b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
** Factory optioned.
Page 38
E2
1
2
•
0
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
**
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-206
'54.
Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
I Character After ESC Printed as Received
I Printing of Character After ESC Suppressed
a.
b.
1
2
0
3
2
3
El
5 6
4
7
8
9
- - - - - - - e
**
'----NotApplicable - Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration.
L55.
~
SI/SO Detection
a.
. b.
d~
El
1
SI/SO Detection Not Used
SI/SO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
Not Appli""". - P""tinn of """'"
5
6
- - - - - - - - - - -
7
0
- -
8
9
e
-
-
**
not""'" 0""",,,=.
56.
Friction FeedlTractor Feed Printer
a.
Friction Feed Printer - Motor Held On After
Paper Alarm
Tractor Feed Printer - Motor Turned Off After
Paper Alarm
b.
4
1
0
e
2
3
- - -
E2
4 5
6
7
8
- - - - - - - - -
**
4~or friction feed printer, choose 56a.
For tractor feed printer, choose 56b.
57.
SSI/OEM Interface
a. I
SSI
1
I 2 I3
E7
141.5
-1-1-1-1
I6 I7 I8
I ·Iel
. --
**
Req uired Selection
58.
Idle Line Motor Control
a.
Disabled - Motor Held On Indefinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled - Motor Turned Off After 40-Seconds
Idle Line
b.
1
2
3
E7
4 5
6
7
8
- - - - 0
- - - - - - - e
- -
-
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 58b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
**Factory optioned.
Page 39
SECTION 582-200-205
4.23
Printer options for 410071 circuit card.
E5
E8
E9
(Printer Circuit Card Viewed From Bene.ath
Printer - Access to Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan of Printer)
E9
C1,E5 ANDES
17
Printer Left Margin and Form Width
a.
First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column
First Printed Column
First Printed Column
First Printed Column -
b.(X)
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Column 5
Column 6
Column 7
Column S
Column 9
Column 10
Column 11
Column 12
Column 13
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17a.
•
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
**
Page 40
1
2
-- --
- - - - - - - - - - - -
3
4
E5
5
6
7
•• •• •0 ••
•• 0• 00 00 0 0
• •0 -0 0 0
0
0 0 •
0
•0 0 •• •0 -0
0
•
•• •0 •0 •0• -0
••0 -
S
9
- - - **
- - - - -
- -
- - -- - -
-
- -
- -
ISS 2, SECTION
17.
Printer Right Mar
Last Char Printed
Column Number
80
73 61 49 37 25
74 62 50 38 26
75 63 51 39 27
76 64 52 40 28
77 65 53 41 29
78 66 54 42 30
79 67 55 43 31
68 56 44 32
69 57 45 33
70 58 46 34
71 59 47 35
72 60 48 36
c.
d. (X)
in and Form Width
E9
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
0
•
•0•
•0•
••
0
•
0
•••
0
••
0
••
0 •• -0
•
••• •••
0
•
0 •
0 •
•• 00
•0 -
0
0
0
E8
E5
7
-
0
0
0
8
-
9
-
1
2
3
4
5
5S~-2~~-~~~
6
7
8
1
• -- -- -- - • •
•• ••
•••
•• ••
••
••
••
- - •• ••
• - - - - •• •• .·1- - - - - - •
.•• •••
•
2
4
3
-
5
6
7
8
- - - - -
•• **
••
••
••
•••
••
-
- - - - - - - - -
-
To obtain counts:
73 through SO operate switches as shown.
61 through 72 operate switches as shown, then
49 through 60 operate switches as shown, then
37 through 4S operate switches as shown, then
25 through 36 operate switches as shown, then
operate
operate
operate
operate
ES position S to OFF.
E5 position 1 to OFF.
E5 position 7 to OFF.
E5 position S to OFF.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17c.
lS.
Printer Paper Feed Out
a.
b.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss - 16 Lines or One Form
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss or ETX - 16 Lines or One Form
c.
E8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
- - e - - - - - 0 0 - - - - - e 0 - - - - - **
Unless otherwise specified, choose lSc.
19.
Printer Errored Character Symbol
c. I
Not Printed on Parity Error
E9
11213141516171s19
1-1-1
I
lelel '1
Req uired Selection
e
o
**
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
Page 41
SECTION 582·200·205
19.
d. I
!- e. I
I- f. I
r-
Character Set
1
4
3
E8
5
6
-
- **
0
0
- -
6
7
8
• 0•
0
- - - - - - - -
Printers With 96·Character Set (Up· Low)
Printers With 64·Character Set (Monocase)
Printers With Special Carrier (Line Drawing)
-
<-
2
7
8
Use of 400629 <:) or 400784 (:) type carriers require selection of 19d.
Use of 400645 (:) or 400785 (~) type carriers require selection of 1ge .
...Use of 400775 (~) type carrier requires selection of 19f (internal use only).
20. Line Feed on Printer
a·1
b·1
Single
Double
See 4.20.
I I I I I I I I I I I
**
I I I I I I I I I I I
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20a.
2l.
Foldover on Up· Low Printer
a. I
b. I
Lower Case and Upper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
1
0
•
E8
5
2
3
4
2
3
4
- - - - - - - - - - - - - **
- Consider only with selectIOn 0 f 19d or 19f.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21a.
2'
~
a.
E8
Foldover on Monocase Printer
1
0
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
b.
•
- -
5
6
7
8
- - - - -
**
Consider only with selection of 1ge.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22b.
1~: I-g;f------+.I~'
39
.
Fo'=
I
'20.
-r-T"I1.......-r1l."""T""T"II--r-T1'--'-"-II-,---il **
!---T.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39a.
48.
Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
a. I
b. I
No (Paper Out Not Gated With Form Out)
Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
Unless otherwise specified, choose 48b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
** Factory optioned.
Page 42
1
2
3
4
E9
5
6
7
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
819
-I.
-j";
**
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
54.
Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
a·1
b.1
Character After ESC Printed as Received
Printing of Character After ESC Suppressed
E9
1
2
- -
3
4
7
6
5
- - -
9
8
a
•
_NotApplicable - Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration
55.
SIISO Detection
a.
b.
SIISO Detection Not Used
SIISO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
1
2
3
4
E9
5
6
7
9
8
- - a - - - - - - - •- - - - - -
**
,---Not Applicable - Position of switches does not affect 0 p eration.
&'.
i. I
OBI/OEM
SSI
In"""'"
Required Selection
58.
Idle Line Motor Control
a.
Disabled - - Motor Held On Indefinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled - - Motor Turned Off After 40-Second
Idle Line
b.
E8
1
2
3
- - - - -
4
5
6
8
7
- - - -
- -
-
0
•
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 58b.
59.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
,g.
h.
Speed Selection (Applies Only if Option 57b
is Selected)
75 Baud
150 Baud
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
C1
1
2
0
•0 •
a
a
a
0
0
a
3
4
0
a
0 a
a a a
a
0
0 a a
a a
0 0 a
0 a 0
•
5
7
6
•
•••
AuxAlarm
a. I
b.1
Enable
Disable
**
•
'--Not Applicable - Position of switches does not affect 0 p eration.
60.
8
a 0 0 a
a a a a
0 0 0
0 a a a
0
a 0
a 0 a a
a a a
a 0
a
E5
1
-
2
a
•
3
4
5
6
- - - - - - -
7
-
8
-
**
~Note:
If 402920 modification kit (p aPer"a
al m IS mstalled m prmter, choose 60a. otherwise,
J mar)
60b must be chosen.
• Indicates on.
a Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option .
**Factory optioned.
Page 43
SECTION 582·200-205
PRINTER - 132:COLUMN
4.24
For options, refer to:
COMPATIBLE PRINTER
LOGIC CIRCUIT CARD
SEE THESE PARAGRAPHS
PRINTER CODE
DESCRIPTION
40P201/ZZ
TRACTOR FEED
410729
410072**
4.25, 4.26 and 4.28
4.25, 4.27 and 4.28
40P202/ZZ
TRACTOR FEED
410072
4.25, 4.27 and 4.28
*:tUse of the 410072 card in a 40P201/ZZ printer requires use of a 402980 lower pan assembly. The
402887 modification kit includes both Ii 410072 card and a 402980 lower pan assembly. The 402980
lower pan asSembly is compatible with either the 410729 or 410072 cards.
Note:
4.25
Selected printer options must be entered on the Controller Arrangement Form.
Location of "Forms" and "LF" switches on 132-column printers.
PRINTER COVER (Top View)
LINE
FEED
OPTION
SWITCH
DOUBLE
t
1-2 LINE FEED SWITCH
Page 44
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
4.26
Printer options for 410729 circuit card.
410729
CIRCUIT CARD
o
(Printer Circuit Card Viewed From Beneath
Printer - Access to Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan of Printer)
Dll D13
(TQggle Switches May
be Present)
17. Printer Right Margin and Form Width
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
f.(X) Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
Last Character on Column
e.
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
D11
6 5 4 3 2 1 6
0
0
10
0
0
- - - - 0
---- -
-- - - - ---- - - - - - - - -
--
013
5 4 3 2 1
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
•• ••
••• •• ••
0 • - • 0
0- •
• 0
.•
••• ••0 •0 •0 - ••••
- **
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17e.
Note:
If right margin specified is 73 through 120, a 410072 card must be used.
•
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
**
Page 45
SECTION 582-200-205
18. Printer Paper Feed Out
a.
b.
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on RM Loss - 16 Lines
c.
Paper Feed Out on RM Loss or ETX
()
D11
013
5 -1 3 2 1 6 5 -1 :3 2 1
--
.-
-0
-- -0
-- - - - -- -- 0
• **
0
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18c.
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
r-
c. I Not Printed on Parity Error
~ Re q uired
Selection
19. Printer Errored Character Symbol
r-
r-
d.~ Printers With 96 Character Set (Up-Low)
e. I Printers With 64 Character Set (Monocase)
4
D11
013
615141312i 1 6i 5 14131211
'1 '1 ·1.I.t
'l ·1· ·1 ·1 -I **
D13
Dll
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
.0
O.
se of 400777 (~) or 400783 (A) type carriers, require selection of 19d.
Use of 400780 (~) or 400887 (:) type ?arriers, require selection of 1ge.
20. Line Feed on Printer
a.1
b.1
Single
Double
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20a.
• Indicates on.
e Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
**Factory optioned.
Page 46
See 4.20.
11111111111
_lj~~i~i~ii1
**
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205.
r-
21. Foldover on Up-Low Printer
a.
I
Lower Case and Upper Case Print
b.1 Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
D11
D13
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
.-
- -- - - -- - - -0 -- -- - - -- -
-
**
-Consider onl y with selection of 19d.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21a.
-
22. Foldover on Monocase Printer
1>1:3
011
6 5 .t :1 2 1 fi f) ·1 :l 2 1
I
h·1
- -- - - - - - - -- -- -- - -
a.
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
-.
-0
-
- **
L..IConsider
only with selection of 1ge.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22b.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39a.
48. Incomplete Form Suppresses
Paper Alarm
a.
b.
No (Paper-Out Not Gated With
Form-Out)
Yes (Paper-Out Gated With Form-Out)
Di1
D13
6 5 4 321 6 5 4 3 2 1
.-
- -- - -- -- r- - -- -0 - -- -- -
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 48b .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
**Factory optioned.
Page 47
SECTION 582-200-205
4.27
Printer options for 410072 circuit card.
410072
CIRCUIT CARD
08
09
010
o
(Printer Circuit Card Viewed From Beneath
Printer - Access to Switches is Through a
Cutout in Bottom Pan of Printer)
DIO
17.
Printer Left Margin and Form Width
a.
First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column First Printed Column -
b.(X)
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Column 5
Column 6
Column 7
Column 8
Column 9
Column 10
Column 11
Column 12
Column 13
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17a.
•
Indicates on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
**
Page 48
1
2
3
4
•
0
0
0
0
0
E5
5
6
-- • • •0 •
-- -- •• 0•• 00 0•0
-
- - -
-- --
-
-
-
•0
0
••
0
8
-- -- - -
• • -- -0
0
0
••
•• ••0 ••0
0 0
• • •0
0
0
7
0
0
9
- **
-
-
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
17.
Printer Riaht Mar in and Form Width
08
Last Char Printed
Column Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
e.
132
f. (X) 121 109 97 85 73
122 110 98 86 74
123 111 99 87 75
124 112 100 88 76
125 113 101 89 77
126 114 102 90 78
127 115 103 91 79
128 116 104 92 80
129 117 105 93 81
130 118 106 94 82
131 119 107 95 83
120 108 96 84
09
7
8
•• ••
•• ••
••
••• •••
•• ••
••• •••
9
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
1
2
0
• •• •• •
0
••• •• •0•
•• 0• 0•
••• 0•• 0••
••• 0•• 0••
010
4 5
o 0
3
6
7
8
**
••
••
0 •
0
•• 00•
•0
0 0
••
•
0
0
0
..Y- O
To obtain counts:
121 through 132 operate switches as shown.
109 through 120 operate switches as shown,
97 through 108 operate switches as shown,
85 through 96 operate switches as shown,
73 through 84 operate switches as shown,
then
then
then
then
operate D9
operate D9
operate D8
operate D8
position 7 to OFF.
position 8 to OFF.
position 7 to OFF.
position 8 to OFF.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 17e.
18.
Printer Paper Feed Out
No Paper Feed Out
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss
16 Lines or One Form
Paper Feed Out on DSR or RM Loss or ETX
16 Lines or One Form
a.
b.
c.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 18c.
19.
Printer Errored Character Symbol
c. I
Not Printed on Parity Error
1
2
3
D9
4 5
-
-
0 0 -
-
0
6
- -
- - -
7
8
- - **
-
DIO
1j2j314j5j61718
- j - j - j - j - j -1-1-
Re quired Selection
_
Indicates .on.
Indicates off.
Position of switch does not affect option.
Factory optioned.
(X) Indicates desired column number.
o
**
Page 49
SECTION 582-200-205
19.
Character Set
d. I
e. I
Printers With 96-Character Set (Up-Low)
Printers With 64-Character Set (Mono case)
1
2
0
•0 •
type carriers require selection of 19d.
4
3
D8
5
6
8
7
9
**
use of 400777 (:) or 400783 (~)
Use of 400780 (t) or 400887 (:) type carriers require selection of 1ge.
See 4.20.
20. Line Feed on Printer
a. I Single
b. 1 Double
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 20a.
21.
Foldover on Printers With 96-Character Set
a. I
b.j
Lower Case and Upper Case Print
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
~ Consider
1
2
3
D9
4 5
2
3
4
6
7
8
6
7
8
0
•
only with selection of 19d.
Unless otherwise specified, choose 21a.
22.
Foldover on Printers With 64-Character Set
a. I
b. I
Lower Case Prints as Error Symbol
Lower Case Prints as Upper Case
~Consider
D9
1
0
5
•
only with selection of 1ge.
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 22b.
See 4.20.
39. Forms (Tractor Printer Only)
a.
b.
~
IOn
I Off
j
~
i
I
**
I
Unless otherwise specified, choose 39a.
48.
Incomplete Form Suppresses Paper Alarm
a. I No (Paper Out Not Gated With Form-Out)
b.J Yes (Paper Out Gated With Form Out)
-
1
2
- -
3
D9
4 5
•
6
7
8
0
**
Unless otherwise specified, choose 48b.
54.
Printing of Escape Sequences Suppressed
a. I Character After ESC Printed as Received
b. I Printing of Character After ESC Suppressed
~NotApplicable
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
Page 50
1
2
3
Dl0
4 5
6
- - - - - - - - - -
- Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration.
7
8
0
• **
- Position of switch does not affect option .
** Factory optioned.
ISS 2, SECTION
55.
SI/SO Detection
a.
b.
SILSO Detection Not Used
SI/BO Detection Enables Printing Additional
Characters
1
2
- - -
3
0
•
D10
4 5
6
582-200~205
7
8
- - - - - - - - -
**
'--NotApplicable - Position of switch does not affect 0 p eration.
~
57'
SSI/OEM Interface
a:1
SSI
58.
Idle Line Motor Control
,a.
Disabled - - Motor Held On Indefinitely During
Idle Line
Enabled - - Motor Turned Off After 40-Second
Idle Line
~eqUired Selection
b.
1
2
3
D9
4 5
- - - - - - - - -
6
0
7
8
- -
**
•- -
Unless otherwise specified, choose 58b.
5~
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ig.
h.
Speed Selection (Applies Only if Option 57b
is Selected)
75 Baud
150 Baud
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
1
C4
3 4 5
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0
0
0 0
0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
2
0
•0 •
0
0
0
0
0
0
••
6 7 8
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
0
0 0 0 **
0 0
0 0
•••
•
-NotAppli'c able - Position of switchdoes n ot a ffe c t operation .
r-
60.
AuxAlarm
a.1
Enable
Disable
b.~
L..-.-,Note.
1
2
3
-- - ..
D9
4 5
0
-
6
7
8
-•
-
**
If 402920 modiflcatlon klt (paper Jam alarm) lS mstalled m prmter, choose 60a. Otherwlse,
60b must be chosen .
• Indicates on.
o Indicates off.
- Position of switch does not affect option.
**Factory optioned.
Page 51
SECTION 5B2·200·205
4.2B
Printer options for 410151 circuit card.
410051
CIRCUIT CARD
(Component Side of
Circuit Card)
SCREW A
SCREWB
Regulator Grounding
(Circuit Gnd to Frame Gnd)
SSI
(OEM) At Printer
(OEM) Ext to Printer
61
a.
b.
c.
Screw B
Screw A
I uomponent Noncomponent Component
~oncomponent
In
In
In
-
In
In
In
-
Either 61a or 61b must be chosen for proper operation.
DATA SET, DATA SERVICE UNIT, INTERNAL
MODEM, AUTOMATIC CALLING UNIT, AND
TELEPHONE SET
500A·L1/2 Data Service Unit (DSU), 2400 BPS
and 500A·L1/3 Data Service Unit (DSU),
4BOO BPS - Section 595·200-Series.
4.29
251A1 Terminal Data Unit (TDU), 2400 BPS (No section released). This TDU is an internal
modem.
Section references:
Data Set 201B (DS), 2400 BPS - Section 592.
Oll·Series and Tech. Ref. Pub. 41201. The 201B
is manufacture discontinued.
Data Set 20lC (DS), 2400 BPS - Section 592·
029·Series and Tech. Ref. Pub. 41210.
Data Set 20BA (DS), 4BOO BPS - Section 592·
027·Series and Tech. Ref. Pub. 41209.
Data Set 20BB (DS) 4BOO BPS·Section 592·030
Series.
Data Set 212A (DS), 1200 BPS·Section 592·034
Series.
Page 52
Automatic Calling Unit·B01 type (DAS)·Section
592·010 and 592·012 Series.
Telephone Set 2565 HK·Section 502·543-405.
The three tables that follow list options
for DSs, DSUs and the TDU. The SDS
should be connected to the DS, DSU or TDU.
Mter making the connection and checking the
options, go to Section 582·200·505.
4.30
4.31
Private Line Version Only: A Data Set
201B, 201C or 20BA can be used with the
station arrangement provided there is access to a
private line system with 2000 or 3002 condition·
ing (the Data Set 20BA requires 3002).
ISS 2, SECTION
4.32
5S2~200-205
201- and 20S- Type Data Sets (Private Line Version Only)
DATA SET AT DATASPEED 40/4 STATION
DESCRIPTION OF RECOMMENDED
DATA SET oniONS
WITHOUT AUX DATA SET
NEW SYNC NOT USED
600 or 900 OHM IMPEDANCE
4-WIRE SWITCHED CARRIER (Note 1)
ECHO DELAY
EIA INTERFACE
XMIT LEVEL (Optional)
REC LEVEL (Optional)
COMP_ EQUALIZER- IN
INTERNAL XMIT TIMING
DSR "ON" IN AL-MODE
NO COMPo EQUAUZER TEST
RETRAIN AUTOMATICALLY
I-SEC. HOLDOVER ENABLED **
EQUAUZER ADJ. (Note 2)
201B-UST
ZL
B
ZR-ZT
201-B3
201C-LIA
YJ
ZJ
W
YA
YorX
ZQ orZR
ZB
XA
T
ZD-ZF
YK,YG.YE
G,F,E,B,A ZA---ZP
S,R,Q,N
ZU
**
YC
-
-
-
-
SWITCHED RTS
DATA SET AT CUSTOMER LCUSAME AS ABOVE, EXCEPT:
0
4-WIRE SWITCHED CARRIER
M
1.
A
D
D
201B-UST
B
I-SEC. HOLDOVER ENABLED
NEW SYNC. NOT USED (Note 3)
CONTINUOUS CARRIER
I-SEC. HOLDOVER-DISABLED
NEW SYNC. USED (See Note 3)
if required at CUlt. machine)
84B-DOWN
XA
-
-
SSA-DOWN
SIA-UP
SIB-UP
SSB-UP
S4A-DOWN
S2B·UP
S2C-UP
SIC-DOWN
YC
YM
YQ
YU
YX
ZS
-
**
20BA-LlA
S3C-DOWN YJ
84C-DOWN
YA
201-BS
ZB
201C-LIA
XA
ZL
W
ZA
YA
XB
-
ZK
YB
zs
YT
20BA·LIA
S4B-DOWN
S4A·DOWN
S4C-DOWN
S4B-UP
S4A·UP
XA
YX
YA
XB
YW
S4C-UP
VB
**Required for 20SA-L1A.
Note 1:
In a single 40/4 station telephone
channel to a customer's equipment station,
the continuous carrier option is preferred at the
40/4 station.
Note 2:
For switched carrier operation, correct
setting of the Compromise Equalizer must be
determined using the Compromise Equalizer Test
in Section .592-027-500_
Note 3: In mUltipoint station arrangements, the
data set at the customer LCU may use NEW SYNC
OPTION to quench timing signals in the data
set and condition the receiver for the next message
- if required, refer to customer LCU requirements.
Page 53
SECTION 582-200-205
4.33
Private Line Version Only: A 500A-Type
Data Service Unit (DSU) can be used with
a station arrangement provided there is access to
a synchronous digital data system. The 500A-I.J./2
operates at 2400 BPS and uses the NHI and HPI
circuit cards. The 500A-L1/3 operates at 4800
BPS and uses the HN2 and HPI circuit cards.
Note 1: Option WV required only under guidelines of Section 886-100-115 when local cable
pairs are too short for proper operation of receiver.
Note 2: Options YQ and XK should not be
installed except as required in other installation
practices.
Note 3: DSUs are not capable of near-end
analog loopback.
Note 4:
details.
Refer to Section 595-200-Series for
500A-TYPE DSUs
Page 54
OPTION
FEATURE
WV
Fixed line build-out network installed (Note 1)
WW
Fixed line build-out network removed
YK
YL
YS
YT
YQ
YR
XK
XL
XM
XN
XO
XP
Signal ground connected to frame ground
Simal ground disconnected from frame grounC!
Continuous reauest-to-send7oermanent RTS)
Switched request-to-send
Circuit assurance installed (Note 2)
Circuit assurance removed
System status installed (Note 2)
System status removed
Switch LED assembly installed to rear
Switch LED assembly installed to front
LL spring clip installed
LL spring clip not installed
SWITCH
SWITCH POSITION
SIA
SIB
SIC
SIA
SIB
SIC
S2
S3A
S3B
S3C
3
5
9
2
6
8
IN
OUT
2
3
6
5
9
8
CP
HNI
or
HN2
HPI
HNI
or
HN2
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
4.34
Private Line Version Only: 251A1 TDU can be used in place of a Data Set 201B or a 201C provided the required station arrangement hardware is present. An 828 or 829 Data Auxiliary Set is
also required.
PI
STRAP (Red)
CPS·I
SWITCH PACK
251 TDU
OPTION
ZA
DESCRIPTION
o -DB For Transmit Line Signal Level
(Required for Private Line Application)
YA
-24 DB For Carrier On Sensitivity
(Reauired For Private Line Application)
4-Wire Private Line OperatIon With
7 Millisecond CTS Delav
851A1 TAU Auto Dialer Out
YC
DSR on in Private Line Service
YD
4-Wire Private Line
ZR
ZT
SWITCH PACKS
ON CPS-1
Close
S2-3,5,6,10
Open
S2-24 7 8
STRAPPING
ONCM1
-
-
Remove
PI Strap
Upen
S1-4
Close
SI-5
Close
S2-9
SI-3
Close
S1-1
S2-1
Open
S1-2
-
-
Page 55
SECTION 582-200-205
4.35
212A-Type Data Set (Dial-Up Version Only)
DATA SET 212A-L1 AND 212A-L1A OPTIONS
,
OPTION
FEATURE
Tip Ring Make Busy
CC Indication (DSR on) for
Analog Loop
Speed Control
(212A-L1A on!tl
Speed Control
(212A-L1only)
Interface
HS Button
HS Button
(XJ not available, see L1
entries YG
and YH)
Interface Control
MB/ AL via CN Lead
(See Options XO XN, XR)
Transmitter Timing
1200 BPS Operation
IN
OUT
ON
OFF
IN
OUT
INT.
EXT.
Slave
Async/Start-Stop
~nc
1200 BPS Operation
Async/Start-Stop
(212A-L1 only)
Sync
Character Length
9 Bit
(Use with YG)
10 Bit
RCvR responds to Digital Loop
IN
(In HS mode only)
OUT
Interface Control RDL Lead
IN
1212A-L1A onlyl
OUT
Interface Control RDL Lead
(212A-L1only)
OUT
(See Ll entries YG and YH)
F
E*
ZF*
ZE
1
X
0
XJ
XK*
1
0
X
XK*
X
XM*
0
0
YE
YF*
YC*
YD
WI
YG*
YH
YG*
YH
YI
YJ*
YK*
YL
XL
XM*
SWITCH SETTINGS
Sl SWITCH
2 3 4 212A-L1A only
/1 212A-L1 only
1'1 (Sl of 212A-L1A
X X has only il
0 0 switches).
S2 SWITCH
S5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
X
0
X
0 0
0 X
X 0
X
X
0
X
00 0
o 0 X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
See
Note
0
X
X
0
0
J
(Continued on next page)
Note: RDL (Remote Digital Loopback) can be
used when both the near-end and far-end data sets
are 212A type. Depressing the RDL key on the
near-end data set causes the far-end data set to go
Page 56
into the DL mode. When the RDL key is depressed
again (to release RDL) or the on-line connection
is broken, the far-end is restored to the normal
operating mode.
ISS 2, SECTION 582·200·205
DATA SET 212A·L1 AND 212A·L1A OPTIONS
(Dial·Up Version Only)
FEATURE
OPTION
Loss of Carrier causes Disconnect
Received Space causes
Disconnect
CB (CTS) and CF (DCD)
Indications
Send Space then Disconnect on
loss ofDTR
Automatic Answer
Answer Mode Indication on
CE (RI) (Option W is required)
Speed Mode
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
COM
SEP
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
CEON
CEOFF
HIGH~
DUAL
IN
OUT
Interface Speed Indication·CI
(Pin 12, on for HS)
CN is 25.
CNand TM
TM (No Connection)
Interface Pin
CN is 18.
Assignments
TM (No Connection)
(212A·L1A
CN is 18.
only)
TM is 25.
CNand TM
Interface Pin
CN is 25.
Assignments
TM (No Connection)
(212A·L1
only)
IN
Signal Ground to Frame
Connection (on 47D Mounting)
OUT
X Switch closed ..
Switcq open.
o
S*
R
V*
Y
A*
B
T*
U
.ZH*
ZG
X
w*
YO
YP*
Y...Q
YR*
SWITCH SETTINGS
S3 SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X
0
X
0
X
a
X
0
0
X
X
a
X
0
X
0
XO*
Strap Plugs E3·E4, E1·E2
XN
Strap Plugs E4·E5, E1·E2
XR
Strap Plugs E4·E5, E2·E3
XO*
(No Switch Settings or Plugs)
Q*
P
Sl Closed
S10pen
- Switch does not affect option.
* Factory furnished option.
Recommended options for 212A·L1 (unless other·
wise specified) for 2·wire switched network: E,
ZF,XK,YF,YC, YH,YJ, YK,XM,R, Y,B,U,
ZH, W, YO, YR, XO, Q. Options YK and XM are
furnished by Option YG (or YH).
Recommended options for 212A·L1A (unless
otherwise specified) for 2·wire switched network:
E, ZF, XK, YF, YC, YH, YJ, YK, XM, R, Y, B,
U, ZH, W, YO, YR, XO, Q.
Page 57
SECTION 582"200-205
4.36
201C-L1A Type Data Set (Dial-Up Version Only)
STRAPPING ON ANALOG BOARD
Transmit Line
Signal Level
Line
1
Impedance
I
Compromiset
Equalizer
Carrier ON
Sensitivity
I
I
OdBm
ZA
27-28,29-30,31-32,33-34
ZP
1 dBm
ZB
19-20, 29-30, 31-32, 33-34
ZO
-
2dBm
ZC
27-28,21-22,31-32,33-34
ZN
-
3dBm
ZD
19-20,21-22,31-32,33-34
ZM
-
4dBm
ZE
27-28,29-30,23-24,33-34
ZL
-
5dBm
ZF
19-20, 29-30, 23-24, 33-34
ZK
-
6dBm
ZG
27-28,21-22,23-24,33-34
ZJ
-
7dBm
ZH
19-20,21-22, 23-24, 33-34
Zl
-
8dBm
Zl
27-28,29-30,31-32,25-26
ZH
-
9dBm
ZJ
19-20,29-30, 31-32, 25-26
ZG
ZK
27-28,21-22,31-32,25-26
ZF
-11 dBm
ZL
19-20,21-22,31-32,25-26
ZB
ZD
-12dBm
ZM
27-28,29-30,23-24,25-26
-13dBm
ZN
19-20,29-30,23-24,25-26
ZC
-14dBm
ZO
27-28, 21-22, 23-24, 25-26
ZB
-15dBm
ZP
19-20,21-22,23-24,25-26
ZA
600U
ZQ
16-17
ZR
900 !1
ZR
17-18
ZQ
IN
ZS
8-9,11-12
ZT
OUT
ZT
9-10,12-13
ZS
I -24 for PL
I -44 for DDD
ZU
ZV
}
Choose One
...
ZV
IJB1 CP)
STRAPPING ON DIGITAL
BOARD (JB2 CP)
INSTALL RED STRAPS
INSTAll RED STRAPS
OPTION
I :-.Jot ll!wd
I CustonlE'r-
I..,
1-2
STRAPPING ON ANALOG BOARD
Sync
FOR
OPTION
-lOdBm
FEATURE
~ew
REMOVE
RED STRAPS
IJB1 CPI
INSTALL RED STRAPS
-
-
STRAPPING ON DIGITAL
BOARD IJB2 CPI
INSTALL RED STRAPS
OPTION
FEATURE
REMOVE
RED STRAPS
FOR
OPTION
YA
20-21
YB
YB
19-20
YA
Controlled
Transmittl'f
TimIng
.\utomatic
Answer
YD
DTR Control
Only
Use With DAS
R28-Typ{'
TypE> at'
Operation
YC:
BX'f
ROY and DTR
Control or
Not Provid(>d
Ring Indication
On Custompl"
Intcrfaee
Grounding
Option
INT
YE
YF
YF
17-1B
EIA
YG
22-24
YH
Contad
YH
22-23
YG
Yps
YI
Xo
YJ
15-16
Common
YK
25-26
Not Common
YL
YJ
YK
XA
35-36
XB
XC
2-Wire DOD
2·Wire PL
t-WirpPL
and Clc'arto ..'il:'nd
D(·lay
YD
13-14
1-3,4-6,28-29,11-12
Note 1
35-36
1-3,5-6,28-29,11-12
Note 2
35-36
2-3,5-6,28-29,11-12
Note 3
XD
4-5
1-3,4-6,27-28
Note 4
XE
4-5,35-36
1-3,4-6,133-134,
11-12
Note 5
,!: DO ~OT RE~tOVE ANY BLACK TEST STRAPS.
t Use option ZS for all installations.
,Vote 1.. Removl:" red straps! 4·5 on JBl CP; 2-3, 5-6, 27-28, 133·134 on JB2 CP
.Votl! 2: RemovE:' red straps: 4-5 on ,IBI CP; 2-3, 4·6, 27-28, 133-134 on JB2 CP
,\'ott, J: Rt'OlOVE" rE:'d straps: 4-5 on JBl CP; 1-3, 4-6. 27-28, 133-134 on JB2 CP
.\'ot£' 4; RE:'OlOVE:' red straps: 35-36 on JBl CP; 2-3, 5-6, 28-29, 11-12, 133, 134 on JB2 CP
,\'otl! 5: Remove red straps: 2-3.5-6,27-28,28-29 on JB2 CP
Recommended Options YJ, YA, Z.Q or ZR, XD, ZS, ZV, YC, YF, YG, and YK.
Page 58
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-205
4.37
20IC -LIC type Data Set (Dial-Up Version Only)
DATA SET 20IC-LIC OPTIONS
FEATURE
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZD
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
ZI
ZJ
;oK
rMlfr!!!!L
2dB
~
4dB
15dB
16dB
17dB
18dB
19dB
~
I
I
TRANSMITTER
AUTOMATIC
ANSWER
GROUNDING
OPTION
FUNCTION OF
EIAINTERFACE PIN 18
ONE PER
OPTION
~
1 4
2 4
1 2 4
8
1 8
2 8
1 2 8
4 8
1 4 8
2 4 8
1,2,4,8
OPTION
FEATURE
PROVIDE
1 2 4 8
2 4 8
1,4,8
4 8
1
2
1 2
ZM
ZN
ZO
ZP
~4dB
15dB
TIMING
LINE CONTROL BOARD TP
STRAP IN
STRAP OUT
OPTION
2 8
1 8
8
1 2 4
2 4
1 4
4
1 2
2
2
1
DIGITAL BOARD (J84)
SWI CH ETTING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YC
YC
'I.
YD
YD
0
ROY & DTR CONTROLLED
OR NOT PROVIDED
YE
YE
0
DTR CONTROLLED ONLY
YF
YF
X
SIGNAL GROUND CONNECTED TO FRAME
GROUND
YK
SIGNAL GROUND NOT
CONNECTED TO FRAME
GROUND
YL
REMOVE EI-E2
INITIATES LOCAL
ANALOG LOOPBACK
YS
INSTALL E3-E4
YS
PROVIDES RECEIVE
SYMBOL CLOCK
YT
INSTALL E4-E5
YT
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
INSTALL EI-E2
X
Ie
CONTINUOUS
RECEIVER
BIT CLOCK
IN
YO
YO
OUT
YP
YP
SATELLITE
OPTION
IN
OUT
YQ
Ivo
0
)(
)(
YR
YR
Factory Furnished Option ~
Recommended Options YC, YF, YK, YS, YO and YR
4.38
208B Type Data Set (Dial-Up Version Only)
SWITCH
5 ... 1 TCH POS IlION
S2C+
SOA
UP *
DOWN
UP
53B
DO'WN
UP
53C
0""" *
UP
AUTOMATIC ANSWER
TRANSMITTER EXTERNAllV TIMED
DOWN
TRANSM I TTER I NT ERN ALL Y TIMED
RS-CS INTERVAL
MSEC
50tt
IN
OUT
*
*
fEATURE
SlA
SIB
zs
0*
-I
D"""
ZT
-2
UP
UP
UP
UP
DOWN
DO...
OPTION
COMPRQM I S[ EQUAL I IER IN
COMPROMI S[ EQUAL! ZER OUT
OSR ON I N ANALOG lOOP MODE
DSR orr I N ANALOG lOOP MODE
MANUAL 4NSWER
RS-CS INTERVAL
or o
or ISO MSEC
TRANSM I T LEVEL
LEVEL
(DB)
208 B DATASET OPT j ONS
YM
YN
YO
YP
YO
YC
* FACTORY INSTALLED
t COMPROMISE EQUALIZER
SHOULD ALWAYS BE IN
tt IF NOT SPECIFIED ON
SERVICE ORDER, INSTALL
50 INTERVAL
-.
-3
-S
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-II
-12
-13
-14
-IS
OOWN
OOWN
OOWN
DOWN
DO...
DO'"
DOWN
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
* r ..,crORY
SWITCH
SIC
00'"
DOWN
UP
UP
UP
UP
OOWN
DO'"
DOWN
DOWN
00...
DO'"
UP
UP
OOWN
OOWN
UP
UP
DOWN
00,,"
UP
UP
DOWN
OOWN
UP
UP
S2A
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
00 ...
UP
OOWN
UP
DOWN
OPTION
"
ZB
ZC
zo
ZE
zr
ZG
ZH
ZI
ZJ
ZK
Zl
lM
ZN
lO
ZP
INSTALLED
Recommended Options ZS, YM, YP and YC.
Page 59
SECTION 582-200-205
·5.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
5.01
The following tools and supplies may be required for installation or servicing of DATASPEED 40
apparatus. Most of these items should normally be present in standard maintenance tool kits.
(Reference Section 570-005-800)
5.02
Tools
Cleaning Brush (Type Face)
Cutting Pliers
Gauge (Friction Feed Printer)
Gauge (Tractor Feed Printer)
Keyswitch Extractor
Keytop Extractor
Long-nose Pliers
Nut Driver
Nut Driver
Nut Driver
Nut Driver
Nut Driver
Retaining Ring Pliers
Ruler, 6"
Scales, Spring (802)
Screwdriver
Screwdriver
Screwdriver
Spring Hook (Pull)
Spring Hook (Pull)
Spring Hook (Push)
Static Ground Strap
Terminal Extractor (Data Set)
Terminal Extractor (40/4)
Tweezers
Wrench
Wrench, Open End
Wrench, Open End
Wrench, Open End
Wrench, Open End
Wrench, Open End
5.03
151394
108286
400610
402617
346257
346260
108285
Handle
135676
89954
1/4"
89955
5/16"
135677
1/4"
135678
5/16"
160396
95960
110443
1/8",2" Blade
95368
1/4",6" Blade
100982
94647
(Blade Less Than 5/32")
142554
75675
75503
346392
341983
(MOLEX HT2285)402840
151392
3/16" socket
125752
3/8"
125765
129534
3/16" and 1/4"
152835
5/16" and 3/8"
129537
3/4"
129536
1/2" and 7/16"
Supplies
All purpose grease -145867,4 oz tube or 143484, lIb can
Oil- KS7470
Thermal compound - 402640
Ribbon - 402444
Paper (friction feed) - standard 8-1/2" wide, 5" dia. roll
Paper (tractor feed)
Degreaser (trichlorotriflorethlyene) - KS20406 L-1
6.
6.01
ADJUSTMENTS
The only adjustments in the station are in
printers and monitors.
Monitor adjustments are give in BSP
Section 582-213-XXX series or FIMP
579-505-350.
6.02
Page 60
60 Pages
6.03
The 80-column printer adjustments are
given in BSP Section 582-210-XXX series
or FIMP 579-505-350.
6.04
The 132-column printer adjustments are
given in BSP Section 582-210-XXX series.
SECTION 582-200-405
Issue 2, January 1979
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
SINGLE-DISPLAY STATION ARRANGEMENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL ....................
1
2.
WIRING DIAGRAMS ............
1
SINGLE-DISPLAY
ARRANGEMENTS ..............
2
410277 BACK PANEL
ASSEMBLY PHYSICAL
LAyOUT .....................
3
410276 BACK PANEL
ASSEMBLY PHYSICAL
LAyOUT .....................
4
8
410276 INTERNAL WIRING ......
14
40PSU101 POWER SUPPLY .......
19
OPCONS ......................
20
A.
B.
40K104/DAB (Early Design) ...
40K105/CAA, 40K203/GAB,
and 40K104/DAB (Late
Design) ...................
20
CABLE ASSEMBLIES ...........
22
C.
This section provides wiring diagrams and
cable components for DATASPEED 40/4
Single-Display Station (SDS) equipment (DATASPEED 40 hereafter will be referred to as 40-type
or 40-type equipment) with the following
exceptions.
Monitor, see Section 582-213-400.
(b) Monitor support cabinet, see Section
582-212-400.
Printer, see Section 582-210-400.
(d) Printer cabinet, see Section 582-210-400.
410277 INTERNAL WIRING ......
B.
1.01
(c)
5
406036 EIA Cable
Assembly and Extension
Cables ................. , ..
406039 SSI Cable
Assembly' and Extension
Cables ................... .
406066 Private Line
Interface Unit Cable
Assembly ................. .
GENERAL
(a)
BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY
WIRING ......................
A.
1.
21
1.02
This section is reissued to include the
40K203 opcon.
1.03
Abbreviations in this section are defined
in Section 582-200-101.
1.04
This information, when used in conjunction with Test and Troubleshooting
Section 582-200-505, will aid in locating cabling
faults.
.
Voltage levels are provided in power
supply diagrams only.
.
1.05
When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
Note.'
22
2.
23
24
WIRING DIAGRAMS
The following wiring diagrams provide
coverage for the Single-Display Station
(SDS) equipped with a 40C304-type SingleDisplay Controller (SDS).
2.01
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo ..
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
@1977, 1978, and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
.
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-405
SINGLE DISPLAY ARRANGEMENTS
40CAB251/ZZ +
406047 =
40CAB251/AE
""
/'''' ...........
406066
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(Used if 251Al terminal
data unit is part of station.)
_-~WM[NIOI/AA
MONITOR
Note:
40K203/GAB also requires
use of 346936 modification kit
(Ref: Specification 50919S).
,
"
7-=---__
829 DATA
AUXILARY
SET
406036 EIA
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(Used if 251Al terminal data
unit is not part of station.)
(Friction or Tractor,
friction is shown.)
Fig. 1
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
410277 BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY PHYSICAL LAYOUT
Note: Fig. 2 shows the 410277 back panel (late design). Fig. 3 shows the 410276 back panel (early
design). '
0
0
410277
ISSUE
0
CC277
0
'.'.'.
'.'.'.
0
0
'.'.'.'.
'.
'.
00
00
'0
0 O
°o
00
° 0
° 0
00
0 O
0
~
o
:
~
0
00
0.
0.
X07
0
GNO
+5
+. +12
-12
'o'..
•
~.' .' -.'.':..
.'.+
0+
.0
00
.0
.0
X03
00
0+
:1
0+
00
X02
o·
00
o·
0
.0
00
0 0
.0
0 0
o.
o.
o·
00
.0
0°
0°
0°
0°
00
00
0°
.0
- 408017
CABLE
S:'~CH"'~ :;92J;5~:0
f-1
FUSE F3
1.4A
341578-- --- --- --JI4
II
5 8 - - - - -.....
PI03
401648 CONN
- - - - - - - -405046(3)
_1- ______
~~;47 CONN
405045
-- --- --- - PI4
341691 CONN
405045 (3)
~~~~--~
(3)
fiio_--flr----B=.;K:.:J
G
W
115 VAC
60HZ
405050 ASSM.
Fig. 4
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-405
BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY WIRING (Cont)
406046
CABLE
"'P-A-R-T-O-F---' 341691
MONITOR
~'I
40MNI0I/AA
4
~
~bI6:'
CaiN
1 W-Y
MON
I
~HILIGHT
2
rr-:......Y-++_ _ _ _-:-<
2
4+
3
~,
3
~VIOEO
,;:;-44
r
PART OF
BACK PANEL
ASSEMBLY
5
DRAIN
4~
5~
W-G
~6
0
G
OISPLY~ 7
ROY
HILIGHT
6 *VIOEO
7
~I'
MONITOR
ROY
8+n
W-R
~: )-;-..::..:.:.......t-+--+---+< 9 ~
BK
-410
DETAILS IN
~II
582-213- 401 ~12
OR
579-505·350 ~ I 3
v
R
r.-....:.:.-++-+---T<
10 #-+- HORZ. ORV.
IW-BR
>+~~+~~---+<
II~
I
BL
I
>+~~~-+---+<12~+5V
BR
>+-=.:~+~----+<
1
134+ VERT SYNC
I P
414 ~~-+-+--+---+<14~+5V
I
1 _S
15~
'5 >+~~~-+---+<
1
r
I
BK
'\4'722
CLAMP (SHELL)
406048
CABLE
401623
401150
CONN
341704(7)
CONN
341705 (8)
OPCON
1
---4 I
OPCON
(FIGS
OR
FIG 9)
R
I >++'TON
I
~ 2 >"'--Y"'--++-----;7 2 ''1""'- I TO 1
~
.....-;-"("
---43
G
3 >T+-'TCN
P
I
~ 4
4
I -~to----,
r-
>++-
~6
S
6
ITCI
40KI04/0AA,__ '- 7
BL
:
---,
)-;---,:o:...~H-----~ 7 >++-1 + 12V
40K104/0AB
OR
~8
W
1
8
-12V
>++-
40KI05/CAr,;9
:
:
1'--1401715 CLAMP
(SHELL)
341647
(PIN 9)
Fig. 4 (Cont)
Page 6
9
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY WIRING (Cont)
115Y AC
eo Hit
401629
CA8LE
(LS)
(8K)
(P8)
(8)
(8S)
(W)
+--
(
IJ,
+---PRINTER
CABINET
40CA820l,
40CAB351, OR
40CA83113
(AND A SET OF PARTS)
PART OF
BACK PANEL
ASSEMBLY
406066
CABLE
(SEE FI8.12)
DAA
~3
~4
~5
---7 29
---728
---730
DAS
829
10
>'---r>>-
406039
CAlLE
(SEE 1'18. II)
PT, R
~ ...
ITCN-+i-< 3
PTR .1105 PI03
,
'I
I : t ; , ~.
2'
, "'-'-4OPIOI,
:
" ~40P151
3 ~ s;l- RI
,~ 23)- N.U.
25)- N.U.
DATA
SET
20lB
OR
2011A
~
,.
I
Fig. 4 (Cont)
Page.7
SECTION 582·200·405
410277 INTERNAL WIRING
AJ~DRESS .BlJS
MISC.
XZ03}
XZ08
~~g~ SEE NOTE I XZ09
XZ02 AO)I
,,~ A40<
I
.
AO)' ;
I
I
AI)2'
AI)2 :
I
I
I
A2)3
A2)3 :
I
I
I
A3)~
A3)4
:
XZ03
XZ04
XZ05
XZ06
XZ07
10.752)37: "-
T
J ".c
J
:
INT)38: ' -
A42<
I
I
I
....
A5)6
J
A6)7
"
"
I
I
IBI3(
I
I
'j:j"()lo >4;.;:B,+:----'.-_ _ _---,
.c
i <
PORY9:, '.
A43<
,
A5?6
-I
I
I
I
I
BI
J ".c
'-.
MHZ
A41<
XZ08
XZ09
I
I
IBI5
I
I
RDY'~~,-~~~~~
,
:A45<
I
I
I
I
HLDA
~ !A46<
)r5 0=-;:_'.
......___-,
I
REFR ESH
F-t-....---4J--.-+--=<:
I
DCK )52: '-
A~FIO+---T-'-.~T,-~~~_~IO_(~~~
_
_
.... A55<
XZOI
XZ02
XZ03
XZ04
XZ05
i5iiA )>=-5'7~-'--'-._
I
I
I
MPX 'j-,-=-4-;.-:_ _ _'-.
....._
All F'--'------;-----'
Note 1: Where XZ numbers
appear one over the other,
corresponding pins of the
indicated card connectors
are connected.
16
17
Fig. 5
Page 8
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
OliO TO RAM
EIA
Xl02
1HZ
)38 XlOI
:
TEST )39
MTRROY)48
i
I
!38(
: 39(
1 48 (
SPARE )50
: 50(
SEG1)55
155<
Loiii')56
56(
SEG 2 )57
57(
JcL:)58
58<
30Hl )59
59(
BD 0 )60
60<
BD 1)61
61(
BD 2 )62
62(
EIA
RATE SELECT ) 4
)7
SUPERV liMIT DATA >2
SEND DATA )3
REQ TO SEND )6
SUPERV RCV DATA / )5
RATE 1NDICATOR
I
CARRIER )9 II
DETECT
BD 3 )63
I
63<
I
I
I
I
CLEAR TO SEND )12 ;
I
I
BD 4 )64
BD 5 )65
64<
65(
DATA SET ROY ) 15
1
,
I
RCV DATA )8 :
I
I
I
BD 6 )66
66(
(INTENSITY OR
~67
ATTRIB. FLAG) BD
6~
(HIGHLIGHTIBLIN:) )68
RING )14:
INDICATOR
:
SERIAL CLOCK T )"
I
88<
SERIAL CLOCK
R )13 :
i
: 5B(
t
t
: i
:
: 59<
:
t
t
61(
::B3I(
-1
B3
\
I
I
..... :B34<
,
62(
I
~:B~
63(
t
t
I
....!B36(
64( :
.....;B37(
,I
65(
j
I
___ :B38(
71(
t
t
,
I
"-;B39(
70(
:
....;B4O<
69
:
~.'5
1 .
DAA
XZOB
XZ09
(SEENOTE2V:B~
...!B2~
*SPARE )2
(I)
I
I
* RING
DATA TIP
PTR/SS18
,
I
I
I
I
I
ITD4)2
(I)
6(
rTC4 )3
(N)
I
I
ITC4) 6
(I)
:
!)<
.
>~4-:-;----....~;~B~~
,
I
1 :
:<:,'860/
:I: SWITCH H.OOK ) ~~;-----4I"-F~,
(TEK-5)
MONITOR
Wiring marked
MON
XZOI
not used by 829
,I
:I
,
~
XZOB
:
SPARE
! 2
XZ09
~
Note 3: Also see X Z 0 8 ,
, I
and XZ09 wiring on p a g e !
:
.:43<
12.
VIDEO+(..=6+-:_ _ _ _--!;!.5=-«
:
:
I
.,A2<
:
I
..-IA5<
'j
fil
VI
tT02)2
III
b
Z
ITC2)3
(N)
::)
HIGHLIGHT (21
:
II
HIGHLIGHT( :
Monitor pins 5,
8, 9, 11 and 15
connect to circuit common.
:
(I~
,
VERT SNYC
>"II~:-----4..JiiFB5""<~
DATA RING
!,
-4I.:..r!B:::5~~
>)'-14~!:------4I.-J>f:858(~
I
,
: I <
ITC3)!
(N)
:
(I)
I
:I: COUPLER CUT THRU »)::8:...;!_ _ _ _
I
i
:I: DATA MODE REQ >):.!15'+:_ _ _ _....
~;.:::B5~~
,
,
:
I
* ON HOOK )>"12:;,_ _ _ _-4I
...'T:B::5~'(
I
: 3 (
IT03)2 :
I
I
I
I
I
I
...:B54<
I
:4 <
,
I
I
I
>6
XZ06
OPCON/SSIA
ITD! )1 ,1
(N)
.:B"(
*+12 Ll:UY
. *-12 LIU
SSI
..:~
)9
* SPARE
,4
jT-< , (
jT< ,:1 <
I
I
:3
I
'*
I
I
,
:38 (
:2
<
ISS 2, SECTION 582·200·405
POWER CIRCUITS
GND. (BLACK)
-12V
(WHITE)
+12V
XZOI
TO
XZOB
XZOI
TO ' SEE
XZ08 NOTE
I
29:
406041
CABLE
32
,
)(z09
XZ09
A70 :
,
XZ09
A641
,
A66'
A65 :
A67:
OPCON
8
,
OPCON
,
7
,
XZOI
TO
XZQB
A71
OPCON/SSI'A
PTR/SSI-B
MON
t--<J----i-:_4-<
5
TO CABLE INNER SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
TIED AT CONTROLLER END ONLY.
AUX SSI-A
AUX SSI-B
,
8
XZ09
1
I
8:,
9
,,
II
,
OUTER SHIELD ON ALL EXTERNAL
CABLES TIED TO FRAME
AND AT REAR OF CONTROLLE R
MODULE VIA BUSHING/CLAMP
ON CABLES.
,,
!
15
:
,
I
A69!
MON
DAA
I
,,
12 '
101
OPCON (581)
9
I
141
AUX EIA
1
101
PTR,(SSI)
'--_ _ _.....,.:.-;4< TO CABLE INNER SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
TIED AT CONTROLLER END ONLY.
Fig. 5 (Cont)
Page 11
SECTION 582·200·405
410277 INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
X~04
CUT
59 :
I
I
CRQ.
DLU
60 :
XZOB
XZ09
I
\B45
1
1
1
58 1
. PND
DPR
NBI
NBZ
NB4
NBB
XZ06
I
RECEIVE ONLY
53 :
1
I
I
MODEM CHECK
SELF TEST
OZ)42
'>.
~
03)43
'>.
~
04)44 : : .
~
I
I
05)45 : : .
~
1810
I
IBII
I
I
1
1BIZ
I
I
I
: B3Q<
I
I
I
06)46 :
I
I
DIG I TAL L 00 P )>-~_0'-7-_ _ _
t-.!..!:!.~
.~
:B33<
1
1
1
07)47 :
Fig. 5 (Cont)
Page 12
'>.
~
'>.
~
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
ADDITIONAL
XZ08-XZ09
WIRING
XZ08
XZ09
4
AUX EIA
XZ07
RATE SELECT )66 1
I
AUX EIA
: 4< RATE SELECT
I
DTR )58 1
I
I
I
I
I < DATA TERM. ROY
I
I
AL >69:
7 < ANALDG LOOP
I
SCA )611
1
I
SO )62:
2 < SUPERV. XMIT DATA
I
136
I
I
I
I
I
3< SEND DATA
I
RTS >63:
45 < REQ. TO SEND
I
SCF/RATE INDICATOR )64:
6
<
SUPERV. RCIf. DATA
RLSA
I
CARRIER )65:
I
9 < CARRIER DETECT
TO DA
:65<
TO OH
I
:66(
I
SCR )66:
113 < SERIAL CLOCK R
I
SCT
>67:
1
II < SERIAL CLOCK T
SPARE
I
RI )68:
TTO
70~
16 < DATA SET REAOW'
02 XFR
SIG
:69<
OCT
:70<
SPARE
:71<
I
CTS )71:
:68<
I
8< RCV. DATA
I
OSR >
:67 <
I
14 < RING INDICATOR
I
RD >69:
:64(
I
I
12 < CLEAR TO SEND
Fig. 5 (Cont)
Page 13
SECTION 582·200-405
410276 INTERNAL WIRING
ADDRESS BUS
MISC.
XZ03}
XZ08
~~8~ SEE NOTE I X~09
XZ02
I
1.0)' : .
1.0)1 ;
I
I
I
A,)2 :
:
AI)2 ;
I
I
I
=oj '..t
1.42<
A3)4
'.~
A43<
J
J,
1.4)5
XZ07
10.752)37: "-
MHZ
A41<
'..c
T
A3)4
~~8~
T '-,/ I A40<
A2)3
1.2)3 ;
XZ03
XZ04
:
,
I
INT)38: ' .
.
I
I
A5)S
A5)&
ASY
A&)7
I
I
;B'4<
I
I
' - , / :A44<
A4)5
'BI5
I
I
j
-. .c
j
'- ,/ i
ROY'~71-4'-~~~'
,,
:A45<
I
I
I
iii:Di )50:
A4&<
'.
I
REFRES H F+-....-4J---<..,..=<
I
A7 8
OCK >52:
All 9
,
I
A9)IO;
10(
I
i»iA
'.
XZOI
XZ02
XZ03
XZ04
XZ05
)>=-5=:-~_ _.....
\,~
I
I
I
MPX 'j~4~:___\,-+_
XZ07
XZ08
I
I
I
,
SELECT)~5~5~:____________~:~B2~1~<
Note 1: Where XZ numbers
appear one over the other,
corresponding pins of the
indicated card connectors
are connected.
AI3
X06
I
16
17
X07
T
....---;-I---<~ II:
Fig. 6
Page 14
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
01/0 TO RAM
EIA
XZ02
lIZOI
1HZ )3I
:
TEST )39
0
0
: 39(
1 48 (
MTRROY)48
SPARE )50
SEG 1)55
!"<
EIA
: 50<
,I
RATE SELECT ) 4
' 55(
5\
LoiD")56
DATA TERM ROY )1
o.
SEG 2 )57
57<
ANALOG LOOP )7
JC"L)58
58(
SUPERV liMIT DATA )2
30HZ )59
5ac
SEND DATA )3
BD 0 )60
60(
BD 1)61
61(
BD 2> 62
REO TO SEND )6
SUPERV Rev DATA I )5
RATE INDICATOR
: 62(
,,
CARRIER )9
DETECT
0
BD 3 )63
: 63(
.,
CLEAR TO SEND )12
I
BD 4 )64
' 64(
BD 5)65
65<
BD 6 )66
66(
(INTENSITY OR
~67
ATTRIB. FLAG) BD
6~
!HIGHLIGHT/BLINK) )68
BD 8
68<
(TAB DOT) BD 9)69
69(
(UNDERLINE) BD 10
(SHIFT OUT) BD"
i
O
)71
DATA SET RDY )'5
RCV DATA )8
RING )14
INDICATOR
SERIAL CLOCK T )"
SERIAL CLOCK
70(
71(
R )13
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
XZ06
: 116< XZ08
,
XZ09
:
~:BI9(
i
I
: 59(
:
:58< :
! ~~B~
~B~
61< :
~:B34<
62(
i
~:B~
63( :
~:B36<
64(
:
~:B37<
o
65(
,
,
0
...-:B36(
71( :
~:B39<
70(
:
~:B40(
.
69(~!B41(
68
<~1B42(
0
67< :
.i:B43<
,
: 66( ,
:
o
0
...-:844<
XZOI
TO
XZ04.XZ06
DMA
MPX
.-:::: 53(
I
I
.i: 54<
Fig. 6 (Cont)
Page
15
SECTION 582-200-405
410276 INTERNAL WIRING (Cont)
~
~
SPARE
* SPARE
DAA
DAA
XZ08
)5' (SEENOTE2I '8241'
.,
, """-
l i
:B2~
:B2~
* SPARE )9:
:(: + 12
*-12
LJ:U
Y:,
,,
,,
,:B54<
,
*ON HOOK )12:
,
I
>:
15'
I
I
,
>:,
:S9(
ITD3 )2
(I)
:
ITC3 )3
(N)
,,,
"-
ITC3
(1)
:70 (
I
)6
;71 (
,I
"-
I
:,85Y'
8 '
,
I
I
!I
SSI-A
iB58<
:(: RING )14:
,
(N)
,
1)" !,
:B5~
,,
:B6~
,
1)13 i
Q
'"
-~_0-;-_ _---4'--~.!.:~B=-'333(
I
Fig. 6 (Cont)
Page 18
."
I
I
I
I
01>-
~
00
COMPONENTS ENCLOSED IN THIS AREA ARE FOUND
ON BASE OF POWER SUPPLY.
JIOI
5
FIOI
B~
r-- - -----,
+24V DC
i~~'03
129920
I-'
o
COMPONENTS MOUNTED
ON HEAT SINK
(PART OF 410600 eel
TIO~
~~,BK
2
C
410600 CIRCUIT CARD
I
FI
ISA
R-Y
liS
VAC
INPUT
CIOI
~,I'.
•
l
~
I
p:l
::T:
It-"
Q7
I
~ 11<&1
L ____ ~~_J
+
I-'
r--,
LC_RlJ
r--------, r--'
t----...---.c.""'-'"
iI iI • ,I
•
"
i
t:o:l
~
S;
,
II
L-+-_ _ __
G-Y
Q,
IBK
(iOS?-{---,
I
IL
II
I
' l / II
1
~8
11\1
_______ ...J LCMJ
r- ----------,
T1
I
~
-'I
I
R~
Y'
OUTPUT TERMINAL BLOCK
-=
F2
THERMAL
SENSOR
TH~
:
I
I
L _________ ---l
r-------, ,--,
""A'll,1
II
lOA
II
d
II.,...,
I
I ______
~'51IV'
L
-' LC.Bl.J
......
+12V DC
00
00
'#
-12V DC
+ S SENSE
')1<
I
.....
&...
.t.:I
00
t:o:l
Q
0-3
I-i
0
Z
01
S""
W-BK
00
t.:I
~
I»
'"
~
0
0
I-'
0
to
.j..
01
SECTION 582-200-405
OPCONS
A.
40KI04/DAB (Early Design)
J1
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (N)
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (I)
2
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (N)
3
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (I)
6
(BR)
B8
(0)
B7
A12
)---0 VSS (+12 V DC)
Jl ALARM
ALARM ON
OFF
All ~ +12V
~ -12 V
A10 '-------... +12 V
r
~ -12 V...J
(R)
B6
(BL)
B5
r
A9 ~ +10 V
~ -12 V...J
LOOP-BACK ENABLE ON
LOOP-BACK ENABLE OFF
LOOP-BACK TEST ON
LOOP-BACK TEST OFF
AS ~ 2 HZ CLOCK +12 V /1 /1
~
-12VJUL
A7
)---0 VDD (-12 V
DC)
B3
• SPARE
B4
• SPARE
0
VSS (+12 V DC)
VDD (-12 V DC)
S
CHASSIS GND
9
(P)
B1
(W)
B2
(G)
Not
present
on some
opcons.
JICONNECTOR
( 401149)
..
I
~
•
3
X
6
,~
,
A6 )--------0 +12 V
-12 V
L'
SPACE
MARK
V
A5 )--------0112 KHZ CLOCK +12
-12 V
•
9
A4
~
)--------0 +12 V
-12 V
I
+12 V
-12 V
+12 V
A2 )------056 KHZ CLOCK
-12 V
Al )--------oVCC (-7 V DC)
LEGEND
• Male Pin
x NoPin Present
410054
ON KEYBOARD SIDE FRAME
Fig. 8
SlJL
SPACE
MARK
A3 )------056 KHZ CLOCK
(Viewed From
Terminal Side)
Page 20
I
SlJL
SlJL
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
B.
40KI05/CAA, 40K203/GAB, and 40KI04/DAB (Late Design)
I
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (N)
INFORMATION
TO DEVICE (I)
/
"
2
"
I
/
I
"
I
3
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (I)
6 /
"'
4
-SPARE
5
VSS (+12 V DC)
I (S)
I
I
I
/
INFORMATION
TO CONTROLLER (N)
VGG1 (0 V)
J11
r-
B8
B7
(BL)
I
1
I
1
(Y)
B6
(R)
B5
/
I
4
~
3
B3
/ 1 (BR)
" 1
1
/1 (G)
I
I
~
1
I
"
2
B4
(P)
B1
(0)
B2
"' I
I
V24 (-12 V DC)
CHASSIS GND
B
/
I
"'
I
I
1
" 1
9 /
(G)
'-'
Jl CONNECTOR
(401149)
..
I
~
3
6
N
>" ,
>•••
9
~
(Viewed From
Terminal Side)
LEGEND
• Male Pin
KEYSWITCH LOGIC
~ONKEYBO ARD SIDE FRAME
Fig. 9
Page 21
SECTION· 582-200-405
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
A.
406036 EIA Cable Assembly and Extension Cables (See Note.)
APPLICATION:
Note:
(C304 CONTRC"LLER-DATA SET)
341977
AT CLAMP];4 729
L
I
E
2
G
3
)
TRANSM ITTED DATA
<
3
W-G
8
)
RECEIVED DATA (RD)
(
4
BR
6
> REQUEST TO SEND (RTS)
(
5
'"
SHIELL
An EIA extension
cable can be connected to
406036. The extension
cable Can be 408065 (7 feet),
408066 (12 feet), or 408067
(25 feet). The wiring of these
(SO) cables is provided in Section
582-200-400.
FRAME GROUND (FG)
W-BR
12
)
CLEAR TO SEND (CTS)
15
)
DATA SET READY (DSR)
)
SIGNAL GROUND (SG)
)
CARRIER DETECT (CO)
<
6
<
7
INNER DRAIN WIRE
10
(
8
0
9
L
II
W 0
-
2
L
12
Y
5
L
15
W-Y
II
,....
TRANSMITTER SIGNAL ELEMENT TIMING (SCT)
L
17
13
,.
RECEIVER SIGNAL ELEMENT TIMING (SCR)
....
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BK
I
"-,
,
'-
'-
I
I
"'
~(-,,-2O=--.:.....-_ _--....:Bc::L_ _ _...:.....--=-~)
L
19
G
SUPERVISORY TRANSMIT DATA (STD)
SUPERVISORY RECEIVE DATA (SRD)
DATA TE RM I NA L READY (DTR )
f(.....::.2.::2'-'"-_ _ _..!.P_ _ _ _..L-..;..:..::14~)
RING INDI CATOR (Ril
f(-=2.=3'-'1"-_ _ _..:S=--_ _ _...!....--.:..4____4)
NOT USED (RS)
~(-=2..:::5.....,.!1!---~W:..-..:..R=-----.!.-..:..7----4)
NOT USED (AL)
DATA~
~
W-180714
1
~'
CONTROLLER
PART OF/ I
END ~
341722
I
341705 (13)
I
END
.
"'-
."" =
I
\
-,
,
"
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
~
6FT.
14 CONDUCTOR
CABLE, 24 AWG
~
'~4080"
~
I
I
I
~L
PARTOF/~
341722
/
I
I
dL-180714
341977
Fig. 10
Page 22
I
I
I
CLAMP ASSEMBLY
(SEE FIG. 12 )
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-405
B.
406039 SSI Cable Assembly and Extension Cables (See Note 2.)
401623
4'0
50
R
ITO IN) ~--r---------~----------~~<
(
Y
2
lTD U) (
2
G
3
3
ITC IN) (
4
W-Y
4
GND (
INNER DRAIN WIRE
5
GND (
6
0
6
lTC (1) (
<
<
<
<
+12V (
-12V (
7
W-R
8
W
\
OUTER SHIELD
l
AT CLAMP
CONTROLLER END
t,-
:~~;,~F"" 33'826
~
401623
""-~
~
""-U,
""-
7
8
9
t
Note 1: Inner drain is
cut off at printer end.
(
<
<
BK
c:§
\
,
CLAMP ASSEMBLY
(SEE FIG.12)
~6FT.
341705(7)
8 CONDUCTOR
CABLE,24AWG
\341647(1)
FOR PIN 9
\401150
I
~-PARTOF
~
Note 2: A printer
SSI extension cable
can be connected to
406039. The extension
cable can be 405306
(6 feet) or 405308
(25 feet). The wiring
of these cables is
provided in Section
582-200-401.
~
I
"'-...
401718
,
- 337826
8,
~
PART OF
401718
........ 337826
CD Supplied with cable, used on tractor feed printer cabinet.
®
Supplied with cable, used on friction feed printer cabinet.
Fig. 11
Page 23
SECTION 582-200-405
C.
406066 Private Line Interface Unit Cable Assembly
APPLICATION: (C 304 CONTROLLER-PLIU)
341729
(
II
(
(
(
I
4
W
R
28
13
W-R
29
7
0
30
Y
5
G
3
4
(
182733
W-Y (NOT USED)
I
I
~
INNER DRAIN WIRE
i
OUTER SHIELD
\AT CLAMP
~g",,,,,,, ;
<
<
<
<
<
<
t
AT PLIU END
\
PLIU
(829 D.A.S)
CONTROLLER
END
1
~rJ--" T~~~
~
I
~
~ "lJ,
\
~cc
' ggB ~
ql -
I ",
180714-
",~
I
CLAMP
ASSEMBLY
(SEE BELOW)
\.
\.
8
I
(50-PINI~~~~~CTOR)
14
'\PAR: : :
341722 , -__________________________________________,
341729
CLAMP
ASSEMBLY
Fig. 12
Page 24
24 Pages
6 FT.
7
CONDUCTOR
CABLE,24AWG.
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-505
Issue 2, November 1978
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
SINGLE DISPLAY STATION ARRANGEMENTS
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL ....................
1
2.
TESTS ........................
3
SELF-TEST ....................
3
LOCAL TESTS .................
5
KD/Controller Local Test .....
Printer Local Tests ..........
KD Local Test ..............
Data Set Analog Loop-Back
Self-Test ..................
5
9
12
ON-LINE TESTS ................
29
Preliminary On-Line Testing ...
On-Line Test Methods ........
Checkout of Received
Printer Message .............
Checkout of Received
KD Message ................
29
29
32
3.
TROUBLESHOOTING ...........
33
1.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.01
25
1.02
This section is being reissued to provide
information on the Single Display Station
with a dial-up feature.
1.03
Troubles isolated to the data set, telephone
lines, or associated systems are not
analyzed. in this section.
1.04
The correction of troubles in this section
is based on replacement of defective
major subassemblies (eg, monitor, opcon, printer,
power supply, etc). FIeld level repair of the major
subassemblies are given in component BSPs as
follows:
582-210-XXX Printers
582-211-XXX Opcons
582-213-XXX Monitor
582-214-XXX Power Supply
32
This section includes all testing of the
DATASPEED 40/4 Single Display Station
(hereafter referred to as 40/4 type). It also includes
trouble analysis.
1.05
See Section 582-200-705 for grounding
strap locations.
Note:
When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each
part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph COlnpany by Teletype Corporation
©1973, 1975, 1976, 1977 and 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U. S. A.
Page 1
SECTION 582-200-505
1.06
Test switches and indicators are shown in Fig. 1 and 2.
Note:
The operation of test switches and indicators should be done under the direction of parts
2. TESTS and 3. TROUBLESHOOTING of this section or referenced sections.
16
HIGH
11
OVER VOLTAGE
TS
F
PS
FS
IS
VOLTAGE
-
Indicator
Test Switch
Fuses and Circuit Breaker
Power Switch
Functional Switch
Interlock Switch
~I9 (FILAl\IENT)
ill
III
(Also located on rear of
40BSE101 KD Base)
F1
Fig. I-Test Switches and Indicators (Controller and KD)
TEST
ON
g-~'"'-
TS9
OFF
(132
Column
Only)
PS4
PRINTER POWER
SWITCH
Tractor Feed Printer
Friction Feed Printer
Fig. 2-Test Switches and Indicators (Printer)
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
2. TESTS
SELF-TEST
Controller Self-Test
2.01 The Controller Self-Test should be performed. The test requires the use of the appropriate Controller Arrangement Form (copies are shown in Section 582-200-205).
2.02 If during a controller self-test, a circuit card is indicated to be defective per the self-test trouble
pattern, perform the following before replacing the circuit card:
(a) Remove card and check for bent connector pins.
(b) If circuit card contains sockets, make sure all L C. packs are firmly seated.
(c) Reinstall circuit card and make sure card is firmly seated in connector.
(d) Re-perform the self-test.
If the circuit card is still indicated as defective, then replace.
Warning: The ac power must be OFF before removing or replacing a circuit card.
CHART 1
CONTROLLER SELF-TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
PROCEDURE
CORRECT RESPONSE
1
Connect ac cable(s) from
cabinet(s) to power source.
Turn on cabinet power
switch(es).
All power supply votage lamps
light.
2
Depress and hold down on
All three indicators (pattern
SELF-TEST switch on 410251 lamps) on 410251 circuit card
circuit card for at least four light while switch is depressed.
seconds or until one lamp
goes out. (TS1 on Fig. 1)
3
Release SELF-TEST switch.
4
When the pattern lamps
blink sequentially, check
the display on the
monitor. Also, check
that the cursor moves
through the whole
display.
ANALYSIS
40PSUl01, see Chart 10.
-40PSU101, see Chart 10.
-410251.
-410261 or 410264 (Private
Line Version.)
-410262 (Dial Up Version)
- Refer to Chart 7 Step 2.
Pattern lamps may flicker during If a light pattern (shown on
this step.
controller arrangement form)
appears and remains; power
After a short time, the pattern
down, replace indicated card,
lamps should blink sequentially. power up and retest.
Note: If switch is not held
If the indicated card is
down long enough, the option
replaced and the problem
menu will appear. Reset by
remains; refer to Chart 7,
depressing LOCAL or RESET
Step 3.
and repeat Step 2.
See Fig. 3. The ASCII* pattern
- Monitor support cabinet ac
is displayed for about 30 seconds, switch off.
then the EBCDICt pattern is
displayed for about 30 seconds,
- Monitor power switch off
(turn counterclockwise for
then the controller will return to
on).
the normal operating mode.
Note: Depress switch and rotate
it 1/4 turn clockwise to retain the
Fig. 3 display (actually the selftest runs and the display cycles
through ASCII followed by
EBCDIC repeatedly). Depress
switch and rotate it 1/4 turn
counterclockwise to end test.
Normal operation returns after
the EBCDIC display.
- Monitor brightness low
(turn counterclockwise for
on).
,410286 circuit card.
- 410287 circuit card.
- Monitor cable.
*American NatIOnal Standard Code for InformatIOn Interchange.
tExtended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
Page 3
SECTION 582.200·505
ASCII Pattem
Norma! Intensity
= VT FF -
SH Sx EX ET EQ AK BL BS ~
~
$ %
!
"
@
A
B C D E
\
a
b
c
d
e
,
+
F G H I J
h i j
&
( )
/
f
9
~
@
\
A
B C
a
b
c
,
( )
$ %
&
/
°E
F
G H I J
d
e
f
9
I
0
I
3
~
S 6
K
L M N 0
p
Q R S
T
U V W X y
k
1 m n
p
r
·
=VT FF-SO
SH Sx EX ET EQ AK BL BS ~
!
So SI DL DI D2 D3 D~ NK Sy EB CN EM SB EC FS Gs RS Us
h i j
k
?
z
r
\
I
"
z
I
I
I
I
-~
-
-
..-
SI 0L DI D2 D3 D~ NK Sy EB CN EM S8 EC FS GS RS Us
I
·
t
K
0
2
0
p
?
Y Z
r
\
J
"-
z
I
I
I
I
-
9
y
I
~
-
(Bottom third of display must be blank.
If not blank, replace 410286 circuit card.)
..I
I
I
In tensifi~d
N ormal I n t enSl'ty
EBCDIC Pattem
5H Sx Ex ET EQ AK BL B5~
!
@
\
,
A 8
a
b
@
\
,
/
( )
C
G
H I J
c
°
d
E
e
F
f
H $ % &
A B C
a
b
,
N $ % &
9
h i j
SH Sx EX Er EQ AK BL BS ~
!
= VT
c
°
d
E
e
F
f
( )
G
H I J
9
h i j
FF-SO SI 0L 0 1 O2 D3 O~ NK Sy E8 CN EM 58 EC FS Gs RS Us
·
K
k
K
k
.
I
0
I
2
3
~
S
6
L M N 0
p
Q R
5
r
U
v w
t
= Vr
, t
/
,...
1 m n
0
p
?
:
<
=
Z 4
\
I,
I
I
I
I
:
z
-
--~
.,-
FF-SO SI 0L 0 1 O2 03 O~ NK Sy EB CN EM SB EC FS GS RS Us
·
I
0
I
3
~
S
L M N 0
p
Q R S
T
U V W X y
I
m n
0
p
"
2
r
s
t
U
6
v
7
w
8
x
9
y
> ?
;
<
=
Z 4
\
I,
I
I
I
I
:
z
-
-~
(Bottom third of display must be blank.
If not blank, replace 410286 circuit card.)
'ate:
I
I
This fi gure is used with Step 4 of Chart 1.
Flashing Half to Intensified
Fig. 3-Self·Test Mode Displays
Page 4
.,
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
LOCAL TESTS
A. KD/Controller Local Test
2.03 Perform the Chart 2 procedures on the KD opcon.
CHART 2
KD/CONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
CORRECT RESPONSE
PROCEDURE
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
Note: Start with Step 1 if the KD has a typewriter style opcon, start with Step 7 if the KD has
a internal numeric cluster style opcon (see Fig. 5. if required).
1
TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON (Steps 1-6)
Depress LOCAL if the key The following message is dis-Cable to opcon.
is not lighted. Request a
played on the monitor.
local test by depressing the
-Opcon.
LITST key while CON- Refer to Chart 7, Step 4.
TROL key is held down.
See Note 2.
See Note 1.
TO TEST PRESS ENTER OR~~::::::::=------;r-!I
SIR
TO RESET PRESS CLEAR
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS
~
(_ -
11
_)
I
I
See Note 3.
If the wrong line code
tim....."::n·"
Dopending on the ... oodo chooeD, the wohl
ASCII or EBCDIC will appear in this area.
PRIVATE LINE VERSION
or r;D::;I'7A;-L."';'U;;;P:":'V;;E;;;R:';:;S~IO::;N:;--'
DEVICE ADDRESS
4th
T R
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
3rd ID CHARACTER STATION POLL ADDRESS
2nd ID CHARACTER
Se N
e
4
ote .
I
Note 1: If the message is not responded to within 20 seconds; the display will clear, the
test will be automatically canceled, and SIR will flash repeatedly. Depress LOCAL to stop
SIR from flashing.
Note 2: The QUICK BROWN FOX ... message may be changed provided that the first
character remains a "T". If "T" is changed to any other character, the display will clear
and the test will be canceled when SIR is depressed.
Note 3:
Besides CLEAR, depression of any PA or PF key will clear display and cancel test.
Note 4: When the SPACE character is selected, it is represented by a blank space. If characters are incorrect per customer order and Fig. 4, check OPT 1 selection for station poll
address and select address or OPT 2 selection for KD device address (Private Line Version)
or Check OPT 1, OPT 2 or OPT 3 selection for 2nd, 3rd or 4th character of ID sequence
respectively (dial-up version).
Page 5
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 2 (Cont)
KD/CONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
2
CORRECT RESPONSE
PROCEDURE
If received without error, the
following message will appear
on the monitor.
Depress SIR.
THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE
LAZY DOG'S BACK 0128456789 TIMES.
Note:
If any characters in the QUICK BROWN FOX ...
message were changed before depressing SIR, those
characters will appear in the above message.
Test is completed. Display is
cleared. Proceed to Step /
8
Depress CLEAR. Depress
LOCAL if station is not
connected to LCU.
4
If message is received with
an error in Step 2, the
following message will be
displayed on the monitor.
THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE
LAZY DOG'S BACK 0128456789 TIMES'
RETEST PRESS ENTER OR SIR
TO RESET PRESS CLEAR
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS
-)
I
/
LJ
.
/
,
'\
TEST MESSAGE:
-
-If "test failed" message is
received, go to Step 4,
Procedure.
- Normal Local Test:
Replace 410290 or 410291.
**TEST F AILED**
(-
-If SIR is flashing, go to Step
4, Local Test Analysis.
~
/"
"-
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
I
Go to Step 5.
- Analog Loopback Test:
Check data set or data set
cable. Replace controller
back panel. (Data set
DSR not "on" in AL
mode can cause this
failure.)
- Far-End Digital Loopback
Test:
Check far-end data set or
check facilities between data
sets.
Note 1:
Local test is canceled
by symptom.
Note 2:
Depress LOCAL to
to stop flashing SIR.
5·
Depress LOCAL if station is not connected to
LeU. Retry Steps 1 and
2 once then cancel teSt
by depressing CLEAR
key.
6
If the local test of the KD is successfully completed, go to Chart 8 and 4.
)age 6
If test still fails, run controller
self-tests.
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 2 (Cont)
KDICONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
PROCEDURE
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
CORRECT REPONSE
INTERNAL NUMERIC CLUSTER STYLE OPCON (Steps 7 through 15)
7
Request a local test by
depressing the LITST key
and the ALPHA key
simultaneously.
-Cable to opcon.
The following message is
displayed on the monitor.
.Opcon.
• Refer to Chart 7, Step 4.
See Note 2.
See Note 1.
TO TEST PRESS ENTER OR SIR
TO RESET PRESS CLEARSEE MANUAL FOR DE1'AILS
(- -
[1
-)
:::::::::::::-----;---1 See Note 3.
If the wrong line code
[::===J---------j--i"- appears,
check the
~,d
Th.
EBCmc.m
appear in this area.
OPT 4 _tion.
PRIVATE LINE VERSION
or . DIAL· UP VERSION
DEVICE ADDRESS
4th ID CHARACTER S N
4
STATION SELECT ADDRESS
3rd ID CHARACTER
ee ote .
STATION POLL ADDRESS
2nd ID CHARACTER
I
Note 1:
If the message is not responded to within 20 seconds; the display will clear, the
test will be automatically canceled, and SIR will flash repeatedly. Depress LOCAL to stop
SIR from flashing.
Note 2:
The QUICK BROWN FOX ... message may be changed provided that the first
character remains a "T". If "T" is changed to any other character, the display will clear
and the test will be canceled when SIR is depressed.
Note 3:
Besides CLEAR, depression of any PA or PF key will clear display and cancel test.
Note 4: When the SPACE character is selected, it is represented by a blank space. If characters are incorrect per customer order and Fig. 4, Check OPT 1 selection for station poll
address or OPT 2 selection for KD device address (Private Line Version) or check OPT 1,
OPT 2, or OPT 3 selections for 2nd, 3rd or 4th characters of ID sequence respectively (dialup version).
Page 7
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 2 (Cont)
KDICONTROLLER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
8
PROCEDURE
CORRECT RESPONSE
Depress ENTER.
LOCAL TEST ANALYSIS
If received without error,
the following message will
appear on the monitor.
-If SIR is flashing, go to
rV
Step 13, Local Test Analysis.
- If "test failed", message is
( THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE
LAZY DOG'S BACK ~123456789 TIMES.
received, go to Step 13,
Note: If any characters in the QUICK BROWN FOX ...
message were changed before depressing ENTER, those
characters will appear in the above message.
hocOO~\
\
Depress CLEAR.
Display is cleared.
10
Request a local test by
depressing the LITST
key and the NUMERIC
key simultaneously.
The message of Step 7 is
displayed.
R.pl". opoon. \
11
Depress ENTER.
As given in Step 8.
As given in Step 8. \
12
Depress CLEAR.
Test is completed. Display is
cleared. Proceed to Step 15.
13
If message is received
9
Symptom - Flashing SIR.
with an error, the following message will be displayed on the monitor.
,
\
Step 4 "Local Test Analysis"
applies.
**TEST FAILED**
'\
TEST MESSAGE:
THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE
LAZY DOG'S BACK 0123456789 TIMES.
RETEST PRESS ENTER OR SIR
TO RESET, PRESS CLEAR
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS
,- -
14
-)
I
Depress RESET if station
is not connected to LCU.
I
./
Go to Step 14.
If test still fails, run controller
self tests of Chart 1.
Retry Steps 7 and 8 once
then cancel test (depress
CLEAR key).
15
Page 8
If local test of KD device is successfully completed, proceed to Chart 3.
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
Stn
or
Dvce
No.
S
P
A
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
S
S
A
-
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
I
Z
[ (¢)
I
D
A
Stn
No.
S
P
A
S
S
A
SP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27:
28
29
30
31
K
L
M
N
0
P
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[ (¢)
I
,
<
%
-<
(
-
(
+
:>
!(I)
&
J
,
Q
R
](!)
:
$
#
*
@
;
"
(Private Line Version Only)
~
figure;' "'",' with
Step 1 or Step 7 of Chart 2. The
figure indicates all station and
device identification for ASCII or
EBCDIC coded stations. EBCDIC
characters are shown in parentheses. Device numbers 00 through
15 can apply.
,
)
.A(')
+
!(I)
0
1
Fig. 4·-ASCII or EBCDIC Station and Device Identification (Private Line Version)
a.
Printer Local Tests
2.04
If a printer is not part of the station, proceed to 2.05. If a printer is part of the station, perform
the Chart 3 procedures.
CHART 3
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
Note:
If a printer is not part of the station, proceed to Chart 4.
STEP
1
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
Preliminary requirements of printer:
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
Refer to Section
582-210-500.
a.
Ribbon and paper loaded.
Printer motor is off.
b.
Switches (top right or left of
printer, cabinet cover raised).
LF-1
Test-Off
Forms (Tractor Feed Only) On
Note:
c.
Cabinet cover closed and ac
power switched ON.
Fan in tractor feed
printer cabinet must be ON
(air flows).
Page 9
CHART 3 (Cant)
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
2
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
Momentarily depress PAPER button
(red) on cover of printer cabinet.
Paper feeds out as long as
button is depressed.
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
-Check for:
a. Printer cable
not connected.
b. Printer cable
defective.
3
TRACTOR FEED PRINTER ONLY:
Depress and release FORMS
ADV ANCE button (black) on
printer cabinet cover. (See Note in
Trouble Analysis column.)
4
Paper feeds out until first
line of next form is reached,
then stops.
Note: See chart on top of
printer to determine the
correct form out selection.
Unlatch and raise printer cabinet
cover.
None
5
Raise cover interlock switch to
maintenance position.
None
6
Set test switch to ON, allow
printer to print several lines,
then turn test switch OFF.
Note: On printers which have
later version 410071, 410072 and
410076 circuit cards, the font identification symbol will be printed in
the columns margined per Option 17.
7
Refer to Section
582-210-500.
Note: Continuous
feedout will occur
if form selector
lever not fully seated in slot 1, 2, 3,
or 4.
Refer to Section
582-21 0-500.
i
See Section 582-200-101 for
font ID symbols.
FRICTION FEED PRINTER:
Lift paper roll to simulate a
a paper alarm. Lower paper roll,
guide paper through window, and
close cabinet cover.
Page 10
Printer turns on and prints
font identification symbol
repeatedly in all columns
until switch is turned off.
",(See Note)
c. Defective
410290 circuit
card.
Refer to Section
582-210-500.
Paper indicator lights.
Paper indicator goes out.
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 3 (Cont)
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
PROCEDURE
7
(Cont)
TRACTOR FEED PRINTER:
Tear off next form at perforations
under pedestal top, then depress
PAPER button on cabinet top
until last form passes through
printer.
Reload forms, guide first form
through window, and close cabinet cover.
RESULTS
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
80-Column Printer With 410640
Circuit Card PAPER indicator
lights and printer motor turns
off.
80-Column Printers With 410076
or 410071 Circuit Cards And All
132-Column Printers --- If Option
48a is selected, PAPER indicator
lights and printer motor turns
off when last form is partly
through printer. If Option 48b is
selected, PAPER indicator does
not light and printer motor does
not turn off until form is completely out of printer and end of
form contact is sensed.
PAPER indicator goes out.
8
Type some text on the display (lower LOCAL indicator extinguishes
case and capitals if possible) and then and PRINT LOCAL indicator
lights and then goes off when
depress PRINT LOCAL key.
printer buffer receives the message; LOCAL indicator lights.
Printer copies entire display (24
lines):
Monocase Printer - All display
characters print as capitals. See
Note following Step 5 of Chart 4.
Up-Low Printer - All display
characters are copied as displayed.
(Continued on next page)
Flashing
PRINT LOCAL
indicator indicates:
a. Printer cabinet lid open.
b. Form or
paper-out
condition.
c. Printer ac
power is off.
d. Printer is
not print
local to the
KD.
e. Printer cable
defective or
miswired.
Refer to Section 582-210700
. Page 11
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 3 (Cont)
PRINTER LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
STEP
Option 18c not
installed in
monocase printer.
Note 1: Friction feed printer may
or may not feed out 16 lines of paper
before turning off, depending on
Option 18_ Tractor feed printer may
or may not form feed before turning
off depending on Options 18 and 39.
8
(Cont)
Character set
of type carrier
in printer does
not match
Option 19.
Note 2: After printer is finished
copying, the motor will remain on
for approximately 10 seconds before
turning off. Later version printer
circuit cards will allow printer motor
to remain on for 40 seconds or
indefinitely, depending on Option 58.
Option 19c not
installed in
printer.
Refer to Sectiori '582~210~
700 '.
C.
KD Local Test
2.06
2.05
Check the KD using the procedure given
in 2.06 and Chart 4. The locations of
the various control and data keys referred to in
Chart 4 are given in Fig. 5. The SDS has only
one KD and therefore, only one opcon and one
monitor.
Follow these instructions before beginning
Chart 4:
(a) Turn on power to the set or station
(LOCAL indicator lights on the opcon).
(b) Turn on power to the display and adjust
brightness.
(c) Perform Steps 1 through 41 of Chart
4, KD Local Test Procedures.
LOCAL LOOP·
BACK TEST
INDICATOR
LAMP
I
EDIT KEYS
(To Alter
Information
on the Display)
' - - - - - - - - - - K E Y B O A R D - - - - - - - - - -....-
Cd
BLOCKING
KEYTOP
D
,REPEAT KEYS
\ \ . . . - - - - - 40K104/DAA or 40K104/DAB Keytop Layout
Fig. 5-0pcon Keytop Layouts
Page 12
-------/
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
LOCAL LOOP·BACK
TEST INDICATOR
EDIT KEYS
(To Alter
Information
on Display)
CLEAR
ERASE
CHAR
INPUT
DlET£ OLETE
LINE
TAB
~
I..!TST
HOME
~
RiTST
REPT
RESET
\'-_ _ _ _ _ KEYBOARD _ _ _ _ _ _---'/CURSOR MOVEMENT
CONTROL KEYS
Note.' The only locking key top is NUM LOCK, depress
set (lights), depress to release (light goes out).
~o
'---------40K105/CAA Key top
/
Layout--------~
Fig. 5-Qpcon Keytop Layouts (Cont)
r---------OPERATIONAL CONTROLS-----------.
LOCAL LOOPBACK
TEST INDICATOR
I
7
EXTERNAL-1
NUMERIC
CLUSTER
8
9
5
6
2
3
-*
/
Note: The, (comma), *, and / keys located within the External Numeric Cluster are not functional
with SDCs (Private Line Version Only) which employ the 410261 circuit card and, therefore may be
covered with blocking keys.
,,'------------40K203/GAB Key top Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Fig. 5-Qpcon Key top Layouts (Cont)
Page 13
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 4
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
Note: Start with Step 1 if KD of the station has typewriter style opcon. Start with
Step 21 if KD has a internal numeric 9luster style opcon.
1
a. Place typewriter style opcon into
the caps mode by depressing and
latching the CAPS LOCK key.
(Opcons with no CAPS LOCK
key require no action.)
b. On the monitor:
e Observe that the raster is barely
present when brightness control
is turned up fully.
e When cursor is in home position, it is approximately 1/2"
from left side of display.
CURSOR
1/2"
~~
I
I
I
~
e Enter a line of Es at top and
bottom of display, then HOME
cursor. Requirements are met.
elf raster is not
present go to
Chart 8.
elf a requirement is not met,
refer to adjustments of monitor in Section
582-213-700 to
meet requirement.
elf E cannot be
entered, go to
Chart 9.
5-1/4"
1
ReqUirements :
e Raster aligned vertically and horizontally.
e All Es sharply defined.
eHeight and width of display as indicated.
eEs uniform across full width.
eHeight of Es same at top and bottom lines.
Page 14
ISS 2, SECTION 682-200-606
CHART 4 (Cont)
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
2
PROCEDURE
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
Upper case alpha characters
and numeric characters can
be displayed.
Home the cursor and depress a few
keys on the keyboard portion of
theopcon.
Note:
I
Lower portion of depressed
keys are displayed.
J
Each keytop need
not be checked except for.
a trouble call. Each keytop
shall function each time it
is depressed.
Writes Null (displayed as
space) from cursor position
to beginning of next field .
.~
'"
I 112 j 3t4j51 61 7is I 9 I 0 I - I ! 1'r'B -,,
lalwlEIRlrlv u 1110 p 1;1 ~
ILOCK~ I RITT
A ITS}
S 01F Gl H J K I L I ~ I .~
\
/ I -, I z I X I c I V I BIN Iiil : ~1~lSH'FT1~
I
ICONTROLl
,
.
\
NEW
FM
c••
lONE
CONTROL
Not present if
blocking key top
is used.
3
Disengage the
\
Writes a space and
causes cursor to
move to right.
I=Ikey by
depressing it again momentarily.
Again depress a couple of keys
on the keyboard portion of
the opcon. (Opcons with no
CAPS LOCK key require no
action; go to Step 4.)
l
)
(
Not
Displayed
J
The alpha characters described
in Step 2 are displayed in
lower case (ie, abcdef, etc).
Page 16
SECTI()N 582-200-505
CHART 4 (Cont)
KD L()CAL TEST PR()CEDURES
STEP
4
PR()CEDURE
Depress the left then the right
B
key while depressing and checking
operation of one of the following
alpha keys (ie, !@#$, etc).
TR()UBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
Upper portion of
the depressed keys
are displayed.
,
}
{
5
Depress the left
FM
with the
right
J
CONTROL
I I
CONTOOL
key together
key; then depress the
key together with the
R
l1!U key.
,
}
{
Page 16
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 4 (Cont)
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
I
I
RESULTS
PROCEDURE
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
Note:
Some characters may be displayed as a character other than the character
received on-line or entered from the opcon. See the table below which also provides
printer actions for applicable characters.
Application of Type of 40KI04 Opcon
Character Received From LCU or
Entered on 40KI04 Type Opcon
ASCIIUP-LO
Character
Displayed
Using:
ASCII MONO
/'""OJ
('oJ
A
EBCDIC UP-LO
'"'-'
EBCDIC MONO
-,
400629 80C ASCII UP-LO
rJ
,
400645 80C ASCII MONO
A
400777 132C ASCII UP-La
rJ
400780 132C ASCII MONO
A
400783 132C EBCDIC UP-La
400784 80C EBCDIC UP-LO
{
,
@
,
@
,
Character
Printed
Using
Type
Carrier:
'/DAA
or
'/DAB
,
,
I
I
{
@
,
,
}
}
'/DAA
or
'/DAB
D
-, Up FM
'/DAB
]
[
4
A
J
[
A
]
[
A
]
[
A
]
[ DL FS
A
DL FS
{
¢
---,
¢
-, DL FS
¢
¢
---,
¢
-, DL FS
{ }
(~ ,'l1li [....
,
'/DAA
{
,'l1li [
A
]
[
A
]
[
SP SP
J....
A
]
[
A
]
[
SP SP
}
A
]
[
A
]
[
SP SP
]
A
]
[
A
]
[
SP SP
{
} ¢
-,
¢
--,
SP SP
l
¢
-,
¢
-,
SP SP
1'II1II
¢
-,
¢
--, SP SP
I'llii
¢
-,
¢
-, SP SP
400785 80C EBCDIC MONO
¢.
@'1111
,'l1li ,'l1li
400887 132C EBCDIC MONO
¢
@
,'l1li
,
LEGEND:
D
Will print with fold-over option in printer enabled. Error symbol will print if fold-over
option .!L!!21 enabled.
Page 17
SECTION 582·200·505
CHART 4 (Cont)
KD LOCAL TEST PROCEDURES
STEP
6
PROCEDURE
Depress one of the following keys
with additional force,
SPACE
7
TROUBLE
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
Depress the
The space key repeatedly
moves the cursor.
,
I I
HOME
key. Then in
(7------- ---CD- - - ·····9
sequence depress momentarily
with more force than normally
required, each cursor movement
key shown.
~-@- •• ~
¢
~-. -(4)----J
-----
~t-~:-s-·.t--+5
:
PROTECTED NONDISPLAYED FIELD>
NUMERIC FIELD> .. ,
----------------------Line 5
SO
CHARACTER ROW OF X'S::: - (May be 132 character row of Xs.)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
(May have "END OF TEST" on line 24.)
Line S
>C<
<=
<=
Fig. 7-SYNC 40 Test Message
Page 32
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
3.
3.03
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.01
The troubleshooting procedures for the
controller are included in the controller
self-test procedure.
3.02
A brief troubleshooting reminder on the
monitor is provided in Chart 8. For
detailed analysis, refer to Section 582-213-500.
Limited troubleshooting for the opcon is
provided in Chart 9. For detailed analysis,
refer to Section 582-211-500.
3.04
Trouble analysis for the printer is not
given in this section. Refer to Section
582-210-500.
The use of a controller arrangement form
(Section 582-200-205) is necessary to
troubleshoot using the controller self-test.
3.05
CHART 7
STATION ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
1. Are all power supply voltage
indicators lit?
Go to 2.
Go to Chart 10, 40PSU101 Power
Supply Analysis.
2. Depress and hold SELF-TEST
switch.
Go to 3.
40PSU101, see Chart 10.
Do all three pattern lamps
(LEDs) on 410251 light?
If power supply voltages are
correct with all controller cards
installed, replace 410251 circuit
card.
If problem remains, replace con·
.
troller cards one at a time and
repeat Step 2 until defective card
is found .
If all replacement cards together
do not allow LEDs to light,
disconnect opcon, monitor, data
set (or data auxiliary set), and
printer cables from back panel.
then repeat Step 2.
If disconnecting a cable corrects
problem, cable or device at other
end is at fault.
If LEDs still do not light, replace
410276 (early version) or 410277
(later version) back panel. See
Note 2 in.Step 3.
Page 33
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 7 (Cont)
STATION ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
3.
Release SELF-TEST switch.
Go to 4.
Does controller pass self-test?
(See Note below.)
Note: If display pattern
appears with errors or is
distorted, replace 410286
circuit card and repeat
Steps 2 and 3. If 410286
circuit card does not correct a display pattern,
replace 410287 circuit
card and repeat Steps 2
and 3.
(
This includes display patterns
of Fig. 3 (see Note in "Yes"
column.
Note 1: Trouble patterns of
controller arrangement forms
are given in Section
582-200-205. When the card
indicated by the trouble
pattern in Section
582-200-205 is replaced, but
the trouble remains, then the
patterns given in the "NO"
RESPONSIVE DIRECTIVE
column of this question
apply.
Note 2: Whenever it becomes
necessary to replace a 410276
back panel with a 410277 back
panel, or a 410290 circuit
card with a 410291 circuit
card or a 410261 circuit
card with a 410264 circuit
card, it may be necessary to
also consult Section 582-200205, Controller Arrangements
for other affected circuit
card positions.
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
Legend for
trouble patterns:
-LED 1
_LED2
eLED3
Front of 410251
circuit card
Replace circuit card indicated by
trouble pattern of applicable controller arrangement form. If more
than one trouble pattern appears,
replace card indicated by last
trouble pattern first. Repeat
Steps 2 and 3.
If indicated card does not pass,
repeat Steps 2 and 3, then follow
applicable procedure below:
a. Replace 41026N* circuit :d,
card, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
b. Remove all circuit cards,
__
except 410251 and 41026N*.
repeat Steps 2 and 3. If only
middle LED is lit, then
replace 410251 and 41026N*
circuit card, otherwise
replace back panel.
e~. Replace 410251 circuit card,
_
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
o b. Follow b. entry of : .
-
o{. Replace 410251 circuit card,
_
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
o b. Replace back panel.
0ta. RePla.ce 410251 circuit card,
_
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
o b. Replace back panel.
-t'
*See Note 2.
Replace 410287 circuit card,
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
o
o b. Replace back panel.
Page 34
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 7 (Cont)
STATION ANALYSIS
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
4. Does the local test work?
(CTRL and S keys or L/TST
and ALPHA).
Go to 6.
Go to 5.
5. Depress the LOCAL key on
the opcon.
Check the cable between
the controller and opcon.
Refer to Section
582-200-205.
Go to Chart 9, Opcon Analysis.
6. In the local mode, do all keys
on the opcon function
prpperly? Refer to C. KD
Local Tests,(2.05).
Go to 7.
Replace opcon. Replace 41029N*
circuit card.
7. Input data on the monitor.
Depress PRINT LOCAL.
Go to 8.
Check cable between the controller and printer. Replace printer.
Replace 41029N* circuit card.
Also see Step 8 of Chart 3.
8. Does the station pass the
on-line checkout?
Place in service.
Go to 9.
9. Does RD LED on 41029N
circuit card flash during
polling or selecting?
Go to 10.
Check data set (or 251Al) options.
Check data set cable (EIA pin 3 11 )
or data auxiliary set cable. Replace
data set (or 251A1).
10. Does RS LED (201 or 208)
or SD LED (212) on data set
light after polling or selecting?
Go to II.
Check data set cable (EIA pin 411)
or data auxiliary set cable ..
Replace 41029N* circuit card.
Does CS LED (201 or 208) on
11. data
set ligp.t after polling or
Go to 12.
Check data set (or 251Al) options.
Replace data set (or 251Al).
12. Does SD LED on 41029N
circuit card flash after polling
or selecting?
a. Check data set or
251AI.
Check data set cable (EIA pin 5.)
or data auxiliary set cable.
Replace 41029N* circuit card.
Is the local lamp lit?
Does the print local printer
pri.Ii.t data properly?
selectimz?.
b. Check data set cable
(EIA pin 2 fl) or data
auxiliary set cable ..
c. Replace 41029N* circuit card.
lIEIA pin number applies to the data set end.
*See Note 2 in Step 3.
Page 35
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 8
40MN101 MONITOR ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
15
RED
DRIVE
410852
1. Is red drive lamp 15 lit?
Go to 2.
Check cable between controller
and monitor.
410286 circuit card in controller.
410656 circuit card in monitor.
2. With PS1 and PS2 (see Fig. 1)
on, is pilot 17 lit?
Go to 3.
Check 341578 fuse, F3 (1.4
SL-BL) and cables.
3. Are 14 and 13 lit?
Go to 4.
Replace 410852 circuit card.
4. Is 12 lit?
Go to 5.
Replace 410853 circuit card.
Replace Q1.
5. Is Illit?
410853
Go to 6.
6
See Note below.
lteplace 410854 circuit card.
Is 16 lit?
Replace 410656 circuit card.
Note:
If 19 (CRT filament) is not lighted or if problem still exists in the monitor, go to Section
582-213-500 for detailed trouble analysis..
Page 36
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 9
OPCON ANALYSIS
Note: Start with Question 1, if typewriter style opcon is present. Start with Question 4 if internal
numeric cluster style opcon is present.
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
TYPEWRITER STYLE OPCON
1. Depress ERASE INPUT and
Check for +12 V and -12 V to
opcon. Refer to Section
582-200-405.
Go to 2.
QUOTES keys together (see
above Note). Does TST indicator remain lit when keys
are released?
Replace opcon.
Note: If lamps flash, clear by depressing ERASE INPUT
T and P keys, then repeat no. 1.
2. Do the following:
(See Note 1
at right.)
(See Note 2 at right.
r
Indicator
Depress /
Keys
Key
Condition
A'
SHIFT
ON
SIR
OFF
CTRL RjTST
SHIFT
ON
C
LOCAL
OFF
CTRL
C
PRINT
ON
SHIFT
F
OFF
CTRL
LOCAL
\
FLASH
LOCAL
OFF
CTRL
C
---
a. Is the opcon a late design
40K104 or a 40K203?
1
Note 1: Ignore any characters that may be
displayed during this test.
Note 2: If opcon has CAPS LOCK key,
when depressing A, C or F, CAPS LOCK
key must be in latched position (ON) or
SHIFT must be depressed. If opcon has no
CAPS LOCK key, do not depress SHIFT.
Interface/bell card not
present on 40K104, or
40K203 present.
Interface/bell card present on
40K104.
Go to 2b.
Go to 2c.
Note: Late design 40K104 opcons are sometimes called OPCON II and have a single card of new
design. To check the vintage of an opcon, it is sufficient to remove opcon from cabinet (or base)
and look through the slot at the rear for the interface/bell card.
Page 37
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
2. (Cont)
b. On late design 40K104 opcon
(interface/bell card not
present) or 40K203 opcon,
fully depress ERASE INPUT.
Does the alarm sound
repeatedly as long as the
key is depressed?
Note: The alarm loudness
control may require adjustment to hear the tone.
c. Do all indicators operate
as described?
3. Does the opcon fail to
generate proper characters?
Go to 3.
Replace opcon.
Depress ERASE INPUT
and P keys together to
terminate test. TST
indicator light goes out.
Replace opcon.
Replace opcon.
Opcon OK.
Opcon is in loopback
mode. Go to 5.
Check for +12 V and -12 V to
opcon. Refer to Section
582-200-405.
INTERNAL NUMERIC
CLUSTER STYLE OPCON
4. Depress CONSOL TEST and
LINE INSERT keys (fully
depress LINE INSERT)
together. Does CONSOL
TEST indicator remain lit
when keys are released?
Replace opcon.
Note: If lamps flash or the alarm sounds more than once or
continuously, clear by depressing CONSOL TEST and RESET
keys, then repeat Question 4 (use RESET adjacent to PF1).
5. Do the following in the
order given.
Indicator
Condition
Depress key(s)
Key
A
SIR
On
C
LOCAL
On
Notes
If entered loop back mode from LOCAL,
LOCAL is already on.
Page 38
M
INPUT
INHIBIT
On
F
PRINT
LOCAL
On
(Question 5, continued on Page 38)
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
5.
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
(Cont)
Depress key(s)
I
Key
Indicator
Condition
NUM
LOCK
Notes
On
SIR
Flashing
On & Off
(Cursor right)
LOCAL
Flashing
On & Off
LINE DLETE
INPUT
INHIBIT
Flashing
On & Off
L/TST
PRINT
LOCAL
Flashing
On & Off
NUM LOCK
NUM
LOCK
Flashing
On & Off
ALPHA&A
SIR
On (no flash)
ALPHA & C
LOCAL
On (no flash)
ALPHA&M
INPUT
INHIBIT
On (no flash)
ALPHA & F
PRINT
LOCAL
On (no flash)
ALPHA & I
NUM
LOCK
On (no flash)
NUM & R/TST
SIR
Off
LOCAL cannot be turned off while in
loop back mode.
ERASE INPUT
INPUT
INHIBIT
Off
PRINT LOCAL cannot be turned off
while in loopback mode.
TAB
NUM
LOCK
Off
Depress TAB not CURSR TAB.
R/TST
SIR
Flashing
On & Off
SIR
Off
R/TST
-
ALPHA & R/TST
Depress only R/TST.
Depress only L/TST.
Depress only R/TST.
(Question 5, continued on Page 40)
Page 39
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 9 (Cont)
OPCON ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
5.
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
(Cont)
Indicator
Condition
Depress keyes)
Key
CONSOLTEST
(See note to the right)
I
Notes
Opcon attention bell sounds repeatedly
as long as key is depressed.
!Replace opcon.
Do all indicators and bell
operate as described?
Depress CONSOL TEST
and RESET (adjacent to
PF1) keys together to
tenninate test. CONSOL
TEST indicator goes out.
Go to 6.
6. Does the following occur?
All three conditions are
met. Go to 7.
Replace opcon.
Replace opcon.
Opcon is OK.
-.
a. CONSOL TEST indicator
goes out,
b. PRINT LOCAL indicator
goes out,
c. LOCAL indicator stays
on.
7. Does the opcon fail to generate proper characters?
Page 40
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 10
40PSUl01 POWER SUPPLY ANALYSIS
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
ANALYSIS QUESTION
1. With the set plugged in and
power ON, are all LED
indicators ON?
All LEDs are on.
Go to 2.
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
At least one LED is off.
Go to 3.
LED INDICATORS
~~~!I~~~_A&~
'\
~'"";;;;",#,VM:
(341636 - 3 Places)
~-- +5 V INDICATOR
+12 V INDICATOR
·12 V INDICATOR
2. Are all voltages correct at
the output terminal block?
The power supply is OK.
Check voltage using a
voltmeter having 20,000 ohms
volt sensitivity.
SLATE
PURPLE
BLACK
WHITE
BLUE
Turn off all power. Remove all
connections from back panel.
Retighten all power supply
connector screws (back panel
is not connected to power supply
now). Turn on power.
Go to 6.
+12 V DC
+5V DC
GND
·12 V DC
SENSE
o
Warning: Wire colors of cable connecting to
block are different from the wire colors of
cable used in 40/1, 40/2, and 40/3 type.
3. Are the ventilation fans in the
electronics module moving
air?
Go to 4.
Check ac power input power
switch(es), cabinet ac wiring and
ac connectors.
4. Turn off power.
Is main fuse on the power
supply blown?
Replace fuse, turn on
power and go to 5.
(129920 fuse, 5 amp
SL-BL)
Replace power supply. If not on
customer premises, go to Note
following chart.
5. Turn off power.
Did main fuse blow again?
Disconnect cable from
back panel. Replace
fuse, turn on power, and
check output voltages.
Replace power supply. If not on
customer premises, go to Note
following chart.
(Continued on next page.)
Page 41
SECTION 582-200-505
CHART 10 (Cont)
40PSUl01 POWER SUPPLY ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS QUESTION
5. (Cont)
"YES" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
"NO" RESPONSE
DIRECTIVE
If no output voltages are
present and fuse blows
again, replace power
supply. If not on
customer premises, go to
Note following chart.
If output voltages are
present (power supply
OK), go to 6.
6. Are all voltages correct at the
output terminal block?
Note: See Question 2 for
values.
7. Are all voltages at output
terminal block now correct?
Turn off power.
Reconnect all leads from
back panel.
Remove all circuit cards
from back panel.
Turn power 011. Go to 7.
Replace power supply. If not on
customer premises, go to Note
following chart.
Turn off power.
Reinstall one circuit card
that was removed in 6.
Turn on power.
Repeat 7 until voltage
not correct. Card causing
problem is at fault.
Replace back panel.
Replace power supply. If not on
customer premises, go to Note
following chart.
Note: When the power supply is shown to be at fault, refer to Sections 582-214-400, 582-214-500
or 582-200-405 as required.
Page 42
42 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCoStandard
SECTION 582-200-705
Issue 1, February 1978
SYNCHRONOUS "DATASPEED*" 40/4
SINGLE DISPLAY STATION ARRANGEMENTS
DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBLY AND PARTS
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL ....................
1
2.
DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBL Y....
3
MONITOR ....................
3
OPCON .......................
3
PRINTERS ....................
4
Friction Feed Printer.........
Tractor Feed Printer (80 or 132
Column) ..................
4
PEDESTALS AND CABINETS .....
5
~UPPLY .......
6
CONTROLLER.................
7
A.
B.
40PSUlOI POWER
3.
GENERAL
1.01
This section contains all necessary information on the removal and replacement
of various components of DATASPEED 40/4
Single Display Station Arrangements. This section
also includes locations of test switches and indicators used in trouble analysis and testing of the
station.
1.02
Whenever this section is reissued, the
reason for reissue will be listed in this
paragraph.
1.03
5
Circuit Cards ...............
Cables ....................
Back Panel. ..•.........••..
Ventilation Assembly ........
7
8
12
13
PARTS .......................
15
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
Abbreviations used in this section are defined in Section 582-200-101.
1.04
To disassemble or reassemble parts (or
units) of this section, the following tools
(or equivalents) are required:
Screwdriver, 1/8 inch blade
Screwdriver, 1/4 inch blade
Socket wrench, 1/4 inch
Socket wrench, 5/16 inch
Open-end wrench, 1/4 inch
Open-end wrench, 1/2 inch
Static ground strap, 346392 (required only if
circuit cards are handled)
Terminal extractor, 402840
When ordering replaceable components,
unless otherwise specified, prefix each part
number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
Note:
INDEX OF REPLACEABLE
PARTS .......................
17
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
© 1977 and 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 582-200-705
1.05
Grounding Strap Locations
Note:
Remove strapping only when necessary.
Q
!l1:~
BRAIDED
GROUNDING
STRAP
~~GREENINSULATED
BRAIDED
GROUNDIN\~:~~~~,~~~ ~ GROUNDmG~
__
,/' (J:/
",."
./
,.'
r-:::.:::::,-.
~~
I
---~-4'"
~
~
,J- --"":.-~
- -"
/~,
,~/
-- = __e>
,,"/
....:"""
,,~,
ilJI
,-1
'-~::--~---:-~~-4t:/;;~:'\'"
::::-i,/
OPCON
CABLE
- -~
40CAB251/ZZ
CABINET
GREEN INSULATED
GROUNDING STRAP
GROUNDCLlP
~
~
~WASHER
PTR
CONNECTOR
Rear of Tractor Feed
Printer Cabinet
BLACK INSULATED
GROUNDING STRAP
Rear of Friction Feed
Printer Cabinet
Page 2
Friction Feed
Printer Cabinet
ISS 1, SECTION 582-200-705
2.
DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBL Y
·····
W
Caution: Remove all power from the set before performing any component replacement or conversions.
This does not apply to cover removal for access to test switches, or to power on adjustments of the
monitor.
'c
MONITOR
2.01
To remove the monitor:
o Grasp
Removal of entire monitor unit from set:
monitor by sides near supports
and simply lift up. Electrical cable
connectors are part of support assembly.
I~
-
A
-:)
~
(3) Removal of monitor housing:
Tilt monitor back and disengage latch.
Slide housing back partially.
Position monitor to its normal position
making sure it locks in that position.
Remove housing completely.
TILT RELEASE
LATCH RELEASE
2.02
(When Housing is
Removed)
To replace the monitor, reverse the removal procedures of 2.01. For further disassembly of the
monitor, refer to Section 582-213-701 or FIMP 579-505-350 (Part 7).
OPCON
2.03
To remove the opcon:
o Place thumb on inward tab of ope on (both sides).
(3) Press downward into unlatched position (each side).
(2) Remove opcon by pulling straight away from the cabinet.
ALIGN
LOCATING PINS
(Each Side)
2.04
To replace the opcon, reverse the removal procedures of 2.03. When replacing opcon, make sure
locating pins are fully engaged before pushing latchlevers upward into locked position. For further
disassembly of opcon, refer to Section 582-211-700 or FIMP 579-505-350 (Part 7).
Page 3
SECTION 582-200-705
PRINTERS
A.
Friction Feed Printer
2.05
To remove the entire printer assembly:
The circuit card can be removed
after Step 4 of disassembly. If printer is
not being removed omit Steps 2 and 3.
Note:
LATE7-~/J
~1X'~~-0
198670
SCREW
408060
VENTILATION
ASSEMBLY
3598
NUT~
0-
/--~
~'1
-- -- ----
2191
WASHER
/--'--
198670
SCREW
29
Lge
To install ventilation assembly, reverse removal procedures of 2.28.
14
J
o
Q
ISS 1, SECTION 582-200-705
408015 Fan
2.30 To remove a 408015 fan:
• Remove 40PSU101 power supply (2.10).
• Remove controller circuit cards (2.12 and 2.13).
• Remove 406046 monitor cable from controller (Step 5 of 2.16) .
• Remove opcon (2.03).
• Remove 406036 EIA cable or 406066 private line interface cable from controller - as applies (Steps 1
and 3 of 2.20).
• Remove 406039 printer cable from controller - if present (Steps 3 and 5 of 2.22).
• Perform Steps 1, 2, and 3 of 2.24.
o Remove four screws and washers that secure fan.
Disconnect fan connector from 408017 fan/power supply cable
connector. Remove fan.
151631
SCREW (4)
~/,72509 WASHER (4)
FAN
CONNECTOR
2.31
3.
To install a 408015 fan, reverse removal procedures of 2.30.
PARTS
3.01
For parts information on interconnect cables of the DATASPEED 40/4, refer to Section 582-20C
405.
3.02
Parts information for individual components (printer, monitor, etc) are not illustrated in this sel
tion. Refer to appropriate BSP section.
3.03
Field replaceable components of controllers are listed in the index which follows the parts illustr;
tion, see 3.04.
Page 11
SECTION 582·200-705
,
0405958
\
198670
/'
~-
401688
406052
/
~
- -___@
'-
o 410276
OR 410277
(410276 Shownj
/
\
'f
~
--@
40171Q
/~
®
I
152634
151631
\
__
72509
/
_ :
-,~
/.
<::;>
o 406064'-----~
0406060 _
,§7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
@
-~"
2191/
198670
CD 408050 fan assembly
0406048 opcon cable, see Section 582-200-205
0410276 (early design) or 410277 (late design) back panel assembly
Present only on 406042 logic moduie (late design); used only for
40PSU101 power supply (late design)
o
40C304 Controller
'age 16
ISS 1, SECTION 582-200-705
INDEX OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
3.04
The index below contains field replaceable parts. The index shows the section or page number of
this section on which access is provided.
Note:
When ordering replaceable components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with
the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).
APPLICATION
Monitor
Opcon
PART NO.
40MN101/AA
341578
Monitor
Fuse, 1.4 Amp
3
582-200-751
40K104/DAA
Opcon (ASCII,
Typewriter Style)
Opcon (EBCDIC,
Typewriter Style)
Opcon (EBCDIC,
Data Entry Style)
3
Printer, Friction Feed
Printer, Tractor Feed80 Column
Printer, Tractor Feed132 Column
Fuse, 1 Amp SL-BL MDL-1
4
5
40K104/DAB
40K105/CAA
40P101/ZZ
40P151/ZZ
Printer
40P201/ZZ
143306
40C304/ AA/001
40PSU101
129920
Controller
Cable
SECTION OR
PAGE NO.
DESCRIPTION
408015
408050
410276
(Early Design)
410277
.. (Lilt!! l)Elsign).
Various Numbers
3
3
5
582-200-751
Controller (SDC)
Power Supply
Fuse, 5 Amp SL-BL
(for 40PSUl01)
Fan
Ventilation Assembly
Back Panel
15
14
12
Back Panel
12
Circuit Cards
7
6
582-200-751
Various Numbers
Cabinets and Pedestals
7 (Locations Given
in 582-200-205)
582-212-700
406036
406039
406046
406048
406066
408017
EIA Cable
Printer Cable
Monitor Cable
Opcon Cable
Private Line Interface Cable
Fan/Power Supply Cable
10
11
8
9
10
13
Page 17
17 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-200-212
Issue 2, January 1979
"DATASPEED"* 40 KEYBOARD-DISPLAY AMPLIFIER (KDA) FEATURE
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL .....................
1
Note: When ordering replaceable components,
prefix each part number with the letters "TP"
(ie, TP405372), unless specified otherwise.
2.
DESCRIPTION ..................
1
1.03
TECHNICAL DATA ..............
3
3.
INSTALLATION ................
4
4.
OPERATIONAL TEST ............
17
5.
TROUBLE ISOLATION ...........
17
6.
DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBL Y .....
23
7.
PARTS ........................
23
NUMERICAL INDEX .............
29
(a)
1.
GENERAL
1.01
This section provides general description,
installation information, testing, trouble
isolation procedures, disassembly/reassembly and
parts identification for the 40KDA101 KeyboardDisplay Amplifier (Fig. 1).
1.02
This section is reissued, to add C18 to
Fig. 10 and specify TKS107 in place of
31246RM.
Two types of KDA installations, (Fig. 2)
are described in this section:
Free-standing units requiring a 405982
modification kit.
(b) KDA units mounted in a 40CAB251/AC
cabinet requiring a 405983 modification
kit. Support components for use with the
KDA in a DATASPEED 40/4 system are
also described.
2.
DESCRIPTION
2.01
The KDA allows for the extension of a
KD (Keyboard Display) device in an
already installed system or may be used to plan
new station layouts with a greater KD location
flexibility. It is only required when a KD is to be
more than 100 feet away from its controller (up
to 600 feet ). However if desired, the KDA can
also be used when a KD is less than 100 feet
from a controller.
2.02
The KDA may be used in maxi-cluster
station arrangements where it is desired to
place the Device Cluster Controllers (DCC) adjacent to the Station Cluster Controller (SCC) to
more closely resemble the station arrangement
that this station is replacing and thus use similar
cable runs to the devices. The use of the KDA in
such a case allows the smaller diameter cable
to be used. Similarly, when the station includes a
Mini-Cluster Controller (MCC), the use of this
smaller diameter cable may be advantageous.
2.03
Fig. 1-40KDA101 Keyboard-Display Amplifier
The keyboard-display amplifier accepts
the low video and half-intensity signals
from the 40C400 type controller. These signals
are driven into an Emitter Coupled Logic (ECL)
line receiver by the discrete differential amplifiers. The outputs are standard ECL differential
signals of 1.6 volts.
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and. Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
©1976 and 1979 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-200-212
CABLING FROM
40KDAIOl KEYBOARD-DISPLAY AMPLIFIER
WITH 405982 MOUNTlNG KIT (F'ree Standing)
CONTROLLER
(Up to 500 Feet)
KD
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
KD
KEYBOARD'
DISPLAY
CABLING FROM
CONTROLLER
405390
(Up to 500 Feet) TERMINATION
BOX
40KDAIOl KEYBOARD-DISPLAY AMPLIFIER WITH
405983 MOUNTING Krr (40CAB251/AC Cabinet)
Fig. 2-KDA Installations
2.04
Both the video and the half-intensity
channels are amplified in the same manner.
Fig. a shows the video amplification circuit.
2.05
The received video line signal is developed
across the R1 resistor. The speed-up networks of CR1-R2 and CR2-Ra apply voltages
at the base of the Q1 and Q2 transistors. The
emitter coupling of transistors Q1 and Q2 make up
a differential amplifier. Transistor Qa is biased
by a constant current source of approximately
22 ma through resistors RIO, R11 and' R12.
WithQa coupled to Q1 and Q2, the outputs of
the quiescent coupled collectors to receiver ML1
produces voltages in the ECL signal voltage range
for the monitor.
2.06
The horizontal drive input signals (Fig. 4)
from the controller (a 5 ma current loop)
terminate at R15, a pull-up resistor coupled to a
DCC or MCC +5 V supply. The input is applied
to the cathode (pin a) of the optical isolator
ML2. ':Ole anode (pin 2) of ML2 is driven by a
speed-up network of R16-C10 from the DCC or
MCC +5 V supply. A local +5 V supply is present
at ML2 (pin 8). The output of ML2 (pin 6) is
buffered by ML4 and given to the KD display
monitor at connector P2 (pin 10) as Transistor
Transistor Logic (TTL) signals to drive a KD
display monitor.
2.07
A trouble analysis lamp (L1) is coupled
to buffer ML4. This lamp is on when the
+5 V local supply and the ac voltage supply are
on. Absence of either .the +5 V or 117 V ac
. supply extinguishes the lamp.
2.08
The vertical synchronization channel
signals (20 ma current loop) to the
cathode (pin 2) of optical isolator MLa (Fig. 5).
The controller +5 V supply is applied to the
anode (pin 1) of MLa through resistor R17. The
output .of isolator MLa coupled to the base of
transistor Q7 allows a TTL signal of sufficient
power to drive the remote KD display monitor.
+'V
RII
RI
VIDEO
Fig. a-Video Amplification
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-212
Fig. 4-Horizontal Drive Input
+!lVIN
"0"1%. "TN.
VERT. RTN.
VERT. "TN.
'¥'ERT. IYNC.
V£RT. SYNC. UN.
+'V
Fig. 5-:-Vertical Channel Signals
2.09
The keyboard-display amplifier allows
the SSI (Standard Serial Interface) transmission signals (Fig. 6) to pass through untreated
from connector P1 (pins 9, 12, 14 and 15) to
connector P3 (pins 1, 2, 3 and 6).
2.10
The power supply (Fig. 7) consists of a
center-tapped transformer (T1) feeding a
full-wave bridge rectifier (D1-D4) with filtering
being done by capacitors C12 and C13. The three
voltage regulators ML5, ML6 and ML7 provide
all required voltages. Diodes D5 and D6 are provided to prevent regulator latch-up while supplying
a common lead. Connector outputs of P3 (pin 4,
PI
12/
I
I
GRD), (pin 7, +12 V), (pin 8, -12 V) and (pin 9,
frame ground) are used by the opcon.
2.11 Technical Data
Height ....................•... 3-1/2 inches
Width ....................... 11-1/2 inches
Depth .............•.......... 5-1/2 inches
Weight .........•....•.•.•..•.... 6-1/2Ibs
Power Requirement ........•.... 103-127 V ac
50/60 Hz at 0.4 ampere
Operating characteristics are:
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 40 0 to 1100 F
Humidity •......... 2% to 95% noncondensing
P3 I
<
ITO (N)
I
. 9E,,--+I---------'--'----TI~
15(
~
I~
ITO (I)
ITe (N)
:
ITe (I)
.
lTD (Normal) -0.5 V to -2 V de
I : ( lTD (Inverted) -2 V to -0.5 V de
I o~·O:.l. o ~4022:::::2V)
177113"
405960,'If....
II
...
402202 (+5V)
--;'__;;;:;~~~~402204 (-12V)
182182
fI_fJ
®
'i'405976'
\!J
>
341691
I
1 I
BL
2
W
3
VIDEORTN.
HORIZ. RTN
lTD (I)
HORIZONTAL
VERT.RTN.
'TD(N)
VERTICAL
ITC (N)
ITC(I)
I
> I
> I
S
4
HALF-INT. SHIELD
+5V
I
>
>
>
>
>
')
>
>
>
)
OUTER DRAIN
I
VIDEO DRAIN
HALF-INT. DRAIN
W·G
5
6
BR
8
Wop
9
y
10
P
11
W-BK
12
R
111
BK
14
0
15
G
ACTUAL WIRING
405354
~180714
~
/
Fig. 15-405372 40KDA Stub Cable Assembly
Page 26
. .,,,,, (Whi'"
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-212
401623
401623
~
(
(
401150
4
W-s
7
W-BL
8
W-BR
6
o
(
( 3
(
1
(
2
(
9
(
341647,
~
7
R
y
3
<
6
(
1
<
2
DRAIN
I t_
<
8 (
G
I
<
4
341648,
;;
<
T'""-___
9 (
""irLJ"+-.J---181392
DRAIN
337826
DRAIN
L;-_....,c:::::@_320420'w.
I
I
<.0
~:~:~i~~---~:~R~-----~.--r-:~«( .o~
4
4
p
10
,
(
(
DRAIN
10 I
.<
341648~
341647~
~1
405136
II
W-Y
15
9 I
W-R
9
( 15
(
I
I
341645
\
180714
34 691
405374
12 Ft
405376
50 Ft
405378
100 Ft
<
<
•
405354
~
(opcon)
1405209 (White)
_181392
.;;::'"
(O~",.)
(SSI)
~!f-~ ~MO""')
~320420
(Video),
312918
CABLE TIE
-
.
Fig_ 16-40KDA to KD Cable Assemblies
Page 27
SECTION 582-200-212
195272---. _
V-I..
_ _ 405387
405391"",
~
151622~
:
107116~~
I
t$t
I
405385
405388
BASEW/NUT
Fig. 17-405390 Cable Tennination Box (24 Position)
Page 28
ISS 2, SECTION 582-200-212
7.06
NUMERICAL INDEX-
Note: When ordering these parts, prefix each number with the letters "TP".
PART
NO.
1291
107116
143307
151622
177113
180714
180989
181392
182182
184056
192007
195272
312918
320418
320420
337826
341546
341645
341647
341648
341657
341691
341704
341705
341718
341729
341762
401130
401150
401582
401623
401628
401629
401647
401648
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
28
Screw, 6-32 x 1/4 Flat
Lockwasher
28
24
Fuse, 0.6 Amp
Nut, 6-32 Sq
28
Insulator
24
Screw, No.6 Self-Tapping 26,27
24
Screw, Self-Tapping
Terminal, Receptacle Type 25,27
Holder, Fuse
24
Screw w/Lockwasher,
24
6-40 x 1/4 Hex
Terminal, Tab Type
24
Screw, 6-40 Spl
28
Strap, Cable
24,27
Terminal, Ring Type
24
Terminal, Ring Type
25,27
Screw, 1/2" Pan Head
27
Fastener
24
Connector, 15 Pt Receptacle 27
Terminal, Receptacle
Type
25,26,27
Terminal, Receptacle
Type
25,27
Nut, Self-Tapping
24
Connector, 15 Pt
Receptacle
25,26,27
Terminal, Receptacle Type 25,26
Terminal, Plug Type
25
Screw w/Lockwasher
6-40 x 5/16 Hex
24
Plug, 15 Pt
25
Terminal, Receptacle Type
24
Plate
24
Connector, 9 pt Receptacle 25,27
Nut w/Lockwasher
25
Connector, 9 pt Plug
25,27
Bushing
25
Cord wlPlug
25
Connector, 3 pt
Receptacle
24,25
Connector 3 pt Plug
24
PART
NO.
402201
402202
402204
403764
405045
405046
405136
405146
405209
405242
405354
405372
405374
405376
405378
405385
405387
405388
405391
405957
405958
405960
405961
405962
405963
405964
405965
405966
405967
405969
405973
405974
405975
405976
405977
405982
405983
407416
407417
407418
410575
PAGE
NO.
DESCRIPTION
Regulator, +12 V
Regulator, +5 V
Regulator, -12 V
Socket, Trans~tor
Terminal, Receptacle Type
Terminal, Plug Type
Relief, Strain
Stiffener
Strap, Marker
Strap, Marker
Relief, Strain
Cable Assembly
Cable Assembly
Cable Assembly
Cable Assembly
Block, Terminal
Cover
Base w/Nut
Clamp
Cover, Transistor
Nut w/Lockwasher, 6-32
Sink, Heat
Cable Assembly
Cover
Lead, Red
Lead, White
Lead, Blue
Socket Assembly
Card Assembly
Cable Assembly
Lead w/Terminal, Black
Lead w/Terminal, Green
Cable Assembly
Transformer
Transformer Assembly
Modification Kit
Modification Kit
Frame wIStuds
Cover
Bracket w /Stud
Circuit Card
24
24
24
24
24,25
24,25
27
28
26,27
27
26,27
23
27
27
27
28
28
27
27
24
24
24
25
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
24
24
25
24
21,24
21
21
24
24
25
24
Page 29
29 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 582-211-210
Issue 1, June 1977
KEYBOARD DISABLE LOCK FEATURE FOR "DATASPEED*" 40/4
ATTACHED KEYBOARD DISPLAY
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2.
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3.
TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.
GENERAL
1.01
The 407400 modification kit provides a
bracket-mounted, key-locking switch and
cabling for installation in a DATASPEED
40CAB251/ZZ Monitor/Opcon Support Cabinet
equipped with a 405562 modification kit.
Note:
DATASPEED 40CAB251/ZZ cabinet
equipped with a 405562 modification kit is
identical to a DATASPEED 40CAB251/AC
Cabinet.
1.02
Whenever this section is reissued, the
reason for reissue will be listed in this
paragraph.
Note:
Prefix Teletype Corporation part numbers with TP (ie, TP407400).
1.03
Without power, there is no SSI clock from
the opcon to the controller. Absence of
SSI clock causes the controller to set the IR
(Intervention Required) bit in a status and sense
message which will be sent to the CPU (Central
Processor Unit), if the station receives a specific
poll. It is interpreted by the CPU as device
unavailable or not ready. On most software
systems, this requires manual intervention at the
CPU to reinstate the terminal. Therefore, to
enable the keyboard, the user is required to:
(1) rotate the keylocking switch to its clockwise
position to restore power to the opcon and;
(2) make a call to the CPU and request that the
terminal be activated. The terminal will respond
to a specific or general poll by sending a "Device
No Longer Busy" alarm flag (status and sense)
after power is restored. The locking key is
removable in the counterclockwise position
only. Two keys are provided with each
switch. Note that lock configuration cannot be
controlled; therefore, successive locks may be
different or identical.
1.04
The 407400 modification kit consists of:
Qty.
Part No.
2
4
2
1
125011
155861
326023
407399
Description
Washer, flat
Washer, star
Screw, 4-40 by 0.281 hex
Switch assembly, keylock
*Registered Trademark of AT&TCo.
Prepared for American Telephone and Telegraph Company by Teletype Corporation
©1976 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Pagel
SECTION 582-211-210
Y
1.05
The 407399 keylock switch assembly consists of:
TWO KEYS ,,,,,,,liod wl40739"
$------
~
STAR WASHER
~
(TWO)
\""6'
326023
SCREW
(TWO)
125011
FLAT WASHER
(TWO)
407399 KEYLOCK
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
@ Place the 407399
keylock switch
assembly inside of
cabinet at the left
front corner
Warning: Orient connectors as shown.
@Orient the switch assembly
unmounted connector as
shown and snap connector into
the cabinet front plate.
3.
6
Secure the 407399 keylock switch
assembly to front plate using existing
holes and mounting hardware provided.
Note that the mounting screws must be
installed with star washers against both
sides of the front plate.
@ Reinstall opcon to cabinet. Using key
provided with switch assembly, rotate
switch to its clockwise position and
restore power to the opcon. Close lid
and return the monitor to its normal
viewing position.
TESTING
3.01
With the opcon enabled (keylock switch in its clockwise position), make a call to the CPU and
request that the terminal be reinstated. The local key indicator on the opcon should be lighted,
depress key if not lighted.
3.02
(a)
If the local key indicator does not light or local operation of the terminal cannot be performed:
Check to see that the SSI connector from the remote controller is properly seated at rear of the
407399 keylock switch assembly.
(b) Check for dirty or broken pins at SSI connector.
(c)
Check to see that proper voltage is present at pins 7 and 8 of the SSI connector. Refer to
schematic diagram (3.03).
(d)
Refer to Station Troubleshooting in Bell System Practice 579·505·354 or 582·200·252.
Page 3
SECTION 582-211-210
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF KEYLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3.03
407399 KEYLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY ON
40CAB2S1/AC OR 40CAB251/ZZ WITH
405562 MOOIFICATION KIT
OPERATOR CONSOLE
{OPCONJ
-l
,,
,,
,
~
,
,
~
,
,
~
I
>I+,
,,
~
,
)"
,
I
)
~
I
)4'
~
,
I'
,'Bj
,
; I)
,
: 'j
:',
,
)
) 7 :
,
,
6'
,
,
)
: 4)
1- ~
Vss (+ 12VDC)
,
VQD (- 12 vac)
B '
,
, ,
,
)5' ,
,,
,
, ,
)
)
)
,
)
,
I
) 4
,,
SPARE
,,
INFORMATION TO DEVICE (NORMAL)
,,
,,
,, ,
I~FORMATION TO DEVICE (INVERTED)
INFORMATION TO CONTROLLER
(NORMAL)
CIRCUIT
COMMON
,
: 6)
)
INFORMATION TO CONTROLLER
(INVERTED)
6
,
~
:9)
REF'ER TO
SSP 579-505.354
OR
S82-200-252
3.04
,
,I
,I
,
I
,,
~
)(
,,
~
,
sw
)B'
)'
,
(~i~~~!:~~~:~~iEp~;.) '--p
,
p/
J'
p,
J,'
KEY LOCK SWITCH
(ROTARY ACTION TOGGLE)
DRAIN
REFER TO
GRD. TAB )
J7
ssp 579-505-354
GRO. TERM.
OR
5E12-200-252
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM OF KEYLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBL Y
o
o
401150 CONNECTOR
407397
CD
KEY- LOCKING SWITCH
PI'
401149 CONNECTOR
JI'
SW
_8_W_BL
C-3-G
C_I_R
C-6-S
C-4-P
C-9-0
C·7·BL
B-2-W-BL
~
---r-
(II
•• (21
C-8-W
(31
A - 4 - P --+----1~.
....1---f-A-6-S
GROUND TAB
All wires 24 AWG. Terminals enclosed in parentheses are for reference and not marked on component.
Connectors shown from wired side.
Page 4
ISS 1, SECTION 582-211-210
CUT ON DASHED LINES.
PLACE IN ATTENDANT'S HOW TO OPERATE MANUAL.
Operator Console Security Lock Feature
The security lock feature will allow the attendant to
disable the associated operator console in the Synchronous 40/4 attached keyboard/display device. A
key lock switch located inside the cabinet can disable
the operator console by rotating key counterclockwise.
To reinstall or restore power to the operator console,
the attendant is required to (1) rotate keylock switch
clockwise (2) make a call to the CPU (Central Process
Unit) and request that the terminal be reinstated.
Key is removable in the
counterclockwise (off)
position only.
Tilt monitor back and
open lid.
~OF'F
~N
Page 5
5 Pages
TELETYPE CORPORATION
Skokie, illinois, U.S.A.
SPECIFICATION 50942S
Issue 1, November 1978
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING THE 346990 MODIFICATION KIT
TO PROVIDE A KEYBOARD DISABLE LOCK ON A SYNCHRONOUS
MODEL 40/4 DETACHED KEYBOARD
1.
1.03
GENERAL
1.01
The 346990 Modification Kit provides
necessary parts for installation of a keylocking switch assembly into a 40BSE201 Opertor Console Base.
1.02
When the keylocking switch is operated in
its clockwise position (all positions viewed
from the front of the keyboard), the operator
console (opcon) is disabled by disconnecting it
from the VDD power source. The key is removable in the clockwise (12 O'Clock) position only.
To enable the opcon, the user is required to
insert the key and rotate the keylocking switch to
its counterclockwise position and thus restore
power to the opctm. An extraneous character
may appear on the I:Ilonitor when opcon power is
restored. On most software systems when power
has been disconnected from the opcon, the CPU
(Central Processor Unit) will interpret it as device
unavailable or not ready. Therefore, it will be
necessary to make a call to the CPU and request
that the terminal be reinstated.
The 346990 Modification Kit consists of
the following parts:
~~.
Description
114127
Flat Washer
Screw, Fil. 2-56
151354
153819
Lockwasher
Flatwasher
2
186582
346983
Lock
1
Cam
346984
1
346985
Actuator, Switch
1
346986
Insulator
2
Switch Assembly
346987
1
Cover
346988
1
Cradle w/nuts
346989
1
Note: Although not included with the modification kit, a trademark nameplate is also required
(choose one):
Customer
~
Part No.
Description
Marking
Code
WS
Blank
346335
1
BA
Bell System
346337
1
TA
Teletype
346338
1
1
2
2
© 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U. S. A.
Page 1
SPECIFICATION 50942S
1.04
A parts diagram of the keylock switch assembly follows:
346983 LOCK
This end of lock may have
a threaded stud or tapped
hole depending on the
manufacturer.
346988
COVER
....
~
~
'. . L
(2)186582
FLAT WASHER
(2) 153819
............ ~....
LOCKWASHER
...... -..J ..... t~
t
(2) 151354
SCREW,
Fil. 2-56
Page 2
SPECIFICATION 50942S
2.
2.06
INSTALLATION
2.01
The installation procedure for mounting a
346990 Modification Kit into a 40BSE201
Operator Console Base is given below.
2.02
Remove ac power to the associated controller.
2.03
Lift monitor off base and put aside. See
Fig. 1.
2.04
Loosen three 405586 screws from base and
remove bottom plate. See Fig. 1.
Place the keyboard (opcon) with the base
upside down on a smooth surface (cable
to the rear). Care should be taken to avoid scratching or marking the keytops. See Fig. 3.
Fig. 3-Keyboard with 40BSE201 Opcon
Base Shown Upside Down.
MONITOR
BASE
405581
!
!
[
BOTTOM~
. ~ .:
~
PLATE
'----_
-;
~1
---------1----/ A...... 405586 SCREW
Fig 1.-Monitor Base Removal
2.05
Remove opcon cable from opcon connector located in monitor base. See Fig. 2.
2.07
Remove the 408894 cover assembly (if
base is so equipped) by prying between
the base and cover until the two 341545 Drive
Fasteners are free from the base. After the cover
assembly has been removed, pull up on the two
latch levers and move the base to the rear until it
is free of the keyboard. A screwdriver or siIililar
tool may be used to aid in the separation of the
base and cover. Set the cover assembly and keyboard aside. See Fig. 4.
341545
DRIVE
F~
408894
COVER
ASSEMBLY
~/
KDCABLE
(From DCC, MCC or KDA)
J
405611---------,
ACCABLE
(Installed by
Service Center)
Opcon cable
to detached
keyboard.
OPCON
CONNECTOR
Fig. 2-Removal of Opcon Cable
40BSE201 OPCON
BASE
Fig. 4--408894 Cover and Opcon Base Removal
Page 3
SPECIFICATION 50942S
2.
2.11
INSTALLATION (Cont)
Disassemble the 346331 cover from the
346327 cradle by removing the four (4)
346334 shoulder screws. Discard the cover but
retain the shoulder screws. See Fig. 5.
2.08
Reassemble the 346333 cable and its
ground strap to the 346989 cradle with
the retained cable clamp and hardware. Use a terminal extractor to remove the terminal from in
position eight (8) of the connector.
filil -
346331
COVER
~
~
POSITION 8
Fig. 8-Connector of 346333 Cable Assembly
2.12
With the 346987 switch assembly on the
side of the cradle opposite the cable (see
Fig. 9), feed the two (2) switch leads through the
square cutout in the cradle between the connector
cutout and the lock cutout. Connect one lead to
the removed terminal and the other lead to position eight (8) in the connector. See Fig. 9.
346327
CRADLE
Fig. 5-40BSE201 Disassembly
2.09
Disassemble the 346333 cable from the
cradle. Discard the cradle but retain cable,
cable clamp and associated hardware. See Fig. 6.
CONNECTOR
CUTOUT
SWITCH
LEADS
CONNECTOR
Fig. 6--Disconnection of Cable
346987
SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
Fig. 9-Installation of Switch
Assemble the 346983 lock to the 346988
cover using the 114127 flat washer and
hex nut furnished with the lock. Assemble the
346984 cam with the flat facing the top of the
cover when the key is in the 12:00 o'clock position. Fasten the cam to the lock with the hardware
furnished with the lock. See Fig. 7.
2.10
2.13
Assemble the 346985 switch actuator, the
two (2) 346986 insulators and the 346987
switch assembly to the cradle using two (2)
186582 flat washers, two (2) 15381910ckwashers
and two (2) 151354 fillister screws. Do not fully
tighten screws at this time. See Fig. 10.
This end of lock will have a
threaded stud or tapped hole
depending on the manufacturer.
346983
LOCK
346988 COVER
FLAT
WASHER
1l4127
,
~
~EXNUT
1(11 " , '
IJ:
FURNISHED
WITH LOCK
"
1(',
u,
Hardware furnished with
~
lock. It varies depen~
on manufacturer . ...
346984
CAM
_.-s==--
Fig. 7-Lock Cover Assembly
Page 4
Fig. 10-Installation of Switch Actuator
SPECIFICATION 50942S
2.
INSTALLATION (Cont)
2.14
Assemble the 346988 cover to the cradle
by carefully inserting the cam through the
opening in the cradle and then fasten the cover to
the cradle with the four (4) shoulder screws
(retained from 2.08). The cam should be
positioned with flat to the left as viewed from
keyboard front. This position is also the keyboard
"ON" position see Fig. 11.
was removed in 2.07, install it to the base. The lip
on the cover assembly must latch over the metal
plate on the bottom of the keyboard then the
cover is fastened to the base with two (2) drive
fasteners.
Keyboard console
(upside down on
a smooth surface).
Note: Spread sides of console
cover slightly to aid engagement.
Fig.ll-Direction of Cam When Inserted in Cradle
Fig. 12-Installation of Opcon to Modified Base
2.15
With the flat of the cam located in the
upward position (keyboard "OFF" position), fully tighten the two (2) 151354 fillister
screws. See Fig. 10.
2.16
Place the keyboard upside down on a
smooth surface with the front of the keyboard towards you. See Fig. 12.
2.17
Place the base assembly over the keyboard (cable to the rear). Pull up on the
two latch levers, bring the base forward to engage
locating tabs and push down on latch levers to
engage. If the 408894 cover assembly (see Fig. 4)
2.18
Turn keyboard and connected base assembly right side up. The trademark nameplate
should be fastened in the approximate center of
the rectangular area of the 346988 cover. To
assure proper bonding, the cover must be clean.
Remove the paper backing (handle the plate by
the edges to avoid touching the adhesive), locate
the plate over the cover, apply firm pressure over
the entire plate, then remove the protective
plastic covering from the plate.
2.19
Connect the opcon cable to the monitor
base. Restore ac power to the associated
controllers.
Page 5
SPECIFICATION 50942S
3.
TESTING
3.01
With the opcon enabled, (key-locking switch in its counterclockwise position) make a phone call
to the CPU and request that the terminal be reinstated. The local key indicator on the opcon should
be lighted, depress key if not lighted.
3.02
(a)
If the local key indicator does not light, or local operation of the terminal cannot be performed:
Check to see that the SSI connector is properly seated in the opcon base and check the connection
in the monitor base.
(b) Check for dirty or broken pins at the SSI connector in the opcon base.
(c)
Check to see that 24 volts are present between pins 7 and 8 of the SSI connector. Refer to Fig. 13.
(d) Refer to troubleshooting procedures in Bell System Practice 582-200-501 or Manual 351 (or
. Manual 384).
3.03
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF KEY LOCKING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OPERATOR
CONSOLE
(OPCON)
OPCON CABLE IN 40BSE201 BASE
J1
'~-i VSS (+12VDC)
I
I
81
>--
I
I VDD (-12VDC) 346987 SW. Assem.
I
I
I Spare
in keyboard disable
position. (Key in
12:00 o'clock position).
I
I
: Information to device (normal)
I
I
: Information to device (inverted)
Information to controller (normal)
Circuit Common
Information to Controller (inverted)
Grd. Term.
Fig. 13
Page 6
SPECIFICATION 50942S
CUT ON DASHED LINES
PLACE IN ATTENDANT'S HOW TO OPERATE MANUAL
Operator Console Security Lock Feature
The security lock feature will allow the attendant to
disable the associated keyboard in the Synchronous
40/4 detached KD. A key-locking switch located
towards the left of the rear side (see below) can disable the keyboard by rotating the key clockwise (all
positions viewed from front of keyboard). To enable
the keyboard, the attendant is required to (1) im
the key, (2) rotate key switch counterclockVl
(3) make a call to the CPU (Central Processor UI
and request that the terminal be reinstated. When
keyboard is enabled, an extraneous character n
appear on the monitor. The key can be removed 0
when the lock is turned to the OFF position.
(Front View)
Location of Keyboard Lock
Pili
7 P~
TELETYPE CORPORATION
Skokie, Illinois, U.S.A.
SPECIFICATION 50859S
Issue 2, November 1978
SYNCHRONOUS MODEL 40/4 MINI-CLUSTER AND
MAXI-CLUSTER STATION CABLING
1.
GENERAL ....................
1
troller and controller to device cabling of many
types are allowed with the use of the cables
and accessories described in this specification.
2.
TECHNICAL DATA .............
4
1.03
3.
DESCRIPTION .................
6
4.
INSTALLATION ...............
7
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING ...........
17
6.
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND PARTS ..
18
7.
TESTING UNSHIELDED SSI CABLE
FOR 40/4 APPLICATIONS ........
18
CONTENTS
1.
PAGE
All cables to and from a pedestal mounted
controller go through the cable duct at
the lower rear of the 40CAB901/AJ pedestal. All
cable lengths within the pedestal should be kept
to a minimum. When ordering cables, careful calculation of the length required is necessary to prevent coiling and storing large excesses of cable
within the pedestal. All cables to and from the
controller must be routed through the strain
relief clamp located on the door. See Fig. 7.
1.04
Interoffice cables shall be routed in such
a manner as to prevent a hazard to personnel and cable damage.
GENERAL
1.01
This specification provides description,
installation and parts information for the
cables and support accessories of Model 40/4
Mini-Cluster and Maxi-Cluster station arrangements. (Fig 1, 2 and 3).
1.02
Due to the varied location of devices on
the customer premises, controller to con-
1.05
After initial installation, no routine maintenance is needed with the exception of
occasional inspections of the cable outer jacket.
1.06
Cable assemblies supplied with marker
straps should be labeled to provide identification. These marker straps are labeled according to system configuration (refer to 4.
INSTALLATION).
PRINTER (PTR)
(=~a,,==-,h
ATTACHED
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
AMPLIFIER (KDA)
~
FREE STANDING
KEYBOARD
~
;~LtR
-
PEDESTAL
CONTROLLER (40C400)
~
'-
&as
Fig. 1-ModeI40/4 Station Equipment
©1977 and 1978 by Teletype Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in U:S.A.
Page 1
SPECIFICATION 50859S
A maxi-cluster configuration (Fig. 2) consists of One sec and from one to six
DCCs. Each DCC is capable of handling from one
to six devices (KDs and PTRs). At least one of the
devices shouid be a RD. A Dee can handle a maximum of four KDs.
1.07
I
~
I
r®
I
I
~/··"""'-l--IJI--~I--~-.-----1--~~
@
13
CABLES
408065 Controller to Data Set, 7 ft
Q [ 408066 Controller to Data Set, 12 ft
408067 Controller to Data Set, 25 ft
408068 Controller to Data Set. 50 ft
405301 Controller to KD, 6 ft
405302 Controller to KD, 12 ft
[ 40. 5303 Controller to KD, 25 ft
405304 Controller to KD, 50 ft
405139 Controller to KD, 75 ft
405140 Controller to KD, 100 ft
405306 Controller to Printer, 6 ft
[ 405307 Controller to Printe.r, 12 ft
405308 Controller to Printer, 25 ft
405309 Controller to Printer, 50 ft
405311 Controller to Controller, 25 ft
@ 405256 Controller to Controller, 6 ft
@ 405312 Controller to Controller, 50 ft
405373 KDA to KD, 6 ft
405374 KDA to KD, 12 ft
® [ 405375 KDA to KD, 25 ft
. 405376 KDA to KD, 50 ft
405377 KDA to KD, 75 ft
405378 KDA to KD, 100 ft
(2) 346333 40BSE101 to 40BSE201, 4-1/2 ft
® 405237 Controller to Termination Box, 10 ft
@ 405238 Termination Box to Controller, 10 ft
@ 405239 Termination Box to Printer, 10 ft
@ 405372 Termination Box to KDA, 6 ft
@ 405389 Termination Box (10 Position) or@)
o
o
o
vo
®
I
Notel:@
can also be
ordered as
406318
(500 ft) or
406319
(2000 ft)
or 406320
(5000 ft).
r
®
I
I
9
I
)
Up to 5
Additional
DCCs
Note 2:@
omitted in
this issue.
Telephone
Line
405390 Termination ~ox (2.4 ~osition)
44A WE Connector Block (10 Position) or
® ( 31246RM* KDA Cable (ordered by the foot)
(Can also be ordered as a 500 foot reel, part
number 405370)
@ 31248RM SSI Cable (ordered by the foot)
(See note above).
.
*Bell System users should specify the equivalent
TKS107.
Fig. 2-Maxi-Cluster Configuration
Page 2
@)
SPECIFICATION 508598
1.08
A mini-cluster configuration (Fig. 3) consists of one MCC which is capable of
handling from one to three devices (KDs and
PTRs). At least one of the devices should be a
KD. A MCC can handle a maximum of two
KDs.
,-------~
KDA
CABLES
408065 Controller to Data Set 7 ft
408066 Controller to Data Set 12 ft
408067 Controller to Data Set 25 ft
408068 Controller to Data Set 50 ft
405301 Controller to KD 6 ft
405302 Controller to KD 12 ft
® [ 4.05303 Controller to KD 25 ft
405304 Controller to KD 50 ft
405139 Controller to KD 75 ft
405140 Controller to KD 100 ft
405306 Controller to Printer 6 ft
® [ 405307 Controller to Printer 12 ft
405308 Controller to Printer 25 ft
405309 Controller to Printer 50 ft
@ 405311 Not used for mini-cluster
® 405312 Not used for mini-cluster
405373KDA to·KD··6·ft
405374 KDA to KD 12 ft
@ [ 405375 KDA to KD 25 ft
405376 KDA to KD 50 ft
405377 KDA to KD 75 ft
405378 KDA to KD 100 ft
346333 40BSE101 to 40BSE201 4-1/2 ft
® 405237 Controller to Termination Box 10 ft
® 405238 Not used for mini-cluster
@) 405239 Termination Box to Printer 10 ft
@ 405372 Termination Box to KDA"6 ft
@ 405389 Termination Box (10 Position) or@)
@) 405390 Termination Box (24 Position)
@ Omitted in this Issue.
5 Kc (greater than 5 Kc).
(e)
Set patch panel dB control to O.
(f)
Set patch panel MEAS-CAL switch to CAL position, adjust the oscillator amplitude
control to obtain a O-dBm reading on the voltmeter.
Set the MEAS-CAL switch to MEAS position.
Measure the cross-talk at the following
frequencies:
Measured Cross-talk
10KHz
2. 50KHz
3. 100 KHz
1.
2.
3.
1.
The cable: (See Note)
Note:
--
Passed 0
- - - dBm
- - - dBm
dBm
---
Failed 0
The cable passes the Cross-talk Tests if all measured values are lower than -48 dBm.
As an example, -50 dBm would pass this test.
Page 21
SPECIFICATION 50859S
ITe IN)
XM'{f--llTl.Iill,Y-OC+---__-I
}----k><>f-----'
1!!5/\.
HP3550B
COMMUNICATION
TEST SET
tlOtN)
UP TO 2000 FT.
OF TWISTED PAIRS
Fig. 20-Cross-talk Meas,urements
7.09
The Loop-Loss Tests require a HP-3550B Communication Test Set and two jumpers. Connect the
test set as shown in Fig. 21. Perform the tests in Table E.
Table E - Loop-loss Test
Cable being tested:
1.
With the test set connected as given in Fig. 21, set up the HP-3550B as instructed in Table D.
2.
Set the MEAS-CAL switch to MEAS position.
Measure the loop-loss at the following
frequencies:
1.
2.
3.
Measured
Loop-loss
28KHz
56KHz
84KHz
- - - dBm
- - - dBm
- - - dBm
1.
2.
3.
Passed 0
The cable: (See Note)
Maximum Loop-loss
allowed
7.5 dB
10.5 dB
12.5 dB
Failed 0
Note:
The cable passes Loop-loss Tests if all measured values are less than maximum allowed values
given in Table E.
405389 CABLE
TERMINATION BOXES
OR WE 44A
ITeIN)
XM'{
ITC 0)
\
HP3550B
COMMUNICATION
TEST SET
ITO IN)
RECE'V{
ITOW
\
UP TO 2000 FT.
OF TWISTE o PAIRS
-
Fig. 21-Loop-Ioss Measurements
Page 22
SPECIFICATION 50859S
7.10
The Background Noise Tests require a 6F Voice-band Noise Measuring set (or equivalent) and
2-135 ohm resistors. Connect the test set as shown in "Test 1" of Fig. 22 or 23 (as applies). Perform the tests in Table F.
Table F - Background Circuit Noise Tests
Cable being tested: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1.
Plug in the 50 KHz weighting network on 6F Voice band Noise Measuring Test Set and calibrate
as follows:
(a)
Set the Counter Separation switch to the 2 dB position.
(b) Set the Function switch to CAL-CTR-BAT and turn the power switch on.
(c)
Verify that the meter indicates in the BAT GOOD area. Replace batteries that do not have
good indication.
(d) Adjust the Counter 1 CAL control until the associated counter just counts (the count will
be erratic when properly adjusted).
(e)
Adjust the Counter 2, 3, and 4 controls by depressing the associated push button switch
and adjusting the CAL control until the counter just counts as in Step (d). During calibration, only one counter will operate at a time.
(f)
Set the function switch to CAL-MTR and adjust the meter CAL control for a meter indication at the CAL marking.
2.
Set the function switch to 600 ohm bridging. Adjust the DBRN dial to obtain a meter reading
in the upper half of the meter scale.
3.
The background noise level is the sum of the DBRN dial setting and the meter reading.
4.
Connect the test set and resistors as shown in "Test 2" of Fig. 22 or 23 (as applies).
Make the reading.
"Test 1" Background noise level _ _ DBRN
"Test 2" Background noise level ___ DBRN
The cable: (See Note)
Passed 0
Failed
0
Note:
The cable passes the Background Noise Level Tests if both the DBRN reading
are lower than 49 DBRN which corresponds to 7 millivolts rms.
Page 23
8PECIFICATION 508598
405389 CABLE
TERMINATION BOXES
OR WE 44A
CAT sec) ~[
6~~~S p
50 KHz U
NETWORK T /-~~.----+()o{:>+---~
"TEST 2"
"TEST I"
/---to-ot---'--'I;I----Il (AT DeC)
N SF NMS
P
WITH
U 50 KHZ
T NETWORK
/---+()o{:>+---.---s>:--iJ
Fig. 22-Noise Measurements
405389 CABLE
TERMINATION BOXES
OR WE 44A
135",
"TEST 2"
"TEST I"
/---+()o{:>+--...L..~--hl (AT PRINTER)
N SF NMS
P
WITH
U
KHZ
r---+CHJt~-,-~-~T NETWORK
so
UP TO 2000 FT.
OF TWISTED PAIRS
BP' BRIDGE POI NT
Fig. 23-Noise Measurements
Page 24
SPECIFICATION 50859S
7.11
The Impulse Noise Tests requires a 6F Voice Band Noise Measuring Set and two 135 ohm resistors.
Connect the test set as shown in "Test 1" of Fig. 22 or 23 as applies. Perform the tests in Table G.
Test 1 and Test 2 can be done simultaneously with two test sets and four resistors.
Table G - Impulse Noise Tests
Cable being tested:
1.
Set up and calibrate the 6F Voice Band Noise Measuring Set as instructed in Step 1 of Table F.
2.
Set the function switch to 600 ohm bridging. Adjust the impulse noise threshold to 65 DBRN
by setting DBRN dial to 35. Reset the counter to 00.
3.
After resetting the counter, run the test for 30 minutes and take a reading.
4.
Connect the test set and resistors as shown in "Test 2" of Fig. 22 or 23 as applies.
Run test as directed in Steps 1·3.
"Test 1" count
The (fable: (See Note)
Note:
7 .12
"Test 2" count
Passed
0
Failed
0
The cable passes the tests if a count of 1 or less is recorded for both Test 1 and Test 2.
The cable is considered suitable for use if it passes the tests of Tables A through G.
Page 25
25 Pages
@ Bell System
; \, \
\
.
.
\'
. ..
' -
'.' ~
JIio t \:1~ ..
" ,.'"
.
,
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2011:08:01 12:04:15-08:00 Modify Date : 2011:08:01 13:07:23-07:00 Metadata Date : 2011:08:01 13:07:23-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.45 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:5e4e8bf3-dabf-410b-944b-54c07d6117b1 Instance ID : uuid:51737e5d-4e3a-47c8-bc16-46b0ece8feab Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 530EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools